Specification of Works PDF

CONTENTS
PAGES
Temporary Hoarding and Structure TS/1

Demolition DEM/1 - DEM/7
Excavation EXC/1 - EXC/15
Concrete Work CON/1 - CON/15
Precast Concrete Component PCC/1 – PCC/22
Brickwork and Blockwork BBW/1 - BBW/8
Drywall Partitions DRP/1 - DRP/6
Movable Acoustic Partition MAP/1 - MAP/4
Floor Mounted Phenolic Board Toilet Cubicles PBC/1 – PBC/5
Finishings - Floor FFL/1 - FFL/16
Finishings - Plastering and Wall Tiling FPW/1 - FPW/8
Finishings - Suspended Ceiling FSC/1 - FSC/9
Acoustic Wall Lining AWL/1 – AWL/4
Roofing ROF/1 - ROF/24
Roof Lifeline System RLS/1 – RLS/3
Carpentry CAR/1 - CAR/8
Joinery and Ironmongery JOI/1 - JOI/25
Furniture & Fitments OFF/1 - OFF/11
System Furniture and Chairs SFC/1 - SFC/9
Signages SIG/1 - SIG/9
Structural Steelwork and Metalwork SSM/1 - SSM/15
Aluminium and Glazing Works AGW/1 - AGW/27
Roller Shutter RSS/1 - RSS/5
Rainwater Plumbing RWP/1
Sanitary Wares, Fittings and Toilet Accessories & Water Dispensers SWF/1 - SWF/10
Glazing GLZ/1
Painting and Decorating PAD/1 - PAD/16
External Works EXW/1 - EXW/26
Fire Fighting and Hosereel Installation FFI/1
Building Construction Authority Requirements for Piling, Excavation or
Basements Works PEB/1 - PEB/3
Vision care for Building Works VBW/1
Safety Requirements for Air-Conditioned Rooms SRA/1
Guidelines for Installation of Fan Hooks GIF/1 - GIF/3
Landscaping Works LSW/1 – LSW/16
Indoor Play Equipment IPE/1 – IPE/4
General Specifications For Swimming Pools, Tiles and Tile Laying 9 Pages
Performance Specification for Tensile Structures 16 Pages
CNT/1
SPECIFICATION OF WORK
• All materials and works shall be in accordance with drawings, this specification and all
current Codes of Practice, Eurocodes and Singapore Standards or other approved equivalent.
• The latest equivalent EN Standards shall apply where BS Standards are described and specified.
TEMPORARY HOARDING AND STRUCTURE
1. TEMPORARY HOARDING AND STRUCTURE WITH SOUND BARRIER
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good condition at all times the temporary hoarding
including modifying layout from time to time including double handling / operations as necessary to
suit the site works, phasing of the works, and School’s operations without compromising the
integrity of the structure.
Temporary hoarding to the site of the works shall be deemed to include the
construction of temporary sound barriers to SO’s approval.
Upon the completion of the Whole of the Works or whenever specified by the SO, the Contractor
shall remove the hoarding and sound barrier and the disposal of any debris caused by the removal
and make good finishes disturbed to SO’s approval at Contractor’s own cost.
TS/1
DEMOLITION
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Existing structures and other external works that need to be demolished are described in the Tender
Document.
The Contractor is advised to price these works on the site as it will be deemed that the prices for
demolition are based on the fact that the Contractor has ascertained the nature and extent of the
work to be undertaken and no claim will be entertained on the ground of lack of knowledge. Where
structures, finishes and fittings, services, etc. are required to be demolished and/or removed to suit
the new works but are not shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall be deemed to have checked
with the SO prior to pricing his Tender and shall have made all allowances in his Tender Price.
The prices for the demolition work shown on drawings shall include for wedging and pinning up,
cutting to line remaining portions, making good any walling which collapses or is pulled down in
excess of requirement, and preparing surfaces of floor slabs under, ceiling over, and abutting
surfaces of columns or side walls to receive new finishes, facing up or flushing up existing surfaces
after cutting to match the surrounding work and cutting back old plaster and pavings, etc. for joints
with new and removing all old materials, debris and other arisings off site to a store or dump to be
provided by the Contractor.
In the event of grubbing up foundations or pile caps, the Contractor shall take all precautions to
prevent any possibility of causing soil disturbances to the surrounding foundation. Should any
subsidence or any damage result from the negligence of this clause, the damage shall be made good
by the Contractor at his own expense.
Debris shall be kept sufficiently moist to lay the dust. This is applicable to debris on site and debris
to be transported out of site. The demolition works shall be periodically sprayed with water to
reduce the amount of dust.
The Contractor shall refer to the Drawings and the site conditions to ascertain the extent and amount of
demolition to be done. He shall take note that the demolition works include the removal of the existing
drains in the compound and any underground structures in the way of the construction of the Basement,
New Extension Blocks or other structures, ceilings of the existing buildings, all existing items that are to
be replaced including floor slab, floor finishes, walls, wall finishes, doors, all fitments and fixture
including sanitary fittings & accessories, wires, M&E fitting including switches, power points, cable truck,
light fittings, plumbing fittings, fire-fighting services, waste, soil and vent pipes, etc. which are not shown
on the Drawings. Other major structures to be removed include the staircases, escalator and lifts. He shall
be deemed to have priced his tender covering all the demolition works required for this project.
The Contractor shall obtain the necessary permission and pay all license fees in connection with
these works.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary machinery, tools, scaffoldings, etc. for the proper
protection and execution of the works.
All materials arising from the demolition shall become the property of the Contractor, who shall take into
consideration the value of such materials and allow due credit to the Employer in his Tender Price.
DEM/1
DEMOLITION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D.)
On completion, the Contractor shall remove all tools, boardings, debris, rubbish and materials and
leave the site clean and tidy to the approval of the SO.
All work described to be taken down and demolished shall include for disconnecting, cutting out
and cutting off, etc. as required and in the case of metalwork burning off if necessary.
All terms of demolition shall be taken as including basketting out if necessary, barrowing, lowering
or raising to ground level and removing from site and clearing away rubbish and allowing credit.
Demolition shall be carried out in such a manner as to cause as little inconvenience as possible to
adjoining properties and the public; the Contractor will be held responsible for any claims which
may arise from the disregard of this clause.
Before commencing demolition of any part of the structure, the Contractor shall write to the PUB,
LTA, Telecoms, Ministry of the Environment and other relevant authorities notifying them of his
intention. If required shall arrange for the disconnection and the removal of all electrical, water and
gas meters and other services.
The Contractor shall decide on the method of demolition to be adopted and inform the SO in writing
of his proposed Method Statement on Demolition Procedures and Precautionary Measures for
approval by the SO before commencement of the work. The Contractor shall comply with the
procedures and recommendations as detailed in SS CP11.
Demolish the relevant existing structures, finishes, fittings, services, etc. on the site as indicated in
the drawings and/or as required for the construction of the new works. Grub up all old foundations,
drains, pile caps (except piles), etc. and remove all debris off the site to a dump to be provided by
the Contractor. All voids shall be filled with approved fill materials well rammed in layers of
300mm thick and leveled. Allow for the disconnection of all services such as water, electricity, gas
and to disconnect all sewage lines and reconnect on completion. All services shall be deemed to
have been diverted by the Contractor, where necessary, in his demolition work.
DEM/2
DEMOLITION
2. PROTECTION OF PROPERTY, ETC.
The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to protect adjoining properties, fences, public
roadways, footpaths, etc. and will be held responsible for making good any damage to the same or
the replacement to the acceptable equivalent to be selected and approved by the SO should the
material be no longer obtainable in the market.
The Contractor shall provide and erect to the approval of the SO all necessary protective screens,
hoardings, shoring, etc. that may be required, of a sufficiently substantial nature to prevent damage,
nuisance or disturbance by debris or dust to adjoining properties, public roadways or persons or
traffic passing nearby.
Unless otherwise specified, the protective hoardings to the whole frontage, sides and back of the site
shall be of a type approved by BCA and SO.
The Contractor shall provide, erect maintain and dismantle all necessary needles, shorings or other forms
of support to the adjoining property to the approval of the SO. The construction and efficiency of such
supports shall be the entire responsibility of the Contractor. Should any subsidence or any damage result
from the inadequacy or inefficiency of the shoring or any other support provided, the damage shall be
made good by the Contractor at his own expense.
Notwithstanding the provision to ensure the stability of the adjacent structure, frequent inspection
shall be carried out by the Contractor during the demolition to ensure that measures provided are
sufficient.
All undiverted or adjoining existing sewer mains and manholes shall be properly protected and all
branch sewers from the building to be demolished shall be properly sealed off by a Singapore
Registered Plumber unless otherwise specified. Water Reclamation Network Department, PUB
(WRN) shall be notified before commencing work.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions not to disturb the adjoining existing electricity supply
cables, drains, gas pipes, water supply pipes, ducts, telephone cables, radio and television relay lines,
hydraulic pressure mains and other usable service pipes and fittings. Where necessary, the above service
lines and fittings shall be properly protected.
The Contractor is required to execute excavation works with caution. He shall make good all
damages occasioned thereto, caused by or attributable in any way to his workmen and shall
indemnify the Employer against any damages or claims arising therefrom.
The Contractor shall be responsible for restricting his workmen only to the site under the Contract
and shall prevent trespassing into adjoining properties and existing buildings. He shall undertake
properly, substantially and effectively to reinstate and make good all damages arising therefore and
shall indemnify the Employer against all claims for damages as no responsibility or liability
whatsoever shall be undertaken by the Employer in respect of any of the foregoing.
The Contractor shall not obstruct any right of way during the progress of the works.
The Contractor shall take all precautions to prevent soil disturbance to the surrounding foundations
during the grubbing up of foundations or pile caps. Should any subsidence, or any damage result
from his negligence, the damage shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense.
Apart from the clauses mentioned above, the Contractor shall also comply with the protective
precautions as detailed in SS CP11 and any extra protective precautions as required by the SO and
to his approval.
DEM/3
DEMOLITION
3. SITE CLEARANCE AND DEMOLITION WORKS
The Contractor shall clear the site of all trees, shrubs, bushes and all other forms of vegetation with
the prior permission of the SO including grubbing up roots, etc. The Contractor shall also liaise with
the National Parks Board with regard to the cutting of all trees demarcated within the site. The
Contractor shall note that felling of trees without the written consent of the SO is strictly prohibited.
On the discretion of the SO, unless otherwise required in this Contract, all existing piles need not be
extracted from the site. However their positions are to be surveyed and submitted in A1's size
drawing.
The Contractor shall demolish and remove with the prior permission of the SO all existing
obstructions and fixtures made redundant by the Works which are within the contract boundary
and/or related to the proposed Works.
The Contractor shall break up and remove (or seal up if directed by the SO) existing redundant
scupper drains, pipes, road kerbs and foundations, side tables, etc; cart away debris and backfill with
approved materials to the required level unless otherwise indicated.
Demolition shall be carried out in such a manner so as to cause as little inconvenience as possible to
adjoining properties and the public. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any such claims
that may arise from the disregard of this clause.
The Contractor shall remove all hard structures such as pavements, drains, aprons, etc. as shown on
the drawing and as indicated on site by the SO and the excavated areas filled up with approved earth
and levelled.
The Contractor shall remove from site whatever rubbish, furniture, etc. left behind by the occupants
and materials arising from the demolition to an authorised dump. All debris / rubbish shall be
cleared and removed from the site daily.
Before commencing the demolition works in any part of the buildings, all electrical, telephone,
plumbing, drainage and other services which come within the area of work shall be disconnected or
diverted to the approval of the Authority and the SO.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions not to disturb existing electricity supply cables,
drains, gas pipes, water supply pipes, ducts, telephone cables, radio and television relay lines,
hydraulic pressure mains and other usable service pipes and fittings across the site. Where
necessary, the above service lines and fittings shall be properly protected.
All surfaces arising from demolition works unless otherwise stated shall be properly prepared to
receive new works including making good all work disturbed and surrounding surface to match
existing.
DEM/4
DEMOLITION
SITE CLEARANCE AND DEMOLITION WORKS (CONT’D.)
Removal of M&E equipment and plumbing fittings such as sanitary fittings, pipes, etc. shall include
disconnection, diversion, sealing or plugging, protection, connecting pipes to new fitting, etc.
The Contractor shall obtain the SO's approval before carrying out any form of demolition work on
site notwithstanding that the items to be demolished are shown on the drawings.
Method of Demolition
The Contractor shall submit full proposal which give details on his method and sequence of
demolition, instruments to monitor noise, dust and vibration levels, tools and equipment to be used,
catalogues, etc. together with his tender submission, taking into consideration the continual usage of
the building.
The proposed method of demolition shall be such that it shall minimise noise, vibration and dust to a
level acceptable to the SO. Traditional methods such as hacking, ball and crane etc. will not be
permitted. Methods such as electric sawing may be considered.
The Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer (P.E.) for the demolition works and to submit a
report containing his recommendations on the appropriate measures to be taken to ensure public
safety and preventing damage to any adjoining building or property in accordance to the Building
Control Regulations.
All proposals on method, sequence and equipment for demolition etc. shall be fully endorsed by a
P.E. and approved by the SO before the commencement of demolition.
Notwithstanding the method of demolition approved by the SO, the Contractor shall be wholly
responsible for the demolition works and the safety of the remaining portions of the buildings and
other adjacent buildings. He shall change the method of demolition or the working hours without
any additional claims if the vibration, dust and noise cause inconvenience to the general public or
the occupant.
The Contractor shall treat all protruding reinforcement encountered during demolition. The
treatment method shall be subject to SO's approval.
The Contractor shall study all Drawings carefully and it is particularly imperative for this section of the
work that he visits the site in order that he is able to include in his tender price, allowances to execute any
other cognate items of work not mentioned specifically herein but shown, implied, intended or can
otherwise be ascertained from the Drawings and required by the SO. No claim on account of this clause
shall be entertained by the Employer.
The dimensions and sizes indicated herein and on the Drawings are only approximate. The Contractor
shall be responsible to verify the actual dimensions and sizes on site with the SO.
Demolition shall not commence unless Contractor has provided proper vehicular access and
sufficient silt traps and/or other approved silt control devices, and safety measures and is ready to
follow up with the subsequent work activities.
DEM/5
DEMOLITION
4. EXCAVATION
The term "excavate" shall include for "getting out" and for all necessary temporary support.
All surplus excavated material arising from excavation and not required for fillings at site shall be
removed off the site to a dump to be provided by the Contractor.
If the excavated material is required for filling, it shall be dumped on site at locations approved by
the SO.
All excavations are to be kept free from water, mud etc. by pumping or bailing as required by the SO.
5. HOARDING UP OF BUILDINGS
The opening in the existing walls resulting from the demolition of the adjoining buildings shall be
hoarded up with weather protective aerated concrete blocks and metal flashings at the exposed gable
roof areas to ensure that no part of the existing building and its interior is exposed or subject to the
erosion of the weather as shown in the drawings.
Approved metal flashings, appropriately detailed, shall be affixed between the joints of the aerated
concrete blocks and the existing walls of the building. Where the woodwork comes into contact
with brickwork or concrete, two coats of approved wood preservative on surfaces of woodwork
shall be applied before fixing. One coat of aluminium wood primer, one undercoat and two finishing
coats of white synthetic enamel paint shall be applied to both sides of the timber.
The Contractor shall exercise utmost caution to the fixing of the aerated concrete blocks onto the
fabric of all blocks such as to avoid disturbance and damage to the structural integrity of the
building.
The Contractor shall submit photographs of the adjoining parts after demolition and his proposed
method of construction and materials for SO's approval prior to commencement of seal-up work. All
damages shall be made good at the Contractor's own expense using materials and methods subject to
SO's approval.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary shoring, hoarding, scaffolding, temporary supports,
screens, etc. to ensure safety of the persons and surrounding properties and to the satisfaction of the
SO. He shall ensure sufficiency of temporary works for the new and existing works, protection
against inclement weather and make good all defects and work disturbed as the work progress. The
construction and efficiency of such supports shall be the entire responsibility of the Contractor.
Should any subsidence or any damage result from the inadequacy or inefficiency of the shoring or
any other support provided, the damage shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense.
6. ENGAGEMENT OF LICENSED ELECTRICAL WORKERS
The Contractor shall engage licensed electrical workers to take charge of the electrical installation
of the existing building during the contract period. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for
the detection, diversion, termination and reconnection of the electrical installation and make sure the
remaining portions of the buildings will function properly. Licensed electricians shall be on standby
basis during demolition works.
DEM/6
DEMOLITION
7. ENGAGEMENT OF LICENSED PLUMBERS TO TAKE CHARGE OF THE PLUMBING

INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall engage licensed plumbers to take charge of the plumbing installation of the
existing building during the contract period. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the
detection, diversion and reconnection of the water services and sanitary installation and make sure
the remaining portion of the buildings will function properly. Licensed plumbers shall be on standby
basis during demolition works.
8. REINSTATE AND MAKE GOOD
All demolition and alteration works shall be carried out without damage to the remaining parts of the
structure or adjoining buildings and if such damage shall occur in the carrying out of the demolition, the
Contractor shall reinstate and make good the same at his own expense.
9. TREES, CREEPERS, HEDGES, ETC.
The Contractor shall provide adequate protection to any trees, creepers, hedges to be preserved.
No trees shall be felled, removed or cut without the prior approval of the Employer and National
Parks Board and only when directed by the SO.
The stumps and roots of trees to be removed shall be grubbed up and removed from the site. All
empty tree holes or cavities shall be filled with approved material to the existing ground level and
compacted to the approval of the SO.
All bushes, shrubs, roots, lallang, etc. shall be removed by cutting and/or digging and the
accumulations shall be removed from site as directed by the SO.
All topsoil and vegetable matter on the site shall be excavated to an average depth of 150mm unless
otherwise specified or directed by the SO. Topsoil shall be stacked on site as directed by the SO for
later use.
All turves shall be cut in either 300 x 300mm squares or in rolls of 600mm to 1 metre wide and shall
have 50mm of the original soil adhering to the roots.
All turves and topsoil shall remain the property of the Employer. However the Contractor is deemed to
have allowed for the cost of removal of topsoil off the site if not required by the Employer.
10. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean down and protect completed sections of the work to the approval of the SO.
11. SO’s CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS FOR DEMOLITION

The above Specifications shall be read in conjunction with the SO’s Civil and Structural Engineering
Specifications for demolition. Where there are discrepancies for similar Specifications the SO’s Civil and
Structural Engineering Specifications take precedence.
DEM/7
EXCAVATION
1. SITE
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for all costs incurred and is also deemed to have visited and
examined the site carefully and to have ascertained the nature thereof and the kind of materials to be
excavated and provisions must be made in his pricing to cover for all types of materials to be excavated
unless otherwise described in the Tender Document.
2. EXISTING LEVELS
Existing ground levels shall be surveyed by the Contractor and to be agreed with the SO before
excavation and filling commences.
Survey shall be carried out by an approved Licensed Singapore Registered Surveyor.
If the Contractor fails to do this the existing ground levels shown upon the drawings prepared by the
SO or Tender Drawings will be taken as final and conclusive.
Final results of all survey drawings prepared on plans and sections shall be agreed and signed
between the Contractor and the SO or his representative.
3. SOIL INVESTIGATION
Results of Soil Investigation Report as enclosed (when available).
The information given on the Soil Investigation Results cannot be guaranteed as applying to all or
any other part of the site and the Contractor shall have no claim for any additional costs incurred by
reason of differing strata, other than breaking up hard material as defined in the Standard Method of
Measurement Clauses 5.06, 5.13 (a) and (b).
4. DEFINITION OF EARTHWORK MATERIALS

Topsoil shall mean the top layer of soil that can support the growth of vegetation.
Approved material shall mean all materials acceptable in accordance with this Specification.
Unsuitable material shall mean other than approved material and these shall include :-
 material from swamps
 peat, logs, stumps and perishable material
 material susceptible to spontaneous combustion
 soil of liquid limit exceeding 70 and/or plasticity index exceeding 35
 materials having a moisture content greater than the maximum permitted for such
materials in the Specification, unless otherwise permitted by the SO.
Rock shall mean hard material whose geological nature is to be regarded as such and individual
boulders exceeding 0.20 m3 or other masses of hard natural material which necessitates the use of
blasting or approved pneumatic tools for their removal.
Special filling material shall mean “approved material” but shall all pass a 75mm BS sieve. The
fraction passing a 75 m BS sieve shall have the following characteristics :-
 liquid limit not exceeding 35
 plasticity index not exceeding 12
 coefficient of uniformity shall be greater than 10
 the percentage passing 75 m BS sieve shall be less than 20% by weight
Cohesive soil includes clays with up to 20% of gravel and having a moisture content not less than
the value of the plastic limit minus 4.
EXC/1
EXCAVATION
DEFINITION OF EARTHWORK MATERIALS (CONT’D.)
Well-graded granular and dry cohesive soils include clays containing more than 20% of gravel
and/or having a moisture content less than the value of plastic limit minus 4, well-graded sands and
gravels with a uniformity coefficient exceeding 10.
Uniformly-graded material includes sands and gravels with a uniformity coefficient of 10 or less,
and all silts. Any soil containing 80% or more of material in the particle size range 60 m - 2 m
will be regarded as silt.
5. RESPONSIBILITY
Notwithstanding any authorisation, approval or direction given by the SO, in any way, the Contractor
shall be responsible for the proper carrying out of the works and for taking any necessary safety
precautions and for any loss or damage which may arise from the operation.
6. SITE CLEARANCE
All vegetation shall be cleared from the building site and all areas of cut and fill. In areas where the
natural land form is undisturbed, all trees are to be retained. Any trees required to be cut and felled
shall be approved by the SO in writing.
All undergrowth shall be cleared from the entire site.
7. EARTHWORK GENERALLY
Before commencement of any excavation works the Contractor shall obtain as-built services
drawings wherever possible and carry out his own investigation to determine any existing
underground services within the vicinity of the works. He shall engage the services of a Licensed
Cable Detection Engineer/Worker to detect and locate any existing underground services and to
determine whether the services are in-use or abandoned.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions in order not to damage any existing underground
services during the execution of the works and shall be held liable for any damages and
consequential damages to any existing underground and/or exposed services and shall pay for all
costs whatsoever.
For the purpose of this Contract the Contractor shall commence all excavation from existing site
levels and shall take all necessary precautions during excavation especially around trees, creepers,
hedges, etc. that are to be retained so as not to damage any roots.
The Contractor shall carry out all earthworks in such a manner as to prevent erosion or slips and shall limit
working faces to safe slopes and height. The Contractor shall ensure that all surfaces have at all times
sufficient gradients to enable them to shed water without causing erosion.
At the end of each day, all surfaces shall be left with no area that can retain water. The Contractor
shall provide and maintain temporary and approved surfaces or sub-surface drainage system to
ensure minimum delay in work progress due to wet weather. Alternatively, adequate means such as
covering all surfaces with properly secured polythene sheet shall be provided and maintained.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary temporary access roads and shall divert and
reinstate permanent drainage system. The proposed alignments and levels of temporary access roads shall
be submitted to the SO for approval prior to their construction. All temporary roads shall be provided
with drainage ditches over its full length.
EXC/2
EXCAVATION
8. METHOD OF EXCAVATION AND FILL
The method of excavation and sequence of working is at the Contractor's discretion but he must
submit details of his intentions to the SO for his approval before commencing any excavations.
The Contractor in excavating and filling shall carry out the works in accordance with the drawings
or as subsequently modified by the SO, in writing and shall adhere to slopes, levels, depths and
heights given therein. No borrow pits will be allowed on the site.
9. CUTTING INCLUDING SLOPES
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, the top edges of cutting shall be neatly
rounded to the dimensions shown on the drawing or as directed by the SO. Such work shall be
deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rate for cutting work and shall not be paid for as extras.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, slopes to cutting shall conform to the table
below.
ALLOWABLE SLOPES IN CUTTING
Slope
Material (Horizontal Distance to
Vertical Rise)
Sand 2 : 1 to 5 : 1
Loose gravel or clay 1½ : 1
Loam, shale or similar soft rock 1:1
Rock with clay seams ¾:1
Jointed laminated or soft rock ½:1
Massive competent rock ¼:1
Where shown on the drawings, slopes on the cross section shall represent the estimated requirements for
the expected types of materials and these slopes shall be subject to re-determination by the SO according
to his assessment of the materials encountered. Where the SO re-determines the slopes, the Contractor
shall not be entitled to any claim whatsoever except where increased or decreased quantities of excavation
become necessary because of re-determined excavation slopes, the difference between such
measurements and the measurements herein given shall be deemed as a variation to the Contract. If
however, the Contractor excavates the slope of a cutting beyond the specified line and the tolerance
applicable thereto, the SO may authorise a minor change in the general slope of the cutting to suit the
convenience of the works or the Contractor may be instructed to fill and make up the cutting to the
required slope in the manner as directed by the SO all at the Contractor’s expense. Such a change shall
not be regarded as a re-determination of the slope and no payment shall be made for any increase in the
excavation.
Unless otherwise specified, no portion of the earth cutting shall vary from the specified or ordered
formation level by an amount exceeding 150mm. In the case of cut slopes, no portion of the
completed slope shall vary by an amount exceeding 300mm (measured at right angles to the slope),
and no portion of the toe of the cutting shall be less than the specified distance from the road.
EXC/3
EXCAVATION
CUTTING INCLUDING SLOPES (CONT’D.)
Unless otherwise specified, rock cutting shall be trimmed to the slope indicated by the SO and there
shall be no projection beyond the specified slope for vertical distance of 2 metres above the table
drain. Above that height, the SO may permit isolated soundly-bedded rock outcrops projecting
form the ordered slope a distance not exceeding 10% of the vertical height of the projection above
the table drain. Such projection, if permitted, shall not occur over more than 20% of the whole area
of the cut slope.
Unless otherwise specified, excavation in rock shall extend to at least 150mm below the specified
formation level and backfilled with approved materials.
In all cuttings, whether in earth or rock, undulations in the general plane of the slope will not be
permitted.
The SO may direct that any overhanging, loose or unstable material, whether outside or behind the
specified slope, be removed.
The excavation shall be so arranged that the working areas are adequately drained throughout the
period of construction.
10. BENCHING IN CUTTINGS
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings or directed by the SO, cutting through any
material subject to fretting shall be sloped at the appropriate slope as indicated on the drawings or
directed by the SO at a height of 600mm above the table drain and benched horizontally for a width
of 900mm and then sloped again at the appropriate slope as indicated on the drawings or directed by
the SO.
In cutting where the strata consists of earth overlaying rock which is required to be cut to a slope of
½:1 or steeper, the face of the rock shall be given its appropriate slope up to the junction of the rock
and earth and the latter shall be stripped to form a bench 900mm wide and sloped hence as the
character of the soil may require.
11. ROCK
Excavate whatever materials are encountered including rock. For the purpose of these Contract,
rock shall be defined as a naturally occurring material of a large coherent mass of such size and
strength as to require the loosening or fracture by blasting or the employment of heavy pneumatic
tools. If excavated by hand it shall require breaking up by steel wedges and sledge hammers.
Loose boulders of a volume not exceeding one cubic metre each and all concrete, reinforced
concrete, brickwork, steel or timber piles shall not be classified as rock nor shall materials such as
earth, gravel, disintegrated or decomposed masses, geologically semi-formed "rock" such as very
dense cemented sand and other such hard and complex materials that can nevertheless be excavated
by the use of ordinary earth moving machines which shall be classified as ordinary materials for the
purposes of payment and be paid for at normal excavation rates.
The Contractor shall inform the SO as soon as any material purporting to be rock is encountered.
The SO will examine such material in its original position and determine whether it is to be
classified as rock in accordance with the foregoing definitions. For material which the SO
determines as rock, take measurements of the volumes excavated and agree same with the Resident
Technical Officer or Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall only be entitled to payment at normal
excavation rates if this procedure is not adhered to.
EXC/4
EXCAVATION
ROCK (CONT’D.)
Blasting will not be permitted without the written permission of the SO and the Authorities.
Blasting shall not be allowed without written permission from the SO. If explosives are to be used,
the Contractor shall obtain all necessary licences from the appropriate authorities and shall conform
to all Government regulations relating to transport, storage, handling and use of the explosives and
shall also conform to the rules set out by the Officer-in-charge of Arms and Explosives.
The SO must be fully informed by the Contractor as to steps and precautionary measures taken to
safeguard the surrounding properties. The Contractor shall be liable for any accident, damage or
injury to any person, property or thing, resulting from the use of explosives. When blasting is
proposed to be carried out, the Contractor shall determine the danger zone likely to be created and
ensure that no damage is caused to persons or property on or off site. Prior to commencing blasting
operations, a written report (supported by photographs`1` where necessary) listing any existing
defects in any structure shall be submitted to the SO.
When blasting operations are being carried out, any road affected shall be closed to traffic and the
appropriate signs shall be erected in accordance with the “Temporary Signing Manual for
Roadworks” of the Land Transport Authority (LTA).
12. RECORD OF DEPTHS OF FOUNDATIONS, ETC.
The Contractor shall agree with the SO and record on a suitable plan the depth of every foundation,
filling to soft spots, etc. as constructed and size of every existing foundations as exposed by the
excavations. All such record drawings shall be signed by the SO and copies to be distributed to the
Employer, SO and his representitives.
13. PLANKING AND STRUTTING
Provide planking and strutting and any necessary stagings to uphold the sides of the excavations.
The term "planking and strutting" shall be deemed to cover whatever method the Contractor elects
to adopt for upholding the faces of the excavations. The Contractor is solely responsible for the
design, supply, fixing and removal of all planking and strutting required of sufficient strength to
resist any earth pressures, to prevent damage to any adjoining property and to ensure the safety of
the workmen.
14. STAGNANT WATER
The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to the approval of the SO and Authorities to ensure that
all holes, voids, bottom of excavations, and any items capable of collecting water be free of water
and subsequently covered up.
He shall take the necessary steps to prevent the breeding of mosquitoes.
EXC/5
EXCAVATION
15. EXCAVATION OF FOUNDATION TRENCHES, PITS, PILE CAPS, GROUND BEAMS, ETC.
Foundation trenches or pits for pile caps, column bases, ground beams, etc. shall be excavated to
sizes and depths shown on drawings or as otherwise directed by the SO.
The Contractor shall report to the SO when the excavations are ready to receive concrete and no
concrete shall be laid until after the excavations have been inspected and approved by the SO.
Excavation for trenches, pits, pile caps, ground beams, etc. shall not be wider than is necessary for
the efficient laying and jointing of pipes or for other works to be carried out.
The bottom of all excavations shall be to the correct levels as shown on the drawings. Any pocket
of soft materials or loose rock in the bottoms of pits and trenches shall be removed and the resulting
cavities and any large fissures filled with (Grade 15) concrete. After the placing of any blinding
concrete required by the contract, no trimming of the side faces shall be carried out for 24 hours.
Excavations dug too deep shall be made up in concrete (Grade 15) at the Contractor's own expense.
Bottom of all excavations shall be trimmed square and level. The Contractor shall form such steps
in bottom of foundation trenches, etc., as the SO may consider necessary in such positions and to
such depths as he may direct in conformity with the description for concrete foundations. The
bottoms of all foundations shall be well rammed and compacted to the approval of the SO.
When the excavation is reaching formation level the last 300mm of the soil is to be carefully
excavated by hand on a dry day and covered with 50mm thick of lean concrete (1:3:6) to exact
levels as shown. Before lean concrete is laid, sufficient drainage shall be provided below it to
keep the whole site well drained at all times and to prevent heaving of bottom owing to built up of
water pressure in the subsoil. Drains are to be connected to proper sumps from where all pumping
is to be done as soon as practicable.
All soft or defective portions of soil below formation level shall be cut out and filled in with
approved material well consolidated in layers of approved thickness. The Contractor shall before
backfilling, measure and determine in the presence of the SO the volume of such poor quality soil
so cut out and replaced. The cost of replacement shall be paid as an addition in the Contract, unless
otherwise stated.
Where the excavation reveals a combination of approved and unsuitable materials the Contractor
shall unless otherwise agreed by the SO, carry out the excavation in such a manner that the
approved materials are excavated separately for use in the works without contamination by the
unsuitable materials.
The earth used for backfilling, unless otherwise ordered and measured as imported shall be selected hard
dry material from the excavations as selected and approved by the SO. Fill and level the site as shown or
directed. All filling shall be done in layers not exceeding 230mm deep and to be compacted with a
mechanical power rammer, with each layer rammed and consolidated before the next. Compacting of the
filling by flooding will not be allowed. No mechanical power rammer shall be used within 1.00 metre of
the top of any pipe.
No excavated approved materials other than surplus to the requirements of the Contract shall be removed
from the site except on the direction or with the permission of the SO. Should the Contractor be permitted
to remove approved material from the site to suit his operational procedure, then he shall make good at his
own expense any consequent deficit of filling arising therefrom with approved material. Stacked spoil
from filling shall be kept tidy at all times.
EXC/6
EXCAVATION
16. KEEP FREE FROM WATER
Bottom of all excavations shall be kept free from water, mud, etc. by pumping, baling or otherwise
as required by the SO and protected form the effects of the weather and thoroughly compacted and
consolidated to the approval of the SO.
17. DEWATERING OF SITE
The Contractor shall provide a scheme of their own for this particular item of work.
The Contractor shall submit for the SO's approval their proposal with plans for a Dewatering
System for the excavation of the whole site. Well points or sumps at various locations and pumps,
pipes, silt traps, tanks and other constructional plant necessary for the work shall be provided and
their removal on Completion of the Project.
The water from the sumps shall be pumped up into a header pipe which runs all round the site
perimeter and shall be capable of receiving all the water from the sumps and discharging it at
various points into approved areas around the site.
The Contractor shall maintain the Dewatering System at all times during the excavation work.
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for the cost of dewatering the excavation works in the
pricing of the excavation works and shall provide a breakdown of cost when asked by the SO to
substantiate this item.
18. HARDCORE
Hardcore beds under floor slabs, aprons, etc. shall consist of clean, hard broken bricks, concrete,
stone or other approved inert material to be selected and approved by the SO and broken to pass a
64mm ring and deposited in layers not exceeding 150mm thick well rammed and consolidated,
blinded with sand and watered.
Thickness of the hardcore as described or as shown on the drawings is deemed to mean the full
thicknesses after ramming and consolidating with a mechanical power rammer.
Provide and lay hardcore beds under floors, steps, etc. of the thicknesses as indicated in the
drawings.
19. FILLING OF FOUNDATION PITS AND TRENCHES AND REMOVAL OF SUPPORTS
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings or directed by the SO, all filling for this purpose shall
consist of approved material deposited and compacted by approved plant as specified in
Compaction. Timber sheeting and other excavation supports shall be carefully removed as the
filling proceeds except where they are required by the Contract to be left in position. The removal of
such supports will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for the stability of the works.
EXC/7
EXCAVATION
20. FOUNDATIONS FOR FILLS
Embankment construction shall include the preparation and compaction to the degree as specified in
Compaction of the areas upon which embankments are to be placed, the placing and compacting of
approved material within areas from which unsuitable material bas been removed as specified
hereunder, and the placing and compacting of embankment material in holes, pits and other
depressions within the foundation area.
Unless otherwise specified, the natural ground over which filling is to be placed shall be cleared of all
loose boulders, grass, topsoil, bushes, trees, roots and other vegetation. If the SO shall consider that
any underlying material is unstable or unsuitable, he may direct it be removed and replaced with
approved material at an agreed additional cost.
Any overhanging rock ledges or caves within the foundation area shall be removed before the
placing of fill commences.
The construction of any section of a fill shall not commence until the formation for that section has
been approved by the SO.
21. FILLING GENERALLY
End tipping of fill shall not be permitted except in special circumstances and then only with the
approval of the SO. The end-tipped material shall be compacted to the requirements as specified in
Compaction.
In the opinion of the SO where the materials would adversely affect the placing of specially
compacted fill, all such work shall be stopped.
All filling material, whether placed and/or compacted or awaiting placing and/or compaction which,
in the opinion of the SO does not comply with this Specification or has been damaged by weather or
in any other way, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
22. PLACING FILLS IN EMBANKMENTS
Embankments shall be constructed in even horizontal layers over the full width, laid in thickness
appropriate to the compaction plant used and compacted to satisfy the requirements as specified in
Compaction. At all times the embankments shall be maintained with a sufficient camber and a
surface sufficiently even to enable surface water to drain readily from them.
If the material deposited as fill subsequently reaches a condition such that it cannot be compacted
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall at his own expense
either :-
 make good by removing the material off the embankment either to tip or elsewhere
until it is in a suitable physical condition for re-use, and replacing it with suitable
materials;
or
 make good the material by mechanical or chemical means to improve its stability;
or
 cease work on the material until its physical condition is again such that it can be
compacted as described in the Contract.
EXC/8
EXCAVATION
PLACING FILLS IN EMBANKMENTS (CONT’D.)
Rock material shall be broken down to dimensions not exceeding the compacted thickness of the
layer in which it is placed. Rock material shall be well distributed in layers extending the full
width of the fill and sufficient fine material shall be placed around the larger material as it is
deposited to fill the voids and produce a dense compact fill. Where insufficient fine material is
present to fill the voids, additional fine material shall be obtained from other sources at the
Contractor’s expense.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, the top edges of embankments shall be
neatly rounded to the dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the SO. Such work
shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rate for earthwork.
23. FILL SLOPES
The slope faces of embankments or other fill areas shall be formed by overfilling, cutting back and
trimming neatly to the desired profile. When determining the desired slope, the Contractor shall
take note of the nature of the fill materials. However, the slope shall not be steeper than that as
shown on the Table below.
ALLOWABLE FILL SLOPE
Slope
Material (Horizontal Distance to Vertical Rise)
Sandy loam, soft clay and loose sand 2:1 to 5:1

Ordinary earth 1½:1
Rock 1¼:1
Rock filling - hand pitched 1:1
The slopes shown in the cross sections on the drawings represent the estimated requirements for the
expected types of material, and shall be subject to re-determination by the SO according to his
assessment of the materials encountered.
Where the SO re-determines a slope, the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim whatsoever except
where increased or decreased quantities of excavation or borrow become necessary because of re-
determined fill slopes. The difference between such measurements and measurements herein given
shall be a variation to the Contract.
When completed, the average planes of the slopes of embankments shall conform to those determined by
the SO. For a vertical distance of 1.20 metres below the road level, no point on the completed slope shall
vary from the specified or ordered slope by an amount exceeding 150mm measured at right angles to the
slope. At distances greater than 1.20 metres below the road level, no point on the completed slope shall
vary from the specified or ordered slope by an amount exceeding 300mm. Undulations in the general
plane of the slope shall not be permitted.
EXC/9
EXCAVATION
24. FILL ADJACENT TO CULVERTS AND RETAINING WALLS

Before backfilling, a filter drain shall be placed against weepholes in all structures. The filter drain shall
consist of clean, hard and durable broken stones or hardcore conforming to grading of Type B material as
shown in Table for Range of Grading. The larger stones shall be placed adjacent to the weepholes and
the smaller particles behind and above the larger particles.
The length of the filter drain shall be extended horizontally throughout the whole width of the
structures. Unless otherwise stated, it shall have a width of 300mm and shall vertically cover the
weephole by at least 300mm.
Special filling material shall be placed adjacent to all structures in accordance with Table for Special
Fill Adjacent to Abutments, Culverts and Retaining Walls. Other approved materials may be used as
backfill outside the limits as specified in the same Table.
Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers of thickness appropriate to the compacting plant used.
It shall be compacted with care to the required density.
RANGE OF GRADING
Percentage by Weight Passing
BS Sieve Size
Type A Type B
63mm - 100
37.5mm 100 85 - 100
20mm - 0 - 20
10mm 45 - 100 0 - 5
3.35mm 25 - 80 -
600 m 8 - 45 -
75 m 0 - 10 -
SPECIAL FILL ADJACENT TO ABUTMENTS,

CULVERTS AND RETAINING WALLS
Minimum Width of
Structure Special Fill
Culvert Wingwalls H/3
Retaining Walls H/3 or full width of base
whichever is greater
Barrels of Box Culverts H/3
Barrels of Pipe Culverts 600mm all round
(H = height of structure)
For framed structure, fill at both ends of the structure shall be brought up simultaneously with the
difference in levels of fills at both ends limited to 600mm.
No fill shall be placed against concrete structures within 21 days after placing concrete unless the
Contractor has provided at his own expense sufficient supports to the walls to the approval of the SO.
He may also be required to submit calculations to show that no damage to the concrete structures
will be caused by his backfilling earlier than 21 days.
The special filling material forms part of the earthwork and the Contractor shall allow for the costs
of providing such materials.
EXC/10
EXCAVATION
25. COMPACTION
All materials shall be compacted in layers as soon as practicable after deposition. The depth of each
compacted layer shall be compatible with the compaction plant used and shall not be greater than
the maximum depth of compacted layer specified for each type of compaction plant in Table for
Compaction Requirements set out below. Earthmoving plant shall not be accepted as
compaction equipment.
COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS
Well-graded
granular and dry cohesive Uniformly-graded
Cohesive Soil soils materials
Type of Category Max Min Max Min Max Min

Compaction depth of No. of depth of No. of depth of No. of
Plant compacted passes compacted passes compacted passes
layer (mm) layer (mm) layer (mm)
Smooth- Force per 100mm

wheeled roller width
2.1 - 2.6 kN 125 8 125 10 125 10 *

2.61 - 5.2 kN 125 6 125 8 125 8*
More than 5.2 kN 150 4 150 8 Unsuitable
Gridroller Force per 100mm

width
2.6 - 5.2 kN 150 10 Unsuitable 150 10

5.3 - 7.8 kN 150 8 125 12 Unsuitable
More than 7.8 kN 150 4 150 12 Unsuitable
Pneumatic- Wheel Load

tyred roller
1 - 1½ tonnes 125 6 Unsuitable 150 10 *
1½ - 2 tonnes 150 5 Unsuitable Unsuitable
2 - 2½ tonnes 175 4 125 12 Unsuitable
2½ - 4 tonnes 225 4 125 10 Unsuitable
4 - 6 tonnes 300 4 125 10 Unsuitable
More than 12 tonnes 450 4 175 6 Unsuitable
Vibratory Force per 100mm

roller width
0.25 - 0.45 kN Unsuitable 75 16 150 16

0.46 - 0.70 kN Unsuitable 75 12 150 12
0.71 - 1.25 kN 100 12 125 12 150 6
1.26 - 1.75 kN 125 8 150 8 200 10 *
1.76 - 2.30 kN 150 4 150 4 225 12 *
2.31 - 2.80 kN 175 4 175 4 250 10 *
2.81 - 3.50 kN 200 4 200 4 275 8*
3.51 - 4.20 kN 225 4 225 4 300 8*
4.21 - 4.90 kN 250 4 250 4 300 8*
* Rollers shall be towed by track-laying tractors. Self propelled rollers are unsuitable.
(Cont’d.)
EXC/11
EXCAVATION
COMPACTION (CONT’D.)
COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D.)
Well-graded
granular and dry cohesive Uniformly-graded
Cohesive Soil soils materials
Type of Category Max Min Max Min Max Min

Compaction depth of No. of depth of No. of depth of No. of
Plant compacted passes compacted passes compacted passes
layer (mm) layer (mm) layer (mm)
Vibrating- Static pressure

plate under base plate
compactor
8.6 - 10.3 kN / m² Unsuitable Unsuitable 75 6
10.4 - 12.1 kN / m² Unsuitable 75 10 100 6
12.2 - 13.8 kN / m² Unsuitable 75 6 150 6
13.9 - 17.2 kN / m² 100 6 125 6 150 4
17.3 - 20.7 kN / m² 150 6 150 5 200 4
More than 20.7 200 6 200 5 250 4
kN / m²
Vibro- Mass kilogramme

tamper
50 - 65 100 3 100 3 150 3
65 - 75 125 3 125 3 200 3
More than 75 200 3 150 3 225 3
Power Mass kilogramme

rammer
100 150 4 150 6 Unsuitable
More than 500 275 8 275 12 Unsuitable
Each class of material to be compacted shall be tested, prior to compaction, by an approved

Laboratory or other approved agencies, in accordance with BS 1377 or other approved equivalent to
determine its maximum dry density and optimum moisture content for compaction.
The moisture content of the in-situ material during compaction shall be maintained as close to the
optimum moisture content as possible. If necessary, this shall be adjusted by wetting or drying on
site to enable the required in-situ field densities of the fill material to be obtained consistently.
Following the compaction process, each layer shall be tested and approved by the SO prior to the
placing of the next layer. In-situ field density tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1377
Test No. 15(A): Sand Replacement Method or Test No. 15(F) : Water Displacement Method or
other approved equivalent.
The in-situ field densities of compacted materials calculated as percentages of the maximum dry
density derived from BS 1377 Test No. 13 (4.5 kg rammer) or other approved equivalent shall be
obtained unless otherwise specified by the SO :-
 within 500mm of formation level (subgrade) - 95%
 more than 500mm below formation level (for embankment) - 90%
EXC/12
EXCAVATION
COMPACTION (CONT’D.)
The Contractor may choose to establish by site trials the relationship among the in-situ material for
compaction, compaction plant used, thickness of each layer and compacting effort in terms of number of
passes. If so established and agreed by the SO, the Contractor shall follow the same compaction
arrangement for each and every subsequent layers in compaction. However, the SO may at any time carry
out in-situ field density tests to determine whether the degree of compaction has satisfied the requirement
in this Clause. When the compaction is found inadequate, the agreed compaction arrangement shall be
adjusted.
Table for Compaction Requirements may be used as a guide for the Contractor in establishing
compaction arrangement. However, site trials shall be carried out to ensure that the density
requirement is achieved.
The Contractor shall allow in his tender for all costs incurred in executing compaction by whichever
method he has adopted and any subsequent alteration as may be directed by the SO.
26. DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS ASSOCIATED WITH TABLE FOR

COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS
The depth of compacted layer is the height by which an embankment is raised by each successive
compacted layers.
The number of passes is the number of times that each point on the surface of the layer being
compacted has been traversed by the compaction plant (or struck in the case of power rammers or
dropping weight compactors). The effective width of a pneumatic-tyred roller, for this purpose, is
the sum of the widths of the individual wheeltracks together with the sum of the spacing between
the wheeltracks provided that each spacing does not exceed 225mm. Where the spacing exceeds
225mm the effective width shall be taken as the sum of the widths of the individual wheeltracks
only.
The force per 100mm width of roll is the total weight on the roller divided by the total roll width.
Where a smooth-wheeled roller has more than one axle the machine shall be assessed on the basis
of the axle giving the highest value of force per 100mm width.
Wheel load is the total weight of the roller divided by number of wheels.
Vibratory rollers are self propelled or towed rollers having means of applying mechanical vibration
to one or more rolls.
 The requirements for vibratory rollers are based on the use of the lowest gear on a self
propelled machine and a towing speed of 1800 - 2400 m/hr for a towed machine. If
higher gears or speeds are used, an increased number of passes shall be provided in
proportion to the increase in speed of travel.
 Vibratory rollers operating without their vibration mechanism in use will be classified as
smooth-wheeled rollers.
 Vibratory rollers shall only be operated with their vibration mechanism operating at the
frequency of vibration recommended by the manufacturers. All such rollers shall be
equipped with a device automatically indicating the frequency at which the mechanism
is operating.
EXC/13
EXCAVATION
DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS ASSOCIATED WITH TABLE FOR

COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D.)
Vibrating-plate compactors are machines having a base plate to which is attached a source of
vibration consisting of one or two eccentrically weighted shafts.
 The static pressure under the plate of a vibrating-plate compactor is calculated by dividing
the total weight of the machine in working order by the area in contact with compacted
material.
 Vibrating-plate compactors shall be operated at the frequency of vibration recommended

by the manufacturer. They shall normally be operated at travelling speeds of less than 900
m/hr but, if higher speeds are necessary, the number of passes shall be increased in
proportion to the increase in speed of travel.
Vibro-tampers are machines in which an engine-driven reciprocating mechanism acts on a spring

system, through which oscillations are set up in a base plate.
Power rammers are machines which are actuated by explosions in an internal combustion cylinder,
each explosion being controlled manually by the operator.
For items marked with an asterisk ( * ), the rollers shall be towed by track-laying tractors. Self-
propelled rollers are unsuitable.
Where combination of different types of categories of plant are used, the compaction requirements
shall be :-
 The depth of layer shall be that for the type of plant requiring the least depth of layer.
 The number of passes, shall be that for the type of plant requiring the greatest number of
passes.
However, where the Contractor uses a lighter type of plant to provide some preliminary compaction
only to assist the use of heavier plant, this shall be disregarded in assessing the above requirements.
27. CONSOLIDATED AND COMPACTED FIRE ENGINE ACCESSWAY
The Contractor shall construct and ensure that the consolidated and compacted fire-engine
accessway with grasscell shall be capable of supporting a 30-tonne fire engine and to carry out such
field tests to confirm compliance to be approved by SO.
28. SETTLEMENT
The Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the approval of the SO all settlement in filling and
in backfilling that may occur up to the end of the period of maintenance.
29. PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICES
The Contractor shall exercise care during the excavations in order to avoid damage to any existing
cable, water mains or sewers, etc. encountered. The Contractor shall allow in his rates for
excavation, all necessary additional labour involved and for all necessary temporary supports and
casings required to ensure the protection of the cables, etc.
EXC/14
EXCAVATION
30. ANTI-TERMITE SOIL TREATMENT
The Contractor shall execute the whole of the anti-termite soil treatment works to the satisfaction of
the SO, and warrants that the works shall be executed using good materials and with all due care and
professional skill. He further warrants against any infestations by termites whatsoever and
howsoever arising for a period of five (5) years from the date of substantial completion of the
Works. The Contractor shall undertake to carry out re-treatment should infestations of subterranean
termites occur within the said five (5) years from the date of substantial completion of the Works at
his own expense and to the satisfaction of the SO. If the Contractor shall refuse, neglect or fail to do
so for any reason whatsoever, within such time as may be specified at the complete discretion of the
SO in a notice in writing from the SO to carry out the re-treatment, the Employer shall be entitled to
engage others to carry out the re-treatment and charge the costs thereof to the Contractor.
The Contractor and Specialist shall provide a written JOINT GUARANTEE of FIVE (5) YEARS
(as per attached Format Specimen) for SO’s approval prior to the commencement of the works.
The Guarantee shall commence from date of Substantial Completion of the Works.
31. SO’S CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS
The above specifications shall be read in conjunction with the SO’s Civil and Structural Engineering
Earthwork Specifications. Where there are discrepancies for similar specifications the SO’s Civil and
Structural Engineering Earthwork Specifications take precedence.
32. PROTECTION
Protect completed sections of the work to the approval of the SO.
EXC/15
CONCRETE WORK
NOTE: All reinforced concrete structural works shall be constructed in accordance with the SO’s Engineering Specifications and Drawings
and the equivalent EN Standards as directed by the SO or his representative on site.
1. STORAGE OF CEMENT
Rapid hardening, sulphate resisting and super sulphated cement shall be kept, stored apart from
Ordinary Portland Cement and from each other.
Cement shall not be kept on site longer than necessary and in no circumstances longer than two (2)
months, but at least sufficient cement for one (1) week's consumption shall be left in store.
All cement shall be fresh when delivered. Cement of different types shall not be mixed one with
another. Consignments shall be used in the order of delivery. Admixture shall be used only if
approved. With each delivery, the Contractor shall send to the SO's representative a memorandum
of the quantity delivered and the manufacturer's test certificate.
If the Contractor proposes to use cement delivered in bulk he shall obtain the prior approval of the
SO and the method of delivery, storage and measurement.
If bagged cement is used, the Contractor shall provide on the site of the works a building or shed for
storing the cement. This building or shed shall be watertight, have thoroughly dry floors and walls,
be well lighted and ventilated and be capable of holding at least two (2) weeks' consumption of
cement. Different consignments of cement shall be kept separate and the cement shall be used in the
order in which it has been delivered to the works.
An approved weighing scale shall be provided if required by the SO to be used for checking the
weight of every bag at the Contractor's own expense. Bags under weight or more than 2% in excess
of the nominal weight shall be rejected and removed from the site.
Cement shall be kept in the store until it is actually required for use on the works, and cement
temporarily placed near the mixer or elsewhere, after removal from the store, shall be adequately
protected by approved means. Cement shall not be kept in a temporary store, except in as far as is
necessary to allow for efficient organisation of the mixing plant.
2. PRECAST CONCRETE
All precast concrete shall be in (Grade C30/40) concrete unless otherwise specified.
The following shall apply if not specified in the SO’s Engineering Specifications.
The concrete in one precast piece shall be placed in one operation. No piece shall be removed from
the mould or erected until sufficiently matured to ensure that no damage shall be done to the piece.
A piece shall be suspended or supported only at the points described on the working drawings or
elsewhere. A piece that is cracked or otherwise damaged during, before or after erection shall be
removed from the works and replaced by the Contractor free-of-charge. Pieces shall be bedded or
otherwise fixed in their permanent positions as instructed.
Lintols (Grade C30/40)
Where possible lintols shall be precast and shall not be built on for fourteen (14) days after casting
unless adequately strutted. Wherever reinforced concrete lintols are not detailed on drawings they
can be constructed in accordance with the table hereunder, the length of the reinforcing bars being
equal to the minimum length for the lintols:-
M.S. Reinforcing Bars with 13mm Cover in Bottom
Clear Span Minimum Length Minimum 115mm 230mm

of Lintol Depth Width Width
Up to 1.20 Clear Span + 2 x T10mm (T)
metres 300mm 150mm 2 x T10mm (T+B) 2 x T13mm (B)
R6mm at 100mm Centres R6mm at 100mm Centres
1.20 to 2.40 Clear Span + 2 x T10mm (T)
metres 500mm 230mm 2 x T13mm (B) 2 x T13mm (T+B)
R6mm at 125mm Centres R6mm at 125mm Centres
CON/1
CONCRETE WORK
2. PRECAST CONCRETE (CONT’D)

Non-Structural Precast Concrete Accessories
Non-structural precast concrete accessories shall be Grade C30/40 unless otherwise stated for kerbs,
lintols and the like elements with all exposed faces finished smooth and fair.
Precast Concrete Cover Slabs

Supply and fix precast concrete cover slabs to branch and main trenches.
Heelstones
Provide 150mm high precast concrete (Grade C30/40) heelstones to jambs of door frame cast to suit
sections of frames and complete with 12mm diameter mild steel dowel bar 150mm long.
3. PRECAST CONCRETE WALL PANELS, HALF SLABS, PRESTRESSED PLANKS, AND

STAIRCASES
All precast units shall be designated to take the stipulated imposed loading as indicated in the
designed live plans and in accordance with the Building Control Regulations or BS 6399 or other
approved equivalent.
The Contractor shall design and provide all necessary hooks for handling and installation of the
precast units. Suitable holes, grooves, bolts and other lifting devices shall be provided at lifting
points to ensure accurate placing of lifting shackle.
All lifting devices and inserts in the elements shall be designed with a minimum safety of 2.5.
The precast units shall be designed for a fire resistance of 2 hours.
The precast units shall be designed to carry all specified loads, and all additional forces due to
manufacture, handling, storage, transportation and erection and deformation of the elements.
The design of precast units shall allow for the provision of openings to electrical, mechanical and
other services ducts, subject to design constraints.
The final deflection of precast units shall not exceed those allowable limits specified in CP 65 or other
For precast half slab, concrete topping of grade 40 shall be cast on top of precast units and beams,
with one layer of topping reinforcement as per deign requirements.
The Contractor shall appoint a qualified person to supervise the lifting and installation of the precast
units. Temporary props shall also be erected, where necessary, to maintain alignment of the precast
units prior to permanent connection.
Joints and connections details between precast units or precast units with in-situ elements shall be
designed for protection against water, weather, corrosion and fire so as to provide permanent
watertightness and structural integrity of the building.
All precast units shall be marked so as to show the member type, and the date on which concrete was cast.
Unless otherwise indicated, the types of finishing requirement shall be divided into two broad
categories of type one and two finishing as described below. Generally, type one finish applies to
concrete wall panels, undersides of precast half slab, and prestressed plank while type two finish
applies to precast staircases.
a) Type one finish – The panel shall have even finish produced with a sheet material. Abrupt
unevenness is to be not greater than 5mm. Gradual unevenness is to be not more than 5mm
per one metre of straight edge. All air pockets holes over 10mm in diameter shall be filled.
All form offset or fins over 3mm shall be ground smooth.
b) Type two finish – In addition to type one finishing requirements, all exposed surface shall be coated
with a neat cement paste using an acceptable float. After this paste has dried, the surface shall be
rubbed down vigorously to remove loose particles.
CON/2
CONCRETE WORK
4. PRECAST CONCRETE MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES

Where appropriate, the following tolerances are given as both plus and minus values on a specific
dimension rather than as a deviation from a maximum or minimum value.
Maximum deviation of the major dimension of the unit:
i) Up to 3m -
ii) 3m to 6m  5mm
iii) 6m to 9m  6mm
iv) Each additional deviation for  2mm per 3m every subsequent 3m
v) Openings (cast within panel)  6mm
vi) Out of square 3mm per 3m OR 6mm total whichever
(difference in length of two diagonals) is bigger
Maximum deviation in thickness:
i) Up to 100mm  3mm
ii) 100mm to 500mm  6mm/-3mm
iii) Additional deviation for every subsequent 500mm  2mm
Position tolerances for cast-in-items:
i) Inserts, bolts, pipes sleeves, etc.  10mm
ii) Electrical outlets 13mm
Maximum deviation from the intended line (bowing after casting)
i) Up to 3m  6mm
ii) 3m to 6m  9mm
iii) 6m to 12m  12mm
iv) Additional deviation every subsequent 6m  6mm
5. PRECAST CONCRETE ERECTION TOLERANCES

The permissible deviation shall be as follows:
i) Distance between edge of panels at joint
- For panels with dimensions (normal to the joint)  5mm up to 6mm
- For each 3m increment in excess of 6m  2mm
ii) Joint taper (panel edges not parallel)
- Per linear 300mm of joint  1/2mm
- Maximum for entire length  9mm
iii) Panel alignment
- Alignment of horizontal and vertical joints 3mm
- Jog in alignment of matching edges 3mm
iv) Verticality of wall/column
- Entire height of building  35mm
- Up to 3m high  10mm
- Each storey height  10mm
v) Panel Position from reference lines
CON/3
CONCRETE WORK
6. CONCRETE FINISHES
Rough Form Finish: No selected form surface, forms of sound material, no further treatment on form
removal except repair of structural defects. In non-public areas, this finish shall be further treated by
patching of the holes and honeycombs and removal of fins exceeding 6mm.
Smooth Formed Finish: Concrete cast against sound plywood or metal forms, true to line and
plane, structural defects repaired. TIE HOLES AND HONEYCOMBS PATCHED AND FINS
COMPLETELY REMOVED. Where such finish is not true to line and plane or contains surface
defects which cannot be satisfactorily remedied, a Portland Cement plaster finish shall be applied as
specified in Finishes Specifications.
Rubbed Architectural Finish: Edges shall be straight and square, patch tie holes, honeycombs, air
holes and other defects. Remove all fins and offsets. Achieve finish by rubbing surface with
carborundum stone and water to achieve smooth finish uniform in colour and texture. Applicable to areas
specified as off-form concrete to receive special Architectural paint finish. All edges to be crisp and true
with a maximum 12mm diameter pencil round at the edges.
7. CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES

Where described the concrete slab finish shall be constructed to the Specifications set below.
All finished slab surfaces shall be true planes within 6mm in 3m as determined by a 3m straightedge
placed anywhere on the slab in any direction.
All External floor finishes (eg. corridor staircase, study places, informal spaces) shall have a consistent
fine rough texture to give a non-skid surface. The slip resistance requirement for the floor finishes shall
achieve Classification X under wet condition in accordance to Singapore Stand (SS 485:2011). Ramp
finishes shall have a texture to achieve Classification W under wet condition in accordance to
Singapore Standard (SS 485:2011).
"Trowelled Finish": Hard power steel trowel finish surface with no aggregate showing.
"Broom Finish": Surface scored with stiff broom or burlap after power floating operation.
Striations shall all be in same direction.
"Fine Broom Finish": Surface scored with fine broom after power floating to produce ridges not
exceeding 2mm. Striations shall all be in same direction.
"Power Float Finish": Concrete shall be surfaced with mechanical power float in a manner which
will compact the concrete and produce a surface free of depressions or ridges, with no voids or
aggregate showing.
8. CURING CONCRETE SURFACES AND MOCK-UP SAMPLE

Curing Compound: Curing compounds, if used, shall be clear low solids acrylic or clear sodium
silicate with non-acid penetrate containing no oil, wax or pigment to be selected and approved by
the SO. Curing compound shall not be used on slabs or screeds which are to receive thin-set tile or
liquid or paste applied waterproofing. All such surfaces shall be moist-cured with water only.
Mock-up Sample: Erect TWO (2 NOS.) mock-up for "Smooth Formed Finish" prior to beginning
work, for SO's review. One sample to be erected for each of the different grades of concrete to be
erected. Size of the sample to be approved by the SO.
9. TEST FOR PONDING OF WATER

Where concrete slabs are cast to falls (including slight falls) the Contractor is deemed to have
allowed for carrying out water ponding tests to the approval of the SO.
CON/4
CONCRETE WORK
10. INTEGRAL WATERPROOFER TO CONCRETE STRUCTURES

Where specified integral concrete waterproofing shall be obtained from approved Specialist Supplier
to be selected and approved by the SO and used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions. The Contractor and Specialist shall provide a written JOINT GUARANTEE
of TEN (10) YEARS (as attached Format Specimen) against water leakages. The Guarantee shall
commence from date of Substantial Completion of the Works.
Concrete to receive the waterproofing admixture shall conform with the current British Standard
Specification for concrete and be designed without additives for FC of at least 25H/mm2 at twenty-
eight (28) days or greater or other approved equivalent if required by the SO.
The rate of usage shall be as per the manufacturer’s printed instructions and the water content of the
concrete mix shall be reduced accordingly to preserve the specified slump. Maximum slump shall
be between 90mm - 100mm. The cement content shall be stated on the premix concrete dockets.
The cement content shall be designed for each mix without the use of any additives. Each cubic
metre of concrete for waterproofing concrete shall contain a minimum of 7.3 bags of 50 kgs
Portland Cement.
Concrete when placed shall be properly vibrated and consolidated without honeycombing. Wherever
possible, concrete shall be placed continuously until the placement is completed. Particular attention shall
be paid to the joints such as the placing of water-bars for SO's approval. Joints shall be thoroughly
cleaned and treated with a rich cement showing when placing is resumed. Freshly laid concrete shall be
thoroughly cured to the approval of the SO.
11. WATERPROOF MEMBRANE TO UNDERSIDE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB ON

GRADE WHERE TIMBER, VINYL, CARPET AND FINISH COATING IS USED AS FINAL
FLOOR FINISH AND WATERPROOF MEMBRANE TO BACK OF RETAINING WALLS
The waterproof membrane shall be Urethane Elastomeric Membrane Waterproofing (liquid applied) or
other approved to be supplied and installed by Specialist and used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions to be selected and approved by the SO. The Contractor and
Specialist shall provide a written JOINT GUARANTEE of TEN (10) YEARS (as attached Format
Specimen) against water leakages. The Guarantee shall commence from date of Substantial
Completion of the Works.
Location where the waterproof membrane shall be installed to the underside of reinforced concrete slab
on grade is to be used are where timber, vinyl, carpet and finish coating is used as the final floor
finishes and waterproof membrane to the back of all retaining walls. Contractor’s waterproofing
Specialist shall submit waterproofing drawing details for SO’s approval.
The Contractor shall cast minimum thickness 50mm average blinding screed to receive the membrane.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and waterproofing Specialist to ensure that the screed or
concrete substrate to receive the waterproofing membrane be steel trowelled smooth prior to the
waterproofing Specialist acceptance to apply the waterproof membrane.
To surfaces cast with formwork, the surfaces of the retaining walls, etc. shall be mechanically de-
nibbed and smoothened with visible holes and pockets patched up with cement, mortar (1:4) and
made smooth prior to the applications of the waterproofing membrane.
The Specialist shall lay the liquid applied seamless membrane to top of blinding screed to ground
slabs, retaining walls, etc. to minimum thickness of 50 mils (30 sq. ft. per gallon). A protective
proprietory slush coat shall be laid on top of the installed membrane followed by 20mm thick
vertical and horizontal cement and sand (1:5) rendering for protection by the Specialist.
The Contractor shall ensure that all substrate to receive the waterproofing membrane shall be sound,
clean, dry and free of debris, grease, oil, cement laitance, etc. to the satisfaction of the Specialist.
CON/5
CONCRETE WORK
WATERPROOF MEMBRANE TO UNDERSIDE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB ON

GRADE WHERE TIMBER, VINYL, CARPET AND FINISH COATING IS USED AS FINAL FLOOR
FINISH AND WATERPROOF MEMBRANE TO BACK OF RETAINING WALLS (CONT’D)
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Colour Black
Non-Volatiles 98 plus minus 2%
Elongation - ASTM D412 400-600%
Recovery - S.55-200-S 85-90%
Modulus @ 100% Elongation 100 - 140 KN/m²
Tensile Strength - ASTM D2370 340 - 480 KN/m²
Shore A Hardness 12
Permeability Rating @ 30 mils - ASTM D1653 0.15 perms
12. CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOF MEMBRANE TO TOILET SLAB ABOVE LOWEST

FLOOR, CORRIDORS, FOYER, AREAS OF UPPER FLOORS NOT ENCLOSED BY
WALLS AND OPEN TO RAIN, LINK BRIDGES, ETC.
The liquid applied waterproof membrane shall be Proprietory two-component flexible cementitious
waterproofing membrane to be approved by the SO and supplied and installed by Specialist strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructed. The Contractor and Specialist shall provide
a written JOINT GUARANTEE of TEN (10) YEARS (as attached Format Specimen) against water
leakages. The Guarantee shall commence from date of Substantial Completion of the Works.
The Waterproofing System shall not be limited to the above areas as described and as shown on the
drawings.
All new reinforced structure as constructed by the Contractor to floors shall be cast and trowelled
smooth to receive the waterproof membrane.
The Specialist shall apply by roller 2-coats of the liquid applied waterproof membrane minimum
1.8mm total thickness to the floor and walls of planter and to the floors of the above described areas
and to toilets with 300mm turn-up on walls and pipes and 100mm turndown into the insides of the
floor outlets at a rate of 1.0 kg/m²/coat. A protective slush coat shall be laid on top of the installed
membrane.
All substrate to receive the waterproofing membrane shall be sound, clean, dry and free of debris,
grease, oil, cement laitance, etc. and to the satisfaction of the Specialist.
13. APPROVED FLOOR HARDENER WITH CASE-HARDENER / DUSTPROOF SEALER
Approved floor hardener with approved case-hardener/dustproofer - Refer to Pavior Specifications.
CON/6
CONCRETE WORK
14. FABRIC REINFORCEMENT
Steel fabric reinforcement shall conform to SS 32 with all joints lapped 150mm and tied with 16
gauge soft iron tying wire.
15. FORMWORK AND TEMPORARY BOXING
All formwork to concrete surfaces shall be sawn as specified unless otherwise stated. The
Contractor shall allow in his tender for strutting formwork exceeding 3.50m high up to any height
and also for all temporary boxing to form openings in concrete work. Steel formwork shall be used
for all circular columns.
16. REINFORCED CONCRETE RETAINING WALL
The Contractor shall construct to SO’s satisfaction, reinforced concrete retaining walls in
accordance with the requirement as shown in the detailed drawing and as specified.
17. OTHER CONCRETE WORKS
Construct concrete (Grade C30/40) fitment bases, vanity tops, counter tops, ramps, etc reinforced
with fabric reinforcement.
18. CONCRETE TOPPING
Supply and lay 50mm thick (minimum) (Grade C30/40) concrete topping to all slabs, laid to falls
with one layer of WSFR D6 or other approved equivalent. Proper expansion joints should be
included for large panels.
Concrete topping in the following areas shall be mixed with an approved heavy duty non-metallic,
non-dusting, non-skid and wear resistant floor hardener applied strictly in accordance with
manufacturer’s instruction.
i) Switch Room
ii) Sub-station and Supporting Rooms
iii) Corridors adjacent to the above facilities
The hardener shall consist of tough, super hard, non-terrous emery aggregates of Moh’s Scale 8
hardness. Aggregates are specially graded and comprise cubic and angular grains. It shall also be
chemically inert, non-oxidising and non-corrosive, highly wear and impact resistant. The finished
floor shall be of natural grey.
Hardness : 8 on the Moh’s Scale
Specific gravity : 3.6 gm/cc
Bulk density : 2 gm/cc
Shape : Angular and cubic
Polish stone valve : 68
Aggregate impact valve : 8
Aggregate crushing valve : 8.1
Storage life : Indefinite
Resistance to chemical attack : No effect of H2SO4HCL and NaOH
All slabs shall be power-floated to give smooth finishes at the levels or falls shown on the drawings
or elsewhere.
These topping shall be laid in separate operation over in-situ floor slab or structural concrete topping
in the case of hollow core slab / precast plank as shown on the drawings.
CON/7
CONCRETE WORK
19. EXPANSION/CONSTRUCTION JOINT OR JOINTS BETWEEN CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Expansion joints, contraction joints or other permanent structure joints shall be designed and
provided for in the position where necessary.
The installation method, selection, mixing, application and curing of all materials used in forming concrete
joints shall comply with the drawings and the manufacturer's specifications.
The joints and their supporting areas shall be protected from loading and disturbance until they have
reached adequate strength. This shall be done by providing and maintaining suitable ramps which
shall not be removed without any permission from the SO.
Where expansion joints are to be formed, an approved compressible filler shall be used to form the
joint.
All expansion joints shall be sealed with an approved watertight seal which can accommodate the
designed movements. They shall have positive anchorage onto the structure and suitable for use in
carparks. They shall be heavy duty, durable and resistant to chemicals such as salts, petrol, diesel, oil, etc.
All installation of the expansion joints shall be by trained personnel and strictly according to the
manufacturer's specifications and recommendations.
Unless otherwise stated expansion joint shall be 25mm wide consisting of strip of 25mm thick
approved impregnated compressible filler with recess at top and bottom filled flush with an
approved compression seal and approved 2 parts polyurethane sealant respectively or approved
equivalent including an approved bond breaker as shown in the drawings or as directed by the SO.
20. WATERSTOPS
All vertical and horizontal joints in the basement walls, slabs and trenches shall have waterstops. This
requirement applies to construction joints as well as any other movement joints.
The Contractor shall supply shop drawings of the waterstops for the SO's approval. The shop
drawings shall show the proposed methods of jointing the waterstops within each structure, and the
method of placement and fixing.
Samples of all materials shall be submitted to the SO for approval.
All waterstops for the basement slabs, walls and trenches shall be of appropriate heavy duty type made
from PVC compound and designed for both vertical, horizontal and external usage.
Waterstops for all joints shall be continuous around all corners and intersections. Splices shall be
made strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
Particular care shall be taken to position correctly the waterstop during installation and to prevent it
from being moved or distorted during the placement of concrete. The waterstops shall be thoroughly
cleaned immediately before the placing of concrete. Adequate provisions shall be made to support
the waterstop during the progress of the work and to ensure proper bonding of the joint. When
waterstops are to be left for future extensions they shall be properly protected against damage or
deterioration.
In general, the 250mm width of waterstop is suited to wall / slab thickness of 250mm and over. For
concrete less than 250mm thick, the use of a narrower waterstop approximately to the wall / slab
thickness will be appropriate.
21. OVERFLOW PIPE TO BE CAST-IN

Over-flow pipe shall be cast into concrete or built into brickwork as the work proceeds.
CON/8
CONCRETE WORK
22. VAPOUR BARRIER (DAMP PROOF MEMBRANE)

Supply and lay one layer of 0.6mm thick approved polyethylene sheet vapour barrier to underside of
all ground floor slabs and aprons, overlapped and taped with suitable adhesive.
23. WATERPROOFING TREATMENT TO CONCRETE FLOORS

Floor areas subject to wet activities, such as toilets, or wetting due to rainwater, such as balconies,
shall be provided with a waterproofing system. For toilets, waterproofing shall be provided for the
walls due to considerable splashing. Construction joints shall be avoided within the wet areas,
where possible.
Where openings are provided for the installation of sanitary pipes, they must be properly aligned to
avoid excessive hacking. The infill materials, after installation, shall have the same or better
material properties than the surrounding concrete and shall allow for the differential movements of
the pipes.
The floor screed and finish shall be laid with sufficient gradient to allow water to drain off. Fixtures
installed in the wet areas shall not obstruct the flow of water.
Liquid waterproofing membrane system (brush on type) to in-situ concrete slabs and walls shall be
any of the following applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions:-
i) Vandex Super or
ii) Tremproof 60 or
iii) Superflex 1 or
iv) Other approved equivalent
Waterproofing admixture to in-situ concrete floors or concrete topping shall be any of the following
applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions:-
i) Conplast Prolapin 031or
ii) Hydroproof No. 2 or
iii) Sika No. 1 or
iv) Cementaid 3CC or
v) Other approved equivalent
The Contractor shall execute the whole of the works to the satisfaction of the SO, and warrants that the
works shall be executed using good materials and with all due care and professional skill. He further
warrants the works against any defects whatsoever and howsoever arising for a period of ten (10) years
from the date of substantial completion of the Works. The Contractor shall make good all such defects
appearing within the said ten (10) years from the date of substantial completion of the Works at his own
expense and to the satisfaction of the SO. If the Contractor shall refuse, neglect or fail to do so for any
reason whatsoever, within such times as may be specified at the complete discretion of the SO in a notice
in writing from the SO to make good any such defect, the Employer shall be entitled to engage others to
make good the same and charge the costs thereof to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall, in addition, furnish to the Employer a written guarantee in respect of the
works, valid for a period of ten (10) years from the date of substantial completion of the Works, by a
third party acceptable to the Employer, in the form and on the terms approved by the Employer as
shown in Appendix, for the due and faithful observance and performance of the aforesaid covenants
and obligations on his part to be observed and performed throughout the said period of ten (10)
years. The guarantee shall be delivered to the SO two weeks prior to the commencement of the
waterproofing works.
CON/9
CONCRETE WORK
24. INTEGRAL CONCRETE WATERPROOFING
Concrete shown in the drawings as watertight shall be waterproofed by the addition of Waterproof
Concrete System admixtures to be approved by the SO.
The concrete slab construction joints shall be treated by an approved swellable water bar system to
be approved by the SO.
All concrete to be waterproofed shall conform to the following requirements:

i) Any admixture or ingredient other than cement, aggregate or approved water-reducing
admixture, used by the Contractor to comply with the absorption requirement must be shown
by an independent authority to have had no reduction in water-repellency after field exposure
for a minimum of 15 years.
ii) The supplier shall satisfy SO that any admixture or ingredient used, or their combination, does not
detrimentally affect the strength or other properties of the concrete.
iii) The cement content of the concrete shall be no less than 350 kilograms per cubic metre. The
maximum water/cement ratio is 0.42. The Contractor shall provide a 10 Years Guarantee against
leakages.
25 SUB-STRUCTURE WATERPROOFING
All lift pits, sumps, trenches and basement structure as specified in the drawings are required to
provide external waterproofing using 1.5mm minimum thickness styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS)-
modified self-adhesive sheet with bi-axial strength cross-laminated polyethylene reinforcement film
to be used all in accordance with the manufacture’s printed instructions or approved equivalent
material to SO’s approval.
a) External application to Slab:

i) Prepare substrate to receive membrane.
ii) 1.5mm (SBS) self-adhesive membrane.
iii) The membrane will be protected by a 50mm thick cement/sand screed of ratio 1:2 with
combed finishing.
b) External application to wall surface

i) Prepare substrate to receive membrane.
ii) 1.5mm (SBS) self-adhesive membrane.
iii) The membrane will be protected by a 25mm thick extruded polysytrene board during
backfilling.
The subcontractor shall submit the waterproofing technical specification, shop drawing details and
sample for approval by the SO. The Contractor shall provide a 10-year warranty.
CON/10
CONCRETE WORK
26. CONCRETE ANCHORS
Materials
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete anchors (including nuts), used for fixing ceilings, M&E
Services, etc, shall be made of steel of minimum ultimate tensile stress (UTS) of 520 N/mm2 and
yield stress of 380 N/mm2.
The metallic parts of the anchors shall be galvanised to a minimum thickness of 5 microns.
The cost of concrete anchors are deemed to be included in the rates for the item of works fixed with
concrete anchors.
Design
The Contractor shall propose the type of anchor to the SO for approval before the commencement of
works. All proposals shall be accompanied by full technical information, track records and test
reports by a relevant certification body, where applicable.
Unless otherwise specified, the loads allowed for ceiling and M&E services in the design is 50
kg/m2 (0.5 KN/m2).
The anchors shall have a minimum factor of safety of 3.0, i.e.
Ultimate Load = 3.0

Allowable Load
For anchors which are designed by a Professional Engineer (PE) engaged by the Contractor to be
installed on the precast or cast-in-situ prestressed concrete slabs the proposal on the types and
positions of anchors shall be proposed by the Professional Engineer to the SO for approval. No
gunpowder actuated anchors or nails shall be allowed on the prestressed concrete slabs.
Installation
All anchors are to be installed on concrete surfaces.
If concrete anchors are installed together with steel backing plates, any gaps between the steel
backing plates or anchors and the concrete surface shall be filled with approved non-shrink
cementitious grout of minimum 28-day compressive strength of 40 N/mm2.
All installation shall be strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and
specifications.
CON/11
CONCRETE WORK
CONCRETE ANCHORS (CONT’D.)
Pull-Out Tests for Anchored Fan Hooks & Ceiling Hanger Rods
Unless otherwise specified, contractor shall engage an approved laboratory to conduct at least 5
random in-situ pull-out tests each for the anchored ceiling fan hooks and the ceiling hanger rods, for
the school project.
The anchored fan hooks shall refer only to the fan hooks that are anchored onto the soffit of existing
structure floors or beams.
The design for the ceiling system and anchored ceiling fan hooks shall be carried out by a P.E.
engaged by the contractor.
The pull-out test for the anchored ceiling fan hooks shall be carried out to 1.5 times the working
loads of the anchored ceiling fan hook and the ceiling hanged rods respectively.
SO shall select the positions of the fan hooks and ceiling hanger rods for the pull-out tests.
Contractor shall allow for all costs associated with the pull-out tests in the Contract.
The approved laboratory shall test 100% of the anchored fan hooks if any one anchored fan hook
fails the pull-out test. Failed anchored fan hooks shall be replaced with new anchored fan hooks
capable of achieving the required carrying capacity.
The approved laboratory shall conduct 5 additional no. of pull-out tests on the ceiling hanger rod for
each ceiling hanger rod that failed the pull-out test at the building block where the ceiling hanger rod
had failed the pull-out test. All failed ceiling hanger rods shall be replaced with new ceiling hanger
rods capable of achieving the carrying capacity.
Contractor shall test 100% of the ceiling hanger roads if 10% of the ceiling hanger rods that were
tested failed the pull-out test. All failed ceiling hanger rods shall be replaced with ceiling hanger
rods capable of achieving the required carrying capacity.
All additional tests and making good of the anchored fan hooks and ceiling hanger rods shall be at
the Contractor’s expense.
CON/12
CONCRETE WORK
27. CONCRETE VANITY TOP
Construct (where applicable) as shown on the drawings concrete vanity in Grade C30/40 concrete
mix and suitable reinforced to SO’s approval complete with opening to receive washhand basin with
150 to 200mm fascia (tiling described separately).
28. CONCRETE PLINTHS
Provide 100mm high concrete plinths in Grade C30/40 concrete to be constructed to the Employer
to all fitments and other floor equipment (not specifically described) and as directed by the SO.
The plinths shall not infringe upon the clearances required for chair and body movement.
Sides of plinths to be tiled to match the tiled floor finish.
29. CONCRETE PLINTH FOR WATER TANKS AND PUMPSETS
The minimum plinth size for the pumpset shall be 2.4m x 3.4m (for flush water reticulation system),
2.4m x 2.4m (for potable water reticulation system), 2.4m x 1.2m (for hosereel pumpset). The
minimum thickness of the plinth shall be 0.1m. The size of the steel skid base and the concrete
dwarf wall for water tanks shall base on the size of the tanks.
The minimum height of the concrete dwarf wall with steel skid base shall be 0.6m.
The Contractor shall submit the details of the materials, proposed size of the steel skid base and the
concrete dwarf wall, orientation of the plinths to the SO for approval before any work commences
on site. All the expenses incurred for constructing and providing the concrete plinths, steel skid
base and concrete dwarf wall shall be borne by the Contractor.
30. CONCRETE PLINTH FOR AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
Concrete plinth shall be provided for all condensing units mounted on flat roof and ground level.
The condensing units refer to condensing units of air-cooled packaged units, air-cooled split type
room airconditioners, variable refrigerant flow or variable refrigerant volume system. The minimum
plinth size shall be 200mm larger than the footprint of the condensing units. If the overall dimension
of the condensing unit is 500mm (length) x 1000mm (width). The minimum plinth size for the
condensing unit shall be 700mm x 1200mm. The minimum thickness of the plinth shall be 100mm.
The indoor units for air-cooled packaged air-conditioners shall be provided with concrete plinth. The
minimum plinth size shall be 200mm larger than the footprint of the indoor units.
The locations of the plinths are to be approved by the SO. To avoid vandalism or injury to the
students, condensing units shall be fenced and protected by 3.0mm thick expandable galvanised
steel mesh panel barriers as requested by the SO.
All expenses incurred for constructing the concrete plinths and fences or barriers shall be borne by
the Contractor.
CON/13
CONCRETE WORK
31. M&E SERVICES

Contractor shall check relevant drawings and provide for all openings and recesses for the housing
and fixing of all M&E services and equipment.
The Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer (PE) to check and design the required coring,
openings and recesses to house all M&E services and equipment. The PE shall ascertain that the
proposed openings shall not affect the integrity of the existing / new structures. The Contrator shall
propose to the SO, for approval, all necessary provisions to incorporate these openings and recesses.
The proposal shall show clearly the sizes and locations of all openings and recesses, and any
modifications to the structural sections and reinforcements that may be required.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have priced the above-mentioned in his tender and there should
be no claim in extra cost or time to the Contract.
32. SUBMISSION OF “AS-BUILT” DRAWINGS

“As-built” drawings shall be submitted to the SO for structural works as required under the Contract.
33. ECO-Concrete for non-structural use
Eco-Concrete Mix Design Details

The product, washed copper slag sand is an alternative sand replacement material for concrete,
being an inert material, it has lower water demand and can be used without any problem. However,
at present it is being used as 70% replacement of sand for concrete fornon-structural use, which
includes slabs on grade (non suspended slabs), pavements, ancillary works, etc, and 10%
replacement of sand for concrete for structural use.
The washed copper slag for use in ready mix concrete is to be obtained from approved source only
as their process of washing etc, is approved for getting the desired quality.
Water soluble chlorides contents should be less than 0.01% m/m and water soluble sulphate content
are to be less than 0.03%m/m. A relevant certification body to certify the same.
Designed Concrete Mix Recommendation for Eco-Concrete
Grade 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10
Characteristic Strength N/mm² at 28 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 -

days
Minimum cement content in kg/m³ of 475 425 375 350 325 300 270 205 175
fully compacted concrete
Maximum cement content in kg/m² of 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550
fully compacted concrete
Maximum water / cement ratio 0.40 0.40 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.63 0.72
CON/14
CONCRETE WORK
34. SO’s CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE

The above Specifications shall be read in conjunction with the SO’s Civil and Structural Engineering
Specifications for concrete. Where there are discrepancies for similar specifications the SO’s Civil and
Structural Engineering Specifications take precedence.
35. SHOP DRAWINGS

For all work in relation to concrete work, etc. the Contractor shall submit shop fabrication drawings
for SO’s approval before commencement of any work/fabrication. Such shop drawings must be
clearly annotated and drawn to facilitate checking including design calculations.
36. SAMPLES
Provide samples at Contractor's own cost as required for SO’s selection and approval and demolish
or remove when not required.

CON/15
PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENT
PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE WALL PANELS AND STAIRCASES
1. GENERAL
All precast concrete components indicated in the drawings shall be prefabricated off-site in a precast
factory.
If the Contractor intends to prefabricate such precast concrete components on site, the SO‟s
approval must be obtained prior to commencement. The SO‟s decision in this matter shall be final and
no claim for extra cost or time completion will be entertained.
If any precast component is obtained from a supplier, the Contractor shall submit together with his
tender, the name(s) of his supplier(s) and quantities to be supplied by each supplier. The Contractor
shall not be permitted to change the supplier(s) without the written consent of the SO.
All precast concrete components shall make up of eco-friendly materials e.g. Recycled Concrete
Aggregates (RCA) that meet Singapore Green Labeling scheme.
Specification is to be read in conjunction with the Structural Engineer’s Precast Concrete Works
Specifications.
2. MATERIALS AND TESTS
All materials used shall conform to the relevant Singapore Standards or British Standards.
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of the Specification.
Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by the SO, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the requirements of the
standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are the current version, unless specific year
references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS CP 65 Part 1: Design and construction
Part 2: Special circumstances
SS CP 73 Design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids
SS CP 81 Precast concrete slab and wall panels
SS 26 Ordinary Portland Cement
SS 31 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
SS 289 Part 1: Guide to specifying concrete
Part 2: Methods for specifying concrete mixes
Part 3: Specification for the procedures to be used in producing and transporting concrete
Part 4: Specification for the procedures to be used in sampling, testing and assessing
compliance of concrete
In the event that the Standards or Codes are partially superseded or become obsolete, refer to the
latest edition or the approved substitution for the relevant clauses.
PCC/1
3. DESIGN
The Contractor shall design, supply and install precast components to locations as shown in
drawings and these precast component shall be designed in accordance with CP 65 or other approved
equivalent and other material and testing standards as listed.
The following loadings and effect shall be considered in the design of precast units: self weight,
construction loads, imposed dead and live loads, wind loads, temperature loads and effects of
differential shrinkage and creep.
The Contractor shall propose for SO's approval the joint connections and sealants details between
precast units and between precast units with in- situ elements. The structural connections shall be
suitably designed and detailed for diaphragm actions for lateral loads. They shall also be suitably
detailed for protection against water, weather, corrosion and fire so as to provide continued water and
weather tightness and structural integrity of the buildings.
The design of precast units shall allow for the provision of openings to electrical, mechanical and
other services ducts, and provisions for securing fan hooks and drain pipes. The details and
locations of the openings for the said openings will be given only after the nominated sub-
contractors for such services are appointed. Where openings, recesses, or anchoring points are to be
provided in the precast elements, Contractor shall propose adequate reinforcements to be incorporated
to prevent local damage and spalling of concrete.
Sharp corners and edges shall be avoided and suitable bearing shall be provided to prevent chipping
and spalling of the concrete.
The precast units shall be designed for a fire-resistance of 2 hours.
The positions and capacities of lifting and erection inserts of precast concrete units shall be carefully
considered for all load induced by manufacturing, lifting, handling, storage, transportation and erection
(especially so for full-height precast columns). A minimum safety factor of 3 shall be used to design
the lifting devices. The Contractor shall submit for SO's approval the precasting and erection
techniques for precast concrete units including structural calculations and details for the lifting and
erection devices. The structural calculations and details for the lifting of full-height precast columns
shall be endorsed by a Professional Engineer.
The Contractor may modify the rebars arrangement and details of precast columns and beams to
facilitate erection of precast component subject to SO's and structural engineer‟s approval. The
Contractor shall submit calculations from his professional engineer with endorsement to prove that the
modifications do not affect the design strength of the precast elements.
Should the load bearing joints and connections be grouted, mortar- packed or concreted, the
Contractor shall submit respective mix design for approval by the SO and carry out tests in the mix
design in accordance with appropriate code or proprietary requirements. Methods of installation
adopted shall ensure that the joints and connections can be fully grouted, mortar-packed or concreted.
Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete units and adjoining structures shall be filled with
appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod.
The Contractor shall apply suitable bonding compounds to connections and joints of precast units for
better performance subject to the approval of SO.
PCC/2
DESIGN (CONT’D.)
Design Consideration
Design and detail the elements for all stresses induced by the worst loads, movement, creep and
shrinkage during the intended design life. The elements and their inserts or fixings are to be capable of
resisting all stresses induced during the processes of manufacturing, lifting / handling,
demoulding, transportation, storage and erection. Design loads are to comply with requirements
stipulated in the Building Control Regulations. Refer to the design drawings for other information on
design loadings if any.
Joints and Connections
Design the joints and connections to transmit all forces developed at the joints of structures.
Fabrication
Ensure the precast concrete elements are fabricated in a manner that when erected and all
connections in place the design intent of the overall structure is achieved. Incorporate the
requirements of all other trades whose work requires blockouts, recesses, notches, embedded metals
or any other items.
Ensure that exposed concrete surfaces of the precast concrete elements are smooth, free from
honeycomb and unacceptable bubble holes. In general ensure that the workmanship requirements
as set out in the CONQUAS Quality Standards for Precast Components are met. Ensure that the
specified architectural finishes requirements as indicated in the drawings are achieved.
Precast Reinforced Wall Panels And Staircases
a) Concrete grade of precast wall panels and staircases shall not be less than grade 40 or the
equivalent Eurocode standard.
b) For the staircase, the reinforcing bars shall comply with the requirement of BS 4449. R denotes
mild steel with a yield strength of not less than 250 N/mm². T denotes high yield steel; with a
yield strength of not less than 460 N/mm².
c) Concrete cover to nearest reinforcement shall be as 25mm for precast staircases.
d) The lightweight concrete panel for corridor shall have the following performance criteria:-
Descriptions 100mm Thick

Weight (kg/m2) 140
Dimensional accuracy (mm) Hollow Core ±5.0
Diameter (mm) 68
Compressive Strength (N/mm2) (based on cube test) 25
Compressive Strength (N/mm2) (based on section test) 15
Fire Rating (Hours) 2
Sound Insulation (STC) 46
Horizontal Load Test (N/mm2) 8.5
Bending Strength (N/mm2) 2
Thermal Conductivity (W/mK) 0.25
Thermal Resistance (m2K/W) 0.4
Water absorption (%) 5
PCC/3
4. WORKMANSHIP
.1 FABRICATION
.1 Moulds
Seal all mould joints as necessary to prevent leakage of cement paste or mortar.
.2 REINFORCEMENT
.1 General
Refer to Structural Engineer’s Specifications for general requirements for workmanship

of reinforcement.
Make up cages and fix securely in accordance with the reinforcement detail drawings to
provide adequate rigidity and to ensure that the specified cover and required fit within
the mould are achieved.
.2 Rebending of reinforcement
Reinforcement up to 16 mm in diameter that projects out from the face of the elements
may be bent to facilitate the casting or demoulding of the elements, subject to the SO’s
acceptance in each case. Do not re-bend to the final position in the structure before the
concrete has achieved two-thirds of its specified strength.
.3 Spacer blocks
Use of spacer blocks for exposed concrete surface is to subject to the SO’s acceptance.
.3 CONCRETING
Refer to Structural Engineer’s Specifications for general requirements of workmanship for

concreting.
.4 NORMAL CURING
Refer to Structural Engineer’s Specifications for general requirements for curing and
acceptable methods of curing.
PCC/4
WORKMANSHIP (CONT’D.)
.5 STEAM CURING
Precast concrete elements may be steam cured at atmospheric conditions subject to the SO’s
acceptance. Carry out steam curing under a suitable enclosure to retain the live steam to
minimise moisture and heat losses. The enclosure is to allow free circulation of the steam
around the sides and tops of members. Position steam jets so that they do not discharge
directly on the concrete, formwork or mould.
In addition, ensure compliance with the following conditions:
.1 Total Chloride Ion Content
The total content of the concrete from the aggregate, water and any admixtures is not to
exceed 0.1% of the weight of the cement.
.2 Timing
Commence steam curing after the concrete attains its initial set. Prevent surface drying
by means of a coating of membrane curing compound or otherwise agreed with the SO
during the period between placement of concrete and application of steam.
.3 Temperature
The temperature of the enclosure surrounding the elements is not to exceed 65°C (175°
F) when measured close to the surface of the elements.
.4 Rate of Ambient Temperature
Increase the temperature of the enclosure surrounding the elements uniformly at a rate
of approximately 20° C per hour (40° F per hour) until it reaches the maximum
temperature stated above.
.5 Rate of Cooling
Take adequate precautions to prevent the elements being damaged by an excessive rate
of cooling. Rate of cooling is to be less than 20° C per hour.
.6 Duration of Curing
Continue curing, with or without steam, for a period in accordance with SS CP 65: Part 1:
Table 6.1 (Minimum Period Before Striking Formwork).
.6 FINISHES
For surfaces with specified architectural finishes such as plain finish, patterned
finish tile finish, etc., agree the method of production with the SO and comply with the
recommendations from the product supplier of the finishes.
For surfaces to structural elements, the general workmanship requirements to surface finishes
shall be to SO’s approval.
For exposed surface ensure the requirements from CONQUAS quality standards for
exposed surface (Precast Components) are met.
Repair minor defects to SO’s approval.
PCC/5
.7 DEMOULDING
For elements cast under factory conditions determine the minimum period before removing
the formwork / mould on the basis of the assessed compressive strength of the component.
The concrete strength at demoulding is to be minimum 10 N/mm².
.8 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
Before fabrication ensure that allowance has been made for all construction tolerances to
ensure proper final fit-up of the structure.
Tolerances for manufacturing and casting of precast concrete elements are to be in accordance
with SS CP 81 Clause 4.8.2.2 (Tolerance Values). Also, check and ensure the following items
are in compliance with the tolerance values as set out in the CONQUAS quality standards for
precast components:
a) Dimensions
b) Lifting Points / Inserts
c) Block outs
d) Sleeve systems
e) Cast-in steel items
f) Bolted/welded connections
In case of conflicting requirements, the requirements of SS CP 81 are to take precedence.
Evaluate any deviation from the agreed values and submit proposals for any necessary
remedial work to the SO for acceptance.
.9 LIFTING / HANDLING
Do not lift any component from the mould on which it was cast, before the concrete has
attained its design demoulding strength.
Determine the need for any additional reinforcement and inserts or fixings that may be
necessary for lifting or handling the elements until they are incorporated into the structure.
Handle and transport the precast concrete elements taking into account their shapes and design
to avoid excessive stresses or damages in the elements. Place paddings at the contact
points between the tie down rope and the precast concrete elements. Lift the precast
concrete elements only at appropriate points shown in the fabrication/ erection shop drawings.
Make provisions for any temporary supports and make good any inserts or fixings, holes, etc.
used for lifting or handling or temporary bracing/supports. Refer to Project Specific Data for
other requirements, if any.
.10 MINOR REMEDIAL WORK
Carry out minor repair of chipping and spalling in the factory unless otherwise agreed by the SO. Do
not attempt major repair until the proposed methods for the repair have been accepted by the SO.
.11 MARKING
Clearly mark each item before delivery in accordance with the drawing to indicate its weight,
location and orientation in the structure so as to facilitate correct delivery and erection. All
marks are not to be easily removed. Position all marks at the concrete surface that can be
easily viewed.
PCC/6
.12 STORAGE, HANDLING & TRANSPORTATION
The storage area shall be adequate to permit easy access and ready for handling of the stored
precast concrete components. Ensure that large enough storage spaces are provided for the
elements with adequate room for lifting equipment and delivery truck to manoeuvre. Store the
elements on firm supports clear of the ground. No precast concrete component shall be placed
on the ground, and they shall be stored with due protection from staining or physical damage.
Ensure that the ground is clean, hard, level and well drained surface to permit well-
organised storage, and to prevent warp, bowing, chipping, cracking, discoloration, staining or
soiling of the precast concrete elements.
Provide the SO with proposals for storage. Issue storage instructions for all precast concrete
elements, defining the storage position, the allowable support points, the maximum height
of any stack and any protective measures required.
Protect the component faces to be exposed in the finished construction from

mechanical damage, dirt, staining, rust marks and other disfiguration. Also, protect the
elements to prevent breakage and staining.
Precast concrete components shall be handled and transported in a way consistent with their
shapes and design in order to avoid excessive stresses or damages. They shall be lifted only at
appropriate points shown on the shop and erection drawings.
Transportation, site handling, and erection shall be carefully performed with acceptable
equipment and methods, by qualified personnel without causing structural damage, detrimental
cracking, finishes impairment, or permanent distortion/buckling of columns.
The precast elements shall not be placed directly on the ground and suitable packers shall be
placed between elements while in storage.
The Contractor shall determine :-

a) Adequacy of design reinforcement to resist handling stresses;
b) Provision of additional reinforcement if required;
c) Exact number, size and location of lifting inserts or other devices and;
d) Proper supports and support locations for storage and transportation.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to develop handling techniques to ensure that all
precast concrete components are successfully fabricated, delivered and installed without
causing structural damage, detrimental cracking, architectural impairment, or permanent
distortion.
For the precast transportation from contractor’s sources, Contractor shall comply with
prevailing traffic regulations and seek approval from the relevant authorities as and when
necessary. The Contractor shall submit a safety manual on precast transportation that covers:-
a) Method to secure the precast components onto the trailer
b) Measures to avoid over-loading of precast components onto the trailer. Overall
height from ground to highest point of trailer shall be checked to ensure compliance
with prevailing traffic regulations.
PCC/7
.13 ERECTION
.1 Site Inspection
Inspect all precast concrete elements before and after erection with particular regard to
the following:
a) Soiling
b) Cracking
c) Chipping
d) Damage to built-in items
e) Tolerances
f) Accuracy of location of bearing surfaces, anchorages and connections. Remove
any defective elements from site.
Do not carry out permanent jointing or connection between adjacent elements
without the SO’s acceptance.
Check the number, type and size of rebars at the connections before erection to
prevent cutting of starter bars.
All precast elements must be inspected and approved by the SO or his representatives
prior to erection and only approved elements shall be erected. Minor defects may be
repaired with suitable methods to the approval of the SO. Any unauthorised erection or
installation works may be rejected and necessary action taken against the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide suitable access to the building site, proper drainage, and
firm and level bearing for the erection equipment to operate under their own power.
All elements shall be properly aligned and levelled as required by the approved
drawings. Any deviations or variations between adjacent members shall be rectified by
a suitable method as recommended by the Contractor if it meets the approval of the SO.
Safe construction practice shall be adopted at all times. Bracketings or props must be
provided to maintain the required position, stability and alignment of precast concrete
components prior to permanent jointing or connection.
All voids shall be sealed with approved epoxy/grout/concrete or other suitable materials to
the satisfaction of the SO.
Prior to joining all contact surfaces shall be cleaned and free from detrimental surfaces.
No permanent jointing or connection between a precast concrete component and other
precast concrete components or in-situ structures shall be carried out without the prior
approval of the SO.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prepare and install the precast
components within the specified erection tolerances prior to calling for inspection and
approval by the SO.
After the inspection of erected precast components, the SO shall be at liberty to reject on
Site any precast components not complying with design or specification requirements.
The Contractor is to ensure that any precast concrete items to be incorporated into the
structure are kept stable in the erected position until the items can safely carry the
construction loads without distress.
Only competent workers who are properly trained to handle and erect precast concrete
components should be employed.
PCC/8
ERECTION (CONT’D.)
Site Inspection (Cont’d.)

Methods of erection shall be such as to avoid soiling, cracking, chipping and
damage to built-in items. Only minor chipping and spalling may be repaired by
patching up at the job site after installation, provided that the damaged areas are still
accessible after the erection and that the repair is done to the satisfaction of the SO.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of location of all bearing
surfaces and all anchorages for precast concrete components. Discrepancies from the
structural drawings noted at this time shall be corrected prior to the start of
erection. Bearing surfaces, notches, bolts, connection angles or plates shall be checked
as to level, line and grade.
Whenever inserts or lifting hooks are used for erection purposes, their locations shall
be checked by the Contractor for compliances with the locations as specified on the
structural drawings. If slings are used, the precast concrete components shall be
marked so that the slings are placed at the proper locations.
Field conditions must be determined by actual measurement so that precast concrete
components and joint sealants installed satisfy design or specification requirements and
are within the specified erection tolerances. As and when instructed by the SO, the
precast concrete components shall be cleaned and repaired after installation.
The Contractor is to ensure that good construction practice is adhered to while the
precast concrete components are on Site and bracings or props must be provided to
maintain the required position, stability and alignment of precast concrete components
prior to permanent jointing or connection.
Each precast concrete component shall be individually adjusted and accurately
positioned within the erection tolerances. Horizontal and vertical joints shall be kept
correctly aligned and positioned, and uniform joint width should be maintained as
erection progresses.
Adjustments or changes in connections, which could induce additional stresses should
be reviewed and approved by the SO.
.2 The Contractor shall employ only qualified welders for welded connections.
.3 Erection Tolerances
The Contractor is to control the alignment of precast concrete elements during erection/
installation. The precast concrete elements shall be position in the frame within the
tolerances given in SS CP 81: Clause 5.5.5 (Erection Tolerance). The Contractor shall
check against the erection tolerance values as set out in the following items of the
CONQUAS quality standards for precast components:
a) Alignment, plumb and level
b) Interface requirements
In case of conflicting requirements, the requirements of SS CP 81 are to take
precedence.
The Contractor evaluate any deviation from the agreed values and submit proposals for
any necessary remedial work to the SO for acceptance.
.4 Lifting capacity of precast components by tower/crawler cranes

The tower / crawler cranes must be able to lift precast components of maximum 8 tons in
weight for installation. The Contractor shall propose to SO before the commencement of
works, the location and design of tower cranes that complies with the required lifting capacity.
PCC/9
.14 SITE CONSTRUCTION
.1 Falsework
The Contractor shall provide suitable falsework support and temporary bracings for the
erected precast concrete elements in accordance with the contractor’s design.
.2 Joint Formwork
The Contractor shall comply with the following tolerance values from CONQUAS for
the alignment, plumb and level of joint formwork:
a) Tolerance for plumb: 3mm/m up to a maximum of 10mm.
b) Deviation of any point from its position: ±10mm.
c) Deviation of any point from its intended level:±10mm.
Ensure the transition from a joint to an element is flushed.
.3 Concrete Joint Infill for Composite Construction
The Contractor shall thoroughly remove loose materials, clean all dust, dirt and
grease and wet surfaces of the precast concrete elements prior to concreting. Place and
compact concrete in accordance with the Structural Engineer’s Precast Concrete Works
Specifications. Maintain support to elements to prevent elements from moving until the
concrete has gained sufficient strength to ensure stability.
.4 All precast concrete components shall be cast under controlled conditions with the
strictest supervisory and quality control acceptable to the SO. The Contractor shall
submit for the SO's approval the technical specifications, and quality control plans for
manufacture of precast concrete units at the factory or site.
.5 The Contractor shall submit proposals for marking identification and date of casting of
each precast concrete component for approval of the SO.
.6 The finished surface of the concrete shall be smooth and free from major blemishes,
honeycombs, discolouration and stains, and shrinkage cracks and to the satisfaction of the
SO. Completed concrete finishes shall be such that skim coat and painting can be applied
directly. Gross variation from the specified finish may cause the products to be rejected and
the Contractor shall replace the rejected precast components at his own costs and expenses.
.7 Prior to mass production of precast concrete components, the Contractor shall produce at
least one sample of each type of precast concrete components for approval by the SO.
The approved sample shall be used as the yardstick for the minimum standard and
quality to be achieved for all precast units. The SO may at his discretion require more
samples to be produced for his approval.
.8 The Contractor shall allow for the incorporation of all requirements of all trades whose
work requires block-outs, recesses, notches, embedded metalwork or any other items
affecting the precast concrete components.
PCC/10
.14 SITE CONSTRUCTION (CONT’D.)
.9 Tolerances for manufacturing and casting of precast components shall comply with the
requirements given as follows:-
.1 Manufacturing Tolerances
a) Where appropriate, the following tolerances are given as both plus and
minus values on a specific dimension rather than as a deviation from a
maximum or minimum value.
b) Maximum deviation of the major dimension of the unit:

(i) Up to 3m -
(ii) 3m to 6m + 5mm
(iii) 6m to 9m + 6mm
(iv) Each additional deviation for
every subsequent 3m + 2mm per 3m
(v) Openings (cast within panel) + 6mm
(vi) Out of square 3mm per 3m or
(difference in length of two diagonals) 6mm total whichever
is bigger
c) Maximum deviation in thickness:
(i) Up to 100mm + 3mm
(ii) 100mm to 500mm + 6mm/-
3mm
(iii) Additional deviation for every subsequent + 2mm
500mm
d) Position tolerances for cast-in-items:
(i) Inserts, bolts, pipes sleeves, etc. + 10mm
(ii) Electrical outlets + 13mm
e) Maximum deviation from the intended line (bowing after casting)

(i) Up to 3m 6mm
(ii) 3m to 6m 9mm
(iii) 6m to 12m 12mm
(iv) Additional deviation for every subsequent 6m 6mm
PCC/11
SITE CONSTRUCTION (CONT’D.)
.2 Erection Tolerances
a) The permissible deviation shall be as follows:
(i) Distance between edge of panels at joint + 5mm

For panels with dimensions
(normal to the joint) up to 6mm
For each 3m increment in excess of 6m + 2mm
(ii) Joint taper (panel edges not parallel)

Per linear 300mm of joint + 1/2mm
Maximum for entire length + 9mm
(iii) Panel alignment

Alignment of horizontal and vertical joints 3mm
Jog in alignment of matching edges 3mm
(iv) Verticality of wall/column

Entire height of building + 35mm
Up to 3m high + 10mm
Each Storey height + 10mm
(v) Panel Position from reference lines
Precast concrete panel walls shall be cast using steel moulds in horizontal
position, or using steel battery mould in vertical position to conform to
the shapes, lines and dimensions of the partitions to be produced. All
reinforcement shall be adequately supported with approved spacers.
The mould shall be sufficiently rigid to achieve the casting tolerances,
shapes, thickness and surface finishes as specified (for combined
panels).
.10 The SO shall have the right to inspect the manufacturing plant and supervise the
manufacture of precast concrete products at all times.
PCC/12
5. VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSIONS
.1 SUBMISSIONS
.1 Design Submission
The Contractor shall submit to the SO the following drawings all complete for
approval within one month from the date of award of tender:-
a) Drawing references
b) Type of construction
c) Overall depth (excl. finishes)
d) Span
e) Self-weight
f) Distributed dead load of finishes, fixtures
g) Allowance for general partitions
h) Concentrated dead loads
i) Distributed imposed load
j) Concentrated imposed loads
k) Deflections
l) Basic fire resistance (as determined without regard to finishes)
m) Finish to soffit
n) Finish to top surface
o) Other requirements
Plans and elevations of each precast element showing all positions and dimensions of
openings, service ducts and pipes and lifting/erection inserts to be incorporated.
Sections and details indicating sizes, numbers and positions of all reinforcements and
prestressing strands. Information on minimum characteristic strength of concrete
required for handling, demoulding, storage, transportation and erection of precast units.
Characteristic strength of reinforcements, prestressing force and estimated cambers
shall also be given.
Handling techniques for precasting, handling, storage and transportation.
PCC/13
VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSIONS (CONT’D.)
SUBMISSIONS (CONT’D.)
.2 Fabrication / Erection Drawings
The Contractor shall submit within time frame directed for SO‟s acceptance, the
fabrication / erection drawings, showing the following information:
a) General arrangement of elements and details of reinforcement.
b) Additional reinforcement for lifting/handling stress, inserts or fixings and devices

for lifting / handling. Where applicable, submit shop drawings for joint
waterproofing to the SO for acceptance.
i) Erection sequences and handling requirements with layout of lifting
equipment and plant.
ii) Details of method of positioning and supporting unconnected precast
components including temporary bracings, backers/shims/ wedges, struts and
props and their installation method with calculations as appropriate.
iii) Full-height precast panel wall shall be lifted with lifting hooks attached at
more than 3 points (locations) to the satisfaction of the SO.
iv) Methods of ensuring stability of the structure during each stage of
construction. The Contractor shall provide bracings of full-height precast
panel wall after erection for lateral and accidental loads.
v) All critical dimensions and their erection tolerances.
vi) Procedure and sequence of installation of sealants on site in relation to
erection sequence and handling requirements.
Any amendments to the drawings or details must be approved by the SO prior to

execution of the works.
.3 Method Statement
Submit to the SO for acceptance before work commences, a method statement including
at least the following information:
.1 Fabrication plant
a) Details of plant
b) QA certification
.2 Concrete batching plant

a) Details of plant
b) QA certification
c) Concrete mix design
.3 Reinforcement fabrication
a) Concrete spacer
b) Materials for inserts / fixings
c) Corrosion protection for inserts / fixings
PCC/14
Method Statement (Cont’d.)
.4 Mould
a) Type of mould
b) Marking identification
c) Date of casting
d) Method of vibration
e) Surface treatment f. Method of curing
g) Minimum concrete age for demoulding
.5 Lifting / Handling
a) Minimum concrete age for lifting / handling
b) Additional reinforcement for lifting / handling stress
c) Method of lifting / handling
d) Device for lifting / handling
e) Location of lifting / handling device
f) Details for lifting / handling device
g) Equipment for lifting / handling
.6 Storage
a) Ground preparation
b) Supporting frame
c) Safety features
.7 Transportation
a) Supporting frame
b) Wedging to cushion the base of precast concrete elements
c) Tie down detail
.8 Erection
a) Erection sequence
b) Size of backers / shims
c) Laying of bedding
d) Device for temporary props / bracing
e) Details for temporary supports / bracing
f) Details for protection
g) Method of positioning, propping and installation
.9 Connections
a) Details
b) Preparation
c) Grouting
d) Grout mix design
e) Temporary shims
.10 Repairs
a) Method of repairs
.11 FInishes
a) Method of achieving the specified surface finishes
PCC/15

.4 Maintenance / Replacement Manual
At the end of the project the Contractor is to submit a maintenance / replacement

manual for all components and connections to be carried out by the building owners.
.5 As-Built Survey
The Contractor shall submit as constructed survey within time frame as directed for the
completed structure demonstrating compliance with permitted tolerances.
.6 Quality Control Manual
The Contractor shall submit a Quality Manual containing a QA / QC programme for the
Works to the SO for acceptance within directed time frame.
The Quality Manual is to include at least information on the following:

a) Quality policy
b) Organisation charts and responsibilities
c) Internal quality control and audits
d) Facilities and equipment
e) Calibration and testing of equipment
f) Testing and inspection procedures Subcontractors and suppliers
.2 MOCK-UP SAMPLE OF ELEMENTS
Prior to mass production of precast concrete elements, the Contractor shall produce at least one
or otherwise agreed number of sample of each type of precast concrete element for SO‟s
acceptance. He shall display the accepted sample at the fabrication plant and use it as a yardstick
for the minimum standard and quality to be achieved for all precast concrete elements.
.3 FABRICATION INSPECTION
The Contractor shall inspect all precast concrete elements before they leave the factory with
particular regard to the following:
a) Cracking
b) Chipping
c) Tolerances
d) Accuracy of location of inserts or fixings
In the case of precast concrete elements cast on site, he shall inspect the elements before
transferring the elements to storage or erection.
He shall repair minor defects in accordance with the method in clause 6.6 of SS CP 81 and
submit the results of the inspection for SO‟s acceptance. The Contractor shall ensure that no
defective precast concrete elements are delivered for erection.
PCC/16
.4 RECORDS
.1 Casting Records
The Contractor shall keep casting records for all elements and allow for SO’s inspection.
Include the following information:
a) Component reference (marking)
b) Date cast
c) Mix details
d) Finish
e) Method of curing
f) Age and strength at demoulding
g) Age and strength at lifting
.2 Inspection Records
a) The Contractor keep inspection records properly and allow for SO‟s inspection.
.5 TESTS
.1 Material Compliance Tests

The Contractor shall refer to all related work sections in clause 5.4.1 above for test
requirements to verify compliance of the quality of at least the following materials:
a) Concrete
b) Grout and mortar
c) Reinforcements
d) Prestressing components
e) Structural steelwork and connections
f) Steel work protections
g) Sealants
h) Waterproofing
He shall submit all test results to the SO as soon as they are available and submit also
the certificates from the supplier of any proprietary products used in the works
demonstrating compliance with the specified requirements.
.2 Water and Weather tightness Test

The Contractor shall conduct watertightness test for the joints of the precast concrete
elements as per the following, unless otherwise agreed with the SO:
a) For floor, flood the floor with 25mm depth of water at the highest point.
b) For external wall, spray with a continuous water jet corresponding to 600 litres
per hour from a water hose with a nozzle velocity of 2 m per second and a cone
scatter of approximately 60o. Hold the hose at 30o to the horizontal plane and at
1.2 m away from the wall surface. Place the hose with the nozzle in line with the
vertical joint and at a level of horizontal joints so that the jet cone scatter will
cover the vertical and horizontal joints.
The test is deemed to have passed if there is no water seepage or dampness
observed at the face behind the face subject to the water test.
The Contractor shall carry out joint watertightness test for the number of joints as
directed by SO for 2 hours.
PCC/17
6. DEFECTS AND REPAIR
The Contractor shall ensure that no defective precast concrete components shall be delivered. The
decision by the Engineer to reject defective precast concrete components shall be final. The Contractor
shall replace the rejected precast concrete components at his own cost and expense. The rejection
criteria shall be made on engineering basis as well as visual appearances.
Damaged precast components shall be either patched up or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of
the SO.
Method of repairs shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before the commencement of
repair works. Major repairs should not be attempted until an engineering evaluation is made to
determine whether the precast component will be structurally sound.
All repaired precast concrete component shall be architecturally and structurally acceptable to the
satisfaction of the SO.
7. WATER AND WEATHER TIGHTNESS
All joints in the precast building super-structure shall be designed for water and weather tightness
and shall be tested for conformance. All joints shall be fully tested in the manner agreed between
the Contractor and the SO.
Stairs and half-landings shall be subjected to localised flooding and wetting with running water
for a duration of not less than one hour. No water shall seep through the joints during or within one
hour after the completion of the test.
All expenses for the tests shall be borne by the Contractor. In the event of failure, the Contractor shall
rectify the defective areas and repeat the test at his own cost.
Approval of materials - The Contractor may submit his alternative proposal, endorsed by a
Professional Engineer, on joint sealants to the SO for approval within two months from the date
of the Letter of Award of Tender. The proposal shall include technical information, samples,
test reports, and proven performance records of the joint sealants. The fire resistances of the joint
sealants shall not be less than that of the precast concrete members over which they bridge. Batch
testing of sealant compounds delivered to the Site shall be carried out as directed by the SO at the
Contractor's own cost and expense. The SO reserves the right to reject the use of any type of
sealants if their performance is deemed to be unsatisfactory. The use of membranes and admixtures
for grout, mortar or concrete for improving water and weather tightness may be approved by the
SO. All sealant materials used at accessible public areas such as access balcony, stair-cases, stair-
landings etc. shall be protected with non-shrink mortar or grout. Liquid membranes, if used, shall
have specified minimum thickness and width for water and weather tightness.
The Contractor shall submit his proposal for joint sealants to the SO for approval prior to installation.
He shall ensure that joints and joint sealants of precast concrete structures are correctly installed, so as
to provide continued water and weather tightness of buildings with minimum maintenance.
Joints surface preparation, primers, sealant compounds and backup materials shall be installed to
give the highest standard of materials and workmanship; these shall conform to all applicable
specifications. Whenever possible, sealants shall be applied with a power-actuated gun. The gun
should have nozzle of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to completely fill the
joints. All compounds smears, primers, solvents etc. used in caulking and sealing works, should be
immediately and entirely removed from adjacent materials as the work progresses.
PCC/18
WATER AND WEATHER TIGHTNESS (CONT’D.)
PERFORMANCE OF WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
General
Expansion joints, contraction joints or other permanent structure joints shall be provided in the
positions and constructed and sealed with waterproofing materials.
The installation method and the selection, mixing, application and curing of all joint waterproofing
materials shall comply with the drawings and the manufacturers‟ recommendation. The Contractor
may proposed to use alternative joint waterproofing materials by submitting supporting technical
information, test reports and samples of the proposal waterproofing materials to the SO for approval.
All waterproofing material used at public access areas shall be protected with non-shrink grout.
Waterstops
Waterstops shall be installed and butt jointed in accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations.
Waterstops shall be securely positioned in the formwork to prevent displacement during concreting.
Sealing Compound
Sealing compound for external use shall be one of the three generic types namely polyurethane,
polysulphide and silicone. One-part polysulphide and one-part polyurethane shall comply with
BS 5215 or other approved equivalent Two-part polysulphide and two-part polyurethane shall
comply with BS 4254 or other approved equivalent. Silicone sealant shall conform to BS 5889
(Type A) or other approved equivalent and also satisfy the “Adhesion after heat again test”
specified in BS 4254 or BS 5215 or other approved equivalent
Preformed Flexible Strip Sealant
Preformed flexible strip sealant is to comply with the following requirement:-

a) Shall only be used in horizontal joint and be subjected to pressure throughout its length;
b) Water resistant;
c) Good adhesion;
d) Non-staining
Bitumen / Rubber Cold Applied Membrane
Bitumen / rubber cold applied membrane is to comply with the following requirement:-
a) Minimum joint movement capacity of +10% of joint width at 25˚C;
b) Resistant to dilute acids and alkali;
Hot-Poured Rubber/ Bitumen Sealing Compound
Hot-poured rubber / bitumen sealing compound is to comply with manufacturer‟s recommendation.
PCC/19
PERFORMANCE OF WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE (CONT’D.)
Bituminous Sheeting
Bituminous sheeting with fibre is to comply with the following requirement:-

a) Resistance to lime water (no visual effect after 2 weeks immersion);
b) Maximum water absorption of 10% of dry weight;
c) Minimum tensile strength of 50kg/cm2;
d) Ozone and ultra-violet resistant
The strip shall be applied to the joints by burning and affixing on each side of joint to a width not less
than 70mm leaving the middle part free to take any movement at the joint without damage.
Neoprene Bearing Pads
Neoprene bearing pads are to comply with the following requirement:-

a) Shore „A‟ hardness of 60+5 at 25˚C
b) Minimum rupture strength of 105 kg/cm²
c) Minimum rupture elongation of 300%
Polyethylene foam Backing Rods
Polyethylene foam backing rods used as mortar stops in panel joints shall have the following
properties:-
a) Minimum compressibility of 75% of original volume at 25˚C;
b) Shall have excellent resilient properties;
c) Density shall be between 35kg/m³ and 45kg/m³;
d) Shall be totally resistant to common acids, lubricants and detergents;
e) Shall be totally resistant to water infiltration by capillary action;
f) Shall be suitable for up to 70˚C.
APPLICATION OF SEALANT MATERIALS
The Contractor shall ensure that joint sealants of precast concrete structures are correctly installed, so as
to provide continued water and weather tightness of buildings with minimum maintenance.
Joints surface preparation, primers, sealant compounds and backup materials shall be installed to
give the highest standard of materials and workmanship; these shall conform to all applicable
specifications. Whenever possible, sealants shall be applied with a power-actuated gun. The gun
should have nozzle of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to completely fill the
joints. All compounds smears, primers, solvents etc. used in caulking and sealing works, should be
immediately and entirely removed from adjacent materials as the work progresses.
PCC/20
JOINT WIDTH AND SEALANT DEPTH AFTER INSTALLATION

The joint width will depend on the dimensions of panel and it coefficient of expansion.
The maximum joint widths and maximum expansions for the common sealants are tabulated in the
following table.
Type of Sealant Maximum Joint Maximum Movement in

Width (mm) Tension or Compression
(%)
Butyl 20 + 10
Acrylic 20 + 15 to + 25
One Part Polyurethane Two Parts 20 + 20
Polyurethane One Part 20 + 25
Polysulphide Two Parts 20 + 25
Polysulphide 20 + 25
The normal design joint widths shall be 10, 13 and 19mm with respect to the maximum panel
dimensions of 1.5, 5.5 and 9.1 metres respectively.
For joints up to 13mm wide, the depth of the sealant shall be equal to the width. For joints over
13mm wide, the depth shall be equal to one-half the width, but not less than 13mm. Sealants
installed shall not be less than 6mm wide or 6mm deep.
SEALANT BACKUP FILLERS

Backup fillers shall be used in joints to control the depth of the sealant, to facilitate tooling of the
sealant and to serve as a bond breaker which prevents the bonding to the back of the joints.
Acceptable backup materials shall be those which compress and respond to movements. These
include the rod type of sponge materials such as foamed polyethylene, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyvinyl chloride or synthetic rubber. The backup materials shall be compatible
and non-staining to the selected sealants.
JOINT PREPARATION
Before sealing the joints, concrete surfaces shall be smooth, clean and free of all mortar dust or other
contaminants that may affect adhesion. Sealant and primer shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer, and the primer shall be as recommended for the particular sealant used.
Water and weather tightness for all joints of the precast concrete components shall be conducted only
when all pipes, trunking, etc. have been installed and the penetrations sealed, unless otherwise
directed by the SO and shall be carried out in the following manner:-
Method of Testing
a) For floor, flood the floor with 25mm depth of water at the highest point.
b) For external walls, spray a continuous jet of water on the joint corresponding to 600 litres per
hour from a water hose having a nozzle velocity of 2m per second and a cone scatter of
approximately 60˚ held at a distance of 1.2m from the wall surface. Place the hose with the
nozzle in line with the vertical joint and at a level of horizontal joints so that the jet cone scatter
will cover the vertical and horizontal joints. The duration of the test shall not be less than 12
hours. The test is deemed to have passed if there is no water seepage or dampness observed at
the face behind the face subject to the water test and for the subsequent 24 hours.
PCC/21
JOINT PREPARATION (CONT’D.)
Frequency of Testing
For external walls, 18 test for vertical joints and 18 test for horizontal joints shall be conducted for
each block. These tests shall be carried out at any location as directed by SO.
For each test which fails, two additional tests shall be carried out at joint locations as directed by SO at
the Contractor‟s own cost and expense.
Water Test Failure

Contractor shall rectify the joint and repeat the test in event of failure of an initial test of any joint.
This procedure shall be repeated until the tests on the joints comply fully with the passing criteria.
Contractor shall bear the costs and expenses of the extra water tests and rectification work. SO
reserves the right to reject the use of any waterproofing materials or joint details that perform
unsatisfactorily during the water tests at no cost to the Employer.
Under no circumstances shall the Contractor be allowed to carry out his own water test without the
presence of the SO or SO‟s representative. All water test shall be witnessed and certified by the SO or
SO‟s representative.
8. WARRANTY
The Contractor shall required to provide a 10-year warranty for all the finishes work and all related
materials and components installed in the precast concrete panel system, to be free from defects in
materials and workmanship. The warranty shall be effective from the date of issue of Completion
Certificate.
The warranty shall cover the following:-
a) Leakage of water and water penetration between precast concrete elements and structures into
interior spaces.
b) Deterioration and discolouration of finishes in excess of normal weathering and aging.
c) Staining by sealants.
d) Faulty expansion joint, grouting, sealant compound installation and other design faults.
e) Failure of parts in installation and fixings to function as prescribed by manufacturer.
9. OVER-RIDING CLAUSE
The Contractor and his specialist shall ensure and undertake that the works, goods or materials
used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required.
10. SHOP DRAWINGS

For all work in relation to concrete work, etc. the Contractor shall submit shop fabrication drawings
for SO’s approval before commencement of any work/fabrication. Such shop drawings must be
11. SAMPLES

PCC/22
BRICKWORK & BLOCKWORK
1. CLAY BRICKS
All clay bricks shall be of a standard size 215 x 102.5 x 65m m thick or modular size of 190 x 90 x
90mm thick or 290 x 90 x 90m m thick of even shape, hard, well burnt, machine made first quality
pressed bricks with true arrises to be selected and approved by the SO.
Bricks shall comply with SS 103 second grade having a minimum compressive strength of 10.5
N/mm².
Where architectural drawings indicate walls to be:-
 115mm Thick (described as half brick wall). - 215 x 102.5 x 65mm Thick bricks to
be used.
 100mm Thick (described as half brick wall). - 190 x 90 x 90m m Thick or 290 x 90 x
90mm thick modular brickstobe used.
 220 or 230mm Thick (described as one brick - 215 x 102.5 x 65mm Thick bricks to
wall). be used.
 200mm Thick (described as one brick wall). - 190 x 90 x 90mm Thick modular brick
to be used.
Submit samples of brick and obtain the approval from SO before placing order. If requested by SO,
submit sample of bricks to PSB for testing and pay fee in connection therewith at contractor’s own
cost. Bricks shall be delivered to the site by the Supplier and are to be carefully stacked on arrival.
Extruded perforated bricks with holes shall be used only on SO’s approval.
2. FACING BRICKS (where applicable)
The 215 x 102.5 x 65mm facing bricks and matching brick tiles shall be obtained from a Specialist
Supplier to be approved by the SO.
The facing bricks shall be Supplied and Delivered to the site by the Specialist Supplier and
subsequently to be laid by the Contractor’s tiler to be selected and approved by the SO.
All rates for facing bricks shall include for the cost of the facing bricks to be supplied and delivered
to the site in good condition.
The facing finishes are all to be manufactured in a single “one-run” production and to be delivered
to site in full truck loads with polythene protection in one complete shipment.
All facing bricks shall be unloaded and properly stacked and under no circumstances are they to be
thrown from lorries in heaps upon the ground.
BBW/1
3. CONCRETE BLOCKS (where applicable)
Concrete blocks shall be hard, even in shape, square with true arrises, well matured and of a dense
well-consolidated mixture.
Concrete blocks shall be from an approved manufacturer and shall be in accordance with SS 76M
and SS 271 and submitted to the SO for selection and approval.
Concrete hollow block shall be of approved sizes for both Class A & B.
CONCRETE HOLLOW BLOCK SIZES
Length x Height
Thickness
Coordinating size Work size ( Work size )

( mm) ( mm) ( mm)
400 x 200 390 x 190 100
200 x 100 190 x 190 100
Class A blocks shall be for loadbearing use. Class B blocks shall be for non loadbearing use.
Loadbearing blocks shall have a crushing stress of not less than 5.6 M N / m² and non-loadbearing
blocks shall have a crushing stress of not less than 3.6 MN / m².
Three quarter, half and quarter size and special corner blocks shall be used for bonding where
applicable.
BBW/2
4. LIGHTWEIGHT AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE BLOCKS
The lightweight autoclaved aerated concrete (LAAC) blocks to be approved by the SO shall be of
approved manufacture and complying with the following technical specifications : -
NOMINAL DENSITY DRYING SHRINKAGE
650 kg / m³ 0.01%
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH WATER PENETRATION
BS 6073 : 1981 0.7 X 10-3 ( m/ S 0.5)
BS EN 679 : 1994
FIRE RESISTANCE
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY (K) NON-LOAD BEARING WALL
0.18W / m °C 75mm thick : 3 hours
100mm thick : 4 hours

VAPOUR RESISTIVITY
200mm thick : 8 hours
60 MN S / gm
SOUND INSULATION
WATER ABSORPTION
Single Layer 100mm thick
0.10kg/(m² S0.5)
STC 40
MODULUS OF ELASTICITY (E) Single Layer 200mm + 6mm plaster, both
3,000-3,400N / mm² faces STC 50
COEFFICIENT OF LINEAR THICKNESS

EXPANSION
75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225,
8 x 10-6 / °C 250, 300mm
SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY
1.05kJ / kg °C (temp. range 30°C-100°C)
(Cont’d.)
BBW/3
LIGHTWEIGHT AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE BLOCKS (CONT’D.)
DIMENSIONS Blocks per m² wall
Joints Mortar 10mm Glue 4mm
FACE DIMENSION 590 x 190 8.34 8.80

590 x 330 4.90 5.04
m² wall per pallet

STANDARD PALLET Mortar Glue
590 x 190 x 75 33.5 31.8
100 25.2 23.9
125 20.1 19.1
150 16.8 15.9
590 x 330 x 75 32.6 31.4
100 24.5 23.5
125 19.6 18.8
150 16.3 15.7
WEIGHT/M² WALL INCLUDING JOINTS, NO FINISH
Mortar Glue
75 mm 54.4 kg 51.5 kg
100 mm 72.5 kg 68.7 kg
125 mm 90.6 kg 85.9 kg
150 mm 108.7 kg 103.1 kg
• SPECIFICATION CLAUSE :
- All LAAC blocks shall conform to the requirements of BRITISH STANDARD BS6073 : 1981, BS
EN 679: 1994
- Standard LAAC blocks to BS6073 : 1981, c o-ordinating face dimensions : 590 m m x 190m m or
590mm x 330mm.
- All works to be carried out shall strictly conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer’s
technical literature.
5. CEMENT AND WATER

Cement shall be Portland Cement as described in "Concrete Work" to SS 26 natural colour.
Water shall be from the PUB mains.
6. SAND
Sand shall be as described in the "SO’s Engineering Concrete Specifications" except that it is to be
fine sand and conforming in all respects to BS 1200 or other approved equivalent.
BBW/4
7. MORTAR FOR BRICKWORK, CONCRETE BLOCKS OR LAAC / AAC BLOCKS

The mortars are to be carefully mixed upon properly constructed timber platforms and prepared in
small quantities as required.
The sand and cement are to be measured by volume in specially prepared and approved gauge boxes
one for each material, size internally 0.0283 cubic metre (1 cubic foot) and thoroughly mixed dry,
the mixture is then to be wetted by pouring water upon i t through a watering can rose and again
mixed by turning over three times.
Care should be taken to make the mixture of the right consistency.
No mortar which has commenced to set may be used or mixed with any other mortar.
Mortar shall be (1:3) and shall mean mortar in the proportion of one part of Portland Cement to
three parts of sand.
8. SETTING OUT
The Contractor shall provide proper setting out rods and set out the same all work showing opening
heights, cills and lintols and shall build the various walls and piers to the thickness, widths and
heights shown on the drawings.
The walls are to be taken up level as far as possible and no lift is to be greater than 1.00 metre above
adjoining walls. Joining of lifts are to be made by long steps and not be toothing.
All walls are to be levelled round at floors. All brickwork must be built in level courses, no four
courses to rise more than 300mm.
9. BONDING BRICKWORK, FACING BRICKWORK, CONCRETE BLOCKWORK OR

LAAC / AAC BLOCKWORK
All masonery work to be built and bedded in cement mortar (1:3) as described.
Build all half brick and brick-on-edge thick walls throughout the work in stretcher bond, laid so that
there is always a lap of one brick over another of half a brick.
Build all one brick thick walls throughout the works to the heights shown on t he drawings in
English Bond in the best approved manner.
Facing brickwork to cavity brickwalls shall be laid in sketched bond.
One brick thick facing brickwork shall be laid in single Flemish or double Flemish bond or as
indicated on the SO’s drawings.
Concrete blocks and LAAC / AAC blocks shall be laid in stretcher bond.
10. PERFORMANCE OF EXTERNAL BRICK WALLS AND PRECAST CONCRETE INFILL

WALL PANELS
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the performance of external brick walls and
precast concrete infill wall panels together with the external plastering or slim coat and painted
surfaces keep out any moisture from penetrating into and showing on the internal surfaces of the
external walls.
Brickwalls - The Contractor shall in this case ensure that all external brick walls are built of selected
bricks. All joints to be bedded solid and bedded in the previously specified cement mortar bedding and
pointed as necessary. Abutting bricks against concrete shall be similarly bedded and pointed.
All piers and intersections and angles of walls shall be properly bonded together.
All perpends, reveals, quoins and other angles of the walls, etc. shall be built strictly true plumb and
square.
No broken bricks or bats shall be used except where closers are required at quoins, joints, etc. to
make bond.
BBW/5
PERFORMANCE OF EXTERNAL BRICK WALLS AND PRECAST CONCRETE INFILL

WALL PANELS (CONT’D)
Precast concrete infill wall panels - The drawings indicate a 100mm thick precast concrete infill
wall panels with skim coat finish. Should the Contractor be NOT CONFIDENT that the 100mm thick
wall is adequate to prevent water and moisture penetration, he is deemed to have allowed for the extra
cost of providing an extra layer of 100mm thick similar wall built with vertical staggered joints (total
200mm thick) jointed and bedded with non-shrink waterproof mortar or to propose a different material
of different thickness and construction at no extra cost. Any extra costs to the change in the materials
used and construction methods and the strengthening the reinforced concrete structure, foundations,
piles, etc. shall not be considered a variation and is deemed to have been allowed by the Contractor in
his tender offer.
11. REINFORCED BRICKWORK, CONCRETE BLOCKWORK OR LAAC/AAC

BLOCKWORK
All half brick and brick-on-edge walls are to be reinforced with an approved mesh reinforcement for
brickwork. One layer of reinforcement every fourth course with the bottom most reinforcement
being 150mm above floor or concrete foundation level.
Mesh reinforcement shall be 62mm wide expanded mild steel strip of 0.71 / mm ( 22 SWG ) to be
selected and approved by the SO.
The mesh reinforcement is to be lapped 150mm at all joints and carried through the full thickness of
the end wall at corners and junctions.
Where half brick or brick-on-edge walls bond with one brick thick walls, the mesh reinforcement is
to pass through the thickness of the one brick wall.
75 and 100mm Thick hollow concrete block walls and LAAC / AAC blocks shall be reinforced at
every course with a layer of approved mesh reinforcement as above described.
12. CAVITY WALLS (where applicable)

The skins of cavity walls are to be tied together with approved galvanised vertical twist type wall ties
254mm (10") long as BS 1243 Fig. 1 or other approved equivalent spaced 920mm apart horizontally and
every sixth course apart vertically and staggered. At jambs of openings additional ties are to be provided
every 305mm (12") in height and within 305mm (12") of the face of reveal.
Particular care is to be taken to keep the cavities and wall ties free from mortar droppings and prices are to
include for the use of continuous battens and for sufficient bricks or concrete blocks at the bottom of the
cavity to be laid dry to enable same to be cleaned out. The bricks or concrete blocks are to be set properly
after the clearing of cavities.
Every fourth vertical joint is to be omitted, immediately over lintols, etc. and at the bottom of wall cavity
brickwork, to provide weepholes and prices are to include for so doing.
13. LAYING AND JOINTING

All bricks, concrete blocks or LAAC / AAC blocks are to be well wetted by soaking in clean water
for at least half an hour before use and tops of walls where left off shall be wetted before re-
commencing brick laying.
All joints to be 10mm thick and flushed up and grouted in solid as the work proceeds.
All constructed brickwork, concrete blockwork or LAAC / AAC blockwork shall be protected from the
sun's rays during the day on which it is laid and also during the following day and the Contractor must
include and provide for a sufficient number of gunny bags and/or kajangs and ensure this is done.
Except where specified to be fair face, all faces of brickwork are to be left rough and the joints raked out
to a depth of 13mm whilst the mortar is green to form adequate key for plaster.
BBW/6
14. POINTING
The joints of external fair faced brickwork are to be raked out square to a depth of 20mm and pointed on
completion in mortar composed of one part of cement to six parts sand with approved proprietory coloured
cement admixture with a neat weather struck joint or as detailed on the SO’s drawings.
Extra care shall be taken when applying the pointing and not to stain the final finished face of the facing
brickwall. Only skilled bricklayers shall be employed to do the pointing works.
15. CLEANING DOWN FACING BRICKWALLS

All facing brickwalls are to be kept free from scaffold splash and the work properly cleaned down on
completion. Should the pointing or facings be damaged the Contractor shall repair and make good all
such defective portions in an approved manner at his own cost to the approval of the SO. No rubbing or
staining of the brickwork will be allowed. All putlog holes shall be made good when striking the scaffold.
16. BUILDING IN FRAMES

Openings for doors, windows, vents, etc. are to be properly marked out and left unbuilt until the
frames have been fixed in position.
All frames are to be built in as the work proceeds and the back of all timber frames to have one coat
of aluminium wood primer before fixing. ( Aluminium wood primer not required for tanalised
timber).
All external door frames, window frames, vent frames, plates etc. are to be bedded in cement mortar
(1:3) as described.
Provide all door frames abutting walls with 38 x 6mm mild steel holdfasts 230mm long with one end
turned up and holed and screwed to back of timber frame or welded to back of steel frames and other end
built into joints of wall. Space holdfasts at approximately 600mm centres in the height of frames or as
shown in detail drawings.
17. PUTLOG HOLES

All putlog holes shall be carefully, properly and completely filled up on completion of walling work
and before any plastering work commences.
18. DEFECTIVE BRICKS, CONCRETE BLOCKS OR LAAC / AAC BLOCKS

Cut out any defective bricks, concrete blocks or LAAC / AAC blocks found in the work after
completion and replace with sound one at the Contractor's own expense.
19. DAMP PROOF COURSES

Three ply bituminous felt damp proof course to be selected and approved by the SO and complying with
BS 743 Type B or other approved equivalent to be laid horizontally on t he full thickness of all walls
throughout the first storey or basement slab which is in contact with the earth substrate of the building at a
height of 150mm above finished ground level. T he bituminous felt shall be lapped at least 150mm at
angles and joints laid on a bed of cement mortar (1:4) the full thickness of the walls and bedded in and
coated on the bottom and upper surfaces with liquid bitumen.
All walls shall be carefully cleaned and well wetted before the cement bed for the damp proof
course is laid.
20. CUTTINGS
Cut or leave all necessary cuttings, pipe chases, perforations, etc. and make good to the approval of
the SO.
All chases are to be of the smallest depth as possible and shall not exceed 25mm in depth and
250mm in width.
Generally make good w here necessary in cement mortar (1:3) to match with the surrounding
surfaces to the approval of the SO.
BBW/7
21. BRICK WALLS, CONCRETE BLOCK OR LAAC / AAC BLOCKWALLS ABUTTING

CONCRETE COLUMNS
Brick walls abutting concrete columns shall have 25 x 230mm long and 3mm thick steel bonding ties
one end cast to concrete columns and other end built into horizontal joints of brickwork at every two
(2) courses. F or concrete blocks or LAAC / AAC blocks the steel bonding ties to apply at every
course.
For LAAC / AAC block walls built to the underside of the structural concrete slab, provide the
similar bonding ties last described. One end to be shot-fired to soffit of concrete slab and other end
built into vertical joint at every third (3) block.
22. REINFORCED CONCRETE STIFFENERS TO STIFFEN LAAC BLOCK WALLS

Supply, fabricate and erect approved reinforced concrete stiffeners to stiffen the LAAC / AAC block
walls at approved centres for the full height with steel reinforcement dowelled into soffit and slab of
the existing concrete structure and steel rods grouted in epoxy mortar.
23. GLASS BLOCK WALL PANEL

Provide and install 200 x 200 x 100m m thick approved coloured, clear & patterned, heavy-duty
glass blocks as obtained from a supplier to be selected and approved by the SO to be bedded and
jointed in approved waterproofing liquid admixture cement mortar (1:3) and pointed in approved
colour grout and including reinforcing horizontally and vertically with 2 nos . x 6m m diameter
galvanised steel bar reinforcement at every horizontal and vertical joint complete with 80 x 50mm
mild steel "C"-channel framing and chicken wire mesh both sides around opening to the approval of
the SO. Glass blocks shall be manufactured in accordance to DIN 18175 a nd listed under PSB
Listing Directory of Certified Product Class 1A or other approved equivalent.
The glass blockwall shall be tested as a complete system panel for compliance to 1-HR fire-rating to
P.B’s approval. The fire resistant test reports shall comply with BS476 Part 22 as per requirements
listed under PSB Product Listing Scheme. Smoke penetration test shall be in accordance & in
compliance with DIN 4102 Part 5 or other approved equivalent.
External joint between glass block to masonry wall shall be recessed and pointed with approved gun
applied polyurethane elastomeric non-hardening sealing compound to be selected and approved by
the SO.
24. PRECAST CONCRETE VENT BLOCK

Precast concrete (Grade 20) vent block shall be of size 200 x 200 x 150mm with square opening
bedded and jointed in cement mortar (1:4) and to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions inclusive of all necessary reinforcement and strenthening.
25. SHOP DRAWINGS

For all glass block wall panel construction and brickwall concrete or blockwall or LAAC / AAC
blockwall construction, when required, the Contractor shall provide, for the approval of the SO,
shop drawings showing typical installation details, patterns, joint lines, setting out lines, etc. A ll
patterns shall be based on concept drawings provided by the SO.
26. SAMPLES

BBW/8
DRYWALL PARTITIONS
1. GENERALLY
The whole of the Drywall Partition System to be selected and approved by the SO shall be executed by
the Contractor’s Specialist who shall be responsible for the design, fabrication, supply and installation of
the drywall partitions inclusive of their intended performance and function.
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in his cost for all Drywall Partition System to be designed and
constructed to meet STC 50.
2. CALCIUM SILICATE BOARD
General
All calcium silicate board when used as fired rated board or wall shall be asbestos free composite
and shall have the following characteristics:-
a) Flame spread = Class 1 (institutions) BS476: Pt 7 or other approved equivalent
b) Combustibility = Non Combustibility BS476: Pt 4 or other approved equivalent
c) Water Absorption &
Bending Strength = complies to ISO 1896 or other approved equivalent
d) Impact & Deflection
performance = complies BS5588 Pt5 Appendix A or other approved equivalent
Non-Impact Resistant Type
Non-impact resistant type shall be used at ceilings and internal box-up at areas not subjected to
weather or impact damage and shall have the following characteristics:-
a) Density (Normal Dry) = 910 kg/m3 („b 10%)
b) Strength
i) Flexible Strength (average) = 9 MN/m2
ii) Compressive load (max allowable) = 7MN/m2
c) Dimensional Stability
i) Moisture ambient to saturated (max) = ±15% movement
ii) Fully saturated (max) = ≤T0.3% expansion
d) Moisture Content
i) Ambient = 3-5%
ii) Ex-Work = 10-15%
e) Sound
i) Absorption coefficient = 0.02 to 0.03
ii) Transmission loss = 28dB
DRP/1
DRYWALL PARTITIONS
CALCIUM SILICATE BOARD (CONT’D.)
Impact resistant Type
Impact resistant type shall be used for internal partition walls and internal box-up at areas accessible
to impact damage and have the following characteristics:-
a) Density At EMC (average) = 1250kg/m3 (±10%)
b) Strength
i) Flexible Strength (average) = 17MPa
ii) Compressive load (max allowable) = 20MPa
i) Moisture ambient to saturated (max) = ±0.1% (1mm per metre) movement
ii) Fully saturated (max) = ≤0.3% expansion from normal state
d) Moisture Content
i) Ambient = 7-10%
ii) Ex-Work = 10-15%
e) Sound
i) Absorption coefficient = 0.02 to 0.03
ii) Transmission loss = 28dB
External Use Type
External use type shall be used at box-up services that are exposed to weather and have the
following characteristics:-
a) Density At EMC (average) = 1500kg/m3 (±10%)
b) Strength
i) Flexible Strength
(a) Dry = 32Mpa AS 3991.2
(b) Wet = 17Mpa S3991.2
ii) Compressive load (max allowable) = 20MPa
i) Moisture ambient to saturated (max) = ±0.1% (1mm per metre) movement
ii) Fully saturated (max) = ≤0.3% expansion from normal state
d) Water-tightness = Watertight (BS 4624:1981 Pt 15)
or other approved equivalent
e) Water permeability = 3.8gm/GNs
f) Weathering test, 1000Hr = No deterioration (BS 3900:1971 Pt F3)

or other approved equivalent
DRP/2
DRYWALL PARTITIONS
3. GYPSUM BOARD AND STEEL STUDS TO PARTITIONS
Boards used shall be 12.5mm gypsum board to be selected and approved by the SO.
The gypsum boards shall be flush fibrous plaster board as previously specified in Finishings -
Suspended Ceiling.
Steel stud framing shall be deformed type with lipped edge sections, 1 m m thick galvanised and
screwable TO BE FIXED 600MM MAXIMUM APART VERTICALLY.
The steel studs shall be self-splicing with wide flanges knurled for easy screw penetration and hot-
dip galvanised.
All door openings shall have double vertical rows of steel studs.
The unit rates shall be deemed to include for the formation of holes through the vertical studs for the
mechanical, electrical, hydraulics, etc. penetrations and for services to run within the partitions.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Mechanical, Electrical, Hydraulics Specialists relating to
the installation of these services and their location. The programme and mode of construction shall
be planned in such a way that sections of the partitions (completed on one side) are handed over to
the other services Specialists to install their services and once tested to return and erect the other
side of the partitions.
The types of drywall flush partitions to be constructed shall be as described. Where greater widths
within the partition cores are required, steel stud chase walls shall be erected.
The Contractor’s Specialist shall ensure that all fixings required on the wall shall be fixed on to the
steel studs and shall be responsible for any damage caused to the drywall flush partitions by wall
fixtures not bolted to the steel studs.
The gypsum boards shall be mounted onto the steel stud framing with non-rusting self-tapping
screws with joints flushed up a nd rendered smooth with proporietory filler to the approval of the
SO.
4. STEEL STUD TO CHASE WALL CONSTRUCTION
Where greater core widths are required for pipe enclosures and other service pipes, chase walls shall
be erected.
The walls consist of a double row of steel studs with gypsum board panel cross braces between
rows. Gypsum board is fixed to the external face. As an alternative, 64mm steel studs cross brace
screw attached to the chase wall studs may be used. Wh en chase wall studs are not directly
opposite, steel stud cross brace 600mm centres are anchored to the continuous horizontal 64mm
runners screw attached to the chase wall studs.
Limiting thickness is 600mm, vertical brace spacing is 1200mm centres maximum.
Steel studs and runners shall be fixed together with 10mm pan head screw.
5. CONSTRUCTION
Erection of the Partition System and the steel stud chase wall partition shall be to the approval of the
SO and in accordance with the manufacturer's Specifications.
DRP/3
DRYWALL PARTITIONS
6. ALUMINIUM FRAMES & GLAZING TO DRYWALL PARTITIONS
Supply and fix all internal fixed glazed window panels, etc. with pigmented organic coated
aluminium frames, mullions, etc. as indicated on the SO's drawings.
All sections of the aluminium frames to be securely fixed to the openings.
Aluminium extruded section sizes and quality of the pigmented organic coating and colours shall
first be selected and approved by the SO.
All openings to partitions shall be constructed of fully heat treated aluminium alloy HE9TF,
HE9TE, or HE9TB complying with the requirements of BS 1474 or other approved equivalent.
When ancillary members such as sills, couplings and the like are formed from sheets materials, they
shall be fabricated from designated Aluminium Alloys SIC, NS3 or NS4 complying with the
requirements of BS 1470 or other approved equivalent.
Aluminium shall be approved architectural aluminium alloy conforming to the requirements of BS

1470 -1475 or other approved equivalent of high corrosive resistance and of adequate strength to
meet the intended requirements therein.
Aluminium extruded members used for fabrication of shopfronts and doors shall have a minimum
wall thickness of 1.8mm.
Aluminium extruded members used in fabrication of glazed windows and fixed panels shall have a
minimum wall thickness of 1.2mm.
Aluminium sections for all units unless otherwise specified or shown on t he drawings shall be
hollow and profiled.
All exposed surfaces of aluminium extruded section shall present a straight, clean and sharply
define line, free from die-marks, scratches and surface blemishes.
Pigmented organic coated aluminium members shall be delivered so that they are of uniform
appearance and free from all marks and blemishes.
Pigmented organic coated film thickness shall have an average thickness of 0.8 mils dry film
thickness on its exposed surfaces.
The aluminium finish shall be free from alloy defects, die marks, scratches, streaks and other
surface blemishes.
7. FLOAT GLASS AND GLAZING
Where glass is described it shall be 6mm thick clear or tinted float glass free from defects and
glazed into the aluminium framed openings with and including neoprene gaskets to SO’s approval.
The glass showing a rainbow effect on reflection shall not be used. If installed it shall be replaced
at the Contractor's own expense.
8. GALVANISED MILD STEEL
Mild steel is to be of British Standard or other approved manufacture and conforming to BS 4, BS

449 and BS 4360 or other approved equivalent obtained from an approved manufacturer.
Galvanising is to be by the hot-dip process in accordance with BS 729 or other approved equivalent.
Alternatively sherardizing by an approved firm will be acceptable.
DRP/4
DRYWALL PARTITIONS
9. WELDING
The prices for all welded and brazed work are to include for all necessary preparation of surfaces to
be welded and for grinding to a smooth finish.
10. DRYWALL PARTITIONS
Supply and install drywall partitions on and including concrete kerb plastered both faces to the
approval of the SO. The Contractor shall supply and install the partitions with the acoustic values
specified by the SO and as a guide but not limited to, the minimum requirements are as follows:-
Partition - 6mm (minimum) thick impact resistant fire-rated calcium silicate board
with 12.5mm thick gypsum board on each side of the partition with and
including 64mm steel studs, with 50mm thick rockwool, minimum raw
density ≥ 60 kg/m3 secured in between (partition 101mm overall
thickness).
- Concrete kerb 200mm high plastered both faces flush with adjoining
faces of drywall partition.
11. ROCKWOOL BATTS ACOUSTIC TREATMENT

Rockwool, minimum raw density 60 kg/m3 shall be selected and approved by the SO securely fixed in
between the metal studs and to the back of the gypsum board with staggered joints. This acoustic
insulation shall be fixed onto all the drywall partitions.
12. UNEVEN ABUTTING SURFACES

The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for in his unit rates for the filling up of all cavities formed
when his partition abuts the existing surfaces of walls, ceilings, and other adjoining structures. The fill
used is to be selected and approved by the SO and this may be in the manner of an approved proprietory
seal complete with double-sided adhesive strips or neoprene strips to ceilings or wet in-situ gypsum
plaster infilling against plastered masonry walls.
13. DOUBLE VERTICAL METAL STUDS

Double vertical metal studs shall be provided at all openings, end of a wall, door jambs, vision
panels, etc.
14. IRONMONGERY
Ironmongery shall be obtained from the same supplier approved by the SO to be used for the timber
doors, etc. as specified in “JOINERY & IRONMONGERY” to match the general works.
However where a supplier is not available to be previously selected the ironmongery shall be obtained
from the Contractor’s Specialist supplier to be selected and approved by the SO.
DRP/5
DRYWALL PARTITIONS
15. SAMPLES
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for in his unit rates for all extra costs in providing the SO
with all necessary samples of proposed materials to be used in the erection of the drywall partitions
as requested and from time to time.
Arrangements shall be made by the Contractor to provide samples to be erected and selected and
approved by the SO at the earliest possible time.
All materials used in the proprietory partitions shall be equal to that of the samples submitted.
Demolish or remove samples when not required.
16. SHOP DRAWINGS

For all work in relation to drywall partitions, etc. the Contractor shall provide for the approval of the
SO shop drawings for the erection of the partitions for approval before commencement of any
work/fabrication. Such shop drawings must be clearly annotated and drawn to facilitate checking
including design calculations.

DRP/6
MOVABLE ACOUSTIC PARTITION
1. GENERAL
This specification covers the supply, design, fabricate, install and commission by Specialist of the
movable sliding and folding acoustic partitions (also known as Operable Wall) with STC 50
acoustic rating.
The requirements specify herein shall be the minimum requirements.
The Specialist shall visit the site, examine the drawings and specifications including Architectural and
Structural constraint and requirement and to incorporate these into his design.
2. SCOPE
Design, fabricate, supply, install and commission the manual movable acoustic partition systems
as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
Manual movable acoustic partition systems specified shall be top supported, on all steel or
aluminium track system.
Extent of manual movable acoustic partition systems shall be as shown in the drawings.
The ends of partitions are to butt to solid structure to effect sound isolation of the partitions.
Bulkheads including structural supports shall be deemed to be included as part of the movable acoustic
partition system's work.
(as attached Format Specimen) against faulty workmanship and premature breakdown of materials.
3. PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION
All the partitions shall achieve a long term field sound insulation between adjacent spaces (as
assessed in accordance with DIN EN ISO 717-1:1997), known as Noise Isolation Class (NIC) or other
For rooms wider than twice the wall height, NIC levels should be adopted for each third section of
the walls. In all cases, measurement points should be taken between 1m distance and one-third
height distance from the movable walls.
Each single manual movable acoustic partition system shall show laboratory tested sound
transmission losses conducted by accredited testing authorities in accordance with
DIN EN 20 140-3:1995 or other approved equivalent.
All partitions when installed shall be tested upon commissioning based on the guidelines set
above, to achieve the following standard of performance equivalent to minimum STC 45 to SO‟s
approval: -
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Room Laboratory Commissioning
Result Test Result, minimum
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Between Rooms Rw52dB NIC 43 - 47
(minimum) (Subject To Site Condition)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The manual movable acoustic partition system shall meet both the above minimum specified site and
laboratory sound insulation values, whichever is the more stringent in terms of sound insulation
performance between the areas as shown in the SO‟s drawings.
MAP/1
4. SUBMITTALS
The Specialist shall submit manufacturer‟s detailed materials and fabrication specifications and
installation instructions. Include catalogues, samples, fastenings and other data as required.
Written test report shall be furnished to the SO as measured by an independent accredited testing
authority on a similar project.
The Specialist shall submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of the operable wall
assemblies.
The Specialist shall submit, for assessment, independent field test report on their completed
manual movable acoustic partition systems.
5. MANUAL MOVABLE ACOUSTIC PARTITION COMPONENTS

Supply and fix manually operated operable wall / partition wall complete with level spring to
ensure a totally flat surface with no protrusions or recess and stability when partition is closed.
The rollers on ball bearing shall be plastic coated and run along an aluminium ceiling track
without any floor track. The whole partition system must comply with Class '0' in accordance with
COP Fire Precautions in Buildings 1997. Fabric and accessories to comply with Class 1 BS 476:
Part 7: 1997 or other approved equivalent on non-combustible surfaces.
The partition walls shall be of FSB Class „0‟ material, together with an approved certificate and
test report and the entire partition system to be certified by a P.E. to comply to an approved
registered certification board. It shall also meet the following specifications:-
a) Must achieve STC 50 (min) sound transmittance value.
b) The partition walls shall be integrated and served as pin-up boards with heavy duty fabric finish
and abrasion resistance of 60,000 cycles 18 (min) and in 12 colours (min) OR to be finished for
use as a magnetic white board as detailed in the drawings.
c) The frame shall be constructed of metal with PVDF2 finish.
d) The partition walls shall be provided with proprietary top and bottom retractable acoustic
device c/w rubber seals.
e) PSB test for field measurement of sound insulation to be conducted and test report to be
submitted.
f) Whiteboard and softboard must be integral system type.
g) Each panel shall include bottom latch complete with anti-dust socket for alignment for the
panels.
Standard Elements : The panels shall be factory assembled, generally in accordance with
manufacturer‟s design drawings.
The panels shall be minimum 107mm thick with a minimum average surface weight of 58kg/m3.
The panels shall be of sound transmission in class of 45db consisting of individual panels constructed
with 16mm free-oscillating chipboard or gypsum board or MDF board on both sides and
incorporating mechanical operated top and bottom retractable sound seals of contact pressure at 1500
Newton per element, suspended at two points by multi-directional steel ball-rollers. Aluminium sides
trims shall be constructed of natural anodised incorporating interpolating magnetic strips of vertical
strength at 70 Newton per run and vinyl finish seals.
The panels shall include and incorporate fabric or laminate finish or a mixture of both with 40mm thick
50kg/m³ rigid rockwool infill faced with MDF boards as per SO‟s drawing details.
MAP/2
MANUAL MOVABLE ACOUSTIC PARTITION COMPONENTS (CONT’D.)
Overhead Suspension System : The overhead track shall be of steel or aluminium construction
supported from the structural system as schematically shown in the drawings. The track design
shall facilitate with 3 mm air gap to minimize structure borne noise. The track shall incorporate
anti-twisting lateral tolerance feature.
Transfer track shall be provided in the design and to be installed with the track's location so that the
moving panels wall transfer movement will be clear of all wall finishes. Only T-track is to be used.
Carrier shall be of heavy duty multi-directional steel roller (R-roller) carrier equipped with
minimum 4 stainless steel ball bearing wheels to suit panel weight.
For panel height more than 5.00 metres, the carrier shall be of heavy duty multidirectional-steel roller
(MR-roller) carrier equipped with minimum 2 heavy-duty stainless steel ball bearing wheels to
suit panel weight. (Carriers using sliding polymer disk (pucks) counter rotating wheels or ball
bearing supported trolleys or high pressure polymer roller are not acceptable).
Seals : Top and floor seals shall be manually activated to seal the panel sound-tight with respect to
the track and floor.
The 4 corner blocks at each corner of the panel shall also be activated to close gap between
joining stile at top and bottom of each panel.
The floor seal shall incorporate a compensating system to accommodate panel clearance of 35mm
with respect to the floor and any changes in clearance due to structural deflection. The
compensating system shall have a contact pressure of 1500N between the panel and the structure
floor. All top and floor seals shall be out of contact with the respective surface during movements
of the panels. Vertical Magnetic Seals shall be designed to perform acoustically matching and
sound tight between panels.
The vertical seal shall be based on a tongued and grooved principle to ensure optimum sealing
with vertical magnetic strip to provide a force of up to 70 N/RM with acoustical labyrinth
minimum 40mm.
Expandable Panels : May be provided as final closure for each partition and of the same construction
as panels. Expandable panels shall have similar and effective top and bottom seals.
Additional Elements : Such as movable fixed jamb, 90 degree angled elements shall be provided
with mechanical seal to meet the acoustic requirements if it is indicated in the tender drawing
provided as per drawing requirements.
6. OTHER WORKS WITHIN THIS CONTRACT
The construction of ceiling bulkheads to prevent flanking is within this contract. The Contractor
must ensure all gaps are covered to prevent sound transmission through the supporting structure.
The bulkheads shall be constructed with 2 layers 12.5mm gypsum boards on each side
incorporating a 3 mm air gap between each layer of gypsum board in order to avoid structure bond
noise leakage (please refer to drawing details) and it shall be insulated with 40mm layer of
rockwool insulation of 60kg/m3 density.
Provide barrier/penetration seals for all building services penetrating the bulkheads to prevent
acoustical flanking transmission.
MAP/3
7. WORK BY OTHERS
The Specialist shall assist the Contractor in the design of a suitable compatible structural system to
support the partition and panels. The structure shall be designed to accommodate the particular
requirements of the movable acoustic partition systems proposed by the Specialist.
8. MAINTENANCE
Replacement : In case of damage of the surface panels, replacement must be possible at job site
without having to roll any panels out of the tracks to prevent any discontinuation of function of
school. The replacement shall include field adjustment carried out on site.
Maintenance/ Servicing : Product shall be of clipped-on system that allows maintenance and servicing
to be done on site without having to dismantle or dislodge the panels from the overhead track system.
Shop Drawing: To all panel layout based on open and close position. Single or Double pass door to be
provided with locks and automatic drop seal to meet the acoustic requirement where indicated in the
SO‟s drawing.
9. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
The Specialist shall submit at least Ten (10) local projects using the same brand of the partition
system for submission to the SO with visitation to completed project references upon request by
the SO.
Each multi-directional R-roller shall be able to take a panel weight of maximum 250kg per roller.
Each multi-directional MR roller shall be able to take a panel weight of maximum 500kg per roller.
Horizontal top and bottom retractable seals shall work as a “Car Jack Principal” flexible spring-
loaded mechanism to accommodate the floor unevenness. Half-turn cranking mechanism with drop
seals shall not be used.
MAP/4
FLOOR MOUNTED PHENOLIC BOARD TOILET CUBICLES
1. GENERAL
1.1 Work Included
a) Floor mounted fully framed solid phenolic core partitions with dimensions
of 2550 x 1860mm or equivalent.
b) Cut-outs in toilet compartments as required.
1.2 Shop Drawings, Products Date and Samples
a) Submit shop drawings and product dates in accordance with architectural

drawings.
b) Indicate anchorage and mounting details, panel construction, components,

hardware, finishes and all relevant dimensions.
c) Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and installation instructions.
d) Provide sample colours and minimum 100mm x 100mm sized sample of

actual partition material. Submit test performance specification as shown
herein in conformity with EN 438.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 Acceptable Manufacturer
Manufacturer to provide relevant ISO 9002 or other approved equivalent for

manufacturing of Floor mounted fully framed partitions with 90 degree corner castings
or equivalent.
2.2 Materials and Components
The material shall have a surface flame spread of not lower than
Class 2, COP Fire Precaution in Buildings.
a) Doors, panels and plasters
i) 13mm thick phenolic board as per specifications, corners rounded to a

12mm radius. Surface will have a textured finish, each side t o double
coating of melamine impregnated colour coat.
ii) Provide Mar 4, 50mm x 75mm, stabilizing section in powder coated

extruded aluminum over the front, end returns any free-standing units.
iii) Wall partitions to be framed fitted into extruded aluminum channel

section, pop rivet fixings and no screws permitted.
PBC/1
PRODUCTS (CONT’D.)
Materials And Components (Cont’d.)
b) Supports
Shall be constructed from polyester powder coated extruded aluminium

section, 50 mm diameter with rebate, all panels must be siliconed into the
rebates. Adjustable foot system with nylon cover plate and stainless steel
adjusting screw. Stainless steel fixing screws to the floor to be covered with
push fit nylon caps.
c) Hardware and fittings
Provide each door with 3 nylon hinges, one with a built-in adjustable spring
for automatic door closing or for holding the door open. Phenolic door to be
rebated 6mm to contain the nylon chute bolt assembly which is held in
position by a 10mm rebated powder coated aluminium cover plate. Fixed
handles and indication rosette with turn button and emergency release to the
exterior, bolted and screwed through to contain the handle assembly. Internal
knob with hard rubber cap to act as a door stop.
2.3 Fabrication
a) Doors 24" (600 mm) wide, in-swinging for standard stalls 32" (900 mm
minimum) wide, out-swinging for handicap stalls.
b) Pilasters, same thickness and construction as doors of sizes required to suit

cubicle widths and spacing. Vertical edges silicone bonded into aluminium
profiles.
2.4 Finishes
Panels available in a choice of standard plain colours from supplier with textured
finish and Melamine impregnated colour coat both sides.
PBC/2
The material performance of the phenolic panels shall comply with the following specifications:-
SPECIFIC SPECIFICATIONS
PROPERTY PROPERTY OR ATTRIBUTE STANDARD UNIT TYPE

or other approved
CGS
equivalent
Resistance to surface water Wear resistance EN 438-2:6 Revolutions ≥ 600

Resistance to immersion in Thickness increase Mass increase EN 438-2:7 % ≤4
boiling water after 2 hrs Appearance % ≤1
Grade 5
Resistance to dry heat at 180˚C Appearance gloss / others EN 438-2:8 Grade 5
Dimensional stability at Cumulative EN 438-2:9 % (L) % 0.10
elevated temperature Dimensional change (T) 0.20
Dimensional stability at 20 ˚C Cumulative EN 438-2:10 % (L) % 0.05
Dimensional change (T) 0.10
Resistance to impact by small Spring force EN 438-2:11 N ≥ 30
diameter ball
Resistance to impact by large Drop height EN 438-2:12 cm 250
diameter ball Diameter of indentation mm ≤ 10
Resistance to cracking (2mm) Not Applicable
Resistance to scratching Load EN 438-2:14 N ≥ 3.5
Resistance to staining Appearance EN 438-2:15 Grade
Groups 1 and 2 5
Groups 3 and 4 5
Resistance to colour change Grade
in xenon arc light Wool Standard EN 438-2:16 ≥6
in enclosed carbon arc light Wool Standard EN 438-2:17 ≥6
Resistance to cigarette burns Appearance EN 438-2:18 Grade 5
Formability Method A Not Applicable
Method B
Resistance to blistering Not Applicable
Method A and Method B
Resistance to steam Appearance EN 438-2:24 Grade 5
Resistance to fire See Separate Table
Resistance to crazing Susceptibility EN 438-2:26 Grade 5
Resistance to moisture Appearance EN 438-2:27 Grade 5
Flexural modulus Stress DIN 53457 MPa ≥ 10,000
Flexural strength Stress DIN 53452 MPa ≥ 110
Tensile strength Stress DIN 53455 MPa ≥ 70
PBC/3
SPECIFIC SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D.)
PROPERTY PROPERTY OR STANDARD UNIT TYPE CGS

ATTRIBUTE or other approved equivalent
Density ASTM D 792-291 Kg/m³ ± 1400

Method A
Physical Size EN 438-1:6 mm Tolerance length and width : -0 / +5
Thickness (T) EN 438-2:4 mm 6≤ (T) ≤ 12 : ± 0.50
13≤ (T) ≤ 16 : ± 0.60
17≤ (T) ≤ 23 : ± 0.0
24,25 : ± 0.80
Squareness Trespa Internal Standard mm Length of diagonals:-
SF : 3156 ± 13
HF : 3308 ± 14
IF : 3412 ± 14
EF : 3677 ± 15
FF : 4097 ± 17
Flatness Trespa Internal Standard mm / m ≤2
Visual Aspect EN 438-2:5 - Inspected according to Trespa
Inspection Trespa Internal Standard Internal Standard PS.NA-03-AC :
06-15-95
CONDITIONS OF INSPECTION
Viewing distance Between 50and 150cm
Light conditions Luminance > 800 Lux
Light colour 95 (TL)
SURFACE
Colour Not visual detectable deviation from reference colour
allowed
Gloss No annoying “flame” effects
No detectable strips
Folds or creases Not allowed
Loose surface particles pressed in the surface Not allowed
Visually detectable surface damages Not allowed
Bumps or dents The following occurrences are allowed:-
• 1 Bump or dent < 2.5mm² per m²
• Total surface < 2.5mm² per m²
Dirt particles, fibres, etc. The following occurrences are allowed:-
Printed Patterns
• 1 Particular ≤ 1.5mm² per panel
• 1 Particular < 0.4mm² per m²
Plain Colours
• 1 Particular ≤ 15mm² per panel
• 1 Particular < 0.3mm² per m²
CORE
Aspect No visible layers
Colour Core colour has to be homogeneous
PBC/4
3 EXECUTION
3.1 Preparation
a) Examine site conditions to which work is to be applied. Ensure correct

location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing provided by others were
required. Report discrepancies to Architect in writing.
b) Take site dimensions affecting this work.
3.2 Installation
a) Installation partitions secure, plumb, level and square in full accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions.
b) Equip each door with 3 hinges, 1 door latch assembly, fit coat hook to
aluminium pilaster profile.
c) Install door and latch in line for latch keep.
d) Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial open position when unlatched,

except that out-swinging doors (handicap stalls) shall return to closed
position.
e) Leave in clean and workmanlike condition.
f) Final cleaning is by others.
3.3 Guarantee
The Contractor and Specialist shall provide a written JOINT GUARANTEE of FIVE (5)
YEARS (as attached Format Specimen) for all materials to be structurally sound and free
from defects under normal use. The Guarantee shall commence from date of Substantial
3.4 Cleaning and Protection
The Contractor is responsible for the cleaning down and protection of the toilet
cubicles arising from subsequent operations by his own or other tradesmen to the
approval of the SO.
PBC/5
FINISHINGS – FLOOR
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The work included in this section covers all floor and wall finishings as indicated on the drawings.
2. CEMENT
All cement used in the works to be Portland Cement as described under "Concrete Work".
3. SAND/WATER
All sand used in the works to be as described under "Concrete Specifications" and shall be clean
and washed fine sand, of light colour to the approval of the SO.
Water shall be from PUB mains.
4. AGGREGATE
Aggregate for paving shall be approved hard stone of dimensions capable of passing a 5mm sieve
and shall be clean and free from foreign matter.
5. PREPARATION OF SURFACES
All surfaces to be paved must be brushed clean and well wetted before each paving is laid. All in-situ
pavings shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and cracking.
6. WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY
All work shall be executed by experienced tradesmen in accordance with the Specification and to
the approval of the SO.
The Contractor must ascertain and finish the work to the exact requirements of the Specialist for
respective floor finishes.
Materials shall be mixed in sufficient quantities for immediate use and not to be used after one (1)
hour has elapsed from the addition of water. Gauges are not to be mixed with each other or old
stuff re-tempered.
Screeds and pavings shall be laid and finished to a true and even surface and to the exact thickness
as described.
No paving shall be applied in unsuitable weather unless adequate protection is arranged before-
hand to the approval of the SO.
7. ARRISES AND ANGLES IN PAVING
All arrises, internal angles, external angles, etc. shall be clean and slightly rounded with neatly
formed mitres.
FFL/1
8. MAKING GOOD
All making good is to be cut out to a rectangular shape, the edges undercut to form dovetailed key and
finished flush with face of surrounding paving. C ut out and make good a ll cracks, blisters and other
defects and leave the whole of the work perfect on completion.
9. PARTIALLY OR WHOLLY SET MORTAR
No partially or wholly set mortar will be allowed to be used or remixed.
10. MIXING OF MORTAR
All mortar for paving shall be mechanically or hand mixed as directed by the SO and the Contractor is to
make allowance for the use of additional cement necessitated by the method of mixing instructed. Only
whole bags of cement are to be used in any one batch of mix.
11. SAMPLES
The Contractor is to prepare, demolish and amend a sample square metre of each type of paving as directed
at his own cost until the quality, texture and finish required is obtained to be selected and approved by the
SO, after which all paving executed is to equal the approved samples.
Selection of samples to be used for all approval External floor finishes (e.g. corridor, staircase, study places,
informal spaces) shall have a consistent fine rough texture to give a non-skid surface. The slip resistance
requirement for the floor finishes shall achieve Classification X under wet condition in accordance to
Singapore Stand (SS 485:2011). Ramp finishes shall have a texture to achieve Classification W under wet
condition in accordance to Singapore Standard (SS 485:2011).
12. LAYING OF PAVING
The concrete floor is to be brushed with a stiff broom before it has hardened to remove laitance and to
give a roughened surface. Where possible, the pavings are to be laid whilst the concrete is green i.e.
within 24 hours after laying of the concrete. In all cases the concrete is to be thoroughly cleaned and
hacked to form a key if so directed by the SO.
Unless required to be laid to falls or cross-falls all floor finishes are to be laid true and level within a
tolerance of + or - 3mm measured over 3.00 metres length with metal straight edge.
The Contractor shall include in his tender price, allowance for the cost of forming patterns, all necessary
falls and currents, non-slip grooves, expansion joints and skirtings to the finishes specified below
including any bordering required to match the whole, all to the satisfaction of the SO.
13. CEMENT AND SAND BEDS AND BACKING
Beds and backings shall be of cement and sand (1:3), the thicknesses and surface textures to suit
the paving or tiling they are to receive. Water used in the mix shall be kept to a minimum. Screed
shall be covered to avoid too rapid drying out. Screeds shall be laid alternately in bays not
exceeding 11 square metres with joints over any construction joints in base concrete, over clean
surface and over a grout of neat cement if the surface has hardened. Screed laid shall be protected
from wear or other damage until the laying of the floor finish begins. No floor finish shall be laid
unless a reliable moisture test shows that the screed is sufficiently dry to receive the covering.
Defective screeding shall be made good at the Contractor's own expense.
FFL/2
14. CEMENT AND SAND PAVING
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, supply and lay 25mm thick (minimum) cement and sand (1:3)
paving mixed with an approved light duty hardener additive, steel trowelled smooth to aprons, landings,
staircase, kerbs, scupper drains and all other areas not indicated to be paved with other floor finishes.
Floor hardener shall be non-metallic, non-dusting, non-skid and wear resistant applied at 3kg/m².
Unless otherwise indicated, supply and lay 20mm thick x 100mm high cement and sand (1:3) skirting with
rounded top edges and coved base to all areas paved with cement and sand paving and concrete topping.
15. HARDENED CEMENT PAVING WITH APPROVED HARDENER AND LIQUID CASE-
HARDENER/DUSTPROOFER
Cement Paving shall be as described in "Cement Paving" and shall be hardened with approved
hardener and case-hardened with a dustproofing solution. Both materials shall be obtained from a
Specialist to be selected and approved by the SO.
Concrete floor surfaces shall be cleaned, washed and applied with a rich cement slurry for bonding
before laying paving on floor slab. The approved hardened cement paving shall be a 1:3 mix and
comprise approved hardener in mixture recommended by Specialist laid to the required thickness
and trowelled to a dense uniform finish.
After the hardened cement paving is cured, apply the required number of coats of approved liquid case-
hardener/dustproofer solution shall be applied as recommended by Specialist onto the surfaces. T he
surfaces to be treated shall be thoroughly clean and free from any loose particles, paint, oil, grease or
other foreign materials prior to the application of the solution.
The whole of the works described in this Section shall be applied in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
(as attached Format Specimen) against faulty workmanship and all materials to be sound and free
from defects under normal use. The Guarantee shall commence from date of Substantial Completion
of the Works.
16. TILING GENERALLY

All work shall be carried out to an acceptable standard by experienced first class tilers to the
approval of the SO.
Soak all ceramic tiles in clean water before laying. Neatly cut the tiles where necessary, keeping
well clear of tap bodies. Cut edges of tiles against fixtures must be carefully ground and jointed.
Sharp edges to be rounded off by the Contractor's tiler as indicated in drawings or directed by the
SO. Keep all joint lines straight and to the required centres. Finished faces shall be true and square
and all tiles shall be fully bedded.
Concrete floor shall be cleaned with a stiff broom or brush and a slurry of cement shall be applied before
laying the tiles. The bedding mortar shall not be less than 25mm thick and shall have a crushing strength
of not less than 15 MPa. The mortar shall be carefully compacted and evened out before the wet tile is
placed in position and tamped carefully into place. The area of tiles laid shall be limited to areas of not
more than 6 m2 at any one time. Joints shall be filled with approved coloured grout. All surplus grout
shall be cleaned off and floor left to set for at least 4 days before allowing traffic.
On completion of all work, all stains and cement residue, etc. shall be cleaned off with a non-corrosive
tile cleaner. The floor shall be washed thoroughly and left to dry. Acid shall not be used for cleaning
purposes. The tiled floor must be left clean, free from stains and to the approval of the SO.
FFL/3
17. WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE TO ALL WET AREAS
The Contractor shall execute the whole of the waterproofing system to concrete slabs of all toilets,
cleaners’ rooms, wash areas, shower, changing rooms, disposal rooms, water tank room and other
wet areas and as shown on the drawings to the satisfaction of the SO and warrants that the works
shall be executed using good m aterials and with all due care and professional skill. He further
warrants the water tightness of the waterproofing system to concrete slabs of the abovementioned
areas, that is, against any defects whatsoever and howsoever arising for a period of ten (10) years
from the date of substantial completion of the Works. The Contractor shall make good a ll such
defects appearing within the said ten (10) years from the date of substantial completion of the
works at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the SO. If the Contractor shall refuse, neglect
or fail to do so for any reason whatsoever, within such time as may be specified at the complete
discretion of the SO in a notice in writing from the SO to make good t he same and charge the
costs thereof to the Contractor. The waterproofed areas shall be flood tested as described in the
Roofing Work section. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his tender for repairing
any defective floor structures, joints and pipe penetrations to the SO’s approval prior to installing
the waterproofing membrane.
The Contractor shall, in addition, furnish to the Employer a written Joint Guarantee in respect of
the waterproofing system to concrete slabs of the abovementioned areas, valid for a period of Ten
(10) years from the date of substantial completion of the Works, by a third party acceptable to the
Employer, in the form and in the terms approved by the Employer for the due and faithful
observance and performance of the aforesaid covenant and obligations on his part to be observed
and performed throughout the said period of ten (10) years. The guarantee shall be delivered to the
SO two weeks prior to the commencement of the waterproofing works to concrete slabs of the
abovementioned areas.
18. LIQUID APPLIED FLEXIBLE CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
The liquid applied waterproof membrane shall be Proprietory two-component flexible cementitious
waterproofing membrane to be approved by the SO and supplied and installed by Specialist strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructed. The Contractor and Specialist shall provide a
written JOINT GUARANTEE of TEN (10) YEARS (as attached Format Specimen) against water
leakages. The Guarantee shall commence from date of Substantial Completion of the Works.
The Waterproofing System shall be not limited to the above areas as described and as shown on the
drawings.
All new reinforced structure as constructed by the Contractor to floors shall be cast and trowelled
smooth to receive the waterproof membrane.
The Specialist shall apply by roller 2-coats of the liquid applied waterproof membrane minimum
1.8mm total thickness to the floor and walls of planter and to the floors of the above described
areas and to toilets with 300mm turn-up on walls and pipes and 100mm turndown into the insides
of the floor outlets at a rate of 1.0 kg/m²/coat. A protective slush coat shall be laid on top of the
installed membrane.
All substrate to receive the waterproofing membrane shall be sound, clean, dry and free of debris,
grease, oil, cement laitance, etc. and to the satisfaction of the Specialist.
FFL/4
LIQUID APPLIED FLEXIBLE CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOF MEMBRANE (CONT’D.)
Flood Testing
All waterproofed area to floors above mentioned shall be flood tested for 24 hours after system
has cured (24 hours at 75 degrees Fahrenheit and 50% relative humidity) and prior to installation
of final finishes or protection course.
Plug drains and place barriers to contain the water.
Flood floors to a depth of 50mm and full depth of the Planter Boxes for the duration of the test.
The Specialist shall bear all costs incurred in rectifying any dampness or leaks directly caused by
the breakdown of his Waterproofing System.
19. TILE ADHESIVE BEDDING OF ALL CERAMIC FLOOR TILES
All ceramic floor tiles shall be laid on cement and sand (1:3) screed with Tile Adhesive mortar
admixture to the approval of the SO and to be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
printed instructions.
Tiling to steel recessed manhole covers shall be bedded in Tile Adhesive Epoxy Mortar Grout to
the approval of the SO.
All ceramic floor tiles shall be bedded in 3mm Tile Adhesive mortar and with the tile
joints grouted in - tile joints exceeding 6mm to be gr outed with Tile Adhesive Quarry
Grout with Flexible Grout Additive to be selected and approved by the
SO.
- tile joints less than 6mm to be grouted with Tile Adhesive Colour Grout with
Flexible Grout Additive to be selected and approved by the SO.
Tile adhesive shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the SO.
All Tile Adhesive System products shall be obtained from the Contractor’s Specialist Supplier to
be approved by the SO and mixed and installed all in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
.
FFL/5
20. CERAMIC OR HOMOGENEOUS FLOOR TILES

Generally the different types of ceramic or homogeneous floor tiles shall be Supplied and
Delivered to the site by the Supplier and subsequently to be laid by the Supplier or the
Contractor's tiler to be selected and approved by the SO.
Overall thickness of all flat and level tiled floor shall be to the finished levels as indicated on t he
drawings inclusive of tile, bedding and screed. Where the tiled floors are laid to falls and cross-falls an
average depth shall be proposed by the Contractor to be approved by the SO.
Floor tiles shall be of approved manufacture and obtained from Supplier with sizes, shapes,
colours and patterns to be selected and approved by the SO. All future deliveries shall be equal to
the approved samples selected.
All ceramic floor tiles used shall comply with SS 301 (1985 Specifications for Ceramic Floor and
Wall Tiles). B edding and tile joints shall be in Tile Adhesive or other approved, bedding and
colour grout as previously described.
Rates shall include for the different types of tiles to be supplied and delivered to the site in good condition.
The Contractor whilst building up his unit rates shall ADD for:-
i) forming to patterns and wastage
ii) labour unloading, stacking, hoisting, distributing and double handling
iii) labour, material in checking, sorting, reboxing or recrating
iv) profit
Cleaning with acid IS PROHIBITED and the Contractor is advised to clean sections of the laid
tiles as work proceeds.
On completion the tiles are to be cleaned and buffed to manufacturer's recommendation.
Packaging
All tiles shall be packed in properly labelled wooden pallets complete with plastic covers.
All tiles shall be kept in batches, numbered in accordance with the number of the containers
and/or pallets.
Delivery
All tiles shall be delivered to the site in their original unopened containers with all labels intact
and legible at time of use.
Samples of Mock-Up
Samples of ceramic or homogeneous tiles shall be submitted free of cost to the SO for approval.
The Contractor shall loose lay a mock-up (for all types of tiles) of approx. 0.5m², for SO’s approval
prior to manufacturing. T he exact location, colours/pattern of tiles shall be directed by the SO.
The mock-up shall be executed to the complete satisfaction of the SO. Upon acceptance of the
mock-up by the SO, the Contractor shall be required to submit full tiling layout drawings to a
minimum of 1:100 scale. The final tiling layout, types of tiles, colours, etc. are subject to the SO’s
agreement and approval.
The Contractor shall submit 1 set of samples of the approved tiles mounted on display boards to the SO
at the time of or immediately after the approval of the loose lay mock-up.
All tiles delivered to the site will be gauged against the approved samples for evenness of colour
and quality. The SO reserves the right to reject the batch of tiles if they are found to be of great
disparity when compared with the approved samples in terms of evenness of colour and quality.
FFL/6
CERAMIC OR HOMOGENEOUS FLOOR TILES (CONT’D.)
Floor Expansion Joint

Provide 25mm wide proprietary expansion joints at intervals to be determined by the SO
constructed of pair of aluminium angles and infilled with synthetic rubber insert, polyethylene
backer rod and polyurethane sealant. The Contractor is deemed to have included the cost of the
floor expansion joints in his unit rates.
Tests Reports
The Contractor shall submit local test report from approved testing laboratories to show that the
proposed tiles comply in all respects with the specification.
Tests
Notwithstanding the submission of test reports the Contractor shall also allow for the cost of
providing samples, transport, testing fees and all other charges and expenses incurred in sending 3
lots each of the tiles from each consignment to PSB or other approved laboratories separately for
testing in 20 pieces per lot selected at random at the discretion of the SO.
The Contractor shall provide the services of a fork-lift and any other necessary equipment for the
sampling of tiles. Samples will be picked at random by the SO or his authorised representative(s) and
the Contractor shall ensure that any pallet or pallets be opened for this purpose.
Tiles selected at random will be dispatched separately in 3 lots of 20 pieces each to an approved
laboratory for testing at Contractor’s own expense.
Tiles shall be tested in accordance with methods and procedures adopted by an approved
laboratory.
If the tiles tested fail to meet the Specification, the entire pallet or the entire tiled area shall be
removed from the site and made good at the Contractor’s own expense.
Storage
All tiles shall be stored under cover in such manner as to prevent damage and contamination, at
designated locations on site.
Colour
The Contractor shall provide full range patterns, colours and textures of the tiles. The SO shall
have absolute prerogative in the selection of tiles on t heir particular patterns, colour ranges and
textures and there shall be no additional cost to the Employer.
To ensure consistent tonal quality, tiles should preferably be manufactured in a single process
irrespective of delivery schedule. The Contractor shall ensure that tiles of the same type in any
one area or in two or more adjoining areas shall be the same and shall show no sign of change in
quality, colour, shade, tone, texture, etc.
Accessories
The Contractor shall provide all accessory tiles in matching size and colour to trim round all water
pipes and any other services pipes inclusive of concrete kerbs, windows and any other openings to
the satisfaction of the SO. The Contractor is deemed to have included the cost of accessory tiles
in his unit rates.
FFL/7
21. CERAMIC OR HOMOGENEOUS FLOOR TILES

Floor tiles shall be of 10mm thick of metric modular size unless otherwise stated.
Joints shall be of 3mm width (±1mm tolerance).
All purposes made tile such as skirting, step nosing and other accessories shall be provided. Such
items cut from larger tile pieces are not acceptable.
All floor tiles shall conform to the minimum requirements of SS 301:1985 for geometrical
characteristics and other technical characteristics not specified herein. The Contractor must state
the country of origin / manufacture of the tile offered.
Cleaner’s closets shall be tiled with ceramic or homogeneous floor tiles complete with waterproof
membrane (applicable 2nd Storey and above) and with 300mm turn-ups.
Areas to be tiled [except areas likely to be wet] shall generally be laid with unpolished large or
small speckled or patterned finish homogeneous stoneware ceramic tile, fully vitrified for heavy
duty use. Speckled finish tile shall be:-
Size : 300 x 300mm and or 300 x 600mm x 10mm thick
Density : 2.4 gm/cm³
Water absorption in weight : 0.05% maximum
Modules of rupture : 38 N/mm² minimum
Abrasion (Vol. of material removed) : 150mm³ maximum
Surface hardness according to Moh’s scale : 6 or above (not applicable for polished tiles)
Colour range : Minimum of 18 distinct colours for SO’s selection
In addition to the above, to create patterns as directed by the SO, the Contractor shall lay
approximately 20% of each area to be tiled with polished or unpolished, small / large speckled
finish or plain coloured homogeneous stoneware ceramic tile, fully vitrified for heavy duty use to
the SO’s approval. These tiles shall be:-
Surface hardness according to Moh’s scale : 6 or above (not applicable for polished tiles)
All areas that are likely to become wet such as toilets, etc. shall be laid with unpolished plain or
large speckled or plain coloured homogeneous stoneware ceramic tile, fully vitrified non-slip for
heavy duty use. The tile shall be:-
Colour range : Minimum of 18 distinct colours SO’s selection
FFL/8
CERAMIC OR HOMOGENEOUS FLOOR TILES (CONT’D.)
Tiles for Maintenance Stock
Supply and deliver only ceramic wall tiles and floor tiles all as specified and as approved by the SO.
Percentage
for
Area Applied Maintenance Remarks
Up to 300m² 2% Max 6m²
Over 300 to 1,200m² 1% Min 6m²

Max 12m²
Over 1,200 to 8,000m² 1/4% Min 12m²

Max 20m²
Over 8,000 to 20,000m² 1/8% Min 20m²

Max 25m²
Over 20,000m² 1/10% Min 25m²

Max 40m²
Maintenance stock for wall and floor tiles shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the pricing
of the respective wall and floor tiles required in this tender and deemed to be included in the
Contact provisions.
The maintenance stock shall be properly protected and upon the direction of the Superintending
Officer, be passed on to the school principal for keeping. Certified vouchers of the tiles by the
recipient shall be forwarded to the SO for record.
22. VITREOUS BULLNOSED NON-SLIP TILES, STAINLESS STEEL DIVIDING STRIPS
Supply and lay 150 x 75 x 8.5mm thick fully vitreous bullnosed non-slip tiles bedded and jointed
in cement mortar (1:3) to a total thickness of 25mm and pointed in tinted cement to treads of
staircases.
Supply and fix 25 x 3mm thick stainless steel dividing strips fixed to substrate by approved
method bedded on edge and including fair joints when the screed length exceeds 3.60m in both
direction and between different floor finishes or as directed on site by the SO.
23 . HEAVY-DUTY HOMOGENEOUS TILES
Supply and lay minimum 12mm thick heavy-duty external weather resistant homogeneous floor
tiles to SO selection and approval.
FFL/9
24. 2MM & 3.5MM THICK HOMOGENEOUS SEAMLESS SHEET VINYL FLOOR WITH
WELDED JOINTS
Generally
Supply and install homogeneous sheet vinyl floor with welded joints to areas as indicated on the
drawings and associated treads and risers in steps.
The 2mm thick Homogeneous Sheet Vinyl Flooring with welded joints in colours to be laid to pattern
and borders with matching 100mm high PVC skirting shall be selected and approved by the SO.
The floor shall be supplied and installed by a Specialist to be approved by the SO, and the system
proposed by the Contractor shall be fit for the purpose intended.
The sheet vinyl shall be capable to withstand the intended usage.
Internationally certified for its performance.
A protective surface finish to minimise trapping of dirt and is easy to clean.
Proprietory accessories such as skirtings, preformed internal and external corners to skirtings, etc.
shall be installed.
As part of TOP requirements, the contractor shall at his own cost be responsible for carrying out
all tests and obtaining the fire test certificates for all vinyl used from an approved testing agency
acceptable by FSSD.
Vinyl Sheets
Supply and lay 2mm thick homogeneous, asbestos-free seamless heavy-duty fully flexible vinyl (PVC)
sheet flooring of approved colour and approved adhesive on screeded floor and finishes with polish on
the surface and complying with BS EN 649. The vinyl sheet shall comply with specification:-
Non-Acoustic Type (minimum 2mm thick)

Abrasion resistance = Group M EN 660
Indentation (150 min) = < 0.16mm EN 433
Light fastness = ≥7 ISO 105-B02
Minimum thickness = Thickness to be approved by the SO
Supply and lay 3.5mm thick asbestos free seamless heavy-duty full flexible acoustic vinyl (PVC)
sheet flooring of approved colour pattern and approved adhesive on screeded floor and finished with
polish on the surface. Complying with BS EN 649. The vinyl sheet shall comply with specification:-
Acoustic Type (minimum 3.5mm thick)

Abrasion resistance = Group T EN 660
Indentation (150 min) = < 0.16mm EN 433
Light fastness = ≥7 ISO 105-B02

equivalent
or other approved
Minimum thickness = Thickness to be approved by the SO

Sound absorption (min) = 19dB ISO 140-8 and ISO 717-2 or other
approved equivalent
Supply and lay 2mm thick x 100mm high matching vinyl sheet skirting with splayed bottom to
areas paved with vinyl sheet flooring.
Supply and lay 2mm thick matching vinyl sheet to tread and riser of staircases and steps complete
with weld joint between base of riser and tread.
FFL/10
2MM & 3.5MM THICK HOMOGENEOUS SHEET VINYL FLOOR WITH WELDED
JOINTS (CONT’D.)
2mm Thick Anti-static Seamless Sheet Vinyl with Welded Joints to LAN & Server Room
Approved 2mm thick anti-static sheet vinyl shall be installed on the floors of the LAN Room and
to other rooms where anti-static sheet vinyl is required as indicated on the drawings.
100mm High PVC matching anti-static skirting shall be selected and approved by the SO.
Substrate Preparation and Self Levelling Compound
As all the existing homogeneous or ceramic tiled floor and cement paved floor need to be removed
for the installation of the sheet vinyl tiles, a layer of self levelling screed must be applied to ensure
that the sheet vinyl when installed is level.
The floor slab shall be thoroughly cured, dry and leveled with 3mm thick poly-vinyl acetate
leveling compound to a true and even surface prior to installation of the sheet or tile vinyl floor by
the Specialist.
After self-levelling bed is applied, the substrate shall be inspected and approved by the SO before
installation of the floor can proceed.
Epoxy Adhesive
The Epoxy Adhesive shall be mixed and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
The Epoxy Adhesive shall be applied using a notched trowel meant for this purpose.
Installation of Homogeneous Vinyl Flooring
Installation shall be carried out by the Specialist in accordance with the recommended procedure
for installation and to be installed by skilled and experienced workmen.
Immediately after installation, the completed floor shall be rolled with an approved roller to ensure
proper contact as the work proceeds.
After installation, no traffic shall be allowed over the completed floor for at least 24 hours.
FFL/11
25. PEBBLE WASH

Supply and install coloured pebbles wash finish at areas indicated on drawings to SO’s selection
and approval.
Minimum 44 choices shall be presented for selection from the following:-
.1 Mix of smooth assorted yellow golden crystal pebbles of the following sizes:-
.1 Small 3 – 5mm diameter
.2 Medium 5 – 7mm diameter
.3 Intermediate 8 – 12mm diameter
.2 Predominantly ivory golden yellow chippings of the following sizes:-
.1 Extra small 2 – 3mm diameter
.3 Mix of assorted ivory red pebbles of the following sizes:-
.4 Mix of assorted black pebbles / river stones of the following sizes:-

.5 Mix of assorted brown pebbles of the following sizes:-

.5 Large 18 – 22mm diameter
.6 Predominantly ivory golden yellow chippings of the following sizes:-

.7 Mix of assorted maroon, black pebbles of the following sizes:-

.8 Mix of assorted black pebbles / river stones of the following sizes:-

FFL/12
PEBBLE WASH (CONT’D.)

.9 Predominantly light ivory golden chippings of the following sizes:-
.10 Predominantly maroon red chippings / pebbles of the following sizes:-
.11 Mix of assorted light brown smooth pebbles of the following sizes:-
.12 Predominantly jade green chippings / pebbles of the following sizes:-
.13 Predominantly blue green chippings / pebbles of the following sizes:-
.14 Predominantly pure white chippings / pebbles of the following sizes:-
.1 Extra small 3mm diameter
.2 Small 6mm diameter
.15 Predominantly black chippings of the following sizes:-
.1 Small 3mm diameter
.2 Medium 6mm diameter
.16 Predominantly green pebbles / river stones of the following sizes:-
.2 40 - 50mm diameter river stones
.17 Predominantly black river stones of the following sizes:-
.2 20 – 30mm diameter
26. RAMPS
Supply and install coloured pebbles wash finish (of aggregate shippings only not smooth river
pebbles) to SO’s selection to the following areas, unless otherwise stated:-
.1 All ramps at doorways from corridor to rooms;
.2 All ramps leading to toilets;
.3 All ramps at corridors to mediate level change;
.4 All ramps for handicapped access.
FFL/13
27. SPRUNG (PNEUMATIC) FLOORING SYSTEM TO MPH
The Contractor shall offer a solid timber sprung (pneumatic) sports flooring system to be installed
by Specialist complying to EN 14904 Type 4 (A) or equivalent standards..
To achieve the stated performance criteria in terms of results all to SO’s approval.
For solid timber flooring system – refer to Joinery & Ironmongery of the Specification of Work.
28. PROPRIETORY COLOURCOAT ACRYLIC COATING SYSTEM
The acrylic coating shall be that of the proprietory colour acrylic coating system to be approved by
the SO comprising of:-
.1 Two layers of asphalt resurfacer – an asphalt-based emulsion blended with selected fibers
and fillers onto asphalt surface.
.2 Two layers of colour concentrate textured mixture – pigmented wear-resistant acrylic
emulsion over the finished Asphalt Resurfacer surface.
.3 One layer of colour concentrate finish mixture – pigmented wear-resistant acrylic emulsion
over the finished colour concentrate textured surface.
Each acrylic coating shall be fully cured before the subsequent layer is applied over it. The mix of
the acrylic materials with water and sand shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s specification.
Application of each Asphalt Resurfacer shall be carried out after the water ponding test is
conducted over the finished asphalt surface and the depression marked out.
Once the surface has been corrected with the Asphalt Resurfacer to attain a surface variation of
not exceeding the thickness of the “Singapore Ten Cent Coin”, 2 separate coats colour concentrate
textured mixture shall then applied to form the base for the final colour concentrate finish mixture.
The finished acrylic surface shall be smooth with even texture.
Line marking shall be painted with White Line Paint Textured – texturized, wear-resistant acrylic
emulsion line marking paint after it had been accurately marked.
FFL/14
29. DUST-PROOF COATING

Supply and provide all rc floor with computer raised floor finish with dust-proof coating of clear
acrylic concrete floor sealer or epoxy floor coating. A minimum of 3 c oat application is to be
provided to these areas.
The technical data for the dust-proof coating is as follows:-
Physical Properties
Tensibility kp/cm² 175
Elongation % 10
Flexural strength kp/cm² 470
Flexibility
Impact strength kpm 2.8
Compression strength kp/cm² 800
Adhesion kp/cm² 30ºC
Hardness Shore D 95
Durability (compared to concrete) 5
Temperature resistance ºC -40 / +100
Coefficient of expansion cm / cm / ºC
Coefficient of friction
Dry 0.45
Wet 0.70
30. WIRE MESH OVER FLOOR TRUNKING, CONDUITS AND PIPES
To all floor trunking, conduits and pipes exceeding 12mm diameter embedded in the floor,
provide 13 x 13mm light gauge wire mesh to be approved by the SO to span across the whole
lengths of the trunking. The wire mesh shall cover a minimum of 200mm over on both sides of
the length of the ducts.
Cost of the wire mesh shall be deemed to be included in the unit rates of the floor finishes.
31. DIVIDING STRIPS
Provide at junction of different floor finishes 25 x 3mm aluminium dividing strips bedded on edge to
finish flush with finished floor level and filed and polished smooth on top edge.
32. FINISHED SURFACES
Care must be taken by the Contractor to prevent any staining of the completed cement paving or
tiled surfaces with cement mortar or other foreign matter. The cement paving and tiled surfaces
are to be thoroughly rinsed with clean water as the work progresses to avoid setting of excess
mortar.
Cleaning with acid on cement paved or tiled surfaces IS PROHIBITED.
Buff all tiled surfaces prior to handing over of the Project.
FFL/15
33. SHOP DRAWINGS
For all granolithic paving, marble, granite, tiling homogeneous and ceramic tiling work, etc. the
Contractor shall provide, for the approval of the SO, shop drawings showing typical installation
details, patterns, joint lines, setting out lines, etc. All patterns shall be based on concept drawings
provided by the SO.
34. SAMPLES
Provide samples at Contractor’s own cost as required for SO’s selection and approval and remove
when not required.
FFL/16
FINISHINGS - PLASTERING AND WALL TILING
1. GENERAL
All areas to receive solid render finishes shall be kept free from oil, grease, paint, smoke stains,
oxide stains and other deleterious substances.
All temporary holes and faults in alignments, etc., shall be rectified by the various trades as the work
progresses.
All fixings, conduits, pipes, sleeves, junction boxes, etc., for all trades shall be correctly located and
securely fixed and anchored in position before the plasterer commences work.
Touching up or making good to render after other trades shall only be executed by skilled plasterers.
The work shall be carried out in an approved sequence to allow all following trades to comply with
the time schedule, e.g. a time allowance shall be made for a sufficient drying out period of plastered
or rendered surfaces to allow for the application of paint or other applied finishes.
If cracks, blisters or any other faults in rendered or plastered work appear at any time before the
expiration of the maintenance period, they shall be cut out, stopped, pointed and made good and the
whole walls or areas such affected must be re-painted, as instructed to the approval of the SO.
2. CEMENT
All cement used in the works to be Portland Cement as described under "Concrete Work".
3. SAND / WATER
All sand used in the works to comply with the latest BS 1199 (Table 1) or other approved equivalent
and is to be uncrushed clean sharp pit or river sand of a light colour free from loam or vegetable
matter and well screened. If there is any sign of vegetable or loamy matter in the sand it must be
sieved and washed before using to the approval of the SO. Coarse for first coat and fine sieved for
the finishing coat, 100 percent to pass a No. 7 BS sieve or other approved equivalent. Where
specified "White Sand" it shall be specially selected processed white aggregate as prepared by an
approved firm.
The clay-plus-fine-silt content shall not exceed 5% by weight and 15% by volume as specified in BS
1199 or other approved equivalent. The field test for determining the volume of silt shall be carried
out in accordance with an approved test agency’s methods to be approved by the SO. All sand
found to contain silt in excess of 15% by volume shall not be used for plastering or in mortars but
shall be removed from the site at the Contractor’s expense.
Water shall be from PUB mains.
4. PLASTICISER
Plasticiser to internal, external wall and ceiling plastering shall be mixed with a plasticiser to be
selected and approved by the SO and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
FPW/1
5. PREPARATION OF SURFACES
All surfaces to be plastered must be brushed clean and well wetted before each coat is applied.
All Portland Cement plaster shall be kept continually damp in the interval between application of
coats and for seven (7) days after application of the final coat.
6. ARRISES AND ANGLES IN PLASTERING
All arrises, internal angles, external angles, etc. shall be clean and slightly rounded with neatly
formed mitres as shown on drawings and directed on site. All vertical arrises of external angles to
plastered walls shall be formed with proprietory galvanised metal or uPVC angle bead to be
approved by the SO.
7. COMPOSITION OF CEMENT BACKING
Provide cement and sand (1:4) backings of required thickness to receive wall tiling.
8. MAKING GOOD
All making good is to be cut out to a rectangular shape, the edges undercut to form dovetailed key
and finished flush with face to surrounding plaster.
Cut out and make good all cracks, blisters and other defects and leave the whole of the work perfect
on completion.
9. PARTIALLY OR WHOLLY SET PLASTER
No partially or wholly set wall plaster will be allowed to be used or re-mixed and must be removed
from the site.
10. MIXING OF MORTAR
All mortar for plastering shall be mechanically or hand mixed as directed by the SO, and the Contractor is
to make allowance for the use of additional cement necessitated by the method of mixing instructed. Only
whole bags of cement are to be used in any one batch of mix.
11. SAMPLES
The Contractor is to prepare, demolish and amend a sample square metre of such type of plastering
as directed, at his own cost, until the quality, texture and finish required is obtained to be selected
and approved by the SO after which all plastering executed is to equal the approved samples.
FPW/2
12. WORKMANSHIP
All plastering work shall be carried out by competent tradesmen with approved equipment.
The plastering shall comply with all relevant "Codes of Practice".
Clean all surfaces with water and heavy wire brush to remove all dust, dirt or loose rust from metal work.
All pipe conduits, etc., shall be correctly chased in well anchored and of sufficient depth to permit
satisfactory concealment without surface blemish to rendering. All temporary grounds and screeds shall
be fixed and sufficient thickness shall be allowed to finish on correct plane. Concrete surfaces shall be
hacked to form key for plastering.
All permanent grounds and fixing plugs shall be correctly located and fixed, all expanded metal
wrappings, etc., shall be securely fixed over lintols, joints between different materials, banks of
conduits, pipes, expansion joints where applicable and other similar conditions before rendering.
Fix 150mm wide galvanised expanded metal lathing to the approval of SO onto the surfaces of
EXTERNAL walls at all vertical and horizontal junctions between brickwork and concrete flush
surfaces where the walls are required to be plastered or tiled. Similar application only to
INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL wall vertical junctions where plastering is to be flushed across
brickwork and concrete walls or columns.
Render coats shall be applied with sufficient pressure to thoroughly fill all voids, chippings,
chasings, rakings, etc.
Heavily cross scratch render coats before initial set to provide mechanical key.
All coats shall be mist sprayed with clean water before commencing succeeding coats.
The thickness of plaster to existing walls and ceilings shall be to thickness to be accepted by the
SO.
All surfaces shall be finished flat, even, straight, level and plumb, hard and true and free from
cracks, stains, blisters, water marks, and other imperfections. All angles shall be straight and true
and all curved surfaces even and true to radius, with small ‘V’ Joints formed straight and regular at
all junctions with other materials.
Where practical each coat in any one plane shall be finished in one operation.
When undercoats are thoroughly set and dry apply next coat. All rendered surfaces shall be carried
up at least 100mm above the level of false ceilings.
Carry out work during suitable weather conditions and alleviate effects of uneven suction.
Protect all openings to prevent draughts. All finished work shall be protected against damage. In
the event of accidental damage the work shall be repaired immediately by competent tradesmen and
as directed by the SO.
Cement render surfaces shall be kept moist by regular spraying for seven (7) days after application.
FPW/3
13. COMPOSITION OF CEMENT AND SAND (1:4) PLAIN FACE
The cement and sand (1:4) plain face shall be mixed on c lean boards in a sheltered place or in a
batch mixer and shall consist of one part of cement to four parts of sand mixed with an approved
plasticiser used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and applied in two coats.
The first coat to approved thickness of rough plastering and shall be cross scored to receive the
second coat which shall be to thickness in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications steel
trowelled smooth finish internally and wood float finish externally.
All external brick walls and concrete surfaces flush with brick walls are to have minimum 20mm thick
cement and sand plain face. Internal thickness of plaster to SO’s approval.
All exposed concrete soffits and sides and soffit of beams are to have 13mm thick cement and sand
plain face.
Refer to "Painting and Decorating" for emulsion and polyurethane paint finishes.
All arrises of external angles to internal and external plastered walls shall be formed with approved
angle bead to be selected and approved by the SO.
14. TILE ADHESIVE BACKING AND BEDDING TO CERAMIC, HOMOGENEOUS WALL

TILES
Where described to be bedded, the ceramic or homogeneous wall tiles shall be bedded with Tile Adhesive
mortar admixture to be selected and approved by the SO. Backing to make up thickness shall have Tile
Adhesive admixture used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
Tile joints - exceeding 6mm to be grouted with Tile Adhesive Quarry Grout mixed with Tile
Adhesive Flexible Grout Additive to be selected and approved by the SO.
- less than 6mm to be grouted with Tile Adhesive Colour Grout mixed with Tile
Adhesive Flexible Grout Additive to be selected and approved by the SO.
Tiles shall be bedded in 3mm Tile Adhesive.
Refer to the Specification for “FINISHINGS-FLOOR” Item 19 for approved type of tile adhesive.
All Tile Adhesive System products above described shall be obtained the Contractor’s Specialist
Supplier to be selected and approved by the SO and mixed and installed all in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's printed instructions.
.
15. RECESSED EXTERNAL PLASTER JOINTS
Recessed external plaster joints shall be formed to the sizes as detailed on the SO's drawings. The
joints shall be formed out of approved proprietory PVC plastic recessed formers permanently fixed
to be selected and approved by the SO.
Joints shall be formed square with sharp and true arrises. A ny damaged recessed joints shall be
replaced and made good.
The Contractor is deemed to have included the cost of all recessed external plaster joints and
horizontal / vertical groove lines including painting as specific in his unit rates.
FPW/4
16. GLAZED WALL TILING

The white glazed and coloured/patterned wall tiling shall be first quality, full glazed tiles, true to shape and
free from all blemishes, complete with all necessary rounded edge and special tiles to BS 1281 or other
The tiles shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water before fixing.
The tiles are to be bedded in and pointed in Tile Adhesive or other approved bedding and colour
grout as previously specified.
The glazed wall tiling is to be neatly cut at all junctions with walls, etc. and is to be neatly fitted
around all obstructions such as pipes, etc.
Where applicable provide approved white glazed and coloured /patterned tiling to walls of approved
sizes and thickness with special decorative tiles to match all as shown on dr awings or indicated in
Schedule of Finishings.
17. CERAMIC OR HOMOGENEOUS WALL TILES

The different types of ceramic or homogeneous wall tiles shall be Supplied and Delivered to the
site by the Supplier and subsequently to be laid by the Supplier or the Contractor's tiler to be
Overall thickness of the tiled existing walls inclusive of tile, bedding and rendering shall be to thickness
approved by the SO. Where the tiled walls are required to be thickened, these shall be described.
Wall tiles shall be of approved manufacture and obtained from approved Suppliers with sizes,
shapes, colours and patterns to be selected and approved by the SO. All future deliveries shall be
equal to the approved samples selected.
All ceramic or homogeneous wall tiles used shall comply with SS 301 (1985 Specifications for
Ceramic Floor and Wall Tiles).
Bedding and tile joints shall be in Tile Adhesive bedding and colour grout as previously described.
Rates shall include for the different types of tiles to be supplied and delivered to the site in good
condition.
The Contractor whilst building up his unit rates shall ADD for:-
i) forming to patterns and wastage
ii) labour unloading, stacking, hoisting, distributing and double handling
iii) labour, material in checking, sorting, reboxing or recrating
iv) profit
Science Rooms, Toilets and cleaner’s closets shall be tiled in ceramic wall tiles up to 2200mm high
with plaster and emulsion paint to continue above.
Splashbacks in approved ceramic wall tiling fixed and bedded and pointed as previously specified
shall be provided on all walls where sinks, wash troughs, water coolers/water dispensers or where
washing appliances and facilities (e.g. bib taps fixed to walls, etc.) are installed against the walls.
Tiling shall be up to 450mm high commencing from top of the appliance and for the full width of
the appliance plus (+) projection of 300mm on each side.
.1 Such areas but not limited to are:-
.1 Pantry walls.
.2 All washing facilities, water coolers or any other water dispensers.
.3 Classroom sinks.
Cleaning with acid IS PROHIBITED and the Contractor is advised to clean sections of the laid
tiles as work proceeds.
On completion the tiles are to be cleaned and buffed to manufacturer's recommendation.
FPW/5
18. CERAMIC WALL TILES

Wall tiles shall be of metric modular size.
Joints shall be of 2mm width (±1mm tolerance).
All tiles shall be complete with all corner angles, matched coved skirting tiles or other purpose made
accessory tiles.
All wall tiles shall conform with the minimum requirement of SS 57:1989 and SS 301:1985 for
geometrical characteristics and other technical characteristics not specified herein. The Contractor
must state the country of origin / manufacture for the tiles offered and is required to pass the glazing
test under the Standard.
Wall tiles shall be selected grade colour-matched first quality glazed wall ceramic tiles including
special colours to be used for forming patterns.
Size : 300 x 300mm and or 300 x 600mm
Water absorption in weight : 5% maximum
Scratch hardness of surface (Moh’s Scale) : 5 (minimum)
Colour fastness : Tiles shall be light-fast
Chemical Resistance : Macroscopic surface examination shall not
reveal any visible change
Resistance to staining : Class 1 (Minimum)
Where homogeneous floor tiles are to be used, the polished and unpolished homogeneous floor tile
specifications previously described shall apply.
19. TILES FOR MAINTENANCE STOCK
Supply and deliver only ceramic wall tiles all as specified and as approved by the SO.
Percentage Remarks
for
Area Applied Maintenance Min Max
Up to 300m² 2% NA 6m²
Over 300 to 1,200m² 1% 6m² 12m²
Over 1,200 to 8,000m² 1/4% 12m² 20m²
Over 8,000 to 20,000m² 1/8% 20m² 25m²
Over 20,000m² 1/10% 25m² 40m²
Maintenance stock for wall and floor tiles shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the pricing of
the respective wall and floor tiles required in this tender and deemed to be included in the Contact
provisions.
The maintenance stock shall be properly protected and upon t he direction of the Superintending
Officer, be passed on to the school principal for keeping. C ertified vouchers of the tiles by the
recipient shall be forwarded to the SO for record.
FPW/6
20. LIQUID APPLIED FLEXIBLE CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
The Contractor shall allow for the liquid applied flexible cementitious waterproof membrane to be applied
to the internal masonery walls of the shower cubicle prior to application of tile finishes and shall be
supplied and applied by Specialist to be selected and approved by the SO all as described in Specifications
of "Finishings - Floor".
21. ACCESS PANELS
300 x 300mm Wall access panels to ducts, etc. shall be formed with the similar wall finishes to be
installed on approved mountings and supports to be approved by the SO and designed and fixed by
the Contractor.
22. DRYNESS OF SUBSTRATE PRIOR TO MOUNTING AND I NSTALLATION OF

FINISHES, FURNITURE, FITTINGS, ACCESSORIES, ETC.
The Contractor shall ensure that all plastered surfaces and tiled surfaces or surfaces that is mounted
on masonery (substrate) are perfectly dry prior to the mounting of furniture, finishes, and fittings.
In the event the finishes, furniture, fittings, accessories, etc. become mouldy, fungus infested, rot and
deteriorate due to dampness of the substrate. The Contractor shall immediately replace the affected
materials at his own cost.
It shall be the onus of the Contractor to demonstrate and prove to the SO that the substrate is dry
before installation of the above-mentioned works.
23. FINISHED SURFACES
Care must be taken by the Contractor to prevent any staining of the completed wall finishes or tiled
surfaces with cement mortar or other foreign matter. Tiled surfaces are to be thoroughly rinsed with clean
water as the work progresses to avoid setting of excess mortar.
Cleaning with acid on tiled surfaces IS PROHIBITED.
Buff all tiled surfaces prior to handing over of the Project.
24. SHOP DRAWINGS
For all ceramic and homogeneous, slate, marble or granite tiling work, etc. the Contractor shall
provide, for the approval of the SO, shop drawings showing typical installation details, patterns,
joint lines, setting out lines, etc. Patterns shall be based on concept drawings provided by the SO.
25. FINISHES ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING
All plastering and wall tiling shall finish 100mm above ceiling datum level of all suspended ceilings
to be installed and shall finish in a neat straight edge.
Exposed brick walls above suspended ceiling shall receive one base coat of cement mortar plaster.
FPW/7
26. DELIVERY AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS
Deliver all manufactured materials in the original package, containers, or bundles and bearing the
name of the manufacturer and the brand. E xcept as otherwise specified herein, the mixing,
installation and application of manufactured material shall be in strict accordance with the printed
directions of the manufacturer.
Protect plaster and all cementitious materials against dampness until used. Store materials off the ground,
under cover and away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces.
27. SAMPLES
Provide samples at Contractor’s own cost as required for SO’s selection and approval and remove
when not required.
28. PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP
The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain all protection necessary to preserve the work of
other trades free from damage due to lathing and plastering operations.
Remove all rubbish, debris, scaffold and tools upon completion and leave area clean of all plaster.
Do not bury or leave plaster on ground anywhere on site.
FPW/8
FINISHINGS - SUSPENDED CEILING
1. ALUMINIUM STRIP CEILING
Aluminium strip ceiling in school hall and other areas as indicated shall be stove enamelled
perforated strip with square edges in 100mm or 200mm (width) x 15m m (depth) module, with
20mm groove complete with sound absorbent inlay.
The ceiling material thickness shall be of minimum 0.8mm, cut to the required length.
The perforation shall consist of 2mm diameter holes at 5mm centres, achieving an opening of 15%.
The colour of the aluminium ceiling is to be .selected by the SO.
The sound absorbent inlay shall have a minimum absorption coefficient of 0.6 at 500 Hz. frequency.
The entire ceiling system shall be complete with all fixing and edging accessories according to
manufacturer's details and specifications.
Contractor shall co-ordinate and prepares shop-drawings of reflected ceiling plans incorporating all
building and M&E services/installation for the SO's approval before commencement of work.
2. CEILING GRID SYSTEM AND CEILING BOARD
Exposed Grid System
Generally
The ceiling suspension system to be used under this contract shall be heavy duty exposed grid
system.
The system shall be roll formed, perforated, press formed and cut to length on a continuous
manufacturing operation according to BS 2994 or other approved equivalent.
The system shall comply to ASTM C-635 or other approved equivalent as heavy duty or other
approved equivalent and shall be capable of carrying a load not less than 23.8 K g/m without the
mid-span deflection exceeding 1/360.
The system shall also satisfy 1 hour fire rating when tested in accordance to BS 475 Part 23 or other
approved equivalent
Sufficient evidence of the compliance to the standards must be submitted to the SO for approval
before materials are used at site.
The body of the grid system shall be made of hot dipped galvanised steel conforming to the
specifications of BS 2989 and/or JIS 3302 or other approved equivalent with zero spangle zinc
coating of not less than 180 gm/m2. The tensile strength of the steel used shall be minimum 270
N/mm2 and the yield strength shall not be less than 210 N/mm2.
The exposed flange of the grid system shall be 14mm width and capped with precoated aluminium
or steel strip conforming to BS 1470: 1987 or other approved equivalent. The finish applied to the
metal shall be factory coated, polyester of dry film thickness not less than 15 microns and
conforming to BS 4800 or other approved equivalent.
FSC/1
CEILING GRID SYSTEM AND CEILING BOARD (CONT’D.)
Exposed Grid System (Cont’d.)
Main Tee
Main Tee shall be 39mm high and nominal width of 14mm and of double web construction with
rectangular bulb. Both ends of the main tee shall have integral splices which can be joined firmly to
form a continuous line. The splices shall not be separated with a force not exceeding 68 kg. Hanger
holes shall be round and not smaller than 6mm diameter and shall be punched on the bulb of the
main tee. Hanger holes punched on the body of the tee is not acceptable. The distance between
hanger holes shall no be less than 75mm. Cross tee slots shall be accurately punched on the body so
that the joggled end of the cross tee can flush to the main tee. The slots shall be 150mm between
both end splices and 300mm thereafter. There shall be a fire expansion slot occurring at 225mm
from one end of the main tee to provide relief of thermal expansion during fire.
Cross Tee
Cross tee shall be 38mm high and nominal width of 14mm and of double web construction. The end
splices shall be an integral part of the tee section and of the snap lock type.
Wall Anqle
Wall Angle shall be galvanised steel fully covered with alumimium on both faces (painted steel) of
[19mm x 19mm] / [24mm x 24mm] or shadow angle [14mm x 24mm] / [14mm x 19mm] / [24mm x
24mm] with recess of 9mm x 9mm.
Hanger rod
Hanger rod shall be a proprietary assembly system comprising of hanger rods and adjustable spring
clip. The assembly shall be capable of carrying a load not less than 320 kg w ithout deflection or
snapping.
The hanger rod shall be galvanised steel rod in 4mm diameter in straight length with hooks bended
by machine. Site straightening and bending of wire coil using hand drill tool will not be acceptable
and will be rejected.
The adjustable spring clip shall be double action type construction made from tempered spring steel.
It shall be capable of springing back to its original shape with force applied against its wings. The
clip shall be coated with phosphate or other anti-rust coating to prevent corrosion.
Calcium Silicate Ceiling
Supply and install approved 6mm thick calcium silicate ceiling board size 600 x 600mm (by default)
or 600 x 1200mm as indicated on the drawings complete with approved reveal tee edge aluminum
suspension systems with clips, rods hangers, etc. nailed or screwed to timber joists or bolted to RC
slab soffit.
Supply and install 6mm thick calcium silicate board border ceiling with galvanised steel suspension
system or fix to ceiling joists. The joints and seams between plaster boards are to be sealed and
finished flush and continuous.
FSC/2
Mineral Fibre Board Ceiling
Supply and install approved 15mm thick mineral fibre ceiling boards of size 600 x 600 mm (by default)
or 600 x 1200 mm as indicated on t he drawings complete with approved reveal tee edge suspension
system with clips, rod hangers nailed or screwed to timber joists or bolted to rc slab soffit. The technical
specification for mineral fibre ceiling boards is as following: -
Technical Specifications
The selected products are non-combustible and sound absorbing and insulation value.
Composition : It consists of inorganic fibre and organic binder incorporating a water-

repellent additive.
Surface : Polyvinyl acetate emulsion paint.
Size : 15mm x 600mm x 600mm

Edge : Revealed Narrow Reveal
Noise Reduction : 0.6 -0.7 Coefficient (Nrc)
Sound Transmission : 40-44 Coefficient (STC)
Flame Spread : Class A (0.25)
Fibre Hazard : Class 0
Density : 350kg/ m3
Light Reflectance : LR Grade 1; above 75%
Humidity Resistance : Test the tiles to 20°C at 65% relative humidity for 24 hours and at 25°C
at 95% relative humidity for 24 hours repeated twice. Sagging over
diagonal must not exceed 2.03mm.
Non Combustibility : To meet BS 476 Part 6: 1989 & Part 7: 1997 or other approved
equivalent.
Suspension Grid : Either 24mm width heavy duty exposed ceiling grid or 14mm width
heavy duty grids.
Exterior Usage : Universal board clips will be required to prevent uplifting of ceiling
panels.
Flush Plaster Board Ceiling
Supply and install approved 12mm thick flush glass fibre reinforced gypsum plaster board with
galvanized steel suspension system or fix ceiling joists. The joints and seams between plaster boards
are to be sealed and finished flush and continuous.
FSC/3
Acoustical Absorptive and Reflective Lay-In Suspended Ceiling
Where the exposed grid suspended ceiling boards are described to be installed as acoustic, they shall
be the pure stonewool core board type to be supplied and installed by a Specialist to be selected and
approved by the SO.
• 600 x 600 x 15mm (by default) or 600 x 1200m m x 15mm as indicated on t he drawings
acoustic lay-in board with pure stonewool of density 60 – 100kg/m³ core with prefinished
non-woven tissue to exposed surfaces.
The tiles shall be fixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions with 24mm
exposed grids in hot-dipped galvanized steel finished on exposed surfaces with matt white plastic
coated metal capping.
The whole installation shall be suspended on proprietary 4mm diameter adjustable hot-dipped
galvanised steel suspension rods each with 2 Nos. holding down clips
Price of the acoustic ceiling shall be deemed to include for the published standard designs and prior
to installation of the suspended ceilings, samples of the types of suspended ceiling to be used shall
be submitted to be selected and approved by the SO.
Pure Stonewool Core Board

Panels to be Class “O” as per BS 476 part 6 and 7 or other approved equivalent and panel < 20mm
thick shall conform to minimum 30 minutes fire resistance as per BS 476 part 21, 22 and 23 or other
approved equivalent
Will not melt in temperatures equal or exceeding 1000°C.
Thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.034 λW/m°C (DIN 52612) or other approved equivalent
standard.
Be used in rooms up to RH 100% and temperature up to 40°C as per AT-15-3485/98, point 2 or other
100% moisture resistant at temperature of 1° to 45°C with no visible sagging or warping.
Minimum 87% diffuse light reflectivity (DIN 5036, Part 3) or other approved equivalent.
STI (Speech Transmission Index) minimum 0.65.
SPL (Sound Pressure Level) minimum 54dB with source level of 65dB at 1 metre away.
Original painted edges with RFN-2 or other approved equivalent paint type wet weight minimum
150g/m² to safe guard acoustical properties.
Manufactured from inorganic materials and components and not disintegrate.
Shall not support growth of fungus, mould or bacteria.
Exposed face in non-woven tissue type A120EXZA322 or other approved equivalent connected to the
core with approved type glue or other approved with wet weight maximum 75g/m². Non-woven tissue to
be painted white with RFN-1 or other approved equivalent acoustic paint maximum wet weight
380g/m² for absorptive and 430g/m² for reflective.
Back of panel in non-woven tissue type SH55S or other approved equivalent connected to core
material with proprietory type glue wet weight maximum 75g/m².
Ceiling panels to be easy cleaning with ordinary cleaning agents dissolved in water.
FSC/4
Pure Stonewool Core Board (Cont’d.)

When suspended 200mm from underside of slab sound absorption coefficient (as) as per
ISO-354 or other approved equivalent as follows with maximum deviation +/- 0.03 from values
below.
ABSORPTIVE
Frequency (Hz) as Frequency (Hz) as Frequency (Hz) as
50 0.12 250 0.78 1250 0.85
63 0.12 315 0.89 1600 0.86
80 0.19 400 0.82 2000 0.85
100 0.48 500 0.80 2500 0.83
125 0.35 630 0.79 3150 0.75
160 0.66 800 0.76 4000 0.72
200 0.75 1000 0.75 5000 0.67
REFLECTIVE
Frequency (Hz) as Frequency (Hz) as Frequency (Hz) as
100 0.29 400 0.54 1600 0.50
125 0.53 500 0.60 2000 0.45
160 0.51 630 0.65 2500 0.39
200 0.66 800 0.60 3150 0.37
250 0.62 1000 0.58 4000 0.26
315 0.56 1250 0.54 5000 0.20
To achieve T20 at 1000 Hz of 0.8 seconds, with +/- 0.05 seconds tolerance for absorptive and 0.7
seconds with +/- 0.05 seconds tolerance for reflective.
To achieve T30 at 1000 Hz of 0.85 seconds, with +/- 0.05 seconds tolerance for absorptive and 0.65
seconds with +/- 0.05 seconds tolerance for reflective.
Average room Reverberation Time in frequency range 125 - 2000 Hz of 0.9 seconds with +/- 0.05
seconds tolerance for absorption and 0.7 seconds with +/- 0.05 seconds tolerance for reflective
ceiling.
Room Reverberation Time T20 and T30 in each frequency with maximum tolerance 0.05 for each
value:-
ABSORPTIVE
Frequency 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
(Hz)
T20 (Sec) 1.35 1.00 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.70
T30 (Sec) 1.40 1.00 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75
REFLECTIVE
Frequency 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
(Hz)
T20 (Sec) 0.85 0.75 0.70 0.70 0.60 0.60
T30 (Sec) 0.85 0.75 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.60
FSC/5
3. ACOUSTIC CELLULAR SPRAY
The portion of walls and ceiling required to be treated with the cellular spray as detailed by Acoustic
Specialist having the proven track record that met the target performance as set out by the project.
Target : RT 60 @ 2.0 seconds measured at site by independent acousticians.
Note : 80% coverage with 38mm thick treatment @ Underside of RC slab or soffit of Roof.
Hertz 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC

NC Values 0.15 0.40 0.90 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.90
Note : 65% coverage with 50mm thick treatment @ Side Walls.
Hertz 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC

NC Values 0.15 0.50 0.90 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.90
(ABOVE data can be used by any acoustic engineers in their performance calculations and design).
Noise Reduction Coefficient test reports shall meet and in accordance with ASTM C-423 or other
approved equivalent with Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens during Sound Absorption
Test in accordance with ASTM E-795 or other approved equivalent.
The materials shall have choice of uniform and homogeneous colour for aesthetic values.
The materials shall be non-combustible construction materials in accordance with British Standard
BS 476 Part 4 : 1970 or other approved equivalent approved and certified by a registered Singapore
certification body and shall be non-toxic and non-asbestos in compliance with EPA 40 CFR Part 248
or other approved equivalent.
The materials shall be non-corrosive in accordance with UMB-80 or other approved equivalent with
base materials shall not contain any phenol agents or resins as used for binder in conventional
insulations. C ompliance of non-corrosion shall be tested in accordance to ASTM C-739 or other
approved equivalent which must demonstrate no perforations for all metal surfaces.
4. ADDITIONAL STEEL SUPPORTS
Prices for the suspended ceiling above described shall be deemed to include for the provision of
approved additional steel supports painted with two coats of zinc chromate paint fixed to underside
of steel roof trusses to support the suspended ceilings applicable to the top-most floor where the
roofing is a pitched roof to be designed, fabricated supplied and installed by the Contractor and
certified by his own PE.
Method of fixing suspended ceiling hangers rods and accessories shall be designed and endorsed by
the Contractor’s PE and shall be submitted to the SO for review and comments, before installation.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his tender prices for any “PULL-OUT” tests
required to be carried out to SO’s approval.
FSC/6
5. PROPRIETORY SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ALL SUSPENDED CEILINGS
Location and spacing of the hangers shall be proposed by the Contractor and marked up on t he
ceiling plan drawings for the SO’s approval.
The Contractor shall prepare a mock-up of 2800mm by 2400mm ceiling grid complete with fixings
and accessories for the SO’s approval.
Prior to installation of the ceiling , the SO shall brief the site supervisor and Contractor on the
inspections required for the system and make checks on other system components like M&E fixtures
to ascertain that these are independent of the suspended ceiling system.
The SO shall prepare a ch ecklist to ascertain that the various fixings and accessories have been
inspected for safety during supervision. The range of tests conducted before and after installation
shall also be recorded in the checklist. This checklist is to be filed on site and made available for
verification and inspection when necessary. The checklist shall be duly signed by the Resident
Technical Officer and submitted to the SO’s representative to acknowledge that 100% check has
been conducted.
Ceiling boards shall be installed only after the SO or his representative had inspected, tested and
verified that all the ceiling hangers had been properly fixed and the ceiling rods had been properly
installed in accordance with the approved ceiling plan above described.
Ceiling boards installed without inspection of the ceiling suspension system shall be removed and
reinstalled at the Contractor’s own expense.
The whole of the proprietory suspension system design incorporating the SO’s comments shall
solely remain the responsibility of the Contractor.
6. WALL FINISHES ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING
All wall finishes such as plastering and wall tiling shall be tiled 100mm above ceiling datum and
finished in a neat straight edge.
7. SAMPLES
Provide samples at Contractor's own cost as required for SO's selection and approval and demolish
8. SHOP DRAWINGS
For all work in relation to suspended ceiling construction, the Contractor shall submit shop
fabrication drawings for approval before commencement of any work/fabrication. S uch shop
drawings must be clearly annotated and drawn to facilitate checking including design calculations.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate and prepare shop-drawings of reflected ceiling plans incorporating
all building and M&E Services installation for the SO’s approval before commencement of work.
FSC/7
10. DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED CEILING WORKS TO PREVENT

PROGRESSIVE COLLAPSE
a) Suspended ceilings used in general interior applications shall comply to the following
standards.
i) British/European Standard (BS EN 13964:2014 – Suspended ceilings – Requirements and

test methods); or
ii) Australian/New Zealand Standard (AS/NZS 2785:2000 Suspended ceilings – Design and
installation); or
iii) Other approved equivalent.
b) Adequate ‘openings’ or ‘breaks’ shall be provided in the suspended ceiling to allow discharge
of water, in case of pipe leaks leading to water accumulation in the ceiling.
c) The supporting frame for the suspended ceiling shall not be continuous over a long span; the
span shall not be more than 12 metres span. There shall be a separation between each of the
supporting frames as to mitigate the risk of large scale progressive collapse of the suspended
ceiling.
FSC/8
FSC/9
ACOUSTIC WALL LINING
1. SUBMITTALS
Shop drawings
Shop drawings shall be submitted to show details of construction, assembly, erection and anchorage
for approval by the SO.
Samples
Submit two (2) 500mm x 500mm square panel samples.
Manufacturer’s Literature
Submit technical data and installation instructions for SO’s approval.
2. WORK INCLUDED
Supply and install acoustic wall lining to walls of the Band Room, Music Rooms, Dance Studio,
Indoor Sports Hall (ISH), PAL Rooms, Performing Arts Studio (at Library) and “Stand-Alone”, etc.
and other areas as specified on drawings.
3. ACOUSTIC WALL PANEL
This acoustical seamless wall lining shall be non-combustible perforated glass fibre reinforced
perforated gypsum plasterboard, free from harmful substances such as asbestos and formaldehyde
minimum requirement is STC 50.
The wall lining shall be seamless perforated “design panel” system with an approved metal furring
system to achieve an NRC value of 0.85.
The gypsum plasterboard shall comply to the following requirements:-

Composition : high grade glass fibre reinforced gypsum
Size : 900 x 2700mm or 1200 x 2400mm
Thickness : 12.5mm
Acoustic Backing : A grey acoustic felt of viscose and cellulose backing bonded to
the back of the panel and a layer of 50mm thick (60 kg/m³)
mineral wool infill.
Perforation : Micro M1 (3mm square perforations at 8.33mm centres with
11% open area).
Sound Absorption (NRC) :
Frequency (Hz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
Sound Absorption Coefficient 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.70 0.60 0.60
Light Reflectance : LRI 75% (DIN 5036, Part 3)
Flame Spread : Class 1
Fire Protection : BS 476 : Part 4 : 1970 – Non-combustibility or approved
equivalent
BS 476 : Part 6 & 7 – Class O or other approved equivalent
Surface Finish : To be painted on site with emulsion paint
Edge : Tapered edges on long side
Weight : 8.50 kg/m²
Moisture Resistance : Maximum deflection 1 : 350 (90% RH)
Joint Treatment : Joints to be taped and filled with joint compound and joint tape.
AWL/1
4. HIGH DENSITY ≥ 551Kg/M3 ACOUSTIC WOOD WOOL CEMENT BOARD WALL PANEL
SYSTEM (TO THE INDOOR SPORTS HALL)
The wood wool acoustic decorative wall panel shall comprise of 65% long, strong wood fibers and 35%
from mineral binders – cement. The shredded ±1.5mm wood wool fibers from plantations; hemlock
spruce are mineralized by binding both the wood fibers and white cement under pressure to create a stable,
resistant, compact and long lasting structure achieving a high density of ≥551kg/m3. It shall be free from
toxic, asbestos, TVOC and formaldehyde and shall be wet and dry rot resistance, vermin and mildew
resistance, and not vulnerable to attack by termites or vermin nor any biological decay.
The acoustic panel shall be installed with 50mm thick 80kg/m3 rockwool infill and approved galvanized
metal furring system to achieve NRC value of 0.92. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the
manufacture’s recommendations and instructions.
Acoustic panel shall be in natural finish.
Due to the wood log from plantation, color and texture of wood fiber deviates naturally.
Material Technical Data:
Product Characteristics Test Standard

Test Result
or other approved equivalent standards
Panel Warranty According Manufacturer Details 10 Years

Fibers width ±1.5mm
600mm x 600mmx15mm
600mm x 1200mmx25mm
Panel dimensions
600mm x 1820mmx25mm
910mm x 1802mmx20mm
Panel Thickness 15mm, 20mm,25mm

Average mass ≥12kg/m2
Average density ±551kg/3
Binder Cement
5mm Chamfered Edges on all 4
Edge Profile
sides
Inclusive of Spray painting by
Colour Specialist Supplier to SO’s
Selection
NRC based on Proposed
ASTM C423 0.95
System
Thermal Conductivity CNS 7333 (1981) Modified 0.08w/ m degree k
Flexural Load CNS 3904 (1986) 650 N
Deflection CNS 3904 (1986) <8mm
TUV SUD PSB Singapore
Certificate of Conformity CLS2 13 07 80782 001

Class 0
BS 476 Part 6
Fire Test
Class 1
BS 476 Part 7
NIEA R201.13C Non toxic
Safety Test NIEA R401.2TT CNS 13970 Non asbestos
ASTM D5116-97 Non TVOC and formaldehyde
AWL/2
Material Technical Data (Cont’d):
Product Characteristics Test Standard Test Result

or other approved equivalent standards
Sound absorption 0.42 αw (without insulation wool)

ASTM C23
(20mm Panel) 0.92 αw (with insulation wool)
Sound absorption 0.46 αw (without insulation wool)
ASTM C23
(25mm Panel) 0.96 αw (with insulation wool)
Green Label Singapore
Green label certificate Approved green product
(Singapore Environmental Council)
5. JOB CONDITIONS
All rooms are to be water tight i.e. walls, windows and roof are completed. Any M & E installation
such as conduits to walls must be installed.
Installation and fixing accessories shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and specifications and to be approved by the SO with interior installation carried
out in a clean and dry environment at least 4 weeks after the completion of plastering and screeding
works. The panels shall be cut by circular saw, jigsaw, or table saw and with the panels secured
firmly to the C-channels
6. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Only the backing battens, tracks and glass fibre butts are to be delivered directly to site for
installation. Fabric shall only be delivered to site when the work is ready for installation.
7. EXECUTION
All installation work shall be undertaken by approved and trained installers. The track profile shall
be fastened to the metal stud frame by means of screws.
The acoustic lining shall be cut to the size of the panel and fixed in place with the perimeter frame. If the
panels are too large, the linings shall be held in place by means of glue or hold-down pins.
The fabric shall be mounted by use of special application tool that inserts the fabric into the jaws of
the track profile. Once fitted, the fabric shall completely cover the area with no braiding or cover
strips. The fabric shall not be installed until:-
a) The space had been enclosed, weathered tight and dry;
b) Painting is completed and wall base and floor covering installed;
c) Painting is completed and wall base and floor covering are installed;
d) All adjacent and related work of other trades had been completed; with air gaps, cracks or
holes in the substrate are sealed;
f) All M&E installation such as conduits to walls had been installed.

g) In situation where electrical services are to be concealed behind the slats / acoustic wall panel
with switches, light fixtures, etc. on the face of the acoustic wall panels, careful consideration
must be given to the arrangements for electrical earthing of the fixed channels & slats /
acoustic wall panel by licensed electrical contractor.
AWL/3
8. REVERBERATION TIME (RT) TEST FOR MPH AND THERAPY ROOMS BY

SPECIALIST
The Contractor at their own cost shall employ a Specialist approved by the SO to conduct an on-site
Reverberation Time (RT) Test to be carried out to the completed Multi-Purpose Hall (MPH) and all
the designated Therapy Rooms. The test result for MPH must be less than mid-frequency
reverberation time Tmf of 2.0 seconds.
RT required test values for the Therapy Rooms shall be determined by the Contractor’s acoustic
Specialist subject to SO’s approval.
All RT tests to be carried out with airconditioning switched on and with all windows and doors
closed.
5 no. copies of the signed report to be submitted to the SO.
9. PROTECTION - AFTER INSTALLATION
Installation of fabric (where applicable) shall only be carried out after painting of areas above the
works. This is to prevent soiling to the fabric.
Polythene sheets shall be used to protect lower portion of the fabric panels after the fabric
installation.
AWL/4
ROOFING
1.0 FLAT ROOF SYSTEM
.1 General
.1 Scope
a) The roofing works shall consist of the supply and installation of all equipment,
labour and materials, flashings, drains, pipe collars, down pipes and ancillary
fittings, which are "indispensably necessary" to ensure that the roofing system
is fit for its purpose.
b) The roofing works shall be carried out in strict accordance to the Manufacturer's
method statement for preparation and installation.
c) All surface preparation, protective layers for membrane, cement additives and
ancillary accessories that could not possibly be indicated in the drawings, but
are deemed necessary to the proprietary system shall be deemed to be inclusive
in the works.
d) The Contractor and the Specialist sub-contractor is to ensure that all surfaces are
ready, properly cleaned and prepared for the application of the water proofing
system and shall conduct a joint site inspection of the roof.
e) The Specialist Sub-contractor is to report to the Contractor any conditions which
prevent the proper installation of the roofing system.
.2 Specialist Sub-Contractors
a) A Specialist sub-contractor/ firm is to be engaged by the Contractor to carry out

the waterproofing works. The Specialist sub-contractor/ firm shall be familiar
with the specified waterproofing system and have skilled workmen to carry out
the works.
b) The terms "specialist" as used in the specification shall mean a firm of
established reputation, which is regularly engaged in, and which maintains a
regular force of workmen skilled in handling and installing the roofing system
specified.
c) The Specialist sub-contractor shall submit the following documentation in order
to obtain SO's approval:-
- BCA registration certificate
- Track record indicating a list of 5 projects using similar system within
the past 3 years.
d) The Contractor shall ensure that a qualified supervisor from the Specialist sub-
contractor is on site to provide "standing supervision" of the application of the
waterproofing works and submit written evidence of satisfactory work
completion. The qualified supervisor shall not be part of the workmen team.
e) The Main Contractor and the Specialist sub-contractor is responsible for joints,
lap details, waterproofing collars around penetrations, etc.
ROF/1
ROOFING
FLAT ROOF SYSTEM (CONT’D.)
General (Cont’d.)
.3 Method Statement, Samples, Shop-Drawings & Test Reports
The following are to be submitted to the SO for approval prior to commencement of

construction:-
a) Samples
- Materials for whole roofing system: waterproofing membrane,
insulation, adhesives, additives, protective felt and any other integrated
component.
- Manufacturer's specifications for the above.
- Manufacturer's method statement including preparation of surface and
material, installation, protection and rectification.
b) Test Reports
Refer to individual material specifications below

c) Shop Drawings
- Installation details for all systems

- Interfacing details at junctions to openings, parapet walls, upstands,
plinths, penetrations, scupper drains, flashings and interfacing with other
works such as metal roofs, rainwater outlets, lightning conductor, etc.
.4 Mock-Up
The Contractor and Specialists sub-contractor shall prepare a mock up for the SO's
approval prior to commencement of the works. The mock up shall be located at
critical junctions such as penetrations, rainwater down pipes, plinths and drains.
.5 On-Site Water Test for Entire Roof
a) Prior to the installation of the insulation material, the Contractor's Specialist shall
conduct a ponding test with minimum 50mm water depth for a period of 48 hours
to ensure 100% water-tightness.
b) Drains shall be plugged and temporary barriers and conc. kerbs shall be
placed to contain the water at the test site.
c) In areas where leaks are observed during the test period, such areas shall be
rectified. Rectified areas shall be retested until such retreated areas pass the
water test.
d) The water run off shall fall to the gutters and rainwater outlets.
e) The Contractor shall rectify any ponding areas prior to installation of the
insulation material.
f) On satisfactory completion of the test, the Contractor shall break up a nd remove
any kerb or temporary barrier and clear all debris.
ROF/2
ROOFING
General (Cont’d.)
.6 Post-finishing ponding test
A second ponding test shall be carried out with minimum 50mm water depth for a
period of 48 hours to ensure 100% water-tightness after completion of the roof
finishing works.
.7 Performance Certification
The Contractor shall submit a certification from his Specialist that the roofing
system is 100% watertight and the test reports of the ponding test are to be submitted
to the SO.
.2 Cement Sand Waterproof Panel Roof
.1 Insulated Flat Roofs
The waterproofing of the reinforced concrete flat roofs, staircase roofs and lift motor
room roofs shall be a fully bonded Inverted Roof system as described hereunder:-
a) Cement and sand (1:3) screed minimum 25 mm thick lay to falls.
b) 2.2 mm ethylene-vinyl-acetate fleece backed waterproofing membrane.
c) 6 mm thick under-screed drainage mat throughout.
d) 50 mm thick extruded polystyrene insulation.
e) Protective felt.
f) 1000 x 1000 x 50 mm thick cement and sand (1:3) cast in-situ panels
reinforced with BRC 3315 or other approved equivalent.
g) Joint sealants - the crack-inducer joints (V- grooves) and expansion joints shall
be sealed with polysulphide sealants.
.2 Insulated Roof Terraces

b) 2.2mm ethylene-vinyl-acetate fleece backed waterproofing membrane.
c) 6mm thick under-screed drainage mat throughout.
d) 50mm thick extruded polystyrene insulation.
e) Protective felt.
f) Cement and sand (1:3) protection / bedding screed minimum 50 mm thick
reinforced with or other approved equivalent 3315 with finishes as indicated in
the drawings.
.3 Non-Insulated Decks

c) 6mm thick under-screed drainage mat throughout.
ROF/3
ROOFING
Cement Sand Waterproof Panel Roof (Cont’d.)
.3 Non-Insulated Decks (Cont’d)
d) Cement and sand (1:3) protection / bedding screed minimum 50 mm thick

reinforced with BRC 3315 or other approved equivalent with finishes as
indicated in the drawings.
.4 Landscape Decks and Planter Boxes (Intensive Green Roof)

c) 30 mm thick sub-soil drainage module
d) Geotextile filter fabric.
e) 50 mm thick coarse washed sand.
f) Growth media to S.O. requirement.
.5 Landscape Decks (Extensive Green Roof)
a) Cement and sand (1:3) screed minimum 25 mm thick lay to falls

b) 2.2mm ethylene-vinyl-acetate fleece backed waterproofing membrane
c) 23mm thick sub-soil water-retention and drainage tray
d) Geotextile filter fabric
e) Lightweight soil-less growth media to S.O. requirement
.6 Material
Roof system shall be composite built up r oofing system on a reinforced concrete roof
slab.
The entire roof shall have a minimum fall of 1:100 to scupper drains and outlets.
The roof panels shall be trafficable for maintenance purposes, without damage.
a) Waterproofing Membrane
Waterproofing membrane to reinforced concrete insulated flat roofs, insulated

roof terraces, non- insulated decks, landscape decks and planter boxes shall be a
fully bonded system as follows:-
The waterproofing membrane shall be a 2.2mm thick homogeneous
thermoplastic sheet of EVA / PVC terpolymer material with polyester fleece-
backing. It shall be inherently bitumen and polystyrene-compatible without the
need for a separation layer. The membrane shall be manufactured as a single
non-laminated layer that is UV-resistant without any surface coating on both
sides. The non-solids (liquids) content shall be less than 10 percent and the
membrane shall be dimensionally stable enough to be used as exposed membrane
without any need for a centrally laid reinforcement.
ROF/4
ROOFING
Material (Cont’d.)
Waterproofing Membrane (Cont’d.)
The waterproofing membrane shall have been used under the same name and
composition for at least 15 years. The waterproofing membrane shall possess a
British Board of Agrément (“BBA”) or European (“UEAtc”) Agrément
certificate or other approved equivalent with durability rating of at least 25
years.
Where the membrane is to be exposed, it shall be according to the colour
specified. For areas where the waterproofing membrane is to be fully adhered,
the cold applied adhesive shall be according to the manufacturer's
recommendations. The waterproofing membrane shall be manufactured to ISO
9001/2 quality assurance.
The Performance Standards of the waterproofing membrane is required to match
or surpass the following:
PROPERTY VALUE TEST METHOD

or other approved
equivalent
standards
Country of Manufacture To SO’s -
approval
Membrane Thickness (measured 1.2mm -
without any adhesive or fleece
backing)
Solids Content (M. Wt. > > 90% -
100,00)
Bitumen Resistance Yes DIN 16937
Vapour Diffusion Resistance < 15,000 DIN 5312
Fire Resistance B2 DIN 4102
Roof Resistance Root-Proof FLL
Tensile Strength > 500 N/50mm DIN 53354
Elogation > 300% DIN 53354
Puncture Resistance Drop Height 600mm SIA 280 Part 14
The waterproofing system shall include all necessary accessories for pipe collar,
roof outlet, outside and inside corners etc. The Contractor shall provide shop
drawings of waterproofing details to the SO for approval.
ROF/5
ROOFING
Waterproofing Membrane (Cont’d.)
They shall be:-

CPE "Texaplas" (for application with trafficable concrete panels) or CPE “Texaplas
T” (for application without trafficable concrete panels) or
i) ECB "Durabit 20SM" or
ii) ECB "Tremco ECB" or
iii) ECB "Carbofol" or
iv) ECB “KB-LEN MG 20” or
v) Other approved equivalent
Prior to placement of insulation material, conduct a ponding test with 25mm water
for 48 hours or as per specialists‟ method statement whichever is higher. Drains
shall be plugged and barriers placed to contain the water.
b) Thermal Insulation
Insulation shall be 50mm thk extruded polyurethane or high-density polystyrene
insulation with a minimum density of 35kg/m³ and thermal conduction of 0.029
to 0.032 W/mK.
c) Screed
a) Cement shall be Portland Cement complying with SS26.
b) Sand shall be natural sand complying with BS 1199 or other approved
equivalent graded from 5mm downwards.
c) Water shall be clean water from the Authorities mains supply.
d) Waterproof Cast Insitu Roofing Panels
The1000 x 1000 x 50 mm or other approved size cement and sand panels shall be
of 1:3 mix and reinforced with or other approved equivalent 3315 galvanised steel
wire mesh. The panels shall be trowelled smooth with at least a wood float
finish. Proper through joints shall be provided at maximum 10 m intervals. All
other joints shall be filled in with bitumen joints to SO’s approval.
Waterproofing admixture shall be:
a) Conplast Prolapin 031 or
b) Super Brite or
c) Hydroproof No. 2 or
d) Sika 'No. 1' or
e) Cementaid 3CC or
f) Other approved equivalent
The whole work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s / supplier’s instructions.
ROF/6
ROOFING
e) Protective Felt / Geotextile Filter Fabric
The protective felt separation layer shall be non-woven polypropylene geotextile

fleece with minimum density of 100g/m².
f) Under-Screed Drainage Mat
The under-screed drainage mat shall be an interlocking dimpled high density

polypropylene sheet with multiple perforations to form a hollow space between
the bedding screed / insulation and the waterproofing membrane or concrete
structure. The water which seeps through the bedding screed shall pass through
the perforated holes to the waterproofing membrane or concrete structure and can
run off freely through the hollow spaces towards the drainage outlet.
Typical properties of under-screed drainage mat shall be as follows:
PROPERTY VALUE
Material Recycled Polyproylene
Dimensions 500 L x 500W mm
Sheet Thickness 1.2mm
Overall Height 6mm
Compressive Strength ≥ 800 Tonnes/m² (Unfilled)
≥ 1,500 Tonnes/m²
(Filled G20 Cement and Sand Screed)
Service Temperature - 30˚C to 80˚C
Chemical Properties Chemical, Root and Rot Resistant
Fire Resistance B2 (DIN 4102) or approved equivalent
Singapore Green Label Yes
ROF/7
ROOFING
g) Sub-Soil Drainage Modules
The sub-soil drainage modules (“draincells”) shall have a compressive strength

of at least 100 tonnes/m² to accommodate both static and dynamic loads during
and after installation. It shall have good resistance to petroleum-based
chemicals and naturally occurring soil chemicals.
The draincells shall have surface perforations each not exceeding 350 mm² to
prevent entry of large fill aggregates. The openings on the horizontal surfaces
shall be at least 65% of the total surface area to provide optimum flow rate.
The draincells shall be at least 30 mm high and shall be interlocked with
adjacent draincells along connecting edges to form a continuous entity whether
as panels, conduits or tanks.
The draincells shall comprise of one or more layers to ensure a total flow rate of
at least 16.5 l/m.s for maximum rainfall under Singapore Code of Practice
SS525: 2006.
Typical properties of sub-soil drainage modules shall be as follows:
PROPERTY VALUE
Material Recycled Polyproylene
Dimensions 500 L x 250 W mm
Height 30mm
Weight c.a. 3kg/m²
Area of Perforation ≤ 350mm²
Void Horizontal Area ≥ 65%
Void Internal Volume ≥ 95%
Compressive Strength ≥ 100 Tonnes/m²
Service Temperature - 30˚C to 80˚C
Chemical Properties Chemical, Root and Rot
Resistant
Drainage Capacity @ 1% Hydraulic ≥ 16.5/m.s
Gradiant
ROF/8
ROOFING
h) Sub-Soil Water-Retention and Drainage Tray
The sub-soil water-retention and drainage tray (draintrays) shall have a high water
storage capacity and high strength manufactured from UV-stabilised high density
polypropylene with compressive of at least 50 kN/m² to accommodate both static
and dynamic loads during and after installation. It shall have good r esistance to
petroleum-based chemicals and naturally occurring soil chemicals.
The drain trays shall have studs / cups of at least 23 mm high with channels in
both directions between studs/cups and drainage slits across the channels
between every other row of studs/cups.
The drain trays shall create a drainage and water storage layer in green roof
construction.
Typical properties of the drain tray are:
PROPERTY VALUE
Material HDPE
Height 23mm
Weight 0.96 kg/m²
Dimensions 2.22 x 1.33m
Compressive Strength 50 kN/m²
Water Storage Capacity 6.1 l/m²
Drainage Capacity of Slits 0.8 l/m².s
Drainage Capacity Below Studs @ 1.5 l/m.s
3% Hydraulic Gradient
ROF/9
ROOFING
.7 Workmanship
.1 Surface Preparation
a) Concrete roof must be free from defects, tested for ponding, dry and free
from oil & grease, swept of foreign matter and cured for 28 da ys and
suitable for receiving the roofing system.
b) Sharp points and uneven surfaces are to be ground down to ensure
proper contact with the waterproofing membrane.
c) Proprietary collars for receiving rainwater goods, e.g. downpipes and pipe
penetrations are to be secured in place.
d) Right angle bends of the waterproofing membrane is NOT ALLOWED. A
45º fillet is to be provided.
e) The waterproofing system is to be inclusive of all necessary adhesives,
additives, primers and flashing accessories as stated in the manufacturers
requirements.
.2 Installation of Waterproofing Membrane
a) Installation shall not proceed on rainy days.

b) Waterproofing membrane shall be free of bubbles, wrinkle and tear.
c) Overlapping side and end laps shall be minimum of 50mm or as per
manufacturer's requirements.
d) Waterproofing membrane shall be reinforced at connections with pipes,
rainwater goods penetrations and scupper drains or as per manufacturer’s
requirements.
e) All terminations of waterproofing membrane on vertical surfaces, e.g.
parapet walls, high plinths, shall be a minimum of 300mm high.
f) Waterproofing membrane shall continue, without break, over flat roof
surfaces, gutters and scupper drains.
g) The Contractor shall coordinate and ensure that Installation of M & E or
other works are carried out after completion of all the waterproofing
works.
h) Final inspection of the membrane is to be carried out by the Contractor and
Specialist.
Damaged membrane is repaired with a patch extending 150mm in all
directions from the slit and seal edges of the patch with approved sealant.
ROF/10
ROOFING
Workmanship (Cont’d.)
.3 Installation of vapor barrier
a) Polyethylene sheet shall be free of bubbles, wrinkle and tear.

b) Workmen shall be instructed to ensure that laying of the Polyethylene
sheet shall not entail multiple crossing with work boots. Protection is to
be provided. Damaged and torn Polyethylene sheet is to be replaced.
c) Overlapping ends shall be at a minimum of 150mm or as per
d) Additional overlapping layer shall be provided around penetrations
where felt is cut. Overlapping shall be a minimum of 150mm secured with
tape.
.4 Installation of Insulation
a) Insulation is to be installed as per manufacturer’s requirements, inclusive

of all adhesives, tapes and accessories.
b) Insulation boards shall be butt-joined with no gaps.
c) Insulation fasteners and plates shall be provided for every 1 meter square.
d) Insulation shall not be left unprotected if upper layers of the roof system
cannot cover it within the same day. Protective plastic sheets shall be
provided.
.5 Installation of Protective Felt / Geotextile Filter Fabric
a) Geotextile felt shall be free of wrinkle and tear.

b) Wetting of the waterproofing membrane to facilitate geotextile felt
installation should not be excessive.
c) Overlapping ends shall be at a minimum of 150mm or as per
d) Additional overlapping layer shall be provided around penetrations where
felt is cut. Overlappings shall be a minimum of 150mm
e) Cast insitu roofing panels are to be immediately placed above each section
of the protective felt to prevent movement.
.6 Installation of Cast Insitu Roofing Panel
a) The cast insitu roofing panels reinforced with BRC 3315 or other
approved equivalent galvanised steel wire mesh over the protective felt and
waterproofing membrane shall be trowelled smooth with at least a wood
float finish.
b) Through or expansion joints shall be provided at maximum 10 m intervals.
c) Joint infill shall be approved polysulphide sealant.
ROF/11
ROOFING
2.0 ROOF SLAB, TROUGH, SKIRTING, ETC
a) All reinforced concrete roof slabs, troughs, skirtings, etc shall be provided with waterproofed
cement and sand screed and waterproofing membrane unless otherwise stated.
b) All pipe penetrations above roof shall be fixed with approved santoprene or other
approved equivalent sleeves in accordance with manufacturer's instructions or with approved
flashing sleeve and polyurethane sealant to manufacturer’s details and instruction.
3.0 METAL FLASHING, CAPPINGS, FASCIA AND GUTTERS
a) Supply and fix 0.62mm thick galvanised steel coated with aluminium alloy and prepainted with
silicon modified polyester of approved colour flashings, cappings, fascia and gutters formed the
required profiles and fixed to match roof according to manufacturer’s instructions.
b) Supply and fix 200mm diameter half round metal gutter including brackets, fixing clips, bolts,
nails and laying to falls.
4.0 RAINWATER DOWN PIPES
a) Supply and fix approved UPVC rainwater down pipes of the sizes as indicated on the drawing
fixed with and including approved holderbats. Jointing compound for pipes shall be approved
solvent welded joints fixed all in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. All
necessary fittings to match pipe shall be provided. The rainwater down pipe shall be brought
down to the floor level, taken under the apron slab and discharged into the drain with suitable
haunching to the satisfaction of the SO.
b) All rainwater downpipes shall be integrated with the column and beam design. Access points
shall be provided for maintenance purposes for all rainwater down pipes.
c) All gutter outlets discharging into rainwater down pipes shall be fixed with removable UPVC
conical or domed grating with luting flange cast in concrete including forming watertight joints.
ROF/12
ROOFING
5.0 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM
.1 Scope
a) The metal roofing works shall consist of all equipment, labour and materials,
flashings, fascias, proprietary fixing system, down pipe, gutters and ancillary fittings,
which are "indispensably necessary" to ensure that the roofing system is fit for its
purpose.
b) The metal roofing works shall be carried out in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's method statement for installation. All fixing systems and ancillary
accessories that are deemed necessary to the proprietary system shall be deemed to be
inclusive in the works.
c) It shall be the responsibility of the Main Contractor to ensure that the supports are
in order to receive the roofing works.
d) The Specialist Sub-contractor is to report to the Contractor any conditions which
prevent the proper installation of the roofing system.
.2 Specialist Sub-Contractors
a) A Specialist sub-contractor / firm is to be engaged by the Contractor to carry out the metal
roofing works. The Specialist sub- contractor / f irm shall be familiar with the fixing
system and have skilled workmen to carry out the works.
b) The terms "specialist" as used in the specification shall mean a firm of established
reputation, which regularly in, and which maintains a regular force of workmen skilled in
handing and installing the roofing system specified.
c) The Specialist sub-contractor shall submit the following documentation in order to
obtain SO's approval:-
BCA registration certificate
- Track record indicating a list of 5 project using similar system within the
past 3 years.
d) The Contractor shall ensure that a qualified supervisor from the Specialist sub-
contractor is on site to provide "standing supervision" of the roofing works and
submit written evidence of satisfactory work completion. The qualified supervisor
shall not be part of workmen team.
e) The Specialist sub-contractor is responsible for joints, interfacing details with the
related works, etc.
ROF/13
ROOFING
METAL ROOFING SYSTEM (CONT’D.)
.3 Method Statement, Samples, Shop-Drawings & Test Reports
The following are to be submitted to the SO for approval prior to commencement of

construction:-
Samples
- Materials for whole roofing system: roofing material, insulation, noise damping layer,
cemboard, steel liner and any other integrated component.
- Manufacturer's specifications
.4 Test Reports
a) PSB Test Report on whole roof system for STC rating in accordance to ASTM E90-
97 and ASTM E413-87 or other approved equivalent.
b) PSB Test Report on whole roof system for IIC rating in accordance to ASTM E492-90
and ASTM E989-89 or other approved equivalent.
c) PSB Test Report on noise damping layer for fire rating in accordance to BS476: Part 6
or other approved equivalent.
d) U-Value of roof system shall comply with Handbook on Energy Conservation in
Building & Building Services.
Weight Max Thermal Transmittance (W/m² - K)

Weight
Range Air Conditioned Non-Air Conditioned
Group
(kg/ m²) Building Building
Light Under 50 0.5 0.8
Medium 50 to 230 0.8 1.1
Heavy Over 230 1.2 1.5
.5 Shop Drawings
a) Installation details for all system

b) Interfacing details at junctions to openings, parapet walls, upstands, plinths, pipe
penetrations, lightning conductor, coping, rain water down pipes, outlets, gutters, etc.
c) Fixing detail through of the system through the base steel liner.
ROF/14
ROOFING
.6 Mock-Up
The Contractor and Specialists sub-contractor shall prepare a mock-up of the roof system for
the SO‟s approval prior to commencement of the works. The mock up shall be located at
critical junctions such as penetrations, rainwater down pipes, parapet wall junctions, etc.
.7 On-Site Water Test for Entire Metal Roof
.1 Water Test
- Upon the completion of the roofing system, a test for water-tightness of the
roof shall be conducted by the Contractor and Specialists sub-contractor to
ensure 100% water tightness. Water jets shall be directed at critical joints of
the roof.
- In areas where leaks are observed during the test period, such areas shall be
rectified. Rectified areas shall be retested until such retreated areas pass the
water test.
- The water run off shall fall gutters and rainwater outlets
.8 Performance Certification
The whole roofing system shall have minimum performance of:

- STC 45 determined in accordance to ASTM E413-87 or other approved equivalent.
- IIC 45 determined in accordance to ASTM E989-89 or other approved equivalent.
- Noise damping layer is to be Fire Rated for: -
a) Surface flame spread: Class 0 in accordance to COP Fire Precautions
(Singapore) 2002.
b) In conjunction with the substrate/metal roof shall have a surface of Class I and
tested in accordance with BS476: Part 6 or other approved equivalent shall have
an index of performance not exceeding 12 and a sub-index not exceeding 6.
ROF/15
ROOFING
5.1 MATERIALS
Roof system shall be built-up roofing system or composite roof system.
.1 Insulated Double-Locked Standing Seam Built-Up Profile Metal Roof
.1 The whole of the Insulated Double-Locked Built-up Standing Seam Profile

Metal Roof System shall be approved by the SO and to be supplied and installed
by the Specialist who shall be responsible for the design, supply and installation
of the total roof system, inclusive of their intended performance, function and
watertightness and to achieve an acoustic value of minimum STC 45. The
Contractor is to obtain from the Specialist a written JOINT GURANTEE OF
TEN (10) YEARS (as per attached Format Specimen) in favour of the Employer
against faulty workmanship and premature breakdown of materials. The
guarantee shall commence on Completion of the Project.
.2 Shop drawings and details shall be supplied by the Specialist for SO’s approval:-
.3 Oven baked pre-painted double-locked seam metal roof profile with 32mm
thick rib height and 510mm cover width:-
a) The double-locked standing seam comprises of metal trays mechanically
seamed during installation, folding the panel edges 180 degrees to form an
angled / double seam producing structurally strong and rainproof joints.
b) The metal sheets should be secured to the substrate using concealed clips
@ 600mm centre to center.
c) The base steel used shall conform to Australian Standard AS1397-2001 or
other approved equivalent and have minimum Base Metal Thickness
(BMT) of 0.55mm, with a minimum yield of 300N/mm².
d) Minimum Slope for straight roof without end-laps shall be 3 degrees and 5
degrees for straight roof with end-laps.
e) It shall come w ith protective metallic coating / corrosion resistant
proprietary zinc / aluminium alloy-coated steel (150gm/m²) and having
coating thickness (total both side) of 50µm or 0.05mm as stipulated in
AS1397 – 2001 or other approved equivalent. The backing coat shall be
in the standard Shadow Grey colour with nominal film thickness of 5m.
Exposed face in XPD or other approved equivalent finish with colour to be
selected by the SO.
.4 One layer of 1.50mm self-adhesive bitumen felt:-
a) The membrane is composed of two waterproofing materials – an
aggressive-rubberised asphalt adhesive backed by a layer of high density,
cross-laminated polyethylene.
b) The membrane resists attack by fungus and bacteria; it will not crack, dry
out or rot and is designed to withstand the ambient temperatures under
most types of metal roof covering in tropical regions.
c) The membrane shall provide proper roof ventilation in moist climates to
prevent interior condensation. It also dampens the rain impact noise.
ROF/16
ROOFING
MATERIALS (CONT’D.)
Insulated Double-Locked Standing Seam Built-Up Profile Metal Roof (Cont’d.)
.5 One layer of double sided radiant/vapour barrier of high tear resistant and tensile strength
of the specified ASTM standards or other approved equivalent.
Reflectivity both sides (ASTM C1371-98) : + 0.95
Emissivity both sides (ASTM C1371-98) : + 0.05
Nominal thickness : + 150 microns
Tensile Strength (ASTM C0882-97)
Machine Direction : 6.280kN/m
Transverse Direction : 4.806kN/m
The Radiant barrier shall be laid from ridge to the eaves across purlins with a 50-75mm
overlap.
The radiant barrier shall be temporarily secured to purlin with square galvanized washer
plate at 600c/c or tape with double-side tape.
Joints at end lap shall be tapped with 38mm sealing tape.
.6 16mm Thick cement board.
.7 1.0mm Thick Z galvanized sub-girt – as spacer.
.8 One layer of 50mm thick rock wool insulation with minimum density of 120kg/m³.
.9 One Layer of acoustic black non-combustible natural wool:-
a) The Roof system construction shall comprise of roof built up as specified and the
roof insulation shall be non-combustible and eco-friendly 100% recyclable
Reinforced Natural Fiber.
b) Acoustical and thermal insulation density shall not exceed 90 kg/m3.
c) The constructed system shall prove to achieve thermal transmittance performance
no more than 14.1 W /m2 for non-air conditioned spaces otherwise submit
thermal calculations for engineer’s endorsement.
d) The reinforced natural fiber Wall insulation material shall be tested non-
combustible in accordance to BS 476 Part 4: 1970 or other approved
equivalent and shall be non-toxic and non-asbestos.
e) The required roof Insulation material shall be minimum 50mm thick and the
insulation’s thermal Conductivity tested per standard ASTM C-177 or other
approved equivalent to be no more than 0.05 W/m K
f) Insulation material shall be in compliance with EPA CFR Part 248 or other
approved equivalent and achieved Green Mark as Eco-friendly building
materials. Tested to contain no formaldehyde, no V.O.C. and shall not cause any
skin irritation to humans.
g) The insulation material shall be non-corrosive in accordance with UMB-80 with
base material that does not contain any phenol agents or resins as used in binder
for conventional insulation. Compliance of no-corrosion shall be tested to ASTM
C-739 or other approved equivalent which must demonstrate no perforations
for all metal surfaces.
h) Acceptable wall thermal and acoustical insulation materials shall attain minimum
ASTM specifications and test methods as follows: ASTM E84, C665, C518,
E96, E970, C423-98, E97-97, E413-87, E492-90, E989-89; C739-97 Sec. 9, 11,
13, 15 or other approved equivalent
i) Approved insulation Materials shall be ISO14000 certified.
ROF/17
ROOFING
Insulated Double-Locked Standing Seam Built-Up Profile Metal Roof (Cont’d.)

.10 One Layer of 30% perforation per square metre trapezoidal corrugated metal / roof
substrate 0.47mm thick with panel width of 700mm and rib height of 24mm in zinc /
aluminium alloy steel. (Not applicable for Classrooms).
a) Exposed face in XRW or other approved equivalent finish with colour to
be selected by the SO.
.11 One Layer of proprietory Galvanised Steel Mesh 300 or other approved
equivalent. permanent safety mesh.
a) The wire mesh shall be galvanized and welded at joint. The mesh size shall be
300mm by 150mm and the wire thickness to be at least 1.5mm. (Only to be
applicable in lieu of perforated corrugated metal roof substrate with black wool
backing where suspended ceiling is to be used.)
.12 Work of this section : includes all labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete the metal roofing and flashing as shown on the drawings and specified herein,
including but not limited to the following:-
a) Steel roofing, fascias, scuppers and related flashings.
b) Connection hardware for attachment of roof steel sheets to building structure.
c) Sealant between steel panel roofing components and between steel panel
roofing and adjoining construction; sealants around penetrations in steel
panel roofing and copings and between copings and flashings.
d) Drilling and tapping of structure as required for fastening of all work
included in this section.
e) Cutting and flashings required for roof penetrations.
f) Gutters and supports, where required.
g) One layer of profiles, pre-painted, metal roof and substrate.
.13 The installation of the metal sheets shall be in accordance to the “Installation code
for metal roofing and wall cladding; Standards Australia SAA HB39-1997” or
other approved equivalent. The sheets shall be installed in accordance to
manufacturer’s recommendations. The fasteners used to secure the metal sheets to
the supports shall confirm to Australian Standard AS3566 or other approved
equivalent and be compatible with the roofing material used.
.14 Sheets shall be laid in such a manner that the approved side lap faces away
from the prevailing weather. A minimum of 50mm shall be provided for
projection into gutters. Flashings shall be supplied in compatible materials as
specified, minimum cover of flashing shall be 150mm.
.15 All sheets shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
in a workman like manner, leaving the job clean and weather-tight. All debris
(nuts, screws, cuttings, fillings, etc.) shall be cleaned off daily. Only competent
and skilled installers familiar and experienced in the application of materials
specified herein shall be used.
.16 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the SO’s approval prior to
commencement of work. In addition, all work shall be executed so as to meet
all applicable requirements of the building regulations in Singapore.
ROF/18
ROOFING
5.2 WORK INCLUDED
The work of this section includes all labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete the metal roofing, and flashing as shown on the drawings and specified herein,
including but not limited to the following:
a) Profiled Steel roof panel for roofing and related flashing.
b) Connection hardware for attachment of roof panel to building structure.
c) Sealant between roofing components and between panel and adjoining construction;
sealant around penetrations in the roof panel and copings and between copings and
flashing.
d) Drilling and tapping of structure as required for fastening of all work included in this
section.
e) Cutting and flashing required for roof penetration.
f) Roof insulation.
g) Double layer of profiled coated, metal roof decking and substrate.
5.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Roofing installer shall be currently approved by the manufacturer of the metal roofing
material.
For actual installation of the metal roofing, use only competent and skilled roofer completely
familiar with and experienced in the application of materials specified herein.
5.4 DESIGN CRITERIA
Profiled Steel roof panel roofing sheets shall be designed and erected to provide a complete
weather-proof of the applicable interior spaces.
Profiled Steel roof roofing panel shall be designed and erected for expansion and contraction
of component materials.
Corrosion free fasteners and connections shall be designed to withstand the positive and
negative pressures due to local wind conditions.
Roof installer / fabricator shall field check dimensions of structure and design the system to
accommodate specified erection tolerances.
5.5 MOCK UP
Before proceeding with fabrication of metal roof components, prepare mock-up of each metal
roof system, size of mock up to be determined by SO. Correct mock up as directed by the SO
until it meets his approval. Retain accepted mock up as standard for acceptance of all metal
roofing and flashing.
Provide mock up as specified in location as directed by SO to show typical pattern of seam,
edge construction, typical gutters and finish texture and colour.
ROF/19
ROOFING
5.6 INSTALLATION
a) Examine the areas and conditions where the metal roof, fascias and flashing are to be
installed and notify the SO of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected to permit proper installation of the work.
b) Surfaces that are to receive the metal roof panel and underlayments shall be even,
smooth, sound, clean and dry, and free from all defects. Cutting and drilling and similar
operations required to accommodate the work of other trades shall be performed.
Where roof panel abuts or adjacent material, the juncture shall be executed in a manner
to assure waterproof construction.
c) Accessories and other items essential to complete the roof installation must be
provided.
d) The roof panel shall be fabricated and installed in accordance 18 with the details
indicated and as specified. Flashing shall be formed on press brake machine, shaping
trimming and seaming shall be done on bench where practicable. Bends, folds and
seams shall be made in such a manner to avoid buckling or fullness in the metal after
installation.
e) The minimum end lap between adjacent sheets is to be 100mm.
f) Provide double standing seam as detailed with a height of 32mm at spacing indicated
on the drawings, formed on site mechanically.
g) Expansion and contraction joints to be slip or loose locked type.
h) Cleaning
All metal work when finished shall be thoroughly cleaned of scraps and dirt. On large
areas this shall be done as each section of the work is finished.
Remove and replace panels and components parts of the above work which have
been damaged (including finish) beyond successful repair, as directed by the SO.
ROF/20
ROOFING
6.0 COMPOSITE SANDWICH INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS (For Covered Linkways)
.1 Supply and install concealed capping type of standing seam insulated roofing panels with rib
1000mm apart and rib dept of 30mm.
.2 The insulated roof panel shall be a composite sandwich panel of 2 metal surface sheet
and backing sheet with rigid FSSD approved core. Panels to be manufactured in
continuous production lines to cold form the outer and inner surface sections. The expanded
PIR insulation is to be injected between the 2 surfaces up to pre-determined thickness
forming a compact and totally integrated unit. Fastening and fixing to be through clamping
the sections, bolts and cover plated. The panels are to be supplied and installed according to
manufacturer's recommendations.
.1 Performance
The composite sandwich panel must have a thermal transmittance (U-value) of a value
that is not greater than 0.27W/m2 K based on a aged thermal conductivity of 0.020 W/mk.
The Sound Reduction Index shall be as follow.
Frequency Hz 63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k

SRI db 14 14 19 24 27 34 43 52
.2 Materials
a) External Weather Sheet

Substrate to be 0.7mm thick galvanized hot-dipped zinc coated steel with a
coating mass of 275g/m² to BS EN 10147:1992 or other approved equivalent.
External coating shall be a metallic-finish cladding steel with a minimum of 120-
micron thick high- performance plastisol coating. To ensure tonal consistency, all
profiles or panels shall come from the same production batch. The reverse
coating shall be aspecially formulated two -coat protective system of corrosion-
resistant primer topped with a heat cured high performance polyester.
b) Insulation Core
This shall consist of 80mm thick, closed cell, CFC free rigid FSSD approved
insulation. The auto adhesive properties of the core bond the external and internal
sheets together, and control the panel thickness achieved during manufacture.
c) Internal Liner Sheet
Substrate to be 0.4mm thick galvanized hot-dipped zinc coated steel coated
steel with a coating mass of 275g/m² to BS EN 10147:1992 or other approved
equivalent. Internal coating shall be a 27-micron thick stoved fluorocarbon
coating. To ensure tonal consistency, all profiles or panel shall come from the
same production batch. The reverse coating shall be a specially formulated two-
coat protective system of corrosion-resistant primer topped with a heat cured
high performance polyester.
ROF/21
ROOFING
COMPOSITE SANDWICH INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS (For Covered Linkways)
(CONT’D)
.3 Fire Resistance Requirements
.1 The fully bonded steel faced insulated panels with fire rated cores shall be of a non-
combustible construction complying with Class '0' classification under the code of
Practice for Fire Precautions in Building (latest edition). It shall satisfy the following
test:
- BS476: Part 6: 1989 - Method of Tests for Fire Propagation of Products or other
approved equivalent
- BS476: Part 7: 1987 - Surface Spread of Flame Test for Materials or other
approved equivalent
.2 The external and liner facings of the panels must achieve Class '0' classification. The
Contractor shall obtain all relevant test certificates for SO's approval prior to installation
works.
.3 Seal & Fillers
All external side laps are to weather sealed along the full length by an unbroken bead of
9mm wide x 3mm thick butyl rubber sealant tape to manufacturer's details. All side joints
have a factory applied anti condensation tape.
All external and laps are to be 1000mm along the full width using two unbroken runs
of 9mm wide x 3mm thick butyl rubber sealant tape manufacturer's details.
Where flashings are fixes across the profile of the insulated panel, this should be
supported by zed support and approved profile fillers shall be used to fully seal and
close the profile.
.4 Construction Requirements
.1 Installation
Panels to be laid with side lap joints away from prevailing wind unless otherwise
shown on drawings.
All fasteners, seals and fillers to be of correct specification and installed according to
manufacturer's details.
Site cut must provide accurate true lines with no distortion, panels to be cut with
powered reciprocating type saw and exposed sites cut panels to be treated with a
suitable edge protection lacquer. Cut openings for outlets, vents, flues etc. to be the
minimum size necessary.
Penetrations shall be constructed through the use of manufacturer's accessories, which
includes but limited to, aluminium soakers (providing integrated up-stand sleeves),
flexible flashings and 9mm wide x 3mm thick butyl rubber sealant tape. A watertight
seal must be achieved regardless of the location of the penetrations. Both the
aluminium soakers and flexible flashings shall have steel coatings to the same
specification as the external weather sheet of the roof panels. Additional support and
bolting area shall be provided for such penetrations.
Remove all swarf and foreign matter immediately from external surface of panels.
ROF/22
ROOFING
COMPOSITE SANDWICH INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS (For Covered Linkways)
(CONT’D)
Construction Requirements (Cont’d.)
.1 Installation
Fasteners to be checked and adjusted if necessary to ensure they are weather tight and
external panel facing is not distorted.
The contractor is to determine and use a safe method of working throughout the
installation and construction period.
.2 Cover Caps
It shall be made from 0.7mm thick steel coated to the same specification as the external
weather sheet of the roof panels.
.3 Flashings
All external flashings to be made from 0.7mm thick steel substrate coated to the same
specification as the external weather sheet of the roof panels. All internal flashings to
be made from 0.4mm thick steel substrate coated to the same specification as the
internal liner sheet of the roof panels.
.4 Primary Fasteners
All primary fasteners must be the high threaded type, manufactured from carbon
steel, anti-corrosion coated, and fitted with a 16mm diameter bonded stainless steel
washer. All panel fasteners to be fixed with a saddle washer located at the crown of
the panel to secure the cover cap. One line of fasteners and saddle washers is to be
positioned at the panel side lap crown for 1500mm purlin centers. Heavy-duty rubber
separators shall be used to avoid contract of separate metal materials.
Additional fasteners, saddle washers and cover caps must be provided if the
buildings are located where high suction loads are evident.
.5 Secondary Fasteners
Flashings to be stitched at 450mm centres (maximum) with carbon steel stitching

screws, complete with 14mm diameter bonded stainless steel washers. Heavy-duty
rubber separators shall be used to avoid contact of separate metal materials.
.5 Construction Details
.1 Flashings
All flashings to be weather sealed at laps and along the full length by an unbroken
bead of 9mm wide x 3mm thick butyl rubber sealant tape.
.2 Panel Lengths
Exact lengths are to be determined by the cladding contractor from the sop drawing
with the emphasis to minimize and laps. This shall be approved by the SO before
proceeding with fabrication.
ROF/23
ROOFING
7.0 ROOFING GUARANTEE
GUARANTEE FOR ALL ROOFING SYSTEMS (FLAT ROOFS, INSULATED CEMENT

PANEL ROOFS, METAL ROOFS, COMPOSITE ROOFS, ETC. AS PREVIOUSLY
SPECIFIED.)
The Contractor and Specialist shall provide a written JOINT GUARANTEE of TEN (10) YEARS
for the completed works on i ts performance against any defects and failure as a roofing system in
particular to its prevention of water penetration. The Guarantee shall commence from the date of
Substantial Completion of the Works.
8.0 SHOP DRAWING

For all Roofing Systems the Contractor shall provide, for the approval of the SO, shop drawings
showing typical installation details, patterns, joint lines, setting out lines, etc. All patterns shall be
based on concept drawings provided by the SO.
9.0 SAMPLES
Provide samples at Contractor's own cost as required for SO's selection and approval and
demolish or remove when not required.
10.0 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean down and protect completed sections of the work to the approval of the SO. Chemicals
shall not be used for the cleaning of the roof tiles.
ROF/24
ROOF LIFELINE SYSTEM
1.0 CLAMPING ROOF LIFELINE SYSTEM FOR METAL ROOF
Purpose of the system
The contractor- shall install a fall arrest system for the purpose of carrying out periodical
maintenance and cleaning using individual rope access techniques with the following
characteristics:-
• The system must be designed to provide protection for a maximum of three workers
connected to the system at any one time. The system must be approved and tested by a
relevant certification body.
Responsibilities
Provide the fall protection system in conformance with EN regulation EN795 C
Design
The system must be designed as a fall restraint system.
Description of a fall restraint system:-

• Cable based system that is positioned so that the user cannot be exposed to a fall hazard
when continuously connected to the system using a specified shock absorbing lanyard
complying with EN regulations.
• No Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE) adjustment is required-whilst connected to
the system. The User requires no particular skills, just to be Competent in connecting
the appropriate travelling device to and from the cable.
• In the area where it is not possible the system must be designed as a fall arrest system
Description of a fall arrest system:-

• Cable system where the user is continuously attached to the system when working at
height that will stop his fall if any.
• Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE) adjustments 1s required to avoid exposure to a
fall hazard.
• In any case the loading of the system should be considered as per fall arrest legislation.
It is required that each anchor integrates an absorber so as to reduce the loadings on
the roof.
Interval between 2 brackets: Less than 6.8m between 2 brackets
Interference with the roof

No penetration of the roof is allowed when installing the brackets to any place of the metal
roof standing seam. The attachment should only be made by S-5-E clamps designed and proven
for locked seam roofs.
Material
The lifeline and clamped plate supports consists of 4 main components:
Single rope
8mm thick stainless steel cable grade 316, construction l x 19.
The cable must be swaged at its 2 extremities and not comprise any tension or turnbuckle device
on line.
RLS/1
ROOF LIFELINE SYSTEM
CLAMPING ROOF LIFELINE SYSTEM FOR METAL ROOF (CONT’D.)
Bracket Fixed By Non Penetrating Clamps
The brackets plates must be of stainless steel grade 316.
Attachment on _the roof must be by non-penetrating clamps

specially designed and proved for metal standing seam roof
(S-5-U).
These clamps must come with proven load tests on the desired
roof. No penetration of the roof is required when installing
S-5-U clamps to the standing seam.
Intermediary Brackets with Integrated Absorbers

- Intermediary brackets with integrated absorbers that
reduces the loading on the roof.
- Each intermediary shall comprise an energy absorbing
system, of swinging brake-pad type, which ensures in the
event of a fall, a absorption of the impact without any
deformation of the part.
- This absorbing system must be simply resettable
manually by the user after a fall without having· to
change the whole bracket.
- Each intermediary bracket can be used as an anchor for
rescue purpose after a fall.
Gliders
a stainless steel 316 glider that allows the user a free run over the lifeline and a free passage of the
intermediary brackets without unhooking
Installation
Standard: Installation performance: To EN 795.
Contractors
A proven lifeline installer with at least 3 years and more than 20 record of successful installation of
such system.
Installer requirements: a certified installer of fall arr st system ·
Routine inspections
Standard: To EN795 Routine inspection.
Completion certificate:
- Provide inspection, testing and certification by a registered installer.
Upon completion of the installation.
Upon the expiry of the defects liability period and valid for a further 12 months period.
Inspection after a fall or other event
Standard: To EN795 clause 9.3 Inspection after a fall or other event. Contractor to submit PE
endorsement of the system.
RLS/2
CARPENTRY
1. CARPENTRY TIMBER GENERALLY
The whole of the timber for carpenter's work shall be the best procurable vacuum/pressure
impregnated timber within the same strength grouping classified in SS CP1 to be selected and
approved by the SO and shall be sound, thoroughly seasoned, sawn die square, free from sap,
shakes, cracks, waney edges, large, loose or dead knots, spongy or brittle heart, white ants, borers
and other defects.
All timber shall be graded in accordance with the latest approved rule of the Malaysian Grading
Rules for Sawn Hardwood Timber and the Contractor shall obtain and produce to the SO a Grading
Certificate in accordance with the rule from the Grading Authority. T he Contractor shall pay all
grading fees, check all grading fees and any other charges in connection therewith. The Contractor
shall make all necessary arrangements with the Timber Industry Board who is the Grading Authority
in Singapore for grading to be carried out. Such fees and charges shall be included in the rates for
carpentry and joinery.
All graded timber shall be marked with the grade mark, the standard name of the timber and the
registered number of the Timber Grader. No ungraded timber shall be brought onto the site or into
the Contractor’s joinery workshop. T he SO may order the removal of any such ungraded timber
from the site.
Before any payment is made to the Contractor in respect of timber used in the works, the Grading
Certificate covering the said timber must be produced to the SO.
The grade of timber used in the works shall not be lower than “Standard & Better Grade MGR”.
This grade allows a small number of defects in the timber, including a limited amount of sapwood.
All visible surfaces of timber when fixed in position shall be entirely free from sapwood, knots and
any other defects.
After the Contractor had taken delivery of the graded and seasoned timber, it shall be stored under
cover in sheltered stacks, properly stickered and stacked to enable air to circulate freely around all
faces and be kept perfectly dry before use. The SO may inspect the timber at any time to ensure that
it is being so stored and may reject any timber which is not so stored. The timber is to reach a
moisture content of less than 18%. The Contractor shall determine the moisture content either by a
moisture meter or by the standard weighing method. The Contractor shall place his orders with the
sawmills immediately after signing the Contract. ‘Group A’ Timber shall be used for all roof
structural timber. All other timber to be used subject to the approval of the SO shall be based
on the Structural Grouping and to be treated accordingly.
2. TESTS
The testing of timber for moisture content shall be executed by an approved testing authority on
request of the SO. S hould any test not achieve specified requirements, the cost of the test,
transportation and rejection of the consignment from which the sample is drawn shall be borne by
the Contractor. Should the test prove satisfactory the cost of the above shall be borne by the
Employer.
3. CERTIFICATES
Treatment certificates for vacuum/ pressure impregnation preservative treatment from the
Contractor’s Specialist shall accompany each consignment of timber and be submitted to the SO for
approval.
CAR/1
CARPENTRY
4. CARPENTRY WORKMANSHIP
All carpenter's work shall be left with a sawn face and is to be accurately set out in strict accordance
with the drawings, framed together and securely fixed in the best possible manner.
All brads, nails, screws, spikes, plugs, bolts, etc. are to be provided by the Contractor.
All joints to be properly scarfed over points of support and not between same. Scarf joints are to be
not less than two times as long as the depths of the timbers to be jointed. Longitudinal joints in
plates, etc. shall be formed over supports and shall lap at least 150mm or twice the depth of the
timber, whichever is the greater.
5. TIMBER GRADES AND SIZE TOLERANCES
The dimensions of timber specified are nominal unless described as finished.
Unwrought timbers shall be left with a sawn face to hold the full dimensions specified or shown on
the drawings.
In wrought timbers, an allowance of 2mm for each wrought face shall be allowed for “nominal”
sizes specified or shown on the drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, sawn timber for carpentry works shall be as stated hereunder:
a) Standard Structural Grade-for structural work.
b) Sound Grade-for General Market Specification (GMS) and strips.
c) Serviceable Grade-for scantling.
Grading shall be carried in accordance with the Malaysian Grading Rules by timber graders
registered with the Malaysian Timber Industry Board. Every timber consignment shall be
accompanied by the Grading Summary certified by the registered timber grader. The sizes of sawn
timber, unless otherwise specified, shall be within the margin of permissible variations stated
hereunder:
a) For widths, depths or thickness not exceeding 75mm within 5mm of the specified size.
b) For widths, depths or thickness exceeding 75mm within 10mm of the specified size.
The Contractor shall provide at his own costs any necessary blocks, wedges or battens to compensate
for irregular surfaces caused by any variations in size of timbers hereby permitted.
CAR/2
CARPENTRY
6. VACUUM / PRESSURE IMPREGNATION PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
All timber shall be vacuum/ pressure impregnated in accordance with SS572:2012 after machining
using copper / chrome / arsenic wood preservatives in treatment plants approved by the Malaysian
Timber Industry Board.
Minimum nett dry

salt retention
a) Interior and above the ground 5.6 kg/m³
b) Exterior and above the ground 8.0 kg/m³
c) Exterior and in Contact with the ground (other
than foundation piles) 12.0 kg/m³
d) Foundation piles 16.0 kg/m³
The timber shall, as far as is practicable, be cut to its final dimensions before treatment, and timber for
joinery shall be wrot and fully worked and ready for framing before treatment. W here crosscutting
cannot be avoided or where further dressing is necessary, all surfaces exposed by such work shall be
liberally swabbed with the approved wood preservatives.
The Contractor, when required by the SO shall produce a certificate from a preservative treatment plant
which certifies that timber required to be impregnated by means of vacuum pressure processes has been
impregnated and has achieved the necessary nett dry salt retention. Notwithstanding the certificate, the
SO reserves the right to carry out independent tests to determine the nett dry salt retention and the result
so obtained shall be conclusive.
All sapwood shall be penetrated by the preservative and the depth of penetration for heartwood is
25mm for foundation piles and 12mm for uses (i), (ii) and (iii).
Any cutting, notching, boring, etc. after impregnation shall be treated with a brush applied
concentrate of similar composition.
7. WOOD PRESERVATIVES BY NON-PRESSURISED METHOD
Wood preservatives by non-pressurised method shall be applied in accordance with the requirements
of SS572:2012.
When wood preservatives are used on site, care must be taken not to contaminate other materials.
All labours such as plane cross cutting, boring, etc. shall be carried out before the timber is treated
and fixed in position. Where this is unavoidable, all new surfaces exposed by the cutting of the
treated timber before or after fixing, shall be thoroughly coated with the preservative to the approval
of the SO.
8. PROTECTION OF WORK
The Contractor is responsible for the temporary doors and closing-in of openings necessary, or in the
opinion of the SO, necessary for the protection of the works during progress.
He shall also provide and maintain any boxing or other temporary coverings required for the protection
of dressed or finished work that might be damaged during the progress of the work if not protected.
The Contractor is to clear out all shavings, cut ends and other timber waste from all parts of the
buildings, particularly the roofs, before coverings or infillings are constructed.
CAR/3
CARPENTRY
9. PROCEDURE OF WORK
The operations are to be so arranged that the convenience and requirements of all tradesmen
concerned in the work may be reasonably respected.
Each rafter and purlin shall extend in one piece between its supports or fixings and except where it
is cantilevered, it shall be supported or securely fixed at both ends.
10. BEARING TIMBER
Bearing timbers shall, as far as possible, be in one piece between points of change of direction.
Joints between continuing lengths and at corners shall be halved if the plates are in one thickness or
sufficiently lapped if the plates are in two thicknesses.
11. PLUGGING WALLS
Where items are described as "plugged" prices are to include for plugging with stout hardwood
dovetail or patent plugs dipped in preservative before fixing or shotfired to the wall at centres not
exceeding 450mm centres. P lugging shall mean plugging to brickwork, blockwork, concrete,
reinforced concrete or similar materials irrespective of any plaster, glazed tiles or other finish
(except glass) to the surface.
12. TIMBER FASTENINGS GENERALLY
NAILS AND SPIKES : Common wire.

a) Nailing of wood member shall conform to British Standard Code and/or as indicated.
b) Penetration : Half length of nail into piece receiving point.
c) Do not drive nails closer together than half their length, nor closer to edge of piece of timber
than ¼ their length.
d) Spacing and size of nails to be such that splitting will not occur.
e) Pre-bore holes for nails wherever necessary to prevent splitting.
f) Bore diameter of holes smaller than diameter of nail or spike (¾ diameter).
g) Use galvanised nails where exposed to weather.
13. SCREW : Bright Steel Wood Screws

a) Screws are to be turned into place, not driven. Self-tapping where required for fastening to
metal framing.
b) Countersink where heads will interfere or as required.
c) Screw bore holes the same diameter and depth as shank, bore holes for threaded portion of
screws with bit no larger than base of thread.
d) Chromium plated screws on all fastenings exposed to weather.
CAR/4
CARPENTRY
14. BOLTS
Generally shall have hexagonal heads and nuts unless otherwise stated. Threads shall be Whitworth
and all bolts shall be fitted with washers.
a) To be installed in drilled holes the diameter of the bolts, 1/32 inch to 1/16 inch oversize.
b) Washers : Provide all bolts bearing wood, unless noted otherwise on t he drawings with
washers under heads and nuts.
c) Use chromium plated bolts, nuts and washers where exposed to weather.
15. POWER DRIVEN FASTENERS
Power driven fasteners fixing to be selected and approved by the SO shall be installed as detailed
and in the size, number and type as shown or recommended in manufacturer's printed instructions.
16. SAMPLES
17. SHOP DRAWINGS
For all work in relation to Carpentry's Work, etc. the Contractor shall provide, for the approval of the
SO shop drawings before commencement of any work/fabrication. Such shop drawings must be
CAR/5
CARPENTRY
19. SCHEDULE OF STRENGTH GROUPING
SCHEDULE OF TIMBER SPECIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH STRENGTH GROUPING
Group A Group B Group C Group D
Naturally Requiring Naturally Requiring Requiring Requiring

Durable Treatment Durable Treatment Treatment Treatment
Balau Kandis Balau Merah Bekak Bayur Ara

Bitis Kempas Resak Berangan Bintangor Damar Minyak
Chengal Kulim Tembusu Dedali Durian Geronggang
Giam Mataulat Derum Gerutu Jelutong
Kekatong Meransi Kapur Kasai Petai
Keranji Mertas Kelat Kayu Getah Pulai
Pauh Kijang Keledang Kedondong Sesendok
Penaga Keruing Kembang Semangkuk Terap
Punah Kungkur Ketapang Terentang
Tualang Mempening Machang
Mengkulang Medang
Membatu Melantai
Merawan Melunak
Merpauh Mempisang
Nyaling Meranti-merah Tua
Perah Meranti-merah Muda
Peraling Meranti-putih
Rengas Meranti-bakau
Sengkuang Meranti-kuning
Simpoh Mersawa
Nyatoh
Penarahan
Perupok
Ramin
Sepetir
Sentang
CAR/6
CARPENTRY
SCHEDULE OF STRENGTH GROUPING (CONT’D.)
No. Typical Usage Species
1. Structural Frames A -Balau, Bitis, Chengal, Giam, Keratong,

- All columns, stilts and beams Keranji
2. Bearers to Water Tank B -Balau merah, Resak, Tembusu
3. Staircase and Component Element Tembusu

3.1 - Stringers and Trades/Riser B -Balau merah, Resak, Tembusu
3.2 - Trimmer Beams B -Balau merah, Resak, Tembusu
3.3 - Balustrades, Nosing and Handrails B -Balau merah, Resak, Tembusu
4. Flooring
4.1 - Floor bearers, joists and strutting for joists B -Balau merah, Resak, Tembusu
4.2 - Floor Boardings B -Balau merah, Resak, Tembusu
4.3 - Gymnasium Floor Boarding B -Balau, Bitis, Chengal, Giam, Keratong,
Keranji
4.4 - Parquest Flooring B -Balau merah, Resak, Tembusu
4.5 - Skirting B -Balau merah, Resak, Tembusu
5. Walling
5.1 - Wall and partition framings B -Balau merah, Resak, Tembusu
5.2 - External wall boardings B
5.3 - Internal wall boardings C
6. Roof Structure
6.1 - Roof trusses, Rafters, Purlins, Wall Plates and A
Other Roof Members
6.2 - Fascia Boards B
7. Ceiling Frames
7.1 - Ceiling joists and spacers B
7.2 - Cover battens to joints of ceiling sheets B
7.3 - Ceiling strips and soffits and battens C
8. Door and Window Frames A, B

8.1 - All doors, window, vent frames, grounds, stops
and Architraves
a. External Usage B
b. Internal Usage C
9. Furniture and Fittings

9.1 - Built – in fittings and furniture generally
a. Carcassing B
b. Lining/Panelling C
c. Top B
9.2 - Workshop Furniture Top B
10. Beading fillets and edgings generally B
CAR/7
CARPENTRY
SCHEDULE OF STRENGTH GROUPING (CONT’D.)
SCHEDULE : MOISTURE CONTENT (M.C.) OF TIMBER

FOR VARIATION APPLICATION
Maximum m.c. at time of

Maximum m.c. at time of installation installation for air-conditioned
Application for non air-conditioned application application (kiln-dried timber)
Structural Components
- Columns, beams bearers, studs, joists 30% (thickness exceeding 100mm) n.a.
ties and struts 25% (thickness not exceeding 100mm) n.a.
Roofing
- Rafters, ties, struts, purlins and
bracings 25% n.a.
- Battens 25% n.a.
Staircase
- Stringers, treads, trimmer beam and
handrail 19% 12%
- Balustrades 19% 12%
Flooring
- Floor boarding and parquetry 19% 12%
- Skirtings 19% 12%
Walling
- Wall, partition framings 19% 12%
- External wall boardings 19% 12%
- Internal wall boardings slats and
screens 19% 12%
Fascia board 19% 12%
Ceiling Frames
- Cover battens to joints of ceiling
sheets 25% n.a.
- Ceiling strips and soffit battens 19% 12%
Door and Window Frames

- Door, window and vent frames
including their stops and grounds 19% 12%
- Door leaves, window and vent sashes
19% 12%
Furniture
- Built in fittings and furniture 19% 12%
- Workshop furniture 19% 12%
- Science laboratory tops 19% 12%
Beading fillets and edgings generally 19% 12%
Note: n.a. = not applicable
CAR/8
JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY
1. JOINERY TIMBER GENERALLY

The whole of the timber for joiner's work unless otherwise described shall be the best procurable
vacuum/ pressure impregnated preservative treated (previously described in Carpentry) Kapor or
other Group B timber as indicated on the SO's drawings or as described (unless otherwise stated).
All timber shall be obtained from a firm to be selected and approved by the SO and shall be sound,
thoroughly seasoned, sawn die square, free from sap, shakes, cracks, waney edges, large, loose or
dead knots, spongy or brittle heart, white ants, borers and other defects.
Grading and vacuum/ pressure impregnated preservative treated timber shall be as described in the
specifications for “Carpentry Timber Generally”.
After the Contractor had taken delivery of the graded and seasoned timber, it shall be stored under
cover and be kept perfectly dry before use. The SO may inspect the timber at any time to ensure that
it is being so stored and may reject any timber, which is not so stored. The timber is to reach a
moisture content of 18% and as described in the specification for “Carpentry Timber Generally”.
Joinery timber shall be equal samples submitted by the Contractor and approved by the SO. Samples
are to remain in the office of the SO during the currency of the Contract.
Timber must be delivered on the site within one month of the commencement of the Contract and
must be properly stacked under cover to ensure free air circulation round all faces and the minimum
of warping.
Any timber of which the SO does not approve is to be removed from the site immediately and
replaced by timber, which is selected and approved by the SO. Only timber, which has been
selected and approved by the SO, shall be incorporated in the works.
All joinery to be left clean for staining or for the application of transparent finishings.
2. PLYWOOD
All plywood is to be sound and free from warping and twisting and is to comply with BS 1455 or
other approved equivalent. Only paint grade plywood shall be used.
Where flush plywood doors are to receive stain and clear varnish, the plywood used shall be 6mm
thick TEAK PLY on both sides (unless otherwise described).
Waterproof plywood shall be WBP Grade.
3. PVC LAMINATE
The colour and type of the PVC laminate shall be obtained from the Contractor’s Specialist Supplier
to be selected and approved by the SO and fixed with an impact adhesive to be selected and
approved by the SO and pressure heat bonded. The Contractor shall include for a recommended
backing to prevent warping.
Rates are to include for all mitred joints to all edges of the plastic laminate finish.
4. TIMBER VENEERS
Timber veneers where described as Meranti, Cherry Wood, Maple, Teak, Mahogany, Ebony, Birch,
etc. shall be obtained from the Contractor’s Specialist Supplier to be selected and approved by the SO.
The colour and type of the veneer is to be selected and approved by the SO and fixed with an
approved impact adhesive as above described for PVC laminate.
Rates are to include for all mitred joints to all edges of the veneered finish.
JOI/1
5. POLYESTER OVERLAID DECORATIVE LAMINATED PLYWOOD

The polyester overlaid decorative laminated plywood shall be obtained from the Contractor’s
Specialist Supplier to be selected and approved by the SO and used in strict accordance with the
The plywood backing shall be the moisture-resistant type and the surface shall be available in matt
or glossy at the same price.
The polyester overlaid decorative laminated plywood panels shall be delivered in standard 2440 x
1220mm wide sheets and shall be sealed in pairs (face to face) so that their surfaces are well
protected during loading and unloading.
Scratched panels shall be rejected and removed off the site and replaced with new at Contractor’s
own expense.
6. NAILS AND SCREWS

Nails and screws are to conform to BS 1202 and screws to BS 1210 other approved equivalent.
7. WROUGHT WORK
All timber for joiner's work is to be wrought unless otherwise described.
8. JOINERS' WORK GENERALLY

All joiners' work is to be cut out and framed together as soon after the commencement of the building
as practicable, but is not to be wedged up or glued until the building is ready for fixing same.
Any portions that warp, get in winding or develop shakes or other defects within twelve (12) months
after the Completion of the Project shall be removed and new portions fixed in its place together
with all other work which may be affected thereby all at the Contractor's own expense.
All work is to be properly morticed, tenoned, shouldered, wedged, pinned, bradded, etc. as directed
and to the approval of the SO and all properly glued up with best quality approved glue.
All exposed surfaces of joinery works shall be wrought by planing, sand papering and glass
papering to an approved finish suitable to the specified treatment.
All sizes stated are nominal sizes. W here there are no full size details, exposed corners of frames,
glazing bars and other finishes shall be rounded. All arrises are to be eased off.
All face work in timber is to be fixed with round or oval brads or nails well punched in or stopped.
9. PROCEDURE OF JOINERY OPERATIONS

The Contractor is responsible for ascertaining and ensuring that the building operations are arranged
in all respects so that the joinery works may be carried out in accordance with the instructions
contained in this Specification or as shown on the drawings.
In the event of any uncertainty about the intentions and details of the work the Contractor is to
consult the SO.
JOI/2
10. FIXED-IN JOINERY

Where the joinery works are specified or shown to be fixed-in, it is the responsibility of the
Contractor to ensure that the necessary fittings are incorporated in the carcass, or alternatively, the
Contractor may construct such ground works as are required to provide a suitable base and fixing for
the joinery works.
No work on these is to commence until the Contractor can take measurement from the site.
The Contractor is to secure fixed-in joinery works so that they are plumb and true to the shapes and
members are to the full sizes shown on working drawings and details.
Vertical junctions shall be solidly bedded in mortar, wedged or otherwise secured as may be
specified, or as is most appropriate in the circumstances, but a clearance is to be maintained in all
overhead junctions so that settlement in the building carcass may take place without stressing or
otherwise loading the joinery works.
11. FRAMINGS
All doors and other framings are to get out and panels slipped in as soon as possible after the signing
of the Contract and allowed to stand until required.
12. SETTING OUT

All dimensions are to be checked before carrying out the work.
13. MEASUREMENTS FOR JOINERY

The Contractor is to take all measurements for joinery works at the building and not from the
drawings.
14. PELLETING
Items of joinery described as "screwed and flush pelleted" are to have the heads of screws let in and
pelleted with timber similar to the item with the grain as matching as possible and are to be cleaned
off and surfaces left flushed.
15. PLUGS
All plugs are as previously specified in Carpenter's Specification.
16. CAPILLARITY
The Contractor is to take all reasonable measures to check or prevent capillary penetration of water
in the joints and open connections of external joinery works and in other positions where joinery
works may be exposed to water.
The Contractor is to ensure that all weathered surfaces, throatings, grooves and joints, etc. and all open
connections in external joinery works are properly executed and weatherproof.
17. MOULDINGS
All moulded work shall be accurately worked to the details supplied by the SO or as directed on site. All
mouldings shall be worked on the solid, except where otherwise stated.
JOI/3
18. SCRIBING
All skirtings, architraves, plates and other joinery works shall be accurately scribed to fit the contour
of any irregular surface against which they may be required to form a close butt connection.
19. DEFECTIVE WORK

Any joinery works which may show flaws or defects arising from unsound materials or defective
workmanship shall be removed and replaced with new at the Contractor's own expense.
20. WOOD PRESERVATIVE

Frames, timbers, etc. that are not vacuum/pressure impregnated with preservative treatment that are
abutting concrete, brick or plaster, are to receive two coats of approved wood preservative
complying to BS 144 other approved equivalent and treated in accordance with SS CP1 before
fixing and the Contractor is deemed to have allowed for the cost of this in his offer.
21. DOOR FRAMES AND ARCHITRAVES

Provide approved door frames in wrought vacuum/pressure impregnated with preservative treatment
unless otherwise described built into joints of masonery walls with three (3) pairs of approved
galvanized steel fishtailed door cramps and screwed to back of frame. D oor frames to fire rated
doors shall also be similar but complying to the FSB requirements to be supplied and installed by the
Contractor’s Specialist for the fire doors. Provide moulded architraves to the door frames.
22. DOORS
Construct and hang all doors in vacuum/pressure impregnated preservative treated wrought approved
timber (unless otherwise described) as shown on the Architectural drawings to SO's approval.
23. ACCESS TO PIPE DUCTS

Access doors shall be constructed in vacuum/pressure impregnated preservative treated wrought Kapor
complete with door frames and cramps (unless otherwise described) all as shown on the SO's drawings.
24. FIRE DOORS

All doors with fire rating ONE HOUR, TWO HOUR and above shall be approved by Singapore Fire
Authorities and shall be subject to testing by an approved Authority and labelling and shall have the
Authority’s mark of approval to be obtained from the Contractor’s Specialist to be selected and approved
by the SO. The Contractor’s Specialist shall be responsible for the installation of the doors and frames.
The fire doors above described shall conform with FSB and a ll other relevant local authority
requirements and come complete with the associated door frame and ironmongery to to match the
other non-fire rated doors to be selected and approved by the SO. It shall be the Contractor's sole
responsibility to obtain all necessary statutory approvals and for any costs associated therewith.
Ironmongery used shall be an FSB approved range (to match ironmongery previously selected for
the non-fire rated doors) to be obtained from the Contractor’s Specialist Supplier to be selected
and approved by the SO and to be installed by the Contractor’s Specialist.
All ironmongery used shall match the existing school’s ironmongery with keys to locksets
mastered to comply with the existing master keying system.
Provide shop drawings to SO's approval.
The Contractor shall provide, for the approval of the SO, shop drawings showing typical
installation details.
JOI/4
25. SECOND GRADE AMERICAN HARD MAPLE STRIP FLOORING OR EQUIVALENT

TO MULTIPURPOSE HALL (MPH),ETC
2nd Grade American Hard Maple Specification:-
• Type - Acer Saccharum, A. Nigrum
• Specific Gravity (12% M.C.) - 0.63
• Average Weight (12% M.C.) - 705 kg/m³
• Average Volumetric Shrinkage (Green to 6% M.C.) - 11.9%
• Modulus of Elasticity - 12,618 MPa
• Hardness - 6,450 N
Certificate of the Quality of Timber from country of origin to be submitted including verification of
documents to be approved by the SO.
26. SELF LEVELLING COMPOUND PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF SPRUNG

(PNEUMATIC) SPORTS TIMBER FLOOR TO MULTIPURPOSE HALL (MPH),ETC
Apply layer of 3-5mm thick proprietory self-levelling compound to the top of the reinforced
concrete slab in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instruction.
The self-levelling compound shall be installed by the Specialist supplying and installing the sprung
timber floor system to ensure that the floor is level to suit his requirements.
The compound shall comprise of high quality synthetic resins, special cement and selected fillers and
when mixed with water will produce a fluid easily trowel mortar resulting in a hard smooth surface.
Surfaces to receive the mortar shall be free from grease, paint, loose materials, dust, dirt, etc.
Special proprietory primer shall first be applied to seal the pores prior to application of the self-
levelling compound.
5mm Thick of the compound shall be walkable in 3 hours and ready to receive finish in 48 hours at 30ºC.
Coverage shall be 25 kg per bag of the compound to cover 5.55m² of floor surface at 3mm thickness.
TECHNICAL DATA
Bulk density of powder Approx. 1.3 kg/litre
Weight of fresh mortar Approx. 2.0 kg/litre
Working time at 30ºC Approx. 20 minutes
Flow life at 30ºC Approx. 15 minutes
Initial Set (Vicat) Approx. 40 minutes
Final Set (Vicat) 1 hour
Compressive Strength (DIN 1164)

After 1 day 6 N/mm²
After 7 days 22 N/mm²
Tensile Bending Strength (DIN 1164)

After 1 day 1.5 N/mm²
Ball Pressure Hardness (Brinell)

After 1 day 30.0 N/mm²
After 7 days 79.0 N/mm²
After 28 days 93.0 N/mm²
JOI/5
27. SPRUNG (PNEUMATIC) SPORTS FLOORING SYSTEM TO THE MPH
.1 The Contractor shall offer a proprietory solid timber sprung (pneumatic) sports flooring
system to be installed by Specialist which complies fully with the respective specifications to
the Multipurpose Hall (MPH).
.2 To achieve the stated performance criteria in terms of results all to SO’s approval.
.3 Proprietory Sprung (Pneumatic) Timber Sports Floor System
.1 Test Requirements
The sprung (pneumatic) sports flooring system has to achieve the stated performance
criteria indicated below:-
The sprung (pneumatic) sports flooring system shall meet the EN 14904 Type 4(A) or its
equivalent certified standard specifically in the following performance criteria:-
.01 Shock Absorption Test (%)

Shock Absorption is the ability of a sports surface to reduce the impact force of a body
falling onto the surface.
Type 4 (A) i.e. the value should be greater or equal to 55% and less than 75% [= 55 < 75]
.02 Vertical Deformation Test (mm)

Vertical Deformation of the sports floor should have a deflection when placed under a
load of 1,500N.
Type 4 (A) i.e. the value should be greater or equal to 2.3 and less than 5 [= 2.3 < 5.0]
.03 Vertical Ball Behavior Test

This is a test whereby a basketball would be allowed to fall vertically onto a surface and
the height to which it rebounds is measured and calculated as the percentage rebound
height.
Rebound height should be greater or equal to 90%.
.04 Friction Test

Pendulum Test Value (PTV) shall be within 80 and 110.
.05 Resistance to Rolling Load Test

The maximum indentation shall be 0.5mm tested under the Minimum Vertical Rolling
Load of 1,500N without damage.
The whole of the Proprietory Sprung (Pneumatic) Timber Sports Floor System to be
approved by the SO and to be supplied and installed by the Specialist who shall be
responsible for the design, fabrication, supply and installation of the sports floor,
expansion joints, skirting, connection of floor sockets, anchors, covers inclusive of their
intended performance and function.
Shop drawings and details shall be supplied by the Specialist for SO’s approval.
The Contractor and Specialist shall provide a written JOINT GUARANTEE of FIVE
(5) YEARS (as attached Format Specimen) against faulty workmanship and premature
breakdown of materials. The Guarantee shall commence from date of Substantial
JOI/6
SPRUNG (PNEUMATIC) SPORTS FLOORING SYSTEM (CONT’D.)
Proprietory Sprung (Pneumatic) Timber Sports Floor System (Cont’d.)
.1 Test Requirements (Cont’d.)
On-Site Test and Verification
Before proceeding with the full installation, the Contractor is advised to carry out his
own pre-test to comply with the performance criteria as stated.
After the installation of the sprung (pneumatic) floor system has been completed, the
Contractor is required to arrange for on-site tests to be carried out to the MPH by an
Accredited Independent Testing Authority to verify that the installed floor system is
in full compliance with EN 14904 Type 4(A) or its equivalent and shall meet all the
Performance Criteria as stated above.
The Test shall be witnessed and endorsed by the SO or his representative. The test
report(s) will be issued by the Accredited Independent Testing Authority and submit
to the SO. The SO will only accept test report(s) that have passed all as stated above.
The Contractor shall factor in the time required to carry out such tests into his Master
Programme time schedule and is liable to pay Liquidated Damages if they fail to
complete within the Contract Period.
Replacement of the Failed Sprung Timber Floor System
Should the installed sprung (pneumatic) floor system originally declared as EN 14904
Type 4(A) or its equivalent certified fail to meet the performance criteria as
mentioned, it will not be accepted by the SO. The whole installed floor system is to be
removed and replaced with one that meets EN 14904 Type 4(A) or its equivalent and
the performance criteria as stated above. The Contractor will bear the replacement
costs and any subsequent on-site tests. The Contractor will be liable to pay for
liquidated damages (where applicable) if there is a d elay in the completion of the
project due to the above
.2 Solid Hardwood Sprung Floor System

The system offered shall be EN 14904 Type 4(A) or its equivalent certified standard
in full compliance to be designed, fabricated, supplied and installed by the Specialist.
Overall construction thickness of the solid hardwood pneumatic sprung floor system
shall be approved by the SO.
Surface shall be minimum 57 x 20mm thick tongued and grooved approved 2nd Grade
American Hard Maple on proprietory sleepers resting on and including proprietory
pneumatic pads with vapour barrier below.
Hardwood floor to be secret fixed and machine sanded smooth and finished with two (2)
coats of approved sealer and two (2) coats of 2-pack quality approved polyurethane finish.
Floor system shall be deemed to include for proprietory skirting.
JOI/7
28. DANCE STUDIO PROPRIETORY FLOOR SYSTEM (Where applicable)

The timber floor to the Dance Studio shall be an approved proprietory floor system by Specialist
comprising 2nd Grade American Hard Maple floor in full compliance with EN 14904 T ype 3
including finishes all to SO’s approval.
Cost shall be deemed to include for matching skirting.
The floor shall be sanded down smooth and sealed with two (2) coats of approved sealer and two (2)
coats of 2-pack quality approved polyurethane finish shall be applied to the Maple floor.
Shop drawings shall be supplied by the Specialist for SO’s approval.
(as attached Format Speciman) against faulty workmanship and premature breakdown of materials.
The Guarantee shall commence from date of Substantial Completion of the works.
29. MUSIC ROOM HARDWOOD FLOOR SYSTEM (Where Applicable)

The floor to the Music Rooms shall be an approved system to be installed by Contractor’s Specialist to be
approved by the SO.
Total overall floor thickness to be 44mm high with 57 x 20mm thick selected 2nd Grade American Hard
Maple secret fixed to and including WBP plywood sub-base secured to structural concrete slab to SO’s
approval.
Cost shall be deemed to include for matching skirting.
The floor shall be sanded down smooth and sealed with two (2) coats of approved sealer and two (2)
coats of 2-pack quality approved polyurethane finish shall be applied to the Maple floor.
Shop drawings shall be supplied by the Specialist for SO’s approval.
JOI/8
30. TIMBER DOORS
The Contractor shall design, fabricate and install the door in accordance with the door schedule.
The Contractor shall provide the SO with full and complete shop drawings. Such drawings shall be
submitted in ample time for checking and for resubmission of any amendments desired so as not in
any way to jeopardise the time for completion of the work.
Flush door shall be constructed in accordance with BS 459 : Part 2 other approved equivalent with
hardwood lipping to all edges.
Fire door shall be FSSD approved solid timber door with hardwood lipping to all edges. Where viewing
openings are required, they shall comply with FSSD requirements.
Unless otherwise stated, the external surface of all doors shall be faced with 6mm thick plywood and
finished with three coats of synthetic enamel paint. P lywood shall be marine-ply for doors which
will come into contact with water.
All viewing panels to doors shall be constructed with 6mm thick clear float glass panel and beaded
all round unless otherwise indicated.
All air-conditioned rooms shall have door closers and viewing panels.
Provide approved Acoustic Neoprene door seals to doors at Music, Band and Dance Rooms.
Provide approved school standard plastic room signages with reversed lettering.
Existing Doors & Viewing Panels : Carefully remove all the existing doors and modify to provide
a framed glass viewing panel and to rehang to SO’s approval (applicable to Schools having equal
leaf pairs of doors).
31. IRONMONGERY TO DOORS
Supply and fix ironmongery to doors.
The Contractor shall provide ironmongery obtainable from suppliers to colours approved by the SO
in accordance with the brands given herein or other equal brands approved by the SO. The
ironmongery supplier must have a valid ISO 9001 a ccredited by Singapore Accreditation Council
for the “Design & Supply of Ironmongery”.
All ironmongery shall be of a good quality type to be obtained from a Specialist Supplier to be
selected and approved by the SO and installed by the Main Contractor (ironmongery to fire doors to
be installed by Specialist) including labeling Keys and Master Keying of all locks.
Prices for the ironmongery shall be deemed to include for construction locks to be activated
into the permanent locksets upon handing over to the SO.
All ironmongery used shall match the existing School’s ironmongery with keys to locksets mastered
to comply with the existing master keying system.
The Contractor is to reconfirm the Master Key, Sub key and Key-A-Like Systems prior to actual
fabrication and installation and is deemed to have allowed for all extra keying and additional
requirements in his offer.
Master key systems shall be provided for classrooms, administration rooms, special rooms and Hall
doors. Key-Alike systems shall be provided for toilets and ducts doors. Bookshop and canteen stall
doors shall not be provided with Master Key or Key-Alike.
JOI/9
IRONMONGERY TO DOORS (CONT’D.)
.1 Hinges
.1 All full mortise hinges supplied shall be of the same manufacturer and available in low,
medium and high frequency (size : 114 x 102 x 3.4mm and 114 x 102 x 4.6mm).
.2 Unless otherwise specified, all hinges shall be of satin stainless steel grade Button
tip, Full mortice template butt hinges.
.3 All hinges shall be supplied with Wood screw for timber doors and Machine screw for
metal doors.
.4 A full mortice hinges are available with security studs for added safety and security.
.5 To provide minimum of 3 Nos. hinges for door up to 2100mm high, 4 Nos for solid doors and
an additional hinges for every 500mm high thereof or for doors exceeding 1000mm width.
.6 All hinges must be tested and assessed against requirements BS 7352:1990-
class 8.or ANSI/BHMA A 156.1-1988-grade 2 other approved equivalent.
.7 Stainless Steel Hinges shall be :-
a) ABS satin stainless steel ball bearing hinges 114 x 102 x 3.4mm or
b) Gege satin stainless steel ball bearing hinges 114 x 102 x 3.4mm or
c) Stanley FBB 191 satin stainless hinges 114 x 102 x 3.4mm or
d) Other equal or approved equivalent
.2 Floor Spring (For all glass doors)

.1 Depth of floor spring shall not be more than 60mm. The contractor shall ensure that the
top level of floor spring completed is of the same level as the adjacent finished floor
level (with finishes).
.2 All floor spring should be provided with pressure relief valve to prevent over loading
and oil leaking.
.3 Floor spring should be provided with adjustable hold open / back check from 75 to
175 degree.
.4 Floor spring should have delayed closing up to 45 seconds.
.5 Floor spring should be available in closing force of 35NM or 25NM.
.6 Must be able to carry door weight up to 150 kg.
.7 Floor spring should be available with interchangeable spindle from 5mm to 50mm
suitable for Timber, Metal, Door rail and Frameless glass doors.
.8 Floor Spring shall be:-
a) Dorma BTS75 double action floor spring c/w stain stainless steel cover or
b) ABS BTS75 action floor spring c/w stain stainless steel cover or
c) Gege 7500 double action floor spring c/w stain stainless steel cover or
d) Other equal or approved equivalent.
.9 Patch Fitting shall be:-
a) Dorma PT10/20 and US10 Patch fitting and Lock or
b) ABS T10/20 and US Patch fitting and Lock or
c) Gege Top and Bottom Patch fitting and Patch Lock or
JOI/10
.3 Flush Bolt
.1 All flush bolts shall of boxed type lever action in satin stainless steel. Length of
flush bolt shall be 200mm and 300mm for Timber doors.
.2 Extension Flush bolt lever action type in satin chrome. Length of extension rod shall
be available from 300, 450 and 600mm for Metal doors.
.3 Dust proof socket use shall be of spring type.
Dust proof socket cover must be able to remove for maintenance.
.4 Boxed Type flush bolt shall be:-

a) ABS satin stainless steel boxed type flush bolt 200/300mm for timber door or
b) Gege satin stainless steel boxed type bolt 200/300mm for timber door or
c) Union satin stainless Steel boxed type flush bolt 200/300mm for timber door or
.5 Extension flush bolt shall be:-

a) ABS sc extension flush bolt metal / alum door or
b) Gege sc extension flush bolt for metal / alum door or
c) Union sc extension flush bolt for metal / alum door or
.6 Dust proof socket with removable cover shall be:-

a) ABS satin chrome dust proof socket w/removable cover or
b) Gege satin chrome dust proof socket w/removable cover or
c) Union satin chrome dust proof socket w/removable cover or
JOI/11
.4 Door Closer and Selector
.1 Manufactured with Cam Action Technology so as to achieve comfortably with low

opening forces and highly efficient closing.
.2 Door closer shall be available in fully adjustable closing force EN size 1 to 4 (Spring
Strength) – Closer Dimension – 51mm x 60mm x 240mm.
.3 Supplied with Slide Arm and Channel as Standard.

.4 Equipped with mounting back plate with universal fixing hole pattern.
.5 Door closers shall have a bui lt i n t hermostat a nd special hydraulic fluid to ensure
constant speed even during varying temperature and with pressure relief valve to prevent
over loading, oil leaking an damaging of back check valve.
.6 Door closers shall be tested to approve efficiency rating of 1.5 million cyclic test (closing
force in relation to opening force in excess of 60%) and have an adjustable latching force to
ensure that the door is properly closed and latched.
.7 Door closers shall be totally reversible without adjustment and have power adjustment
for door width up to 1100mm.
.8 Door closers shall comply with all the quality assured manufacture to ISO 9002, EN
29002, BS 5750 and ANSI Grade 1 other approved equivalent.
.9 Door selector shall be available. Exposed type with 280-350mm length.
.10 Cam action door closer (size 2-4 adjustable power) shall be:-
a) Dorma TS92 cam action door closer with back check and slide arm channel or
b) ABS 9200 cam action door closer with back check and slide arm channel or
c) D line 14.5813.02 Cam action door closer w/back check and slide arm channel or
.11 Cam action door closer (size 2-6 adjustable power) shall be:-
a) Dorma TS93 cam action door closer with back check and slide arm channel or
b) ABS 9300 cam action door closer with back check and slide arm channel or
c) D line 14.5813.02 Cam action door closer w/back check and slide arm channel or
.12 Door Selector shall be:-

a) D line door selector or
b) ABS door selector or
c) Dorma door selector or
JOI/12
.5 Lockcases
.1 All lockcases supplied shall be of the same manufacturer with certificate of cyclist test
to 500,000 operation.
.2 Lockcases and strike plate must be modular and supplied with full size template
and fixing instruction for Timber and Metal doors.
.3 All lockcases shall be supplied complete with modular strike plate, Cylinder,
Escutcheon, thumb turn, as required for the specified function, Escutcheon and thumb turn
must be in satin stainless steel grade 316L. Cylinder must not protrude more than 4mm
from the door surface. And it must be flush with the escutcheon cover.
.4 Rebated kit and striking plates shall be provided for all double leaves Timber doors.
.5 All lockcases shall of heavy spring and open softly, smoothly and silently at 30
degree angle (approximately) and yet strong enough to prevent any form of sagging to
S.O‟s approval.
.6 All cylinder retaining screws supplied must be in Torx fixing to prevent tempering.
.7 All lockcases must be fire rated up to 4 hrs and it must comply to Din 18250. All
lockcases must have a minimum 60mm backset.
.8 All lockcases must be supplied with cast iron latch bolt and dead Bolt.
.9 Heavy duty mortice latch with strike shall be:-

a) D line 14.9034.02 – 60mm heavy duty mortice latch with strike or
b) ABS 11206/60 ss heavy duty mortice latch with strike or
c) Gege 120 series 60mm ss heavy duty mortice latch with strike or
.10 Heavy duty mortice night latch – anti throughst with strike shall be:-
a) D line 14.9034.02 – 60mm heavy duty mortice night latch – anti throughst
with strike or
b) ABS 11206/60 ss heavy duty mortice night latch – anti throughst with strike or
c) Gege 120 series 60mm ss heavy duty mortice night latch – anti throughst with strike or
.11 Heavy duty mortice entrance lock with strike shall be:-
a) D line 14.9031.02-60mm heavy duty mortice entrance lock with strike or
b) ABS 11206/60 ss heavy mortice entrance lock with strike or
c) Gege 120 seris 60mm ss heavy duty mortice entrance lock with strike or
.12 Heavy duty mortice escape entrance lock with strike shall be:-
a) D line 14.9031.02 – 60mm heavy duty mortice escape entrance lock with strike or
b) ABS 112060/60 ss heavy duty mortice escape entrance lock with strike or
c) Gege 120 series 60mm ss heavy duty mortice escape entrance lock with strike or
JOI/13
Lockcases (Cont’d.)
.13 Heavy duty mortice escape dead lock with strike shall be:-
a) D line 14.9036.02 heavy duty mortice escape dead lock with strike or
b) ABS 11206/60 heavy duty mortice escape dead lock with strike or
c) Gege 120 series 60mm ss heavy duty mortice escape dead lock with strike or
.14 Rebated kit shall be:-
a) D line 14.9036.02 rebated kit or
b) ABS 11206/60 rebated kit or
c) Gege 120 series rebated unit or
.15 All Jimmy Proof Lockcases shall have the following:-
a) Minimum 60mm backset of high purity zinc alloy casting
b) Bolt shall be solid steel bolt and be nickel electroplated using the
restricted profile 7 pins rim cylinder
c) The rim cylinder must have a restricted multi- profile family for future
expansion and have a 7 minimum 7 pins.
d) High security cylinders designed to meet CEN Grade 5 other approved

equivalent.
.16 Jimmy Proof Lock with strikes shall be:-
a) Gege Jimmy proof lock with strikes or
b) BKS Jimmy proof lock or
c) Abloy Jimmy Proof lock or
.17 Supply mortice latch w/weak spring with strikes to all HR shall be:-
a) Union 2642 mortice latch w/weak spring with strikes or
b) Abs 11306/100 ss weak spring mortice latch with strike or
c) Gege 130 series 100mm ss weak spring latch with strikes or
JOI/14
.6 High Security Cylinder
.1 All cylinders supplied shall be of the same manufacturer and have three zone over
lapping key way for anti-pick protection by specially design housing mushroom pins
of special hardened steel.
.2 All cylinder supplied must be under Grand master key complete with a Construction
key. The contractor shall liaise with his sub-contractor responsible for producing a
key chart in Grand master key system for SO‟s approval prior to production of cylinder.
.3 All cylinders have a comprehensive range of cylinder lengths which enable correct
specifications for flush mounting against vandalism by wrenching.
.4 All cylinders shall be supplied with 3 nos Copper nickel key for differ cylinder and 6
nos Copper nickel key for key alike cylinder.
.5 All cylinder supplied must have a Restricted multi-purpose family for future expansion
and have a minimum 7 pins.
.6 No cylinder pins shall be exposed in any form of protruded more that 5mm in
excess of door leaf thickness.
.7 The cylinders shall have special hardened steel pins to prevent vandalism by drilling
from all angles.
.8 “Cog Wheel” or feature side bar and steel bar leaving within the barrel giving
additional anti-prick features.
.9 High Security cylinders designed to meet CEN Grade 5.
.10 Supplier shall provide computerized master keying system for SO‟s approval
before pinning of cylinders.
.11 Restricted Profile – 7 pin single cylinder shall be:-

a) ABS AP2000/3000 restricted control – single cylinder or
b) Gege Stop key AMS restricted – single cylinder or
c) Union Medeco restricted security cylinder – single or
.12 Restricted Profile – 7 pin double cylinder shall be:-

a) ABS P2000/3000 restricted control – double cylinder or
b) Gege Stop key AMS restricted – double cylinder or
c) Union Medeco restricted security cylinder – double or
JOI/15
High Security Cylinder (Cont’d.)
.13 Restricted Profile – 7 pins single thumb turn cylinder shall be:-
a) ABS AP2000/3000 restricted control – single thumb turn cylinder or
b) Gege Stop key AMS restricted – single turn cylinder or
c) Union Medeco restricted security cylinder – single cylinder thumb turn or
.14 Single Thumb turn cylinder – Power Grid master key shall be:-
a) Union – single cylinder thumd turn or
b) Yale – single cylinder thumb turn or
c) Alboy – single cylinder with thumb turn or
.15 Padlock and Hasp and Staple – Power Grid master key shall be:-
a) Union – Padlock or
b) Yale – padlock or
c) Alboy – padlock or
.7 Fixing
.1 All fixing supplied shall of the same manufacturer.
.2 Fixing shall be available to suit Timber and Metal doors.
.3 Fixing must be supplied with Torx head detail to prevent tampering.
.4 Fixing must be available for lever / pull handle and all bolt through detail.
.5 Torx screw driver and attachment for power tools is to be supplied with fixing.
.6 Secret fixing bolt and through fixing detail must be available for all type of fixing problem.
.7 Spindle must available to solve all type of fixing problem.

a) Spindle shall be available in hook single sided, full, spilt type with bolt through.
b) Spindle length shall be able to take doors thickness of 120mm if necessary
.8 Torx section bolt through fixing shall be:-

a) D line 14.2961 or 2962.92 Torx sectioned bolt fixing M4 x 75mm or 5 x 75mm or
b) ABS Torx sectioned bolt fixing M4 x 75mm or M5 x 75mm or
c) Gege Torx sectioned bolt fixing M4 x 75mm or M5 x 75mm or
JOI/16
Fixing (Cont’d.)
.9 Single sided hook spindle shall be:-
a) D line 14.2800.92 Hook single spindle fixing 8 x 8mm or
b) ABS Hook single sided fixing 8 x 8mm or
c) Gege hook single sided spindle fixing 8 x 8mm or
.10 Double sided full/spilt spindle shall be:-
a) D line 14.2811.92 spilt double spindle 8x8mm with bolt through fixing.d line
14.2815.92 full double spindle 8x8mm or
b) ABS spilt double spindle 8x8mm with bolt through fixing.abs full double
spindle 8x8mm or
c) Gege spilt double spindle 8x8mm with bolt through fixing.Gege full
double spindle 8x8mm or
.11 Secret fixing for Pull Handle shall be:-
a) D line 14.4955.92 secret fixing for timber and metal doors or
b) ABS secret fixing for timber and metal doors or
c) Gege secret fixing for timber for timber and metal doors or
.12 Bolt through fixing for Pull Handle shall be:-
a) D line 14.4915.92 bolt through fixing for timber and metal doors or
b) ABS bolt through fixing for timber and metal doors or
c) Gege bolt through fixing for timber and metal doors or
JOI/17
.8 Handle and Accessories
.1 All levers / Pull Handle and Accessories shall be of the same manufacturer.
.2 All Levers / Pull Handle and Accessories shall be satin stainless steel uniform
finishes through the whole handle and accessories product range.
.3 All Levers / Pull Handle must be fitted with a solid insert for optimum strength and to
withstand very rough handling.
.4 All Levers / Pull Handle shall have a uniform bend to a radius which equals the
diameter of the tube.
.5 All Roses, Escutcheon and Snib turn shall have a snap on cover with a maximum
thickness of not more that 4mm.
.6 All Levers / Pull Handle, Roses and Acessories must be supplied with a bolt
through fixing and supplied with a Torx head detail to prevent tempering.
.7 All Lever Handle must be bolt to the Roses to prevent loose and poor fixing.
.8 All Lever Handles shall be supplied with a ring of 23 nos stainless steel ball
bearings surrounding the neck of the lever handle to prevent wear and damaged due
to poor installation.
.9 Roses for snib turn dimension to be 50mm x 4mm Snib turn dimension 38mmx15mm
for normal use and 68mmx15mm for disabled model. The snib turn must not protrude
not more that 18mm.
.10 Where required, Lever / Pull Handle, Knob, Flush Handle, Panic Device and Accessories
could be inter-mixed for inside/outside to create special function and usage.
.11 Lever handle shall be:-

a) D line 14.2316.02 lever handle on 50 x 4mm roses or
b) ABS 5120 lever handle on 50 x 8mm roses or
c) Orgo 8141 lever handle on 53 x 8mm roses or
.12 Fixed knob handle shall be:-

a) D line 14.3116.02 fixed knob handle on 50 x 4mm roses or
b) ABS 6000 fixed knob or
c) Orgo 3020 fixed knob or
.13 Recess handle shall be:-

a) D line 14.3910.02 Recess handle on 80 x 4mm or
b) ABS Recess handle on 80 x 4mm or
c) Orgo 6612 Escutcheon on 50 x 8mm roses or
JOI/18
Handle and Accessories (Cont’d.)
.14 Escutcheon shall be:-

a) D line 14.3435.02 Escutcheon on 50 x 4mm roses or
b) ABS 5110 Escutcheon on 50 x 8mm roses or
c) Orgo 6612 Escutcheon on 50 x 8mm roses or
.15 Blank escutcheon shall be:-

a) D line 14.3245.02 Blank escutcheon on 50 x 4mm roses or
b) ABS 5110 Blank escutcheon on 50 x 8mm roses or
c) Orgo 6612 Blank escutcheon on 50 x 8mm roses or
.16 Toilet Indicator shall be:-

a) D line 14.3475.02 toilet indicator on 50 x 4mm roses or
b) ABS 5110 toilet indicator on 50 x 8mm roses or
c) Orgo 7122 toilet indicator on 50 x 8mm roses or
.17 Push Plate with keyhole shall be:-

a) D line 14.3776.02 175 x 175 x 2mm Push plate with key hole or
b) ABS 175 x 175 x 2mm Push plate with key hole or
c) Orgo 175 x 175 x 2mm Push plate with key hole or
.18 Pull handle shall be:-

a) D line 14.4212.02 Pull handle 200 x 19mm or
b) ABS Pull handle 200 x 19mm or
c) Orgo 9025 Pull handle 200 x 19mm or
.19 Pull handle with secret fixing detail shall be:-

a) D line 14.4414.02 Pull handle 650 x 25mm with secret fixing detail or
b) ABS Pull handle 650 x 25mm with secret fixing detail or
c) Orgo 9025 Pull handle 650 x 25mm with secret fixing detail or
.20 Pull handle for bolt through fixing shall be:-

a) D line 14.4812 or 4814.02 Pull handle 900 x 38mm secret or through fixing detail or
b) ABS I-Pull handle 900 x 38mm secret or through fixing detail or
c) Orgo 9125 Pull handle 900 x 38mm secret or through fixing detail or
JOI/19
.9 Door Stop
.1 All Levers/Pull Handle, Accessories and Door stop shall be of the same manufacturer.
.2 Uniform finishes through the whole handle and accessories product range.
.3 Door stop is to be anchor to the floor with a M8 bolt to prevent damage to the
stopper.
.4 Floor mounted door stop shall be:-

a) D line 14.5070.02 Floor mounted door stop or
b) ABS 4360 Floor mounted door stop or
c) Dorma 5001 Floor mounted door stop or
.5 Buffer cost hook door stop shall be:-
a) D line 14.5065.02 Buffer cost hook door stop or

b) ABS 4365 Buffer coat hook door stop or
c) Dorma 5013 Buffer coat hook door stop or
.6 Magnetic door stop shall be:-

a) D line 14.5075.02 magnetic door stop or
b) ABS magnetic door stop or
c) Dorma 5002 magnetic door stop or

JOI/20
.10 Panic Device
.1 All Levers / Pull Handle, Accessories and Panic Device shall be of the same
manufacturer.
.2 All Levers / Pull Handle, Accessories and Panic Device shall be satin stainless steel.
.3 All Levers / Pull Handle must be fitted with a solid insert for optimum strength and to
withstand very rough handling.
.4 All Levers / Pull Handle shall have a uniform bend to a radius which equals the
diameter of the tube.
.5 All Roses, Escutcheon and Snib turn shall have a snap on cover with a maximum
thickness of not more than 4mm.
.6 All Lever Handle must be bolt to the Roses to prevent loose and poor fixing.
.7 All Lever Handles shall be supplied with a ring of 23 nos stainless steel ball
bearings surrounding the neck of the lever handle to prevent wear and damaged due
to poor installation.
No washes or bushes shall be allowed in the handle fixing detail.
.8 Roses for Snib turn dimension to be 50mm x 4mm.
Snib turn dimension 38mm x 15mm for normal use and 68mm x 15mm for disabled
model.
The snib turn must not protrude not more than 18mm.
.9 Where required, Lever / Pull Handle, Knob, Flush Handle, Panic Device and Accessories
could be inter- mixed for inside/outside to create special function and usage.
.10 Mortice panic device shall be:-
a) D line 14.5015.02 Mortice panic device or
b) ABS 379 Mortice panic device or
c) Gege Mortice panic device or
JOI/21
.11 Automatic Door Bottom & Perimeter Seal
.1 All 24 hr aircon room and AHU room shall be provided with Door bottom and
perimeter seal.
.2 Sound and Flame Proof with non flammable silicone profile.
.3 Additional internal; seal for increase smoke proofing. iv)Flexible silicone material with
cavity lip profile.
.4 Actuator has to be in a unique asymmetric design for a smoother operation on hinge or

lock side controlled actuation.
.5 Fixing can be grooved or recessed.
.6 The aluminium profile casing and actuator are made of temperature resistant materials.
.7 Must not be de dragging along the floor when the sealing profile is raised and
lowered.
.8 Closed Cell TPE Foam Structure with outer resistant skin/sheath.
.9 Extremely Low Water Absorption.
.10 Compression Set Resistance.
.11 Non corrosive, elastomeric profile seal incorporating non shrink fixing leg.
.12 Sealing profile are grooved.
.13 High reset ability.
.14 Resistance against weather.
.15 Automatic Door Bottom Seal

a) ATHMER – Automatic Door Bottom Seal SB 430 up to 1000mm length or
b) ABS – Automatic Door Bottom Seal ABS/SB 430 up to 1000mm length or
c) NGP – Automatic Door Bottom Seal 4447S up to 1000mm length or
.16 Perimeter Seal

a) ATHMER – Foamtite Perimeter Seal up to 6000mm for single leaf door or
b) ABS – ABS / Foamtite Perimeter Seal up to 6000mm for single leaf door.
c) NGP – 172NA Perimeter Seal up to 2100mm length or
.17 Meeting Stile

a) ATHMER – TP Astragal for Meeting Stile up to 2200mm length or
b) ABS – ABS/TP Astragal for Meeting Stile up to 2200mm length or
c) NGP – 178SA Astragal for Meeting Stile up to 2100mm length or
JOI/22
.12 Sliding and Folding Door hardware
.1 The Sliding and Folding Door hardware System is has been specifically developed for
use with aluminium doors.
.2 The system must have a low-friction polyacetal wheels with stainless steel bearings, in
smooth, quiet operation with extreme resistance to corrosion.
.3 The system must have corrosion resistant hanger bodies and aluminium track,
satin stainless steel hinges and a unique combination threshold/guide channel.
.4 All Flush Bolt, Flush Pull must be of satin stainless steel finishes.
.5 The track must be able to withstand door weight of 75kg per panel.
.6 Sliding and Folding Door hardware shall be:-

1a) ABS pacer P600 aluminium top track – 3.0M.
1b) ABS pacer P94 aluminium bottom channel – 3.0M.
1c) ABS pacer P65 ext folding hinges.
1d) ABS pacer P62 ext folding intermediate hanger.
1e) ABS pacer P63 ext folding end hanger.
1f) ABS pacer P63 ext folding intermediate guide.
1g) ABS pacer P63 ext end guide.
1h) ABS pacer P63 fixing kit for aluminium door.
1i) ABS pacer P454 SS Flush Bolt.
1j) ABS pacer P400 SS Flush Pull
OR
2a) Stanley top track – 3.0M.

2b) Stanley bottom channel – 3.0M.
2c) Stanley ext folding hinges.
2d) Stanley ext folding intermediate hanger.
2e) Stanley ext folding end hanger.
2f) Stanley ext folding intermediate guide.
2g) Stanley ext end guide
2h) Stanley fixing kit for aluminium door.
2i) Stanley SS Flush Bolt.
2j) Stanley SS Flush Pull
OR
JOI/23
Sliding and Folding Door hardware (Cont’d.)

.6 Sliding and Folding Door hardware shall be (Cont’d.) :-
3a) Henderson 301 top track – 3.0M.
3b) Henderson 301 bottom channel – 3.0M.
3c) Henderson ext folding hinges.
3d) Henderson ext folding intermediate hanger.
3e) Henderson ext folding end hanger.
3f) Henderson ext folding intermediate guide.
3g) Henderson ext end guide.
3h) Henderson fixing kit for aluminium door.
3i) Henderson SS Flush Bolt.
3j) Henderson SS Flush Pull or
4) Other equal or approved equivalent.
32. PVC DOORS

Supply a nd f ix 40m m t hick cellular f oam PVC flush doors of approved colour and
construction details, complete with cellular foam PVC door frame, hinges and lockset to locations as
indicated on the drawings. These doors to comply with UL94 (Test for flammability of plastic
materials) Class 94 V-O other approved equivalent. A mock-up sample is to be submitted for SO's
approval.
33. OPERABLE WALL / PARTITION
Refer to “Specification of Work – Movable Acoustic Partition”.
34. WALL BARS

Supply and construct chengal wall bars at the hall. The wall bars shall consist of 120 x 50mm upright
and 50 x 50mm cover fillet with notches for and including 45 x 33mm oval section horizontal bars
and bolted to galvanised steel framing and including dark staining and varnish to timber surfaces.
35. COUNTER TOPS FOR TOILETS

All toilets shall be supplied and installed with the following counter tops:-
a) Neutral (solid surface), or
b) Kiassicut, or
c) Corian, or
d) Cerata, or
e) Lucrite, or
f) Other equal or approved equivalent.
36. LOCKS TO CONSUMER SWITCH ROOM AND METER COMPARTMENT

All locks to consumer switch room and meter compartment shall be:-
a) Abloy master key code reference MK 911047 or
b) Chubb (Union) master key code reference G1HBG or
c) Yale master key code reference MK 48 or
JOI/24
37. REPLACEMENT OF ALL EXISTING DOORS LOCATED WITHIN THE AREAS OF THE
ADDITION & ALTERATION WORKS
It shall be deemed that the Contractor has in the pricing of the section of the Builder’s Work of the
document allowed for all cost for the replacement of doors located within the areas of the addition &
alteration works.
38. SAMPLES
39. SHOP DRAWINGS
For all work in relation to Joinery and Ironmongery, the Contractor shall provide, for the approval of the
SO, shop drawings before commencement of any work/fabrication. Such shop drawings must be clearly
annotated and drawn to facilitate checking including design calculations.
40. CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF WORK
The Contractor is responsible for the cleaning and protection of all Joiner's Works arising from
subsequent operations by his own or other tradesmen.
Fixed joinery which, in the opinion of the SO is liable to become bruised or damaged in any way, is
to be properly eased and protected by the Contractor until the Completion of the Project.
JOI/25
FURNITURE & FITMENTS
1. CABINETS
Construct high and low level cabinets, open shelves, work benches, counters and all other cabinets
complete with doors, shelves, accessories, keys, locks, associated ironmongeries and built-in
fixtures according to SO’s drawings and details. Where all proposed shapes and sizes of
classrooms, etc. are similar to those in the handbook, all fixtures are to be provided accordingly,
otherwise please refer to drawings showing the revised fixtures layout and construct accordingly.
The Contractor shall note that all dimensions for this item of work shall be carefully checked on
site before fabrication or commencement of work on site.
Unless otherwise stated, all external and exposed surfaces of cabinets shall be finished with
1.3mm thick approved laminated plastic veneer of colour and pattern to SO’s approval.
Laminated plastic veneer shall be:-
● Wilsonart or ● Print or
● Formica or ● Other equal and approved
All internal surfaces of cabinets shall be polymer finish surface of colour to SO’s approval.
All internal surfaces of open shelves cabinets shall be finished with 1.0mm thick approved laminated
plastic veneer of colour and pattern to SO’s approval and of brands as above described.
Ironmongery for joinery cabinets shall be:-
● Hettich or ● Yale or
● Hafele or ● Other equal and approved
Homogenous solid surface work tops shall be 12mm thick made up of acrylic resins to produce solid
surfacing counter tops that with seamless installation, non-porous and easily maintained.
Exposed edges shall be smooth and bullnosed or with pencil rounded edges.
• Specific Gravity : 1.75 ● Pencil Hardness : 5H
• Rockwell Hardness : 90 ● Water Absorption : 0.06%
• Tensil / Strength : 390 kg/cm2 ● Gloss : 5 ˜ 15
Type of material and colour shall be selected and approved by the SO.
Worktops, counter tops and benches with homogeneous solid surface shall be provided to areas as
indicated in the drawings.
Where plywood is used in the joinery for built-in, cabinets and fitments installed against the external
walls (not corridor side) with windows, WBP plywood shall be used throughout.
Built-in cabinets and fitments shall be installed by the Contractor’s Specialist in accordance with the
drawings to SO’s approval. Cabinets and fitments that are floor mounted shall be constructed on and
including a concrete plinth 75 to 100mm high to be provided and cast by the Contractor prior to
installation by the Specialist.
OFF/1
2. MAGNETIC WHITEBOARD
.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1 Applicable Standards
.1 DIN Standards or other approved equivalent.
a) DIN 51168 : Vitreous Enamel Layer Thickness
b) DIN 51155 : Impact Resistance of Vitreous Enamel
c) DIN 51150 : Resistance to Acid
d) DIN 51163 : Porosity in Vitreous Enamel Coating
e) DIN 51158 : Temperature Shocks Resistance Test
f) DIN 51169 : Enamel Surface Fault Detection
.2 ASTM Standard/ISO Standards or other approved equivalent.
a) ASTM C282-67 (1972 ) : Citric Acid spot Test
b) ASTM C540-72 : Image- gloss Test
c) ISO 2813 : Gloss Test
.3 Reflectivity Standards
a) ASTM D523 or other approved equivalent.
b) BS EN ISO 2813 or other approved equivalent.
.2 SUBMITTALS
Samples 300 x 600mm to be submitted upon approval of design details by SO.
Shop drawings to be submitted for SO's approval before fabrication. Approval of shop
drawings will not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility including accuracy of
dimension and detail.
.3 PRODUCT HANDLING
The Contractor shall pack the products to prevent damage of surface and edges in transit
and deliver in accordance with the contract schedule and installation sequence. Label
containers or wrappings with the manufacturer's name and reference specification number.
The products to be stored in a dry, ventilated room. In the event of condensation between the
packaging foil and the enamel-steel surface, the former to be removed immediately.
OFF/2
MAGNETIC WHITEBOARD (CONT’D.)
.4 MATERIALS
.1 Vitreous Enamel steel (0.65mm)
.1 Strip steel of a special cold reducing mill quality suitable to a continuous coil
enameling process. The steel to be of a ferritic structure with low C + Mn + P + S + Si
content (maximum 0.15% ) Thickness of the strip steel to be 0.38mm (26 gauge).
.2 The Enamel frit (comprising of quartz, feldspar & other inorganic minerals)
shall be ground together with the necessary colour oxides to a accurately
granulated paste and the steel material shall be free from surface blemished,
scale, deep corrosion marks or any other defects which may affect the
serviceability or appearance of the finished products.
.3 Steel is pre-cleaned and chemically treated to ensure maximum adhesion of

vitreous enamel coating.
.4 Metal Surface Pre-Treatment
All metal surface shall be pretreated in accordance with the following schedule:
a) Degrease : Immersion in suitable degreasing fluid and exposure

to suitable flame temperature degreasing system to
ensure that no organic traces are left on the material.
b) Wash : Cycle under running constantly renewed water stream

of drinking quality.
c) Acid Etch : Weight loss shall be no less than 350 -500 gm/m².
d) Wash : As described previously.
e) Nickel Deposit : Deposit shall be no less than 250 -400gm/m² not

later than 2 hours after acid etch. Neutralize all traces
of acid / alkaline by immersion in borax / soda
solution or equal.
f) Dry : Rapid drying by induced airstream or similar.
.5 All surfaces of steel shall be fused with a base coating in an enameling

furnace at a temperature of 810 degrees Celsius. A second layer of cover coat
shall be applied on the surface. Finish coat (plus ground coat) : 200 microns +
25 -0 micron. The deviation from the nominal shall be measured with the use
of an electronic measuring device like the "Elcometer" or similar (for
measurement of resistance of coating).
.6 For boards with permanent designs, patterns or graphics, additional layers of

coatings are applied onto the finished coat by means of metal screening
techniques for each additional colours. Firing of screened surfaces to be carried
out in a suitable belt type enameling furnace at a temperature of 650 degrees
Celsius specifically designed for such operation without steel distortion.
.7 Music Room magnetic whiteboards shall be supplied and installed completed

with manuscript lines.
OFF/3
.2 Substrate
Whiteboard to be bonded onto paper honeycomb core with galvanized steel back stabilizer.
.1 Core material
a) Cardboard paper honeycomb core of cell size not more than 15mm in
continuous length
b) Thickness : 13.0 mm when use with aluminium frame.
18.0 mm when use with timber infill frame.
.2 Stabilizer
The back stabilizer shall be 0.4mm galvanized steel sheet in one continuous
length without joint.
.3 Application of adhesive & Bonding

A permanent elastic type polyurethane adhesive is to be applied 100% of
surface area to be laminated. Adhesive bonding strength is equal to or better than
the bond strength of any of the core or stabilizer materials. Boards shall be held
on power press at pressure of 6kg/sqm or more. Flatness of boards shall then be
within specified tolerances.
.3 Vitreous Enamel steel Whiteboard
.1 Tolerances
a) Length plus width: plus / minus 2mm
b) The finished surface of boards 1.8mm or less & shall have a
maximum deviation from flatness of 1.8mm in a convex direction
measured perpendicular to the normal plane of the board face. Boards more
than 1.8m in length are allowed an increase in the above maximum
deviation of 1.6mm for every 300mm increase in board length.
c) The finished surface of flat boards shall have a maximum deviation
from flatness of 1.5mm in a c oncave direction measured to the normal
plane of the board face.
.2 Surface Appearance
a) The surface shall be Gloss Unit (GU) 70 or less glossy GU 55 finish and
be specially formulated for use with dry markers and must be dry erasable.
When used for projection, the matt surface shall not produce the unwanted
hot spot effect.
b) Surface hardness shall between 3-5 of Mohn's scale and to DIN- EN
101 or other approved equivalent. Average hardness shall be 1500 N/MM2
c) All surfaces shall be free of exfoliation, cracks, pits, blister, buckling

and rippling. Any other blemish shall not be visible at a distance of
1.5m or more from the board when viewed at eye level, nor penetrate
more than one coat of enamel.
d) Board faces shall be free of chipping.
OFF/4
Surface Appearance (Cont’d)

e) School to have option choose either GU 70 or GU 55. School to be advised
that the GU 55 less glossy whiteboard is comparatively more difficult to
clean than the GU 70 whiteboard.
.4 Wood veneered aluminium frame
.1 When specified in drawings, aluminium frames and pen trays shall be

laminated with wood veneer and stained to required colour and finish.
.2 Bonding of veneer to aluminium extrusions shall be achieved using hot melt

adhesives specifically formulated for profile wrapping.
.3 Wood, drips, runs, or spills. Lacquer veneer used shall be 0.3 mm thick with
fleece backing.
.4 All visible surfaces shall be veneered without cracks or splinters and sanded
down prior to application of stain and lacquer.
.5 Stain and lacquer shall be applied by spray without lap marks, grain raising
not crack, peel or blister under normal use.
.5 WORKMANSHIP
.1 Standards
.1 The standards of workmanship shall be such as to ensure compliance with the

performance requirements given herein.
.2 All components shall be adequately wrapped or otherwise protected to avoid

damage during delivery and handling. Any damaged or defective materials
will be rejected and shall be removed from the site and replaced at the
Contractor's expenses. All edges of panels to be protected with PVC
impregnated self- adhesive cloth tape. All surface area shall be protected with
removable, PVC-film until work is completed.
.3 The units shall be constructed square and true to plane, both in themselves and
in their relationship with each other when installed in a continuous range. All
cut ends either for a butt or miter joint shall be clean and true without burrs, so
as to present a perfectly close fit with the adjoining members.
.2 Supporting Metalwork
Supporting metalwork including brackets, fixing devices for boards to be non-

corrodible, or adequately protected against corrosion in the situation for which it is
designed. All ferrous members to be protected by the following coatings - galvanizing
and chlorinated rubber paint.
.3 Performance Requirements
If in the opinion of the Contractor, the number or type of fixings or other materials shown
on the drawings or described in the Specifications is insufficient to meet the performance
requirements, he shall submit properly detailed alternatives for the approval of the SO.
OFF/5
.6 INSTALLATION
.1 Co-ordinate the installation of vitreous enamel steel whiteboard with work of other
trades. The work of other trades behind the whiteboard is to be completed prior to
installation of the whiteboard.
.2 All vitreous enamel steel whiteboards shall arrive on site pre- cut and sized according to
shop drawings ready for mounting. Protective film on whiteboard shall be in place prior to
installation and shall be removed only on completion of the project or as instructed by the
Designer. All fixing positions shall be set out, maintaining vertical and horizontal
alignments as appropriate, spacing the fixings equal distances apart.
.3 In the event that on site cutting or drilling is necessary, the drills or cutting blades
used must be specifically designated suitable for ceramic based material and if in doubt
the whiteboard manufacturer is to be consulted prior to cutting.
.4 Dust and grease in rebated and/or profiles to be removed carefully. Joints between
rebates or frame and Whiteboards to be at least 4mm wide. A strip of approximately
20mm of the packaging foil to be removed from all round the whiteboard to avoid the
foil to be fitted in any mounted part.
.5 Fasten whiteboard without causing distortion or damaging finishes.
.7 CLEANING
.1 All surfaces of the installation shall be cleaned in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
.2 The three most common contaminants that may be required removal from the
vitreous enamel steel whiteboard are:
a) The protective film that is applied to the whiteboards has an acrylic based adhesive.
The solvent required for cleaning is ethyl- acetate. Only small amount of ethyl-
acetate is necessary and the area of contamination should be cleaned. After
cleaning rinse the surface with clean water and allow to air dry or wipe off with a
rubber squeegee.
b) Second contaminant is adhesive. The solvent for cleaning such adhesive is
toluene. Procedure of use of toluene is similar to ethyl-acetate as above.
c) Other contaminants such as dirt, fingerprints or smudges can, be removed
using mild detergents and rinse with clean water. Cement with heavy caustic
content can damage exposed enamel surface beyond repair therefore care
should be taken to avoid such occurrence.
.8 DEFECTIVE WORK
a) Completed installation is to be free of scratches or damage to all internal and external
surfaces.
b) Remove and replace at Contractor's expense, any deformation or other defective works
including failure of items of ironmongery during the Defects Liability Period.
c) Deformation of whiteboards in excess of dimension tolerances under this section shall
not be tolerated.
OFF/6
3. PIN-UP BOARD
Supply and fix 12mm thick approved soft board fixed to 9mm thick plywood backing and screwed
to timber framing with timber edge trimming all around as shown on drawings. P in-up boards to
incorporate fabric covers, integrated into the frame of the pin-up board, for protection of the mineral
fibre board. The fabrics shall be of Polyester / Acrylic composition, of weight 250gms/yard to
750gms/yard. It shall conform to BS 1006 or other approved equivalent for Colour Fastness
resistance due to light, water, perspiration and rubbing. The fabric shall have a selection of 24
colours, for SO's approval. The fabric shall also comply to FSSD code of flame spread Class O. The
fabric material shall be stretched over the soft board and securely fastened using staples with frame
without joints.
4. RETRACTABLE PROJECTION SCREEN
Supply and install approved projector screen shall be constructed of approved tearproof fibreglass
matt-white screen attached to rigid steel roller encased in heavy gauge steel case with built-in
tensioning devices, manually operated and including all necessary wall or ceiling brackets and fixing
away from wall at approved angle and hooked at bottom to provide a flat, taut projection surface.
The fixing details are to be approved by the SO.
Prior to the order and installation of the new projector screens the Contractor shall check and verify
with the school if “short-throw” projectors are to be used. The new projector screens shall be
suitable for “short-throw” projector usage.
Provide galvanised steel structural support to SO’s approval for LCD overhead projector mounting
and base plate with security ring to be fixed to concrete soffit or to roof trusses at uppermost storey
inclusive of all necessary extra galvanised steel framing supports above suspended ceiling level.
5. STATE FLAG
Provide as and fix to wall State Flag to all General Teaching Rooms, Specific Teaching Rooms,
Administrative Staff Areas and Ancillary Areas as detailed on the SO’s drawings. R efer to
“SIGNAGE” for specification of flag.
6. CURTAINS & CURTAIN TRACKS AND VERTICAL BLINDS
Supply and fix heavy duty PVC blackout curtain in panels of 1500mm and heavy duty aluminium
curtain tracks complete with transverse cords, overlap rails, rollers, brackets, pulley seats curtain
hooks, etc. in areas specified in drawings.
Supply and fix aluminium curtain tracks complete with transverse cords, overlap rails, rollers,
brackets, pulley seats, curtain hooks, etc.
Supply and fix perforated PVC vertical blinds complete with transverse cords, etc. in areas specified
in drawings.
Other areas as indicated on the drawings.
OFF/7
7. BLACK-OUT ROLLER BLINDS
Supply and install chain-operated black out roller blinds, to the following specified components:
Mechanism - Chain
The Mechanism has a built-in braking action, which secures the blind in any position and ensures an
easy operation.
The braking effect is obtained by means of a cone and disc brake system, which applies the precise
braking power necessary to keep the blind in the required position.
Control of the blinds shall be by a plastic moulded ball chain on either side of the roller blind. The ball chain
wheel cover shall swivel to suit the angle of operation and also serve as a stop action device for the blind in its
extreme position. The wheel cover shall be sufficient to prevent the moulded ball chain from being dislodged.
Failure of which shall be deemed as unacceptable defect.
Roller Tube
Roller Tube shall be available in 3 ba sic sizes of Ø25mm, Ø36mm or Ø42mm diameter, or as
required, to suit specific requirement.
Strength and provision of Roller Tube shall be suitable to the individual width of the Roller Blind
provided at window. Sagging or other failure of the Roller Blind due to the inadequate strength of
the Roller Tube would not be acceptable.
Roller Tube of Ø25mm and Ø36mm shall be rolled from 0.4mm steel strip, which has been
pretreated chemically and to stove enameled powder-coated finish. Ø42mm is rolled from 0.5mm
steel strip according to the same principal, and to the same powder-coated finish
End Plugs
End Plugs shall be made from synthetic material ensuring minimum friction. The shape of the end plug is
designed so it fits tightly into the aluminum bottom rail, but can be easily removed if required. The black-out
fabric shall be coiled round the end-plug, and secured with durable adhesive. The end- plug and coiled black-
out fabric shall be slipped into extruded aluminum bottom roll, so that no amount of force will dislodge the
aluminum bottom roll from the black out fabric.
Brackets
Fixing brackets shall be made from galvanized steel and suitable for left or right hand chain operation. The
fixing brackets shall be of sufficient strength and durability to suit different tube size and blind width.
Black out fabric

a) Composition : 100% Fire-proof acrylic coated glass yarn
b) Weight : 430 g/m2 -12.7 oz/sq.yd
c) Thickness : 0.62 mm
d) Fire Rating : Fire Retardant MI (France), B1 (Allemagne)
e) Colour : BS 1006: 1990 m ethod 802, Grade 718 Fastness
(White excluded -Norm ISO 105) or approved equivalent
f) Making Up : Weldable
g) Cleanability : Hand cleaning on plane surface with mild detergent.
h) Light Penetration : 0%
i) Opening in Fabric Weave : 0%
OFF/8
8. INSULATION AND VAPOUR BARRIER
The Contractor shall provide insulation and vapour barrier to the walls, floors and ceiling/roof of all
areas to be provided with 24 hour air-conditioning (eg LAN rooms). For the LAN room, the
Contractor should ensure that the finished internal dimension of the room remains at 3m x 3m clear.
Contractor to propose and build other alternative insulation if the required clearance cannot be
achieved. 2mm thick anti- static vinyl floor finish (with welding joint) shall be added to the floor of
LAN rooms, after floor finish system that includes insulation and vapour barrier.
9. ACOUSTIC INSULATION FOR M&E ROOM
Supply and install acoustic ceiling and wall paneling to all AHU room and lift motor rooms. The
acoustic insulation system shall comprise of 25mm thick non-combustible perforated calcium
silicate panel, 50mm thick (100 kg/m3) rockwool insulation and 12.5 x 12.5m m galvanized
weldmesh fixed on 50mm x 50mm timber runners at 600mm centres both ways fixed on the concrete
soffit or block wall using approved anchor bolt or fixing.
The soffit of the space directly beneath the AHU room should also be acoustically treated in the
same way.
The ceiling and wall panel shall be sprayed painted with a primer coat and at least 2 finishing coats
of approved paint.
10. STATIONARY OUTDOOR BASKETBALL STAND
The stationary outdoor basketball stand shall be galvanised mild steel in pigmented organic coated
finish single column floor mounted gooseneck post with vandal proof heavy-duty acrylic backstop
as described for the ISH wall mounted basketball backstop.
The basketball stand shall be sturdy and with bases permanently anchored to the reinforced concrete
floor slab.
The stationery outdoor basketball stand shall be installed at the covered 1st storey void deck..
Reinforced double ring and netting with no net hooks to be used.
Polyethylene (PE) blue padding to basketball post and backboard.
FIBA Certificate of approval.
Catalogue of the precast shall be submitted to the SO for approval prior to installation.
11. SHOP DRAWINGS

For all work in relation to Fittings, Fixtures, Furnitures and Equipment, etc. the Contractor shall
provide for the approval of the SO shop drawings for the erection of the Fittings, Fixtures, Furniture
and Equipment for approval before commencement of any work/fabrication. S uch shop drawings
must be clearly annotated and drawn to facilitate checking including design calculations as necessary.

Clean down and protect completed sections of the work to SO’s approval.
OFF/9
Diagram 3-B
SETBACK DISTANCE AND POSITION OF PROJECTOR
Diagram 3-C
ENLARGED DRAWING OF SECURITY BOLT
OFF/10
Diagram 3-D
LCD SUPPORT BRACKET
OFF/11
SYSTEM FURNITURE AND CHAIRS
1. GENERALLY
The system furniture proposed shall create a pleasant and flexible environment which facilitates and
accommodates change, accepts growth and allows the Employer to effectively use their space. It
shall be responsive to changing needs and future requirements.
The furniture shall be of the sizes, materials and finish shown on t he SO’s drawings and as
specified.
All furniture shall be rigid and free from vibration in a variety of layouts. They shall be of sturdy
construction with fine engineering details and be inherently stable against tipping. All fitments and
furniture shall be of construction for easy storage, assembly and re-erection without any decrease in
performance. They shall be durable and easy to clean and maintain with replaceable parts.
All components shall be designed for easy removal and repositioning. Components shall be designed
for interchangeability and reversibility without the need to consider lefts and rights, ups and downs
to reduce down time during alterations and minimise the cost of inventory. Components shall be
able to be repositioned or reconfigured without leaving marks or holes exposed.
All furniture shall be of good qua lity and finish to SO’s approval and be designed with rounded
corners, edges, etc. with no projections likely to catch on clothing, etc. and for safer softer feel.
All metal brackets and hardware items shall be finished with an electro-deposited layer of zinc or
nickel to protect against corrosion and wear.
All suspended components are to come complete with all necessary brackets. M ounting brackets
shall be designed to be easily latched and unlatched to reposition the suspended units up and down
the panel. E ach suspended unit is to be provided with a safety catch or other approved means to
prevent them from being accidentally dislodged.
All cupboards, storage units and drawers are to have recessed pulls of superior quality finish and are
to be provided with locks with key-alike locking system per workstation (with minimum 1,000
combinations) 3 keys shall be provide for every lock. All keys shall be properly labelled and
systematically handed to the Employer on completion of the Works. All movable parts of drawers
are to have resilient plastic bumpers to prevent metal to metal contact and ensure quiet operation.
Product components and spare parts of old and new system shall be of modular concept and shall be
readily available.
The Contractor shall install the whole of the system furniture to the satisfaction of the SO and
warrants that the system furniture installed is with the use of good materials, all due care and
professional skill and further warrants against:-
 faulty components / parts,
 paint cracking peeling, etc.,
 plastic laminate / veneer delamination,
 fabric durability and colour fastness,
 rust and
 structural failure of panel
SFC/1
GENERALLY (CONT’D.)
All metal surfaces shall be treated against rust and have epoxy coated finish or other approved finish
and shall be scratch resistant.
Plastic laminate shall be high pressure factory applied and shall be resistant to scratch, impact,
moisture damp, chemical and cigarette scorching, matt finished, and of colour selected by SO.
Minimum thickness shall be 0.8mm unless otherwise specified. T he veneer finish shall be as
specified with approved grain solid trimming, stained to SO’s approval and finished with copolymer
liquid plastic dressings.
The Contractor shall construct a mock up of the system furniture as specified prior to the
commencement of the system furniture installation for the purpose of pre-assessing by the SO of its
quality. The aforesaid mock up to SO’s approval shall be the minimum reference standard of
workmanship the Contractor would have to provide for the installation of the system furniture.
2. PANELS
All panels shall have acoustical properties, be light in design and rigid. All panels shall be finished
in fire retardant fabric. All panels must not support combustion or contain toxic materials.
Panels shall be based on modular concept, i.e. constructed of a frame with components that allow for
a wide degree of flexibility of configuration of surfaces. The surfaces, referred as the panel pads (or
tiles) shall be able to achieve wide choice of finishes, easy replacement of finishes and meet the
functional needs required of system furniture, eg. wire management and the ability to accommodate
other modules e.g. storage units. The panel pad system proposed by the Contractor shall have the
following capabilities:-
White board pad to provide an erasable writing surface.
Pass through pad to provide an opening between both sides of panels.
The panels structure/framework shall be of steel/aluminium and the panel pads shall be constructed of
steel/aluminium of minimum 0.8mm thick to ensure system rigidity and durability. Panels shall have
steel supporting framework (minimum 16 gauge) with epoxy coated metal top cap and edge trims. All
edges shall be rounded and the panel system is to be provided complete with all fixing accessories,
cover strips, stabilising feet, etc. Stabilising feet are to be stable and strong and epoxy coated.
Panels shall be minimum 65mm thick and maximum 95mm thick. They shall be available in various
heights. The Contractor shall comply with the minimum height specified.
A logical progression in panel width to permit maximum flexibility shall be incorporated in the
design. The minimum and maximum panel width shall be 500mm to 2150mm.
Panels shall be structurally designed to support a variety of mounted storage, work surfaces and
supplementary components without specific attachment points for flexibility in the repositioning of
such units and when fully loaded shall not affect the integrity of stability of the panels. Such hanging
slots shall be concealed and provided with safety catches to prevent unintended pull/fall out.
The connections of panel modules shall be flexible, allowing a variety of angular as well as
perpendicular configurations. The panels shall also be designed to take work components and
storage on either or both faces of the modules.
SFC/2
PANELS (CONT’D.)
All panels must not support combustion or contain toxic materials. Minimum overall rating must
comply with the following or equivalent:-
 NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient) of 0.85 for the absorptive surface area and NRC of 0.7
for the entire panel surface including trims and edges respectively.
 STC (Sound Transmission Class) of 20.
 NIC (Noise Isolation Class) of 18 for the Flanking and NIC of 20 for the barrier respectively.
 Fire rating of Class A/Class 1 for the entire panel.
 The fabric shall pass colour fastness test to BS 1006:1971 and BS 2681 or other approved
equivalent.
Test reports from a recognised laboratory, satisfying the above requirements shall be submitted by
the Contractor.
Unless otherwise specified, panels shall be finished in fabric and timber veneer. The Contractor shall
allow for 30% of the fabric to be in special patterned and jagged designs. P anels finished with
fabric shall be tackable. It shall be readily upholstered on s ite. T he fire rating of fabric shall be
based on NF PA-101, 1982. F abric shall be cleanable by spot remover and shall be minimum
density of 335 g/m². Fabric shall be available in wide range of colours to SO’s approval.
Panel systems which include concealed wire management capabilities must meet relevant local
authorities requirements and the components shall be engineered for responsive and fail-safe
operations. Full power and telecommunication capabilities shall be included and to SO’s approval
prior to the design of such power panel.
Panels shall have compartmentalised concealed wire management system and shall have:-
 at least 3 compartments for electrical, data and telephone cables.
 fibre optic pass-through capability.
 plug-in (power, data and telephone outlet) capability at work surface height.
 storage for excess wiring in the panels.
 access to future maintenance and additional of power/data/phone point to the panels without
the need to dismantle the work surface.
The panel system proposed shall allow easy cleaning and maintenance. All tops / panel trimmings
shall be scratch resistant and easily cleaned by spot remover. Panel surface shall be resistant to
chemicals, eg. hair grease.
The panels shall be provided with adjustable levelling glides.
Panel system shall include integrated concealed wire management capabilities by means of raceway
located at the work surface height. The system shall enable wide degree of flexibility for the
running wires i.e. base, table height and top for maximum flexibility of use. Raceway covers shall be
easily removable and replaceable.
Cable ducts shall be free from sharp edges and have neatly designed removable cover to allow easy
installation of wiring. C over shall be easily snapped into place. A ll cable ducts shall have
releasable cable ties.
The Contractor’s tender sum shall be deemed to include the panels’ hardwares, connectors, end
pieces and all other associated and necessary accessories.
SFC/3
3. WORK SURFACES/TABLES
All tables shall be free standing with the capability of having a panel hung system. They shall be sturdy
and rigid against vibration and capable of supporting heavy electronic equipment.
The material used for work surfaces shall be resistant to scratch, impact, moisture, damp, chemical,
etc. It shall also enable easy cleaning of stains, etc. Plastic laminate or approved equivalent finish
shall be used on all work surfaces unless otherwise specified. Rounded corners and radiused edges
shall be provided for safety.
The work surface cantilever support brackets shall be possible for cantilever works surfaces to be
flush jointed with each other. They shall be capable of being assembled on either side of a panel
without the need for extra componentry.
As far as possible, the dimensions of all work surfaces shall be standardized for interchangeability.
The working height shall be adjustable either continuously or in steps to suit individual
requirements. Secondary work surfaces shall be capable of being mounted at varying levels to the
main work surface.
Where free standing desk is specified, it shall be designed for housing concealed wires both
vertically and horizontally.
The work surface shall have rounded edges and shall be finished with minimum 0.8mm thick high
pressure textured laminate postformed at the exposed edges. T he desk shall be minimum 25mm
thick heavy density, chipboard or steel reinforced construction, properly supported to ensure no
deflection under a loading of 180 kg. Work surface more than 1200mm shall have steel
reinforcement.
All free-standing desks and desk without a panel in front shall have a modesty panel down to the
floor recessed at 150mm from the edge of the work surface. The panel sides and modesty panels
shall be finished in plastic laminates.
All free-standing desks shall be capable of being mounted on e ither side of the panel without
differentiating between left and right.
The side-table shall be rigidly fixed to the main work surface with properly designed brackets and built-
in stainless steel threads for screws or other approved means of fixing. The side-table shall be designed
to be completely reversible (right hand - left hand) and it shall be possible to refix the side table several
times without affecting the integrity of the supports.
All work surfaces (desk top and side tables) shall be provided with 2 w ire access openings. The
opening shall be sealed with removable cover. The cover shall match with the surfaces of the desk
top. Wire management clips or other approved means shall be provided below each work surface to
manage/conceal wires.
Table shall be designed and shall accommodate retractable, adjustable keyboard tray with tilting and
height adjustment features.
SFC/4
4. OVERHEAD STORAGE UNITS

The overhead storage units (or Hanging Bins) of 300mm (D) mounted to panel shall be designed for
easy support off panel and shall be readily repositioned. T hey shall come complete will all
necessary brackets and fixings, and shall be capable of being mounted on either or both sides of the
panel without causing any tilting or affecting the stability of the panel when fully loaded.
The storage units shall have epoxy coated finish or other approved finish for steel units, and for
timber units shall be plastic laminated finish for the exterior and polymer or other approved finish
for the interior unless otherwise specified.
Two sliding shelf dividers shall be provided for every level of storage. Shelves within storage units are
to be easily adjustable at various heights to allow for storage of different materials.
The storage units shall have tip-up door fitted with anti-slaming devices such as “soft-closing” with
heavy duty good quality hinge and track.
Task light shall be incorporated in the design of the storage unit. It shall be fixed at the underside of
the storage unit.
Storage units shall be capable of being fully loaded without visible deflection.
5. PEDESTALS/DRAWERS
All pedestals/drawers shall be fully stable under loading and shall pass load test of 30 pounds per
drawer, fully extended. An anti-tilt shall be incorporated.
For general usage, combination of pedestal are:-

 2-box and 1-file floor standing pedestal, or
 1-box and 1-file suspended pedestal.
with a utility drawer accommodating stationery tray.
Mobile pedestals shall have counterweight base to prevent toppling over when all drawers are fully
extended. Castors shall be equipped with locking device to keep mobile pedestal stationary.
Wood or steel drawers may be used. All drawer pulls shall be rounded and of full length and good
quality finish and design.
Independent convenience drawers, lateral drawers, file drawers, etc., where provided, shall slide one
below the other and shall be designed for instant installation and repositioning. Ball bearing or other
approved glides shall be provided for quiet sliding operations.
The drawers shall be provided with safety catches to safeguard against unintended pull-out.
Drawers shall be fitted with anti-slamming devices.
The interior of lateral file drawers shall be provided with adjustable dividers or supports for hanging
file folders.
All pedestal / drawers shall be equipped with locks and key-alike system.
Each drawer of lateral filing unit shall have 2 s ets of hang file bars, for filing side to side.
30 numbers of suspended file pockets shall be provided for each drawer.
SFC/5
6. SIGNAGE
Officer name and designation signage attached to panel or doors shall be provided. Each wall sign
shall come with a base, grooved insert, clear protective tamper resistant lens cover, 3 sprues of 5/16”
characters, 6 s prues of 1/2” characters, mounting hardware (screws and velcro) and double sided
tape. The wall sign shall have radiused design. The Contractor shall provide a range of minimum 6
colours to SO’s approval.
7. TIMBER CUPBOARD
Cupboard overall size 700mm (W) x 400mm (D) x 1350mm (H) shall be of PVC plastic laminated
with plywood white PVC lining construction of furniture manufacturing quality cupboard tops,
drawer fronts and lift-up doors, and with appropriate solid timber reinforcing members shall be of 20
gauge. Cupboard backs and sides shall be of 19mm thick. Cupboard bottom and front strip shall be
of 15mm thick. Cage bottom shall be reinforced with two 15 x 15mm solid timber bearers.
It shall consists of 5 nos . of open shelves which are to be easily adjustable at various heights to
allow for stage of different materials with 2 nos. of dividers on each shelf.
Overall cupboard height is inclusive of metal glide. Actual height with glide fully recessed is 3mm
less. Heights may increase up to 16mm by extending standard glides. Glides are accessible from
the inside when the bottom drawer or shelf is fully extended or removed.
The full-height hinged door of the cupboard shall be self-closing with European-style hinge and
open 110%.
The cupboard shall be equipped with full width finger pull with enamel finish and supplied with
clear plastic label holder and label.
The cupboard shall be slotted at 38mm centre to accept dividers.
8. TASK LIGHTS (TL)
Task lights shall be provided for workstations complete with cables and individual on/off switch
controls to the workstations. All cables to the task lights shall be pre-wired into the systems furniture
from the floor pedestal or raised floor power box or service outlets in the workstation vicinity.
The task lighting for each workstation (where specified) shall be 18 w att compact fluorescent
luminaire complete with high-frequency ballast and mirror reflector complying to CIBSE LG3
Category 2 or other approved equivalent for glare limitation. The housing for the luminaire shall be
sheet steel, finished with epoxy powder coating to SO’s approval. The Contractor shall ensure that
the luminaire is integrated with the workstation. The 18 watt fluorescent tube shall have a colour
rendition of above 80 and colour temperature of 4000K.
The HF Ballast shall be designed to regulate the fluorescent tube as specified. T he Mean Time
Between Failures (MTBF) of the electronic ballast shall be at least 100,000 hours and exchange
malfunctioned ballasts at no cost to the Employer.
SFC/6
9. ELECTRICAL WIRING & FIXTURES
All electrical works (where specified for eg. switched socket and task lighting) shall be carried out,
supervised and tested by the Contractor’s qualified licensed electrical worker (LEW) to SO’s
approval.
Each workstation and each computer table shall be provided and installed with two twin 13A
switched socket outlets with neon indicators on a panel. E ach twin 13A socket outlets shall be
cabled/wired to a female connector at the panel. The Contractor shall provide a 3-core flexible PVC
insulated PVC shielded 2.5mm2 cable terminating in a 3-pin plug to be plugged onto one (1) of the
socket outlet in the service outlet box (by others) at one end, and a male connector at the other end
to be plugged into the female connector at the panel. The length of the flexible cables to be
provided from each twin 13A socket outlets at the panel to the switched socket outlet at the floor
box shall be minimum five (5) metres.
All twin 13A switched socket outlets, connectors and 3-pin plugs supplied by the Contractor shall be
approved by a relevant certification body. All flexible cables shall comply with relevant Singapore
Standards.
Polarity tests shall be conducted by the LEW engaged by the Contractor in the presence of the SO
and the LEW to ensure the correct terminations of the flexible cables.
There shall be a l ogical organisation of wiring for computers, calculators, printers, telephone
systems, typewriters, lighting, etc. They shall be concealed unless otherwise specified by SO.
The raceway integrated with the panel shall include a ch annel with separate compartments for
accommodating power and extra low voltage cables. The cables must be separated by metal dividers
to prevent interference. The channel complete with metal dividers forming the compartments shall
be an integral part of the furniture system and the raceway design.
The raceway wire management system shall provide the basis for ease of reconfiguration. The
raceway shall be of the “lay-in” type which allows wires to be removed easily without the need for
threading through the partition.
Electrical and communication wiring coming from the service outlet box shall be capable of being
fed through the base of the components of the systems furniture. T he design of this wire
management system shall allow the wires or cables to be branched off in various directions as may
be required. In this respect, provision shall be made for future requirements.
Each workstation shall have one (1) No. twin RJ45 socket outlet prewired with category 5FTP cable
in flexible PVC conduit being fed through the base of the system furniture, the flexible conduit shall
be terminated at the service outlet box of the floor trunking system with appropriate rubber bush.
The length of the communication cables (100 ohm FTP) to be provided from the RJ45 outlets to the
corresponding outlets from raised/flush floor services boxes shall be minimum four (4) metres.
Receptacles and communication outlets shall be provided in raceways at suitable levels and
locations in the various system furniture components to ensure flexibility in subsequent relocation.
SFC/7
ELECTRICAL WIRING & FIXTURES (CONT’D.)
Each twin 13A socket outlets shall be cabled/wired to a female connector at the panel (single or
double 13A switched socket-outlet). A three core 2.5mm2 flexible cable of 4 metres length is to be
provided from the female connector. The flexible cable will be used for the interconnecting power
points between panels.
All twin 13A switched socket outlets, connectors and 3-pin plugs (including plugs for task lighting)
shall be supplied and connected to the service outlet box provided by others within a distance of 5m.
The cable-way integrated with the panel shall include a channel with compartments for
accommodating power, data and telephone cables individually. T he cables must be separated by
metal dividers to prevent interference. T he channel complete with metal dividers forming the
compartments shall be an integral part of the furniture system and the raceway design.
Long design layouts of electrical wiring shall be avoided to prevent the electrical voltage dropping
below a safe or efficient level. Voltage drop calculations shall be submitted upon request by the SO.
All electrical works (where specified for eg. switched socket and task lighting) shall be carried out
by the Contractor’s qualified licensed electrical contractor and tested by licensed electrical workers
to SO’s satisfaction.
10. CHAIRS FOR THE SYSTEM FURNITURE
General
The chair shall be ergonomically designed to be comfortable and provide proper support to prevent
shoulder and back fatigue and to be adjustable to fit the user in various working positions.
The foam shall be top quality high resilient polyurethane foam providing adequate support while giving
soft overall cushioning. Foam shall be with stabilisers against breakdown of foam structure.
The chair shall, unless otherwise specified, have impact resistant (ABS) backshell and seat base.
Arms shall be fully moulded polyurethane armrests set back so as not to damage desk and shall be
comfortable, hard wearing and replaceable.
The base of the chair shall, unless otherwise specified, have 5 prongs dispersed at equal angles
around a central supporting core. The material shall be heavy duty die cast aluminium with epoxy
coating with no welded parts. The chairs shall be stable so as not to topple over even when heavily
loaded on one side.
Each chair shall, unless otherwise specified, be on 5 numbers heavy duty castors to be moved with
the minimum effort. They shall be double wheeled counter turning type with swivelling joints of
hard composition suitable for carpeted floors.
The chair shall, unless otherwise specified, be fabric upholstered and the fabric shall be heavy duty
superior quality flame resistant and fade resistant fabric which shall be mildly water resistant to
allow ease of dispersion of perspiration.
The fabric shall be comfortable and shall be textured, multi-coloured and with tight yarn so as not to
be easily pulled, torn or fluff.
The fabric shall be of colours to SO’s approval and there shall be no di fferentiation in colour of
fabric and other parts for chairs of different batches. Different colours will be used for chairs within
each chair type.
The fabric shall satisfy the following requirements:-
• Weight : minimum 480 gm/m²
• Abrasion Martindale : in excess of 60,000 cycles, 800g/12kpg
SFC/8
CHAIRS FOR THE SYSTEM FURNITURE (CONT’D.)
The chair shall be designed so as to be easily re-upholstered.
All metal parts shall be treated against rust, and exposed metal parts shall be epoxy coated.
Pneumatic adjustment for chairs shall be with heavy duty pneumatic cylinder adjustment, by lever or
other approved means.
The chair shall be compatible in design.
The chair shall be delivered fully protected with polythene covers.

The Contractor shall supply the chair as specified to SO’s approval, and warrants that the chair is
using good materials and further warrants against:-
 Faulty components/parts,
 Poor workmanship, and
 Fabric durability and colour fastness.
that is, against any defects whatsoever and howsoever arising for a period of FIVE (5) years from
the date of substantial completion of the Works. The Contractor shall make good all such defects
appearing within the said FIVE (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works at
his own expense and to SO’s satisfaction. If the Contractor shall refuse, neglect or fail to do so for
any reason whatsoever, within such time as may be specified at the complete discretion of the SO in
a notice in writing from the SO to make good a ny such defect, the Employer shall be entitled to
engage others to make good the same and charge the costs thereof to the Contractor.
Type
The chairs shall be low back swivel chair on c astors, with armrests and pneumatic height
adjustment.
The height of the backrest shall be easily adjustable. The forward and backward position shall also
be easily adjustable to give proper support for the back.
The overall height of the chair shall be minimum 350mm when the chair is at the lowest position.
The seat shall be minimum 450mm wide and minimum 400mm deep.
The seat height shall be adjustable from 350 - 510mm.

SFC/9
SIGNAGE
1. SIGNAGE PROVISION
The signage works are to be executed by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide and supervise the installation for all signage needs for the Works.
The Contractor shall work out the room numbering system to all rooms, including Toilets and
Service Rooms.
The Contractor shall provide the following signs in acrylic plate:-

 Room Numbers to all rooms.
 Room Names to all doors to all rooms.
 Information signs to all Toilets.
 Information signs to all Risers and Fire-fighting equipment compartments.
 Level Indicator signs to all levels at all the staircases and lift lobbies.
 Directional Signs - all levels as shown on the drawings and lift lobbies (6 colours per sign).
 Floor loading plan - all levels as shown on the drawings (6 colours per sign).
 “Fireman Access Panel, DO NOT OBSTRUCT” sign and ∆ sign to all FAP. T he quantity
shall be as indicated on the drawings.
 Handicap signs to all levels.
All acrylic plate shall be 4mm thick with bevelled edges and polished surface. The signage will be
reversed silkscreen with printed text and spray colour background.
All acrylic block cut-out shall be 30mm thick. F or the entrance sign wall, the names shall be
mounted on a 2mm thick aluminium “U”-tray with 50mm built-up in sprayed colours. The acrylic
cut-out letterings will be in spray painted colours.
The Contractor shall provide the following vinyl self-adhesive signages:-

 Double continuous bands each of 50mm width to all frameless full height glass panels and
frameless glass doors.
 “Push” and “Pull” signs to all glass doors. The signage shall be 150mm length and 30mm wide.
 Fireman access panel “triangle symbol” to all FAP locations. T he quantity shall be 6
numbers per block. The triangle shall have equal sides with the height of 150mm.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate and work closely with the SO in the course of his signage design.
SIG/1
SIGNAGE
SIGNAGE PROVISION (CONT’D.)
Acrylic State Flag

Contractor is to supply acrylic State Flag to all classrooms. The State Flag is centrally located about
200mm above the pin-up board, left of the magnetic whiteboard. The specifications are as follows:-
• Design - use artwork provided by Ministry of Information Communication and Art

(MICA)
• Material - Transparent Acrylic
• Printing - Silkscreen Printing (Reverse)
• Size - 460mm x 690mm x 3mm with beveled edges
• Finishing - Glossy, backing with approved protection
• Colour - Pantone Red (032) or Sunflower Red
Road Signs
Supply and install 1 No. “NO ENTRY” and 1 No. “STOP” road signs including galvanised post and
concrete foundation all to the details and dimensions as shown on the drawings.
Entrance Sign Wall and Aluminium Box Lettering
In the event the Contractor decides to provide new signages in lieu of re-furbish by re-powder
coating, the following specifications shall apply.
Construct entrance sign wall to details as shown on t he drawings including applying architectural
coating to exposed surfaces of wall.
Supply and install 3mm thick natural anodised aluminium box letterings of School name in four official
languages for entrance wall. Height of lettering should not be more than 200mm.
Supply and install 3mm thick natural anodised aluminium box letterings of School name in English
mounted to one block as approved by the SO. Height of lettering should not be more than 450mm.
Coloured Metal School Crest
Supply and install coloured metal School Crest to the following locations:-
• Entrance Wall (size not exceeding 1 m²) (Existing to be re-powder coated.)
• Stage Front (size not exceeding 1.2 m²)
SIG/2
SIGNAGE
2. SIGNAGE INSTALLATION
Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of paper prints and 1 set of reproducible of complete shop
drawings of all signs to SO for approval before fabrication. Full size details of all exposed edges,
joints between materials and details which affect the appearance shall be included. Print of copy
layouts with white letterings on black background shall also be provided.
The shop drawings to be submitted by the Contractor shall contain sufficient information as to
enable the SO to check the Contractor’s proposals for compliance with the Specifications and to
assess the soundness and suitability of the proposed construction with regard to the purpose for
which it is intended. The details shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following items:-
 Various sectional views of components, fully dimensioned and accompanied with detailed
description of parts of each component;
 Type of each material used;
 Thickness or gauge of members;
 Type of finish;
 Jointing details showing how composite units are to be connected together;
 Mounting details of sign units to the door, floor, ceiling or wall where appropriate.
The shop drawings shall include instructions and explanatory details for the sequence of fabrication,
assembly, erection and the installation of all materials and elements.
Sample
The Contractor shall submit mock-up samples of layout and choice of colours for each sign for
approval before commencement of fabrication.
If the Contractor fails to comply with the above, the SO reserves the right to either reject the whole
or part of the works and the Contractor shall not be granted any extension of time and compensation
whatsoever to that respect.
All samples shall be labelled, tagged or otherwise clearly identified and each label shall have
sufficient clear space to permit the application of any approval stamp by the SO.
All technical information, catalogue and other manufacturer’s products related to the works shall be
submitted.
Only materials, components and accessories that have been approved in writing by the SO shall be
used and installed in the works.
Before mass production of the signs, samples of each sign shall be put up on Sites for actual viewing
and inspection of the SO.
The Contractor shall allow for modification and adjustment of sample and in adverse cases rejection
of the sample in his tender price.
No mass production is allowed until the sample is approved. A ny delay in approval due to the
sample not being to the satisfaction of the SO will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
SIG/3
SIGNAGE
SIGNAGE INSTALLATION
Erection
Signage works shall be installed and erected in accordance with the approved shop drawings.
All signs shall be fastened securely in correct vertical and horizontal alignment.
The Contractor shall use fixing and jointing methods, types and spacing of fastening which are
suitable having regard to:-
 Nature of and compatibility with product/material being fixed and fixed to;
 Recommendations of manufacturers of fastenings and manufacturers of product / material

being fixed and fixed to;
 Materials and loads to be supported;
 Conditions expected in use;
 Aesthetics and appearance.
No short fired fixing shall be allowed. Power actuated fasteners shall not be used unless approved
by the SO.
All work shall be installed square, plumb, straight, true to line or radius, accurately fitted and located, with
flush type hairline joints (except as indicated otherwise or to allow for thermal movement), with provisions
for other trades, thermal movement and exclusion of water as required for a secure and rigid installation,
all in accordance with the approved shop drawings.
The Contractor shall protect all metalwork and subsequently remove all protective applications and
clean prior to completion of the works.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ensuring total coordination of all work and shall take site
measurements prior to preparation of any shop drawings or before commencing fabrication.
Final Location of Signages
The Contractor shall work out precisely the location of signs to be installed and allow ample time for
verification and confirmation of locations, positions and methods of display before commencement
of installation of signs on Sites.
The actual location of each and every sign will be confirmed by the SO. Locations will be
confirmed in the form of location plans and other information drawings.
All positions of signs shall be however, subject to final confirmation on site. The Contractor shall,
in the case of the large major sign types and the directional signs, mark these positions on site for
final approval by the SO prior to installation.
If the Contractor proceeds with installation of signs on Sites without verification and confirmation,
the SO reserves the right to relocate and reposition the signs without additional cost. The Contractor
shall make good damaged existing works arising out of relocations and repositions, at his own costs.
The SO reserves the right to change the positions of signs whenever necessary.
SIG/4
SIGNAGE
SIGNAGE INSTALLATION (CONT’D.)
Fixing / Fastening / Adhesives

Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the SO or otherwise shown in the Drawings, all sign units
which are to be floor, ceiling mounted or wall projected shall be mounted with fixing-screws of
corrosion resistant material, in sufficient numbers as to render the structure firmly held in place,
stable and free from being toppled. In this regard, all exposed or visible screws and other fasteners
shall be stainless steel or heavily chromed brass or galvanised steel. O rdinary mild steel screws,
bolts and nuts and such like fasteners that are not corrosion resistant shall not be permitted.
Unless otherwise specified, fastening shall be as follows:-
• Signs built into concrete or masonry shall be anchored with galvanised steel strap anchors,
shop welded on.
• Signs attached to concrete or masonry shall be fixed with welds or bolts embedded into inserts
or expansions shields.
• Signs attached to metals (other than structural steel) shall be anchored by bolts or screws.
• Signs attached to structural steel shall be anchored by welds or bolts and attached to metals
other than structural steel shall be anchored by bolts or screws. Power actuated fasteners are
not permitted unless approved by the SO.
Additional frame support shall be provided by the Contractor if necessary at no e xtra cost to the
Employer to ensure stability and durability of the signs.
Fastenings for all materials and components are to be aluminium alloy or non-magnetic stainless
steel unless otherwise specified. Self tapping screws and nails shall be aluminium or stainless steel.
Length of fastenings shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations but otherwise subject to the
following:-
 Nails are to be not less that 25mm or 2½ times the thickness of the member through which
nails are being driven, whichever the greater.
 Screws are to be not less than 12mm or twice the thickness of the member through which the
screws are being driven whichever is the greater.
 Regardless of these specific minimum lengths, fastenings are to be not longer than the total
thickness of the members being joined, less 5mm.
 Adhesives shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the product being fixed
and fixed to and approved by the SO.
Joints and Edges

Unless otherwise directed by SO, all joints and edges shall be pointed with an approved coloured
silicone sealant. Sealants shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions with
backer rods where necessary. A ll surfaces to receive sealant shall be thoroughly cleaned; excess
materials and spillage shall be cleaned and removed.
The joints for each and every material shall be accurately set, cut and neatly executed and finished
with no pr otrusion, gaps or misalignment. T he joints shall be of stout and sturdy construction to
match the purpose for which it is intended.
SIG/5
SIGNAGE
Steel and Metalwork

All metalwork shall be fabricated and installed by experienced fabricators or manufacturers. The
materials, methods of fabrication, fitting, assembling, brazing, supporting, fastening, operating
devices and erection shall be in accordance with the working drawings, this Specification, approved
shop drawings and best practices of the trade. All materials shall be new and clean having structural
properties to safely sustain or withstand stresses and strains to which materials and assembled work
will be subjected. All work shall be accurately and neatly fabricated, assembled and erected.
In so far as is practicable, fitting and assembling of work shall be done in the shop. Work that cannot
be permanently shop assembled, shall be completely assembled, marked and dismantled in the shop,
before shipment to ensure proper assembly on S ites. S hop assembly shall be to the largest
practicable sizes to minimize site work. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the
shop fabricated items will properly fit into the works. In the event that shop fabricated items do not
fit into the works, the items shall be returned to the shop for correction.
Metal shall be cut by sawing, shearing or blanking. Flame cutting will be permitted only if cut edges
are ground back to clean smooth edges and to the approval of the SO. All cutting shall be accurate,
clean, sharp and free of burrs without deforming adjacent surfaces or metals. All holes required in
the metalwork shall be drilled or cleanly punched holes. Burning to form holes is prohibited.
Connection shall be made within tight joints capable of developing the full strength of the member.
Joints shall be flushed unless otherwise indicated and formed to totally exclude water where exposed to
the weather. Joints shall be located where they are least conspicuous. Unless otherwise shown shop
connections shall be welded or bolted and site connections shall be bolted or screwed. Expansion and
contraction joints to allow for thermal movements of metal shall be provided at locations and by
methods approved by the SO.
Welding shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the relevant Singapore or British
Standards applicable to the metals being welded and by methods recommended by the
manufacturers of the metals being welded. Weld shall be continuous except where spot welding is
specifically shown. Welds exposed to view shall be ground flush and dressed smooth to match the
finish of the adjoining surfaces. W here welds are required to be flush the metal edges shall be
undercut. All welds on or behind surfaces which will be exposed to view shall be executed so as to
prevent distortion of the finished surface. T horoughly remove weld splatter and welding oxides
from, all welded surfaces.
Brazing shall be to BS 1723 or other approved equivalent.
Threaded connections shall be made tight with threads entirely concealed and the use of lock nuts.
Bolts and screw heads exposed to view shall be flattened countersunk with projecting ends of
exposed bolts and screws cut off flush with the nuts or adjacent metal surfaces.
Abutting bars shall be soldered and headed, dowelled and pinned or small bars shall pass through
larger bars and then pinned.
Casting shall be in one piece where practicable and of uniform thickness sufficient to ensure the required
strength for the design and use. C astings shall be smooth, true to dimensions and pattern, free from
defects and the best quality with all surfaces and edges clean, smooth and perfect.
Operating devices, mechanisms and hardware used in connection with metalwork shall be
fabricated, assembled, installed and adjusted after installation so that they will operate smoothly,
freely, noiselessly and without excessive friction.
Provide as necessary all supplementary and miscellaneous parts for each item of work so that it may
serve its function properly even though these may not be specifically shown in the Contract
Documents.
SIG/6
SIGNAGE
Steel and Metalwork (Cont’d.)

All metalwork shall be fabricated to coordinate with other trades and services and work shall be
accurately cut, fitted, drilled and tapped to accommodate such trades and services. T emplates and
drawings for proper coordination of this section of the works shall be provided.
In addition to the foregoing and other requirements as specified, metalwork shall conform to the
following:-
• All surfaces exposed to view shall be clean and free from dirt, stains, grease, scratches
distortion, waves, dents and other defects which mar the appearance of finished work.
• All surfaces exposed to view shall be straight and true to line or curves. Arises and angles
shall be as sharp to line or curves. Exposed edges shall be eased to a radius of approximately
1mm unless otherwise shown. F orm bent metal corners to the smallest radius possible
without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.
• At all breaks and bends the Contractor shall ensure that all surface finishes shall fully match
the finished appearance of the adjacent members.
• All exposed connections shall be formed with hairline joints flush and smooth and using fasteners
wherever possible. Exposed fastenings where permitted shall be of the same materials, colour and
finish as the metal to which they are applied unless otherwise indicated and shall be of the smallest
practicable size Philips flat head countersunk screws or bolts.
Hardware
Provide and install all incidental hardware necessary for the proper functioning of the signs, which
shall be in stainless steel unless otherwise approved by the SO.
All equipment and materials shall be new of first quality of their respective kinds of the appropriate
grade and quality adequately protected against the local climatic conditions, such as watertight
capability. I n addition, the Contractor shall give special consideration to exposure to spray from
rain, exposure to sun and dust.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall ensure that the whole quantity of each product and
material required to complete the work is of a consistent size, quality and overall appearance. The
Contractor shall handle, store and fix products with care to ensure they are not damaged when
incorporated into the work.
Stainless Steel
All stainless steel work shall conform to the requirement of BS 1449 pa rt 2 or BS 3014 or other
approved equivalent as appropriate to the work. S tainless steel shall be low carbon, chromium
nickel austenitic steel, type 316L to be approved by the SO. All stainless steel shall be factory
fabricated to the best standard of workmanship and under factory supervision and control. T he
surface of the stainless steel shall be in No. 4 satin horizontal in one direction to achieve a hairline
finish.
Aluminium
To provide aluminium sheet of alloy and temper for the type of use and finish indicated and not less
than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B209 or other approved equivalent.
To provide aluminium extrusion of alloy 6063T5 and temper for the type of use and not less than
strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B221 or other approved equivalent.
Extrusions should be at least 2mm in thickness. Signboards which require illumination should have
an operable door panel for easy access for maintenance. The door panel should be attached to the
main frame by a co ncealed hinge. To obtain full strength and rigidity, only continuous hinge
integrated to the main frame will be accepted. A ll corner joints for the extrusions to be injection
moulded using ABS-Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene resins. The corner joints have to be treated
with a UV stabiliser and pigmented to required colours.
SIG/7
SIGNAGE
Silk Screening Printing
Materials
Coating Materials Generally

Silk screen inks shall be of an appropriate quality for the material and finish on which they are applied.
The finish for inks on face-screened surfaces shall be semi-matt (eggshell).
Hue Translucent Inks

Where a specified hue is applied for translucent illumination, the ink must match that hue when lit.
Hue-Face Illumination
Where a specified hue is applied for face illumination, the ink shall match that hue for daylight and
colour-corrected ambient lighting conditions.
Ink hue shall not be affected adversely by the presence or lack of ultra-voilet radiation or of other
rays in the spectrum.
There inks are screened onto acrylic to an exact match in hue and finish with other surface coatings,
the resistance to weathering of both coatings must be consistent in order to retain the match of hue
and finish.
Inks shall withstand detergent cleaning, rain, humidity, heat and other ambient conditions.
Workmanship
Preparation of Surfaces
Ensure that all surfaces to be screened shall be free from imperfections. Remove dirt, dust and
grease and treat acrylic materials with anti-static cleaner.
Application
Ink application shall be flat, evenly distributed over the printed area and free from spotting, marks or
imperfections.
Silk-screened graphic content shall be sharp-edged without any bleeding.
Light colours shall not be printed over dark colours. In the case of face screening, the light colours shall
be block-printed and dark colour stencil-screened on top. For reverse screening, the dark colour is stencil-
screened first and then blocked with the light colour behind.
Registration and Contents

The schedule and drawings for each sign type generally give as indication of the extent of the text,
symbols and graphics to be incorporated in the signs. Actual contents will only be confirmed after
award of the contract.
The Contractor shall in his overall schedule indicates the dates whereby sign contents is to be
confirmed, taking into account the necessary periods preparation and approval of final artwork for
the various signs.
All printing in particular multiple colour printing, shall be carried out with true registration.
Defects Liability Period

During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall ensure that all sign system and all sign
boxes are kept in good working condition and that at any time when called upon shall replace all
defective parts.
SIG/8
SIGNAGE
Acrylic
Submittal
Shop drawings, where required for relevant sign types shall show sizes, dimensions, and profiles of
acrylic sheet or block work.
Samples displaying the available colour range and quality of the acrylic sheets shall be submitted to
SO for approval before mass production.
Materials
The acrylic supplied shall be free from specks, air bubbles, waves, scratches, air-holes and other
defects.
Acrylic sheets shall have consistent transparency or translucency as selected.
All acrylic shall be polished whenever required to the best standard of workmanship and under
factory supervision and control.
All injection moulded parts shall be free from sink marks and black spots.
Shop drawings, where required for relevant sign types shall show sizes, dimensions, and profiles of
acrylic sheet or block work.
Samples displaying the available colour range and quality of the acrylic sheets shall be submitted to
SO for approval before mass production.
Installation and Workmanship
Corners shall be polished unless otherwise shown.
Supports
All materials used for support shall comply with provisions as described earlier, as the case may be.
Supports should be at least 3mm thick and shall have the capability of future changes without the need
for removing the entire support. All signboards mounted to the support will be by means of bolt and
nuts concealed either in the signboard casing or the internal portion of the support. Welding of the
signboards to the support will not be acceptable.
SIG/9
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK AND METALWORK
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Structural steelwork shall be constructed in accordance with the SO’s Engineering Specifications
and drawings and as directed by the SO on site.
For structural steelwork no allowance has been or will be made for rolling margin.
Rates shall be deemed to include for structural steelwork not cast into concrete to be hot-
dipped galvanised to BS 729 or other approved equivalent.
Rates for welded work are to include for all labour and materials, including preparing surfaces for
welding and grinding to a smooth finish.
Rates for steelwork are to include for treating surfaces in contact with aluminium at intersections
with aluminium or approved bituminous paint.
The specification on structural steel works shall be read in conjunction with the Civil and Structural
Engineer’s Specifications. I n cases of discrepancies, the requirements specified in the Civil and
Structural Engineer’s Specifications shall take precedence.
All materials, testing, fabrications, assembly, erection and finishing of the structural steelwork shall
be in accordance with the codes and standards set forth herein and/or in the Civil and Structural
Engineer’s Specifications.
No approval or any acceptance by the SO shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibility under
the Contract for the quality of materials and standard of workmanship on the Works.
All steelwork including connections shall be hot-dipped galvanized to 80 microns thick

conforming to SS117 before delivery to site. All exposed or damaged / cut / welded parts shall be
painted with two coats of compatible zinc-rich paint.
All steelwork shall comply with BS5950-1 : 2000 and BS 5950-2 : 2001 or other approved
equivalent unless otherwise specified.
BS4360:1990 or other approved equivalent for weldable structural steels has been superseded by
new BS and EN standards. Material for weldable structural steels shall comply with the new BS
and EN standards.
All materials for steelwork shall comply with the latest BS and EN standards. These new standards
are outlined in BS5950-1: 2000 and BS 5950 - 2: 2001 or other approved equivalent.
SSM/1
2. SCOPE OF CONTRACTOR’S WORKS
The Contractor shall furnish, fabricate, assemble, erect and finish all the structural steelwork for
a complete installation. Any materials and works incidental to the structural steelwork not
specifically described herein but necessary to complete the steelwork as intended shall be supplied
and installed by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with other contractors and furnishing to them
with all necessary information for coordination of the works. Supply and/or installation of all
anchors, fasteners, inserts, fittings, fixtures and the like as required to complete the structural
steelwork shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of shop and working drawings in accordance
with the requirements specified herein.
The Contractor shall engage an Independent Testing / Inspection Agency (ITA) to carry out tests of
the materials and inspection of the steelworks in accordance with relevant BS or other approved
equivalent standards.
3. TESTING, INSPECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL
All the materials and workmanship for the structural steelwork shall be subject to the tests and
inspection set forth below. The Contractor shall perform any additional tests and inspections as
deemed necessary for assuring the quality of the work to the approval of the SO.
The Contractor’s test and inspections shall be carried out in the manner specified by ITA. The
schedules and methods of the tests and inspection shall be submitted to the SO for his prior approval.
The scope of the ITA work include but are limited to the following:
a) Review of contractor and sub-contractors’ QA/QC manuals, inspection and test plans and
shop drawings.
b) Review of welding procedure specifications and qualification records, welder’s
qualification records and witnessing of qualification tests.
c) Steel material inspection / verification of inspection and tests records.
d) Joints fit-up inspection.
e) Visual welding inspection.
f) Witnessing of NDT and review of NDT results/reports.
g) Verifying / witnessing of dimensional inspection.
h) Witnessing of bolt tightening inspection.
i) Compilation of inspection / test reports and review of manufacturer’s data records.
The SO shall reserve the right to inspect all materials and operations of the Contractor related
to the structural steelwork. The SO shall have reasonable access to the shops, factories, storage
areas, warehouses and any other places of work of the Contractor the SO deems it necessary to
inspect the materials and workmanship.
Notwithstanding the certificates and/or test reports of the manufacturers or other independent
testing agencies submitted, the SO may order material retest to be conducted.
SSM/2
4. SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit to SO for review a schedule for submission of all
shop drawings and other submittals required under the Contract. The required submittals
include but are not limited to the items listed in the following sections.
.2 Shop Drawings
a) The Contractor shall provide the SO with two complete sets of detailed shop
drawings, full marked up general arrangement drawings and relevant calculations
duly prepared and endorsed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer.
b) The shop drawings shall indicate clear and complete details of each assembly,
component and connection, together with all information relative to their surface
treatment and fabrication including welding procedures and sequence, etc.
c) The SO's approval of these drawings must be obtained before the fabrication can
commence. Such approval shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for any errors which his drawings or calculations may contain.
.3 Material Certifications
The Contractor shall submit to the SO, mill certificates, delivery orders and/or test reports of
the manufacturers or independent testing agencies properly correlated to the all the materials
that are to be incorporated in the permanent structural steelwork.
.4 Welding Procedures / Welders Qualification Records

a) Welding procedure specifications shall be prepared and pre- qualified in
accordance with the relevant standards and submitted to the SO prior to
commencement of work.
b) The Contractor shall submit welder qualification records, issued by approved testing
agency, related to the approved welding procedures for each welder employed.
c) The Contractor shall maintain records of all welding procedure specifications,
procedure qualification records and welders / welding operators qualification records
for the project. Certified copies of these records shall be made available to the SO.
.5 The Contractor shall submit a detailed description detailing the sub- contractor’s production
capacity and capability, manpower resources available, experience, resume of the personnel
to be assigned to the sub-contracted work, plant resources available, and the like for the SO’s
perusal and approval.
.6 Others
a) Procedures for fabrication, transportation, assembly, erection and finishing.
b) Safety Procedures
c) Testing and Inspection Plan
d) QA/QC Manual of Contractor and sub-contractors.
SSM/3
5. MATERIALS
All steel to be incorporated in the Works shall be traceable to the original manufacturers.
Mill certificates and delivery orders of all steel sections shall be submitted to the SO at least
fourteen days before the start of fabrication. Failure to produce documentary proof of the origin of
any materials in a fabricated unit will be sufficient reason for the SO to reject the unit.
All structural members except structural hollow sections shall be hot- rolled conforming to BS
EN 10025 S275/S355J0 or BS EN10113 S275/S355M/N or other approved equivalent as
appropriate, unless otherwise specified in the drawings.
All structural hollow sections shall be hot-finished conforming to BS EN10210 S275/S355J2H,

unless otherwise specified in the drawings.
Dimensions, properties, tolerances and rolling margins of all steel sections shall conform to the
relevant product standards specified in BS5950-2 or other approved equivalent.
Ordinary bolts and nuts shall be hexagonal with plain washers all grade 8.8 conforming to
BS4190 unless otherwise specified. Bolt length shall be such that the projection beyond the nut
after tightening is not less than three full threads nor more than 13mm, unless otherwise permitted
by the SO.
All holding-down bolts shall be Grade 8.8 unless otherwise specified.
All high strength friction grip bolts shall comply with BS 4395, Part 1 or other approved
equivalent and shall be installed in accordance with BS 4604, Part 1 or other approved equivalent.
Electrodes for welding shall comply with BS 639 or other approved equivalent. Electrodes shall
be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The coating shall be dry
when each electrode is put into use, and all unused electrodes shall be returned to store.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary for all material testing to be carried out by the approved
ITA, as and when directed by the SO.
SSM/4
6. FABRICATION
.1 General
The Contractor shall obtain authorisation to start fabrication. Such authorisation will not
normally be given before all shop drawings have been checked and approved.
.2 Marking
a) At all stages of the fabrication, the Contractor shall positively identify the
respective structural steel members following an approved marking system. Punches
and chisels shall not be used for markings on the outer surface of the members.
b) For the purpose of continuous identification until completion of the erection, the
marking shall be made with a durable material that will not impair the material. Hard
stamping may be used for marking, except where otherwise instructed by the SO.
c) Where the approved drawings indicate areas of steelwork are not to be painted, no
marking shall be placed in such areas.
.3 Cutting
a) Members shall be cut as an appropriate manner by shearing, cropping, sawing or
machine flame cutting such that it will not impair the strength of the member.
Manual flame cutting may be done only with the prior approval of the SO.
b) Sheared or cropped edges for all butting members shall be dressed to a neat finish
and shall be free from distortion.
c) Flame cut edges should be free from notches, burrs or gouges. Surface defects and
gouges greater than 3 mm shall be removed by grinding. All re-entrant corners shall
be finished notch-free to a radius of at least 15mm.
d) Where manual flame cutting are allowed by the SO, the cut shall be made to not less than
3 mm from the finished dimension with the final removal completed by grinding.
.4 Holes for Bolts
Holes for bolts shall be formed only by drilling. Punching or flaming

cutting shall not be permitted. All bAverage hardness shall be 1500
N/MM2
urrs shall be removed to ensure proper contact of connecting members.
.5 Bending
The bending of structural steel sections to form curved members shall be achieved by a hot
bending process. The bending of all steel sections shall be carried out in a specialist
workshop subject to the approval of the SO.
.6 Tolerance
a) Dimensional and fabrication errors of the structural members shall be within the tolerance
set forth in the relevant standard to which the approved detailed design relates.
b) Fabricated items are to be accurate to within ± 3mm of their design length. The
fabricated structural steel members showing deviations in excess of the specified
tolerances shall be corrected by an approved method, prior to the shop priming. No
heating or hammering for the correction of deviations shall be permitted, except where
a specific permission is obtained from the SO.
SSM/5
7. WELDING
.1 All welding shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS 5135 or other
.2 All welding operations shall be performed only at established and qualified workshops that
provide a controlled and sheltered environment, subjected to SO’s approval. These
workshops shall be properly equipped with the necessary facilities and equipment for
complete welding. Site welding shall only be permitted for unavoidable welding operations
that cannot be otherwise carried at these workshops.
.3 Welder / Welding Operators
a) All welding shall be performed only by approved welders tested to AWS D1.1 or BS
EN 287: Part 1 or other approved equivalent for the approved welding procedures.
b) The Contractor shall submit copies of each welder / welding operator qualifications
issued by an approved testing agency together with the welder / welding operator
resume bearing a photograph for identification. The SO reserves the right to
have any welder re-tested at any time during the Contract.
.4 Welding procedures
a) Welding procedures for shop welds and site welds, shall be qualified in
accordance with AWS D1.1 or BS EN 288: Part 3 or other approved equivalent and
welding procedure sheets shall be submitted to the SO for approval prior to
commencement of welding works.
b) No welding shall be carried out in strong breeze and/or rain unless adequate
shielding facilities as approved by the SO are provided. No intermittent welding is
permitted on surfaces exposed to rain.
c) Fusion faces shall be properly prepared and free from loose scales, slag, rust,
grease, paint any foreign material. The fusion faces shall be carefully aligned and
the correct gap and alignment maintained during the welding operation.
d) Gaps between parts to be joined with fillet weld shall be not more than 4.0mm.
For gaps up to 4.0 mm, the size of the fillet welds shall be increased by the gap width.
e) Parts to be butt weld shall be carefully aligned. Misalignments exceeding 10% of the
thickness of the thinner part or 3.0mm whichever is the smaller shall be corrected.
No part shall be drawn into a slope greater than 2 degrees in the making the
correction.
f) All welds shall be finished full and made with the correct number of runs.
All adhering slag being carefully removed from the exposed faces immediately after
each run. The welds being kept free from slag and other inclusions.
SSM/6
WELDING (CONT’D.)
.5 Inspection and tests
a) The Contractor shall employ an Inspection Institute approved by the Employer's

Representative to carry out all non- destructive tests of welds as specified by the
Employer's Representative.
b) The tests on the welds shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant BS
indicated as follow:
i) Radiographic test to BS2600/BS2910 or other approved equivalent.
ii) Ultrasonic test to BS 3923 or other approved equivalent.
iii) Magnetic-particle test to BS 6072 or other approved equivalent.
.6 Extents and methods of tests and examinations
a) The extents and methods of test and examinations of the welds shall be as follows,
unless otherwise approved by the SO. Extent of the tests and examinations set forth
shall be applicable to both shop and field welds. The SO may order any other
additional tests as he deems necessary.
b) All welds shall be visually inspected and approved.
c) Ultrasonic tests or radiographic tests shall be performed on 100% of all full penetration butt
welds. T he acceptance criteria for these welds shall be category A to BS 5135 or other
d) Ultrasonic tests shall be performed on 50% of all partial penetration butt welds and
fillet welds with leg length greater than 12mm. The acceptance criteria for these
welds shall be category A to BS 5135 or other approved equivalent.
e) Magnetic particle test shall be performed on 50% of all fillet welds. The
acceptance criteria for these welds shall be category B to BS 5135 or other approved
equivalent.
.7 Corrections of Welds
a) Welds not to the satisfaction of the SO shall be thoroughly removed by grinding

or other approved methods, without impairing the parent metals, and re-welded to
approval.
b) Deficient assemblies shall be taken apart, corrected and re-assembled using new materials
as required.
SSM/7
8. TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE AND HANDLING

The Contractor shall provide the SO with lists of the structural members included in each
consignment to facilitate the SO’s inspection of the members delivered to the site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for adequate protection of the steelwork members against
deformation and damage during shipment and storage.
The Contractor shall arrange shipments so as to tie-in with the progress of construction work. The
Contractor shall suitably pack the bolts, nuts and other small items in suitable containers.
The structural steel materials shall be stored off the ground on platforms, skids, or other suitable
supports. The materials shall be kept free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matters and shall
be protected from damage and corrosion.
The Contractor shall take the utmost care in handling and stockpiling the structural members to
minimize the damage.
All steelwork shall be marked, before dispatching to site, in accordance with the
marking schedule to be prepared by the Contractor.
9. ERECTION
.1 The erection of the steelwork shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5950 Part 2 or
other approved equivalent and the safety regulations and by-laws of the relevant authorities.
.2 Prior to erection of any steelwork, the Contractor shall submit for the approval of the SO a
detailed method statement of the proposed erection procedures. Where deemed necessary by
the SO, calculations prepared and endorsed by Contractor’s PE shall be submitted to
demonstrate the structural adequacy of the proposed erection procedures.
.3 The Contractor shall at his own expense carry out trial assembly and erection of the steel
structure at the fabrication yard or other approved location for checking as may be required
by the SO.
.4 The Contractor shall check and verify all dimensions in the building in which the steelwork
is to be erected and shall inform the SO of any discrepancies, errors or omissions prior to
erection of the steelwork.
.5 At all times during erection, the steelwork shall be secured against all loads, including those
from erection equipment and their operations. If necessary, temporary bracing and supports
shall be provided at the Contractor’s cost.
.6 During lifting and fitting of the steelwork, care shall be taken to prevent all parts and
members from being distorted or damaged, and to keep the stresses in them within the limits
specified in BS5950 or other approved equivalent. Should any part or member be damaged,
it shall be repaired or replaced to the approval of the SO.
.7 Permanent bolting or welding shall not be carried out until all members are properly aligned and
the positioning and leveling of the steelwork are in accordance to the specified erection
tolerances.
.8 Fastening of the splices of compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces
have been brought completely into contact, unless otherwise shown on the approved
drawings. Bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in contact shall be cleaned before the
members are assembled.
.9 Holes for bolts shall not be enlarged beyond the specified hole size without prior
approval of the SO.
.10 Drift pins may be used only to bring together the parts and members, but shall not be used
in such a manner as to distort or impair the parts or members whatsoever.
SSM/8
ERECTION (CONT’D.)
.11 BOLTING
.1 Unless otherwise approved, nuts used for connections subject to vibration shall be of
the type capable of preventing the connections from loosening. Self-locking nuts will
be acceptable.
.2 Bolts spun galvanized, sheradized or electroplated with zinc cadmium or

aluminum bolts, nuts and washers shall be used for connection of metal sprayed or
galvanized steel members.
.3 Friction grip bolts
a) Friction grip bolt tightening shall be by the turn-of-nut method or by torque

control method using properly calibrated wrenches, and performed in two
stages as set forth below.
b) If the turn-of nut method is employed, performance tests shall first be carried
out for each lot and size of bolts in the presence of the SO. The Contractor
shall submit the test report to the SO for his approval, and no permanent
tightening shall commence without the SO’s approval.
c) Prior to commencement of the bolt tightening, the Contractor shall determine the
necessary torque values to achieve the required bolt tensions.
.4 Anchor bolts
a) Anchor bolts shall be accurately installed in the concrete by use of templates

and/or wires, and properly protected from damage during concrete placing
operations and until they are finally tightened to the approval of the SO.
b) Each anchor bolt shall be securely fastened with two nuts and a washer,
except where otherwise approved.
.5 Inspection and tests
a) Where required by the SO, the torque coefficient value of the high strength
bolts shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the relevant
standards.
b) The Contractor shall conduct the following tests and inspection in the
presence of the SO, after completion of the bolt tightening.
c) In case of the torque control method, 10% of the bolts, with a minimum of 1,
in a group shall be re-tightened with the same wrenches used in the second
stage, to confirm the complete tightening. The Contractor shall measure the
torque values for the re-tightening. Each value shall be within ± 10% of the
required torque value.
d) Should any of the bolts be found loosened or otherwise insufficiently tightened,

all bolts in the group shall be re- tightened to the required tension. All over-
tightened bolts shall be replaced with new ones.
SSM/9
10. PROTECTION COATING/FINISHING
.1 Unless otherwise specified, all painting to steelwork shall comply with the requirements
of the relevant portions of the specification in addition to the following requirements.
.2 Painting schedule
a) Unless otherwise specified, steelwork, which will be in bonding contact with

concrete, shall not be painted. The surfaces for friction-grip joints shall be sand or
shot-blasted or ground to near white metal and left for natural rusting. No protective
coating shall be applied to the friction grip surfaces of the friction grip joints.
b) Machined surfaces shall be protected against corrosion by approved rust-inhibiting

coating that can be removed prior to erection.
.3 Painting application
a) Unless otherwise provided, the surfaces within 200mm of any field weld locations
shall be kept free from any paint and prevented from rusting until approval by the SO
to apply primer is obtained. No finish paint shall be applied to the bolted or welded
joints until after the SO’s approval of the joints.
b) Any damage to the coating shall be repaired immediately after discovery, to the
satisfaction of the SO. Before touching up, rusted area shall be spot blasted to the
surface preparation grade set out above.
c) Prior to application of the subsequent coat, the surfaces if the foregoing coats shall
be cleaned free from any dust, dirt, oil, grease, water, moisture, rust, corrosion, salt,
mill scale, and all other substances detrimental to painting.
d) All painting operations shall be performed by qualified painters whose qualifications

shall be approved by the SO prior to proceeding with the operations.
e) Dry film thickness of each coat of the paint shall be measured, in the presence of the
SO, using the dry film thickness gauge of an approved type, and the records shall be
submitted to the SO for approval before proceeding with the subsequent coat. Any
defects found shall be repaired to the SO’s approval.
SSM/10
11. STRESSBAR SYSTEM
.1 This section shall be read in conjunction with the relevant drawings. In cases of
discrepancies, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence.
.2 Stressbar system shall be provided as shown in the drawings.
.3 The preceding sections of this structural steel specification shall also applied to the works
for the stressbar system.
.4 The acceptance of the stressbar system shall be subjected to the approval of the SO.
.5 Stressbar system shall consists of smooth surface finished bar and the following
components: forked clevis, clevis pin, turnbuckle conical cover.
.6 The bar shall has the following characteristics:
a) Nominal tensile strength, 620 N/mm²,
b) Nominal 0.1% proof stress, 460 N/mm²,
c) Minimum elongation at maximum force, 16%
d) Modulus of elasticity, 205 x 10³ KN/mm²,
.7 The bar shall generally not be allowed to be spliced. Under exceptional circumstances,
splicing using turnbuckle coupler shall be allowed subjected to SO’s approval.
.8 The bar shall be hot-dipped galvanized to 80 microns thick conforming to SS117 before
delivery to site. Painting as per architectural requirement shall then be applied on the
galvanised bar.
.9 The threaded end of the bar shall be hot-dipped galvanized to 80 microns thick conforming
to SS117 before delivery to site. No painting shall be allowed at the threaded end.
.10 The components supplied shall be architecturally pleasing.
.11 The components supplied must be capable of transmitting the maximum tensile force to the
capacity of the bar. Contractor shall engage a P.E. to furnish calculations showing that
the components are capable of transmitting the maximum tensile force to the supporting
structure.
.12 All components shall be hot-dipped galvanized to 80 microns thick conforming to SS117
before delivery to site. No painting shall be allowed on the structural connecting contract
faces of the components. Painting as per architectural requirement shall then be applied
on the exterior surface of the components.
SSM/11
12. INTUMESCENT PAINT FOR FIRE PROTECTION
.1 Intumescent paint is allowed to be used to protect the structural steel members of buildings
of all purpose groups, except purpose groups VI and VIII as per defined by FSB, to achieve
the required fire resistance.
.2 For buildings of habitable height not more than 24m, intumescent paint is allowed to be
used to protect the structural steel columns and beams.
.3 For buildings of habitable height more than 24m, intumescent paint is allowed to be used to
protect only the structural steel beams, excluding load transfer beams.
.4 Contractor shall submit intumescent paint to the SO for approval The intumescent paint
shall also be listed under am approved Product Listing Scheme.
.5 The Intumescent paint shall be subjected to the fire resistance test as detailed in BS 476 Pt
20/21 or its equivalent.
.6 The Intumescent paint shall also be subjected to weathering tests as detailed in BS 8202:Pt
2: 1992 or other approved equivalent. Fire test for fire resistance performance shall be
conducted on the specimens after the weather tests. The fire resistance rating of the tested
specimen shall not be less than 75% of the original prototype.
.7 Coating of intumescent paint onto structural steel, and subsequent maintenance shall conform
to BS 8202: Part 2: 1992 or other approved equivalent.
.8 Flame retardant chemicals, intended for upgrading of fire resistance rating or surface spread
of flame of timber or any combustible material, shall not be allowed to improve the required
fire resistance or the class of the surface.
.9 A signage depicting the following minimum information shall be fixed at a conspicuous

location:
a) Name of supplier
b) Fire resistance rating of the intumescent paint
- Date of painting
- Expected date of re-painting.
c) To include the following caution note:- “Caution: No other paint / coating shall be
applied to the surfaces of the structural steel members protected by the intumescent
paint system”.
SSM/12
METALWORK
13. STAINLESS STEEL
The stainless steel is to be Type 316L to be selected and approved by the SO. Where described they
shall mean the following:-
 Type 316L Hairline Finish - No. 4 Sheets brushed with 150 - 200 grit abrasive in
non – directional.
 Type 430 Mirror Finish - BA Finish high polished.
The Contractor is to obtain a certificate to Indemnity that the stainless steel is of the High Chromium
High Nickel (Austenitic) types.
When stainless steel is erected the Contractor is to protect the surfaces from scratches and with frequent
washing with soap and water to maintain the original clean bright appearance.
Stainless steel unless otherwise specified shall be the best quality 18/8 High Chromium High Nickel
(Austenitic) Steels in polished / non-direction hairline finish as shown in drawing including all joints,
junctions and capped ends, and bent and welded/connected to the SO's approval. The Contractor is to
obtain a certificate to guarantee that the stainless steel is of the High Chromium High Nickel
(Austenitic) type.
When stainless steel is erected the Contractor is to protect the surfaces from scratches and to
maintain the original clean bright appearance.
General
All stainless steel shall be American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Standard 316L, 18/8 type
not exceeding 0.012% maximum carbon content, unless otherwise specified. Where bend for
stainless steel tube is less than 135°, it shall be cast bend.
Material
Stainless steel tubular section used for fabrication of handrail and supports shall be 1.5 mm
or 3 mm thick of diameters as indicated on drawings.
a) All stainless steel railing shall be in hairline finish and exposed surfaces shall be free from
scratches and other surface blemishes.
b) Sample of railing shall be submitted free of cost for the SO's approval. All materials
subsequently delivered to site shall equal to the approved sample.
Installation
a) All screws, nuts, bolts, washers and other fasteners used for the assembly of the stainless
steel balustrading and railing shall be of stainless steel unless otherwise directed by the S.O.
b) The Contractor is required to submit shop drawings showing detail of fixing and glazing
for the approval of the S.O.
c) The stainless steel railing shall be securely installed, set plumb, level and in proper
alignment and capable of withstanding any operating forces.
d) The whole of the stainless steel railing work shall be carried out by qualified workmen and
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved detail drawings.
Protection and Cleaning

The stainless steel railing shall be adequately protected to prevent damage during the construction
period. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all surfaces, remove all
stains and replace any damaged or defective works as required, at no extra cost.
SSM/13
14. GALVANISED STEEL
All sections to be made from steel plates shall be in accordance with BS 4360 or other approved
equivalent rods and bars are to be in accordance with BS 1449 P art 1 a nd 2 or other approved
equivalent of low carbon galvanised steel. Small steel angles, tees and channels shall be of cold
rolled section complying with BS 2994 or other approved equivalent.
Unless otherwise stated, all steel sections, channels, angles, brackets, plates, chains, trusses, pipes, frames,
etc. including fasteners shall be hot-dip galvanised. Any damaged/cut/welded parts shall be treated with
one coat of appropriate metal conditioner coating and two coats of copolymer plastic coating.
All galvanised steel bolts used shall include heads, nuts and washers.
15. GALVANISED STEEL BALUSTRADES AND HANDRAILS
Supply and install hot-dipped galvanised steel balustrades and handrails consisting of balusters,
handrails, horizontal intermediate and bottom rails, the whole welded together and including fixing
to brick or concrete wall and concrete kerb with plates, brackets, etc. as shown on the drawings. All
balustrades and handrails shall be painted with one coat mordant solution, one coat zinc chromate,
one undercoat and two finishing coats of synthetic enamel paint.
All balustrades to be 1100mm high.
16. GALVANISED STEEL CHANNELS, ANGLES, BRACKETS, PLATES, ETC.
Supply and fix all galvanised steel hollow sections, channels, angles, brackets, purlins, flashings,
plates, etc. as shown in the drawing.
17. GALVANISED STEEL FRAMINGS
Supply and fix galvanised steel framings consisting of hollow sections, channels, angles, brackets,
plates, etc. with welded or bolted connections as shown in the drawing.
18. GALVANISED MILD STEEL GRILLES
Supply and fix hot-dipped galvanised mild steel grilles to profiles and patterns as shown on t he
drawings and to be painted with one coat mordant solution, one coat of red lead primer, one
undercoat and two finishing coats of synthetic enamel paint.
The spacing of any grille member shall not exceed 100mm.
19. EXTRA STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORT FOR BASKETBALL RETRACTABLE

FOLDABLE, BACKBOARD AND NETTING
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for extra painted galvanized mild steel structural steel
support as extension for the pair of basketball retractable foldable acrylic backboard, hoop a nd
netting only when the structural fixing position falls short for the proprietory basketball backstop
system to be mounted. SO’s approval shall be obtained for this design to be endorsed and paid by
Contractor’s own PE.
SSM/14
20. PERFORATED ALUMINIUM PANELS
Perforated aluminum panels in minimum thickness shall be framed with approved framing all in pigment
organic coated finish with 50% minimum perforation (size of perforation to be approved by the SO) all as
shown on the drawings to be approved by the SO.
21. GALVANISED STEEL MESH
Supply and fix pigmented organic coated finish expanded galvanized steel mesh complete with
galvanised steel frame where indicated on the drawings.
22. FAN HOOKS
Guidelines for the installation of fan hooks for “Cast-in Method” and “Installation by Use of Anchor
Bolts” - Refer to “Specification of Work – Guidelines for Installation of Fan Hooks”.
23. SHOP DRAWINGS
For all Structural Steelwork and Metalwork, etc. the Contractor shall provide, for the approval of the
SO, shop drawings showing typical installation details, patterns, joint lines, setting out lines, etc. All
patterns shall be based on concept drawings provided by the SO.
24. SAMPLES
Clean down and protect completed sections of the Structural Steelwork and Metalwork to the
approval of the SO.
SSM/15
ALUMINIUM AND GLAZING WORKS
1. SCOPE OF WORKS
The Contractor’s Specialist shall design, supply, engineer, test, fabricate, deliver, install and
guarantee all construction necessary to provide the Aluminium and Glazing Works complete with all
accessories and components, in conformance with the requirements of the drawings and
Specifications.
Without limiting the generalities of the foregoing, the works shall include, without being limited to:
(a) External windows, window frames, roof lights, fixed panels, screens, louvers, doors, glass
doors, etc, glass and glazing, and hardware.
(b) Bolts, fasteners and secondary metal work connecting the aluminium works to the structure.
(c) Any exposed external aluminium works.
(d) All anchors, attachments and reinforcements for mullions and transomes required for a
complete installation.
(e) Etching and sandblasting of glass.
(f) Supply and installation of glass.
(g) All waterproofing and grouting required between structure and window frames including
grouting voids within frames.
(h) All caulking, sealing and flashing as required for a watertight assembly.
(i) Isolation of dissimilar metals and moving parts.
(j) Engineering proposals, drawings and data.
(k) Shop drawings, engineering data and structural calculations of all installations, to be prepared
and signed by their appointed Professional Structural Engineer.
(l) Samples and mock-ups.
(m) Performance test of the systems.
(n) Co-ordination with work of other trades.
(o) Protection of the work.
(p) Guarantees.
(q) Final external and interior cleaning of the systems.
AGW/1
SCOPE OF WORKS (CONT’D.)
(r) Shop drawings
Basic design requirements as described in this specification and other architectural

requirement such as the size of panels, nett glass area, openable function, configuration of
vision panels shall be retained in the shop-drawings. However, the Contractor may propose
alternative on the construction details provided all basic functional and architectural
requirements are fulfilled.
Particulars of the following must be given in preparing the shops drawings:-

i) Thickness and profile of the various sections to be used
ii) Joints, welds, intersections and assembly
iii) Finishes
iv) Waterproofing
v) Hardware including hardware schedules
vi) Anchorages, structured supports and reinforcement
vii) Glass and glazing methods
In addition, the sub-contractor shall submit with his tender detailed method statements which
shall describe the followings:
i) Drainage system of the windows and doors
ii) Ways of ensuring watertightness and air-tightness
iii) Ways of ensuring vertically of window and door frames
iv) Ways of accommodating thermal movement due to weather conditions
v) The protection of aluminium surface finish and operating mechanism from damage
after installation.
The shop drawings shall show at least major items of work, to full metric scale as far as
practical, metal and glass thickness, arrangement of components, jointing, details of all field
connection especially of mullion to mullion, transom to mullion and anchorage, diagrams and
details explaining provisions for protection system for water leakage, thermal movement,
fastening and grouting methods, sealing methods, glazing methods, flashing, metal finishes
and all other pertinent information.
The shop drawings may also show the maximum permissible structural tolerances of the
building that the system has been designed to accommodate in case these tolerances exceed
those specified in this specification.
The aluminium works and glazing shall be designed to compliance with Singapore Standard
S.S. 212:2007 and S.S.268:2007, to withstand loads due to:-
i) Wind pressure (up to 1200pa, as per PSB Standard SS212, 2007 Appendix c).
ii) Dead loads (eg. Infill panels, etc)
iii) Live loads that may be imposed (eg. Window cleaning cradles, etc.)
AGW/2
2. ALUMINIUM AND GLAZING WORKS GENERALLY

Aluminium shall be pigmented organic coating finish (powder coated finish) unless otherwise stated
or shown on the drawings to be approved by the SO.
All aluminium members shall be factory fabricated to the best standard of workmanship and under
experienced factory supervision and control. S hop drawings shall be submitted to the SO for
approval prior to fabrication.
All joints in frames at corners, junctions or intersections, shall be electrically welded, or
mechanically cleated or made with the best trade type of joints with all due care.
All aluminium sections shall be so designed to suit the required span and comply with statutory
requirements on lateral loadings where applicable.
Samples of aluminium sections shall be submitted to the SO for approval prior to commencement of
work.
The Contractor and Specialist shall provide a written JOINT GUARANTEE of TEN (10) YEARS (as
per attached Format Specimen) for the design, materials, performance, workmanship, including but not
limited to discolouration, water penetration, etc. for the supply and installation of all types of aluminium
and glazing works. The Guarantee shall commence from date of Substantial Completion of the Works
3. ALUMINIUM WINDOWS, LOUVRED WINDOWS, DOORS, ETC.

Supply and fix approved doors, windows, etc. complete with frames, mullions, transomes,
ironmongery, weather strippings, glazing beads and other matching accessories.
Supply and fix approved aluminium adjustable louvred window frame and fittings with clips to receive
2mm thick x 150mm wide aluminium blades or 6mm thick x 150mm wide clear glass louvres, screwed
to timber frames including control mechanism, flush handle and coupling mullion, etc.
To all adjustable glass louvred an extra length of powder coated aluminium C-Channel Clip shall be
installed at the bottom edge for the full length of each glass louvred blade and properly secured to
the end clips to SO’s approval.
Supply and fix approved aluminium fixed louvres in accordance with manufacturer’s details.
All windows, sashes and other opening units shall have weather stripping of rubber gaskets,
neoprene setting blocks and approved silicon water-resistant sealer, and doors shall have weather
stripping of certified high pile wool mohair with silicon water-resistant treatment to eliminate water
leakage in extreme weather conditions. A ll joints between aluminium head or cill and concrete
surfaces shall be also similarly treated with silicon water-resistant sealer.
All units shall be prepared for glazing with aluminium glazing beads, non-setting putty and/or press-
fit rubber gasket or other equal and approved proprietary method.
4. ALUMINIUM SUN SHADE & SCREENS

Supply and install approved aluminium sun shade and screens complete with frame. The aluminium
sun shade shall be finished in pigmented organic coating to be approved by the SO.
5. ALUMINIUM CAT-LADDER
Supply and install anodized aluminium cat-ladder inclusive of cage as indicated on the drawings.
6. ALUMINIUM FINS
Supply and install aluminium fins in powder coated finish as indicated on the drawings.
AGW/3
7. DOUBLE BANK UNIVERSAL LOUVRE

The double bank universal louvre shall have good airflow properties and good rain defence
properties comprising:-
Shall Section : Louvres at 50mm pitch
Deep Section : Front louvre at 100mm pitch with rear louvers at 50mm pitch
Arrangement of louver : Horizontal
Material : Aluminium
Finish : Polyester powder coated
Coverage : Total coverage: a ll exposed surfaces and edges of components and
assemblies ate coated, excluding fixings and rivets
Colour : Manufacturer’s international available colours and to SO’s selection
Guards : Galvanised steel bird guard (screening behind louvres)
Blanking panels : Single skin aluminium with external decorative polyester powder paint
finish to match louvers
Performance Specification
A multipurpose louvre system shall be provided to achieve minimum resistance to airflow, with
louvre blades to be aerodynamically shaped with no sharp edges or protrusions, to ensure the highest
efficiency airflow performance.
Airflow
The following minimum aerodynamic coefficients shall be achieved when the louvre panel is tested
to EN 13030:2001:
Air Inlet – 0.308
Air Extract – 0.25
Rain Defence
The louvre system shall achieve the following weathering classification when the louvre panel is
tested to EN 13030:2001
Class A2 – up to 1m/s suction velocity
Class B2 – up to 2.2m/s suction velocity
Class C2 – up to 3.0m/s suction velocity
The louvre system shall be drained internally through hollow section vertical mullions which shall
discharge water onto the cill.
Product Specification
Double Bank Universal Louvre type shall have louvre blades at 100mm pitch deep section at front
and 50mm pitch shallow section at rear.
Construction throughout shall be from high quality corrosion resistant aluminium alloy type 3005
(Colterra) or 3105 to BS 1470 or other approved equivalent.
Front louvre blades shall not be drilled but clipped and not riveted or screwed to structural
supporting mullions allowing for expansion and contraction along their length without distortion and
to provide a continuous external appearance if required.
Mullion shall be concealed at 1250mm maximum centres and their points of support along their length shall
be in accordance with prevailing site wind pressures in accordance with BS 6399 part 2 or other approved
equivalent. The mullion shall be manufactured from 2mm sheet so that associated support steelwork is
reduced to a minimum.
Cill and frames shall contain all peripheral fixings and be manufactured form 1.6mm sheet.
The aluminium used shall be 100% recycled aluminium for the principal aluminium components.
AGW/4
8. DESIGN BY CONTRACTOR’S SPECIALIST
The Specification is of the "performance" type and includes the minimum requirements for the
External and Internal Aluminium Works without limiting the Contractor’s Specialist to the method
of achieving the performance required.
The Contractor’s Specialist shall be responsible for the entire design of the Aluminium and Glazing
Works based on the outline drawings and details prepared by the SO.
The Tender Drawings do not purport to identify or solve completely the problems of thermal or
structural movement, pressure equalization, vapour barriers, fixings and anchorage, flatness and
stability of facing moisture disposal, etc. The drawings also do not purport to solve problems at the
glass line associated with glass movement, pressure fracture or thermal shock.
The Tender Drawings indicate profile and configuration required together with relationship to
structural frame and interior building elements. T he drawings also contain details which suggest
directions for solving some of the major design requirements and the Contractor’s Specialist may
use these details and develop them, as he deems best.
The following Specification contains technical requirements for the Aluminium and Glazing Works,
etc. and the Contractor’s Specialist in submitting proposals for the Aluminium and Glazing Works
will be deemed to have included against the entire contents of this Specification in the Contract Sum,
as a minimum requirement and also to have included for any measures necessary for compliance
with the Specification, regardless of whether such means are specifically referred to in the
Specification.
Designs must be based on the basic design requirements stipulated in this Specification and shall
comply with architectural requirements such as the sizes and configuration of panels, nett glass area.
However, the tenderers may propose alternative construction details provided that all basic
functional and architectural requirements are fulfilled.
The preliminary design proposals to be approved by the SO shall be in the form of drawings, drawn
to full Metric Scale clearly indicating all major dimensions and illustrating key sections, etc. and all
other constructional requirements, complete with full Specification on all items of work including:-
(a) Metal quality, finishes and thickness.
(b) Glass quality, coating and thickness.
(c) Sections of all typical aluminium and other metal sections.
(d) Arrangement and jointing of components.
(e) Fixing and anchorage system.
(f) Drainage system and provisions in respect of water leakage.
(g) Provisions for thermal movements.
(h) Flashing.
(i) Sealant and sealing method.
(j) Glazing method.
(k) The maximum permissible structural tolerances of the building that the system has been
designed to accommodate in case these tolerances exceed those specified in this Specification.
(l) Weight of all typical systems per unit area.
(m) All other relevant information.
AGW/5
DESIGN BY CONTRACTOR’S SPECIALIST (CONT’D.)
The Contractor shall submit for SO’s approval the following but not limited to for each different
section, size, quality, type, etc.:-
(a) 450mm Long mullion and transome sections.
(b) 450mm Long casement sections.
(c) 450 x 450mm Glass.
(d) 600 x 600mm double bank louver & standard louvers
(e) Others as requested by the SO.
Samples are to be with the same finish and workmanship as the Contractor’s Specialist had proposed
and shall include fixing device.
Extra costs due to any additional requirements in respect of the Contractor’s Specialist design as
aforesaid which may subsequently be found or deemed necessary by the Contractor’s Specialist or
the SO, will be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.
The Contractor’s Specialist shall be responsible for the design of all components of the Aluminium
and Glazing Works installation, including (but not by way of limitation) frame sections and sizes,
catches, locks, sliding gears, glass thickness, glass location, weather stripping and gaskets, to meet
all performance requirements and shall be subject to the approval of the SO.
The design drawings of the Contractor’s Specialist will be subjected to the inspection and
acceptance of the SO.
The shop drawings, samples, etc. shall be provided for the approval of the SO before the
Contractor’s Specialist is allowed to proceed with the fabrication. H owever, the approval of the
drawings by the SO shall not absolve the Contractor and or his Specialist from all responsibilities
and liabilities as to the performance and the efficacy of the Aluminium and Glazing Works.
In addition, the Contractor’s Specialist will be requested to prepare all shop drawings when
instructed by the SO during the course of the works.
AGW/6
9. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The following design requirements must be complied with:-
(a) General
i) The Contractor’s Specialist shall provide substantiation of the compliance of the design
with the Specifications by full and complete calculations for all parts, components and
assembles, prepared and signed and endorsed by an approved Singapore Registered
Professional Engineer.
ii) Submit for review and approval by the SO, with shop drawing submittals.
(b) Wind Load
The design wind load for the External Aluminium and Glazing Works is to be determined
according to the requirements of Singapore Standard SS 212, Specification for Aluminium
Alloy Windows. The exposure grade is to be "moderate" with appropriate wind speed
correction factors for ground roughness and building height, all as described in SS 42.
The External and Internal Aluminium Works shall be designed to withstand the wind loads
established according to the procedures described in SS 212, without damage or permanent
deformation to the installation and without deflection in any member exceeding 1 / 125 of the
clear span between structural supports, or 20mm whichever is the lesser under wind loading
of p=200Pa and no permanent damage.
The design wind load for the Aluminium and Glazing Works shall be capable to withstand
wind loading of maximum 1.5 KPa.
All Aluminium and Glazing components shall be so designed that deflection arising from wind and
static loads shall not adversely affect the strength and appearance of any component or result in a
permanent set of any member or affect any adjacent materials.
(c) Air Infiltration and Water Penetration
The Aluminium and Glazing Works shall achieve the minimum performance level in relation
to air infiltration and water penetration under "moderate" exposure conditions as set out in
Singapore Standard SS 212, Specification for Aluminium Alloy Windows.
(d) Thermal Movement
The Aluminium and Glazing Works shall be so designed to accommodate thermal movements
occurring under local climatic conditions and temperature changes.
(e) Structural Movement
i) The effect of normal settlements, deflections or expansion of the building structure

shall not affect the efficiency and proper functioning of the Aluminium and Glazing
Works. L ateral deflections of the structural will not exceed 1 / 250 of the span or
maximum 20mm whatever is less.
ii) Before approval of shop drawings, the Contractor’s Specialist is to confirm the limits of
in-service lateral and vertical deflection which the installation has been designed to
accommodate.
AGW/7
GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D.)
(f) Structural Tolerances
The Aluminium and Glazing Works shall be designed so as to accommodate the structural
construction tolerances as defined in BS 8110 and BS 5606 for Code of Practice for Accuracy in
Buildings or other approved equivalent.
(g) Treatment Against Crackling Noise
The design of the Aluminium and Glazing Works shall incorporate proper treatment against
crackling and other noises caused by:-
i) Thermal expansion and contraction of metal components.
ii) Deflection of the building structure.
iii) Wind loading.
(h) Weight
The total weight of the Aluminium and Glazing Works including all fixings and accessories
shall not exceed 100 kg / m2.
(i) Fire-proofing
The whole Aluminium and Glazing Works assembly and their individual components shall
comply with statutory requirements and/or the Bye-Laws of the authorities concerned with
fire-proofing. The Contractor’s Specialist will be fully responsible for any submissions to the
relevant authorities as may be necessary to demonstrate the compliance with statutory
requirements of any material used in the assemblies.
AGW/8
10. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1 ENGINEERING REQUIREMENT
.1 Cut and trim component parts of the aluminium works and glazing during erection
only with their approval of the manufacturer or fabricator, and in accordance with
their recommendations. Do not cut through reinforcing or prestressing members.
Restore finish completely to protect material and remove all evidence of cutting and
trimming. Remove and replace members where cutting and trimming has impaired
strength or appearance.
.2 Members which are observed to be warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or
defaced to such extend as to impair strength or appearance in the process of erection,
as directed.
.3 Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints. Support on metal shims and
secure in place by bolting to clip angles and similar supports anchored to supporting
structure. Use only the types of equipment, ropes, wedges, spaces, spacers, shim and
other items during erection which will not stain or mark the finish of units.
.4 Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of material being
welded and in accordance with appropriate recommendations. Use only methods
which will avoid distortion or discoloration of exposed faces. Grind exposed welds
smooth, using only clean wheels and components which are free of iron or iron
compounds. Restore finish of components parts after welding and grinding.
.5 Solder and blaze only fill or seal joints (not to form structural joints) and in
accordance with component part manufacturer’s recommendations. Grind smooth and
restore finish.
.6 Paint clip angles and other ferrous metal parts which will be concealed, with a zinc
rich primer.
.7 Frames shall be set and fixed to walls by lugs. No screw fixing through aluminium
frame will be allowed.
.8 Composite windows / doors with different functions should have a homogenous
complete extrusion as transom or mullions. No extrusions to be jointed with sealant
as the interface details.
.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
.1 Erect all compared parts within the following tolerances:-
.1 Variations from plumb or angle shown:-

a) 3.00mm maximum variation in storey height or
b) 3.00mm run, non-cumulative.
.2 Variations from level or slopes shown:-
a) 3.00mm maximum variation in any column-to-column space or 9.0m run,
on-cumulative.
.3 Variations from theoretical calculated position as located in plan or elevation in relation
to established floor lines, column lines and other fixed elements of the structures:
a) 6.0mm maximum variation in any column-to- column space or floor-to
floor height, or 13.71m run.
b) 6.0mm maximum total variation at any location.
AGW/9
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D.)
.3 ALUMINIUM ALLOY
.1 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys shall be AA 6063-T5 comply with BS
1474 for extruded sections, bars and round tube; with BS 1471 for drawn tube and
with BS 1470 for plate, sheet and strip or their respective approved equivalent.
.2 Structural members shall have a minimum thickness of 2.0mm and non-structural
members shall have a minimum thickness of 1.5mm.
.4 FINISHES ON ALUMINIUM
The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following:
.1 Anodizing
.1 Anodic coating to 25 microns (average) minmum complying with BS 3987. At
no point on the significant surface (S) shall the local coating thickness be
less than 20 microns.
.2 Combined coating to comply with JIS H8620 or other approved equivalent, except
the minimum thickness of coatings shall be 9 microns for the anodic and 7 microns
for the liquid organic.
.2 Polyester Powder Coating Finish (Pigmented Organic Coating)

.1 The galvanised steel surfaces to be powder coated shall receive a multi-stage
chemical pre-treatment process to remove organic and inorganic surface oils,
residual oxides and chemical conversion coat before powder coating.
.2 The pre-treated galvanised steel surface shall receive a factory applied, over-cured
polyester powder coated suitable for exterior use. The coating shall be of average
thickness of 40-80 micros, and applied by electrostatic spraying. The coating
system must be applied by a specialist applicator or approved equivalent.
.3 The powder coated colour shall be selected and approved by the SO. The
Contractor shall submit samples of powder coated galvanised steel sections to
the SO for approval together with full technical specifications as supplied by
manufacturer, before proceeding with the works.
.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
.1 All parts shall be:-
a) Secure by concealed screws wherever possible,
b) Where exposed to view, screws positions are to be indicated on preliminary
drawings.
c) Exposed screws shall be of countersunk type non-magnetic stainless steel and
neatly located in approved manner.
.2 All components shall be assembled, secured anchored reinforced, sealed and made
weathertight in a manner not restricting thermal or wind movements of the external cladding.
.3 Free and noiseless movement of all components of the curtain wallings and windows
due to thermal, structural, wind pressure, or dead loads, shall be achieved without strain
to glass, without bucking of any component and without excessive stress to any
members or assemblies.
.4 The entire curtain walling and windows shall be designed, fabricated, assembled and
installed so that all leakage and condensation shall be drained and discharged to the
exterior face of the wall; and all internal parts and spaces vented by acceptable means
to ensure air pressure equalization where possible.
AGW/10
.6 FABRICATION
.1 General
All assemblies shall be fabricated and assembled in accordance with the drawings and
the requirements of these specifications. Deviations of any nature, without approval
of the SO, shall not be permitted.
.1 Tolerances
Furnish a schedule of fabrication tolerances for all major wall cladding

components. In addition to the fabrication tolerances, provide for and schedule
thermal movement including assembly and installation tolerances for all major
and/or applicable wall cladding components and/or assemblies.
.2 Workmanship
.1 All work shall be carefully fabricated and assembled with proper and
approved provisions for thermal expansion and contraction, fabrication
and installation tolerances and adjoining building component tolerances
and design criteria.
.2 All forming and welding operations shall be done prior to finishing, unless
otherwise noted.
.3 All works shall be true to detail with sharp, clean profiles, straight and free
from defects, dents, marks, indentations, waves or flaws of any nature
impairing strength or appearance; fitted with proper joints and
intersections and with specified finishes.
.3 Shop Assembly
As far as practicable, all fitting and assembly of the work shall be done in
the shop. Work that cannot be permanently shop assembled shall be temporarily
assembled in the shop and marked, before disassembly to ensure proper assembly
later on the building.
.4 Sleeves
Unless otherwise noted, all aluminium sleeves shall be extruded sections designed
to accurately interlock with adjacent sections and incorporate serrated surfaces for
the secure bedding of sealant between the parent metal and the sleeve.
.5 Joints and Gaskets
All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber and all inner frames shall
have insertion of neoprene/santoprene gasket or other air- tightening materials.
All joints must be stainless steel screw tightened. No rivet pins are allowed for
section joints.
AGW/11
FABRICATION (CONT’D.)
General (Cont’d.)
.6 Sealant
.1 Sealing compounds shall be in silicone and/or compriband sealant or

other equal and approved which are compatible with the aluminium and
adjoining works.
.2 Perimeter of external windows interface with the concrete plaster shall be

applied with an approved sealant.
.7 Galvanising
Galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles shall comply with BS 729 or other
.8 Hardware
.1 Windows shall have aluminium friction stays and fitted on aluminium

cum l atch ha ndle locking device. Sliding window gears, channels and
accessories shall be corrosion-proof and waterproof and shall ensure easy
and smooth mobility of sliding lead.
.2 All hinged casement and sliding casement windows shall be provided with
approved keyed locking devices to SO’s approval.
.3 Rollers used shall be made of hardened synthetic resin with ball bearing
at their cores. Guides shall also be of synthetic resin material and exposed
parts shall be in approved matching colour.
.4 Roller for sliding door and sliding window must be the adjustable type
that is able to adjust to prevent that panel from jumping track.
.5 Sliding window track must be stacked in different height for

proper water tightness.
.6 Sliding door lock shall be cylinder hook bolt pull flush with safety pin.
.7 Single or double swing doors shall have double action floor springs.
Door handles shall be 25mm diameter stainless steel tube.
.8 All doors shall be fitted with cylinder locks and keys in duplicate.
.9 All cylinder locks to doors shall be of different and not similar keying
combinations such that the key of any one door will not be able to
unlock the other doors.
.10 All hardware shall be of a finish to match the selected and approved powder
coated finish. Catalogue and samples of hardware offered must be submitted
with the Tender for the approval of the SO.
AGW/12
General (Cont’d.)
.9 Ironmongery
.1 Ironmongery shall be the best quality hardware. Fixtures to aluminium

doors, windows, etc, shall have finishes to match closely those of the
adjacent aluminium finishes.
.2 Window handles shall be cast aluminium type.
.3 Friction stay for top hung and casement window shall be stainless steel grade
304 with proven testing report from an approved laboratory to be submitted.
.4 All ironmongery shall be approved by the SO.
.5 Catalogues and samples of hardware offered must be submitted with the

Tender for the approval of the SO. Hinges, pivots, hangers, rollers, etc,
shall be of materials resistant to atmospheric corrosion.
.10 Fasteners
.1 Bolts, screws and nuts shall comply with BS 4190 or other approved
equivalent and all bolts shall be fitted with washers.
.2 Self-tapping screws shall comply with BS 4174.
.3 All screws, bolts, & nuts shall be stainless steel in grade 304.
.11 Safety Device
.1 Safety device shall be incorporated into all the glazed sliding window panels
to prevent them from jumping track. Guider and stopper must be provided.
.2 Sliding panels must be slide on a proper sliding track. Sliding in channel

between two tracks type is not recommended.
.12 Weather Strip
All weather strips shall be of approved polypropylene pile or santoprene.

PVC gasket shall not be allowed.
AGW/13
General (Cont’d.)
.13 Storage and Protection
.1 All aluminium sections shall not be stored in a manner where they rub
or slide against each other or against other metallic surfaces.
2. All aluminium shall be protected with proven adhensive PVC film

wrapping before dispatch to prevent units from damage by other builder’s
work during and after installation. All corner framed shall be protected
with corrugated cardboard to prevent from damage during transportation.
3. Any aluminium unit which is damaged in anyway during transportation or

before installation, shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
.14 Erection and Installation
1. The Contractor shall submit a schedule on the procedure for inspection

during installation so as to maintain quality control on job site.
2. The Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement for the

protection of the surface of curtain walling members during delivery and
erection, with description as to when the protection can be removed.
This method shall be acceptable to the SO.
3. The Contractor shall submit bi-weekly reports on the inspection of

erection and installation.
4. Delivery and Storage of Materials – All materials delivered to site shall be

stored in allocated spaces where the stored materials will not be exposed to
wetting or damage. Materials shall be stored neatly and properly stacked.
Curtain walling units and/or their components parts shall be transported,

handled and stored in a manner to preclude damage of any nature.
Glass shall be transported, handled and stored in a manner in strict

compliance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Remove all units or components which are cracked, bent, chipped,

scratched or otherwise unsuitable for installation and replace with new.
AGW/14
General (Cont’d.)
.15 Document and Certification
Quality Control Documentation – In-plant and job site quality control procedures
shall be documented in writing for the SO’s review and approval to ensure the
design integrity and performance of the as-built product. Documentation shall
include schedule, details, isometric and/or schematic explanatory sketches cross-
referenced to the shop drawings, data sheets, etc. The SO shall be given free access
to the plant to inspect fabrication procedures. No fabrication or assembly of job site
materials shall commerce without prior written approval from the SO.
.1 The in-plant quality control procedures shall include but not necessarily be
limited to the following items:-
Fabrication : Tolerances, joinery, sleeves, etc.
Finish Match : Approved finish and controls required for the match of
exposed surfaces.
Assembly : Welds, fasteners, sealants, gaskets, separators, glazing, etc.
Protection : Handling, protection, shipping
.2 The job site quality control procedures shall include, but not necessarily be
limited to the following items:
Anchorage : Lines, grades and related building tolerances
Installation : Tolerances, finish match, joinery, sleeves, flashing,
welds, fasteners, sealants, etc.
Sealant : As recommended by the applicable sealant manufacturer(s).
Protection : As recommended by the applicable materials
manufacturer(s).
.16 Cleaning
.1 On completion, the Contractor shall remove all protective materials and

the aluminium members and glazing to the satisfaction of the SO.
.2 The aluminium work shall be thoroughly cleaned with plain water with
soap or household detergent on completion of the job. No abrasive agents
shall be used.
.3 Defects in workmanship appearing during the Defect Liability Period

shall be rectified at the Contractor’s expense.
.4 Rejection and Rectification

Any material, finish or workmanship which is found not to comply with
this Specification, will be rejected by the SO, any such rejected items will
be removed immediately and replaced to the entire satisfaction of the SO,
at the Contractor’s expense.
AGW/15
11. TESTS
.1 WINDOW PERFORMANCE
.1 Air Infiltration (Permeability) Test

Criteria : Test Pressure shall be up to 200 pa (200N/m²)
Requirement : The maximum air infiltration at pressure difference of 200 pa shall
be less than 10m³/h/m length of opening joint at test pressure.
For fixed lights, air leakage shall not exceed 0.5m3/h/m length of
visible perimeter.
.2 Water Penetration (Water Tightness) Test

Criteria : Test pressure shall be up to 180 pa (180N/m²) ie. 15% of Design
wind pressure up to 1200pa.
Requirement : No significant leakage up to test pressure.
.3 Wind Loading (Resistance) Test

Criteria : Test pressure shall be up to 1200pa (1200N/m²)
Requirement : The maximum allowable deflection shall be 1/125 of the distance
between supporting span or 2.0cm whichever less under the wind
loading of p=200pa and no permanent damage.
.4 Safety Test
Safety test pressure shall be up to 1800 pa (1800 N/m²) for positive and negative
pressure (1200 pa x 1.5)
.5 Requirement on : Any permanent residual deformations damage functional defects

shall be noted.
.6 Repeated Test
All windows in particular louvred window are to be able to withstand and comply to
repeated use test.
.7 The contractor shall allow for the testing to be conducted on each type of window to
certify that the above performance criteria are met.
AGW/16
TESTS (CONT’D.)
WINDOW PERFORMANCE (CONT’D.)
.8 Performance Requirements
.1 The design, supply and installation of the aluminium windows and doors
provided for the works shall comply in all aspects with S.S.212:1998 and
S.S.268:1988 respectively and shall withstand loads due to wind pressure, dead
loads and live loads that may be imposed.
.2 All structural components of the aluminium works and glazing including

members or frames, glazing stops or gaskets, welds or weldings, connections,
adhesives and sealants shall be designed and fabricated with a factor of safety
not less than 1.5. F ailure of any structural component shall not occur at less
than 1.5 t imes the maximum “Design Wind Pressure”. Failure is defined as
breakage or component disengagement or permanent distortion.
.3 Operation Test
All windows in particular louvred window are to be able to withstand and comply
to repeated use test.
.4 Ultra Violet Light (UV) Weathering Test on Polypropylene Louver Clips
Contractor is to ensure test certificate is not more than 2 years old at the point of
submission of sample for approval, otherwise new tests have to be conducted at
an accredited lab to obtain updated results. Contractor is to allow for 2 batches
testing upon delivery on site.
TEST METHODS:
Accelerated Weathering (Xenon Arc)*
1. Adopted ISO 105-1994 Testiles-Test for Colour Fastness Part B02 :

Colour Fastness To Artifical Light: Xenon Arc Fading Lamp Test
(Water-Cooled Xenon Arc Apparatus) and their respective approved
equivalents.
a) Test Conditions : i) Before weathering

ii) After 100 hours xenon arc exposure
iii) After 500 hours xenon arc exposure
iv) After 1000 hours xenon arch exposure
b) Light Source : Xenon arc lamp water-cooled continuous

light
c) Irradiance : 1.10 ± 0.03 W/m²/nm at 420mm
d) Distance between
sample and light
no. of determinations : 3 Per test condition
AGW/17
TESTS (CONT’D.)
Performance Requirements (Cont’d.)
.4 Ultra Violet Light (UV) Weathering Test on Polypropylene Louver Clips (Cont’d.)
TEST METHODS (CONT’D.):
.2 Load (Non-Standard)
a) Test conditions : a) Before weathering
b) After 100 hours xenon arc exposure
c) After 500 hours xenon arc exposure
d) After 1000 hours xenon arc exposure
b) Crosshead speed : 5mm/min
c) No. of determinations : 3 per test condition
d) Degradation Temperature
3. Degradation Temperature By Thermo Gravimetric Analysis (TGA)
a) Test Conditions : a) Before weathering
b) After 100 hours xenon arc exposure
c) After 500 hours xenon arc exposure
d) After 1000 hours xenon arc exposure
b) Temperature range : Ambient to 750º C Scan rate:20º C/min
c) Atmosphere : Air
d) No. of determination : 3 per test condition
CONDITIONS:
Unless otherwise specified, all test specimens were conditioned at 23 ± 2º C, 65 ±
5% relative humidity.
TEST RESULTS
TEST UNIT RESULT

1) Xenon Arc Accelerated Weathering
a) 100 hours NA Should have no
change in colour
b) 500 hours
for a), b) & c).
c) 1000 hours
2) Maximum Load, Average N Not less than 400
for a), b), c) & d).
a) Before weathering.
b) After 100 hours xenon arc expose. ˚C Not less than 300
for a), b), c) & d).
AGW/18
TESTS (CONT’D.)
Performance Requirements (Cont’d.)
.4 Ultra Violet Light (UV) Weathering Test on Polypropylene Louver Clips (Cont’d.)
REMARKS:
1. Accelerated Weathering (Xenon Arc)*

a) The ‘*’ sign indicated that the xenon arc light source covers both
UV (ultraviolet and visible light.
b) The range of spectra is between 300nm and 420 nm.
c) The UV light range is between 300nm and 400nm and the visible
light range is between 400nm and 700nm.
d) The xenon arc accelerated weathering is a simulation of the

natural sunlight that has both the UV and visible light.
2. For degradation temperature test, there was no significant difference in

degradation temperature among the test samples before and after xenon
arc accelerated weathering.
3. The test samples were not degraded after 1000 hours of xenon arc exposure.
12. INSULATION MATERIALS (Where applicable)

All thermal insulation shall consist of rigid rockwool to be selected and approved by the SO and
shall comply with the following :-
(a) Shall not retain water.
(b) Shall be in general 50mm in thickness.
(c) Shall be secured by welded impaling pins or equivalent.
(d) Should have a density of 32 kg/m3 and a K value of 0.035 w/m degree C.
(e) PVC laminated to receive paint finish.
AGW/19
13. WORKMANSHIP
All work shall be carried out in a neat workmanlike manner and in accordance with the approved
programme. The standard of the workmanship is to be at least equal to the best obtainable locally
and is to comply with the most recent rules and regulations of all Authorities having jurisdiction
over the work.
The standard of the design and the construction of the Aluminium and Glazing Works resulting from
such workmanship shall be such as to meet the requirements of the various tests described elsewhere
in this Specification.
The fabrication and installation of all Aluminium and Glazing Works shall be carried out by the
Contractor’s Specialist.
All dimensions shown on the tender drawings and the shop drawings shall be verified by actual site
measurement before fabrication and installation.
All aluminium members shall be factory fabricated to the best standard of workmanship under
experienced factory supervision and control.
Materials, methods of fabrication, assembly, installation, fastenings, supports, braces, operating

parts and the like shall be in accordance with the shop drawings.
Operating parts and hardware shall be fabricated and installed so as to facilitate smooth, free and
noiseless operation without excessive friction. In addition, they shall be adequate for the purpose for
which they are intended.
All joints of both the inner and outer frames at corners, junctions and intersections shall be
mechanically jointed and be such that when assembled they are as strong and rigid as adjoining
sections. Due care shall be taken to ensure that all joints are watertight and leakproof. Joint lines
should not be visible or mark the finished surfaces.
Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction in horizontal and vertical members which are
exposed to the weather or elements. Any distortion of members or any glass cracked or broken as a
result of inadequate provisions must be rectified by the Contractor’s Specialist at his own expense.
All works shall be securely installed and anchored in position, set plumb, square and level and in
proper alignment with other work, all in accordance with the shop drawings.
14. SETTING OUT AND SITE MEASUREMENTS
The Contractor’s Specialist shall set out the positions of the windows, door, etc. for the approval of
the SO before commencing.
Site measurements for all the Aluminium and Glazing Works shall be made by the Contractor’s
Specialist prior to fabrication of the units.
15. CLEANING
The Contractor’s Specialist shall be responsible for the removal of protective materials and cleaning the
cladding thoroughly with water or other approved cleaning agents. Mortar and paint splashes, etc. shall
be removed from the frame from time to time and as directed.
On Completion, all surplus materials must be removed from the site by the Contractor’s Specialist
and everything left in a neat and tidy condition to the approval of the SO.
AGW/20
16. GLAZING
(a) General
All glass shall be float glass and of best quality of approved manufacture, free from air
blemishes or flaws of any description and shall be full weight and thickness as specified. The
Contractor’s Specialist must obtain all the glass from one Supplier.
All glass shall be cut accurately to fit frames with necessary clearance and shall be set to give
full bedding for the entire width of frame. T he Contractor’s Specialist shall replace any
defective, damaged or broken glass at his own expense and shall leave all glazing clean and
perfect on completion.
All exposed glass edges shall be ground with carborundum stone and polished.
Adequate glazing clearances shall be allowed. Edges of glass shall not be ripped, shelled or
damaged in any way. Glazing with cracks or damages caused by faulty installation, incorrect
tolerance, etc. shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
All glass shall have not more than 30% of light transmittance value.
LOW EMISSIVITY GLASS TO BE USED

AND SHALL BE SELECTED AND APPROVED BY THE SO
(Shading Coefficient Minimum 0.75 or as indicated on the drawings)
LOCATION TYPE
ALL CASEMENT WINDOWS, 6mm Thick clear or tinted float glass. C olour to be
FIX PANELS, GLASS LOUVRES, selected by the SO.
ETC.
ROOF LIGHT 6mm + 1.52mm + 6mm Heat soaked tempered and
laminated clear or tinted glass.
TEMPERED LAMINATED 12.76mm Clear tempered laminated glass. The Contractor
FRAMELESS GLASS (RAILING / to check and design to the required thickness conforming
BALUSTRADE / PARAPETS to Lateral Impact requirements and Horizontal Loading
AND GLASS BARRIERS) Code H.3.3.1 & thickness / lateral force ditto in stainless
steel U-supports.
FRAMELESS GLASS DOORS & 12mm Thick heat soaked clear tempered glass.
EXTERNAL FIXED PANELS
(b) Tinted Float Glass

Supply and fix 6mm thick approved tinted float glass panes or louvre blades to aluminium
window framings with neoprene or polypropylene clips.
Colour of tinted glass shall be to SO's selection.
(c) Obscured Glass

Supply and fix 6mm thick approved obscured glass panes, in general at all toilet locations.
(d) Laminated Glass

Supply and fix 12mm thick approved laminated glass to aluminium door frames and doors.
Laminated glass shall be composed of 2 panels of glass as required by structural analysis, with
a polyvinyl butyl plastic interlayer.
AGW/21
GLAZING (CONT’D.)
(e) Tempered Glass

Tempered glass shall be of 12mm thick approved clear tempered float glass.
All heat-treated (tempered and heat strengthened) glass shall meet ASTM C 1048 or other
approved equivalent and the followings requirements:-
Compression Levels
i) Heat Strengthened Glass
• Surface Compression -5,500 psi. Range 4,000 ps i to 7,000 ps i for 8mm glass
and thinner
• Surface Compression -6,500 psi. Range 5,000 ps i to 8,000 ps i for glass
thickness exceeding 8mm
• Edge Compression -5,000 psi minimum
ii) Tempered Glass
• Surface Compression -10,000 psi minimum
• Edge Compression -9,700 psi minimum
Warp, Bow and Surface Conditions
i) Overall Bow and Warp, when measured in accordance with the procedure listed in
ASTM C 1048 or other approved equivalent shall not exceed 0.79mm per 300mm
length.
ii) Rollerwave Peak to Valley Distortion
• Within the main body -0.0762mm maximum
• Within 267mm of a leading and trailing edge - 0.203mm maximum
iii) Rollerwave distortion shall run parallel to the width dimension for the entire project.
The only exception is when the width dimension exceeds 2134mm.
(f) Insulating Glass (If Applicable)

All insulating glass units shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 546, ASTM E576 and
ASTM E 773 and be rated Class CBA in accordance with ASTM E774, must be certified
through the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) and their respective approved
equivalent.
Insulating glass units shall be composed of outer and inner panes of 8 glass with dehydrated air
space, hermetically double sealed with a primary seal of polyisobutylene and a secondary seal of
structural silicone. Aluminium pacer construction shall be continuous with three (3) bent corners
and one (1) keyed-soldered corner or four (4) bent corners.
Components of insulating glass shall have the following built-up layers and properties:-
i) One pane of 6mm thick Solargreen or other approved equivalent tempered glass
(inner) with 12mm air space and one pane of 6mm Solargreen or other approved
equivalent tempered glass (outer).
Light Transmittance 45%
Light Reflectance (out) 10%
Solar Transmittance 12%
Solar Reflectance 6%
Shading Coefficient 0.38
U-value 3.36 W /m2K
Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) 33
AGW/22
GLAZING (CONT’D.)
(g) Frameless Glass Door
Frameless glass door shall be non-handled double action with adjustable hydraulic hold
open frameless 12mm thick tempered glass door complete with stainless steel double pull
handles and single throw cylinder corner lock of minimum 20mm bolt projection and
minimum 14mm thick security rosettes with master key system provided.
(h) Low-E Glass
i) 6mm LOF Clear Float (Low-E #2) or other approved equivalent
VISIBLE LIGHT
Transmittance (%) 82
Reflectance (out) (%) 10
SOLAR ENERGY
Reflectance (%) 10
SHADING COEFFICIENT 0.80
EN U-VALUE W/m2K 3.63
ii) 10mm LOF Clear Float (Low-E #2) or other approved equivalent
VISIBLE LIGHT
Reflectance (out) (%) 10
SOLAR ENERGY
Reflectance (%) 9
SHADING COEFFICIENT 0.75
EN U-VALUE W/m2K 3.63
NB : Conditions and calculation of the above optical and solar performance data are based
on EUROPEAN Standard.
Performance data is based on representative samples of factory production. Actual value

may vary slightly due to variations in the production process. Other glass manufacturers and
coaters may use different instruments and measurement techniques. Therefore, reported
performance values may vary on identical products by others.
AGW/23
GLAZING (CONT’D.)
(i) Supply of Glass
The Contractor’s Specialist shall be responsible for the ordering, scheduling, receiving, delivery,
protection and installation of glass and glazing works on site or in transit.
Glass shall be stored in packed cases bearing the manufacturer's name and/or trade mark
and kept at a clean, cool dry area and opened periodically to inspect glass for possible
moisture damage.
The type, quality, thickness or weight of the glass shall be clearly marked on the packages.
Interleaving protection should be used between lights to ensure circulation of cool dry air.
Individual lights in preparation for installation shall be left against uprights with a slope of 1
in 12. Bottom and top edges to be supported all the way through on felt. Glass shall not be
stacked under partial sun exposure.
The Contractor’s Specialist shall be responsible for cleaning of all glass throughout the Building
Contract and shall be responsible for replacements of damaged or fallen lights.
When cleaning, the appropriate cleaning detergent and method of operation to

manufacturer's Specification shall be used.
Glass shall be protected from staining, particularly iridescence, and etching-mullion /

transome details to be designed with edge drips to prevent backflow of rainwater.
Periodical cleaning is to be undertaken to prevent stains/etching.
Should the Contractor’s Specialist require welding works, heavy screens are to be used to
keep splatter off glass.
All glass to be right angled at corners, cut clean with light edge arris or factory polished.
Edges shall not be nipped, shelled or damaged in anyway, or exposed to prolonged contact
with water.
All glass shall be free from marks, scratches, abrasions, pittings, stains, rainbow effect,
iridescence and other defects.
Glass stored on site are to be protected with hard-boards against the elements of the weather
and breakage.
The Contractor’s Specialist shall be responsible for all carriage freight, insurance damage,
breakage, duties, customs clearance, etc.
AGW/24
GLAZING (CONT’D.)
(j) Installation of Glass
There shall be no glass to metal contact at any point. W here glazing clips for temporary
mountings are to be used, they are to be insulated from the glass.
The following shall be provided in the design and installation:-
i) Specific clearance of glass to vertical and horizontal members.
ii) Specific bite of glazing.
iii) Nature and application of neoprene setting blocks.
iv) Extent of face tolerance.
v) Provisions of scaffoldings/stagings/temporary gondolas.
vi) Temporary protection of works.
vii) Protection against falling lights.
viii) Plumbness, checking each light with theodolite relative to frame and overall window
and door alignment.
(k) Glazing Methods to be Used in Aluminium Work
Glazing seals to the glass shall be:- Totally Gasket System.
(l) Aluminium Rebates and Clearances

The rebates in fixed aluminium frames to receive glazing or panels are to be of the
following sizes:-
Width of rebate: Thickness of glass or panel (+) 10mm.
Height of rebate/glazing beads (-) 5mm minimum, which dimension is to be regarded
as a general guide. Other rebate sizes may be accepted at the discretion of the SO.
Glazing compound filler strip covering the external top face of rebate to be 5mm by
7mm deep.
(m) Glass
All glass to conform to Standard BS 952 or other approved equivalent.
Shading co-efficient of all the external glass priced for in this tender/contract is deemed to
meet the required Shading Coefficient (SC) values required for the whole development
(new-built with additions and alterations) based on the type, colour and thickness of glass
specified in the drawings.
The tenderer/contractor is deemed to have enquired and checked with the SO and allowed
for the correct SC value and type of glass to be used for the development to meet the
required ETTV, OTTV, thermal transmittance calculations, etc. required by the Authorities.
AGW/25
17. ASSEMBLY
As far as possible, all sections shall be formed, cut, drilled, tapped, welded, fitted or otherwise
fabricated in the shop. Where it is not practicable to ship fully assembled components, they shall be
shipped ready for assembly to the extent practical for field erection and in a secure and workmanlike
manner to perform as hereinafter specified and to assure a neat weathertight construction.
A permanent watertight joint shall be made at the junction of the side frame members with all
horizontal members.
Joints shall be made by welding or by concealed mechanical connectors. No corner fastening
devices such as pins, screws, bolts or pressure indentation shall be visible on vertical exposed faces
of sash members when the panels are in place. A watertight joint shall be made to all window, door,
etc. openings at the junction of the cills, head and side frame members.
Design shall be such that water will not be entrapped on the windows, doors, etc. cills, heads and
vertical of frames on the exterior or interior side of any frame except where special provision is
made for the removal of condensate or to cause staining onto the external face of the building.
Extruded sections shall be structurally designed to a minimum but can be larger only on the approval
of the SO on the Contractor’s Specialist standard extrusion size.
Rebates to receive glass (glass bite) for doors, window, etc. shall be to glass manufacturer's
requirements and recommendation.
Profile of aluminium fixed louvres to panels shall be designed to disallow water penetration.
18. FIRE-PROOFING
Fixing systems shall comply with statutory requirements and/or the Bye-Laws of authorities
concerned in connection with fire-proofing, etc. as specified.
19. FASTENERS
All screws shall be made of stainless steel.
All nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and other miscellaneous fastening devices incorporated in the aluminium
window, etc. should be of aluminium alloy, non-magnetic stainless steel and shall be of sufficient
strength to perform the functions for which they are intended. Where dissimilar materials other than
those listed are used, they shall conform to the requirements of paragraph "Dissimilar Materials".
20. FIXING TANGS FOR WINDOW, DOOR, FIXED PANEL, ETC. FRAMES BUILT INTO
MASONRY WALLS
Frames shall be fixed to walls at jambs by BS 4300/12/1969 or other approved equivalent (14 gauge
min.) aluminium alloy or hot-dipped galvanised steel tangs spaced at not more than every eighth brick
course or second block course. Tangs to be 25mm wide and 150mm long with ends split and bent and
to be fitted to frame by rounded headed stainless steel self-tapping screws. Frames to be set true and
level in reveal openings.
21. ANCHORS
All anchoring devices used in the erection of the window, etc. shall be of aluminium, non-magnetic
stainless steel or other non-corrosive materials compatible with aluminium; steel anchors may be
used providing that they are either hot-dipped galvanised or properly insulated from the aluminium.
AGW/26
22. GLAZING BEADS

All beads shall be held in position by secret fixed stainless steel screws and must be capable of being
moved into position in a direction roughly perpendicular to the glass and shall be strong enough to
maintain adequate pressure between fixings.
"Snap-on" glazing beads will be accepted. The manufacturer shall be responsible for a secret fix system of
screwing down such beads should failure occur during the indemnity period and all costs involved shall be
to the Contractor’s Specialist account unless the beads were specified and detailed by the SO.
23. INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL TRIM

The provision of trimming members shall be incorporated in the design and construction of
windows, doors, panels, etc. as necessary to suit the architectural requirements specified for the
finishings internally and externally in other trades.
24. PRESSED METAL CILLS

Pressed metal cills shall be formed out of 2mm thick Pigmented Organic Coated (Powder Coating)
architectural aluminium sheet metal with secret snap-on fixing. All cills shall be in continuous length.
25. WEATHER STRIP

All weather strip shall be of good qua lity neoprene and compatible with the aluminium to be
26. FLASHING
All flashings unless specified to the contrary shall be 2.0mm thick gauge sheet aluminium (which
may be bitumen coated) or other approved firmly fixed in accordance with approved details.
27. SHOP DRAWINGS

For all work in relation to Aluminium and Glazing Works the Contractor’s Specialist shall provide for the
approval of the SO shop drawings before commencement of any work / fabrication. Such shop drawings
must be clearly annotated and drawn to facilitate checking including design calculations.
28. PROTECTION
All finished aluminium sections, panels, etc., shall be protected with PVC tape or wrappings to be
selected and approved by the SO before dispatch to prevent units from damage by other builder's
works during erection.
Where aluminium frames are erected and in contact with concrete, plaster, steel or other dissimilar metal,
two coats of bituminous paint to be selected and approved by the SO shall be applied before fixing.
29. CLEANING OF THE WORKS

The Contractor’s Specialist shall be responsible for cleaning all the Aluminium and Glazing Works
to the approval of the SO on completion.
AGW/27
ROLLER SHUTTERS
1. ROLLER SHUTTERS GENERALLY
All manually operated, electrically operated and non fire-rated roller shutters shall be either of
the names listed below to be selected and approved by the SO.
(i) Tacam Steel (ii) Gliderol
(iii) Singapore Rolling Shutters (iv) Ferco Shutters Pte Ltd
(v) Other equal and approved equivalent-
2. ALUMINIUM MANUALLY OPERATED SECURITY ROLLER SHUTTERS
The aluminium manually operated security roller shutters in pigmented organic coated finish
shall be designed, fabricated, supplied and installed inclusive of intended performance and
function by an approved Specialist Contractor to suit the openings. All materials and Specialist
Company proposed by the Contractor to be approved by the SO.
Sizes for the roller shutters are of NETT opening sizes. Structural opening sizes may be varied
to suit the particular construction requirements of the shutters but all such changes shall be only
with the prior approval of the SO.
The manually operated roller shutter shall be constructed of movable interlocking pressed
aluminium slats to form a continuous curtain with the edges treated with heavy-duty self-
lubricating seamless braided nylon polyglide to prevent metal-to-metal contact. The drum
assembly shall consist of suitably graded oil-tempered torsion springs secured to drum-wheels
moulded from engineering plastics. The curtain top shall be fully secured and wrapped around
the drum assembly to form a cylindrical torque-tube. T he bottom rail shall be extruded
aluminium section lock-seamed onto the bottom of the curtain with the base of the rail
containing two slots to retain a seamless finned PVC weather-seal.
Support guide rails shall be rigidly fixed and all costs shall be deemed to be inclusive of any
galvanized mild steel or frame galvanized mild steel or frame galvanized mild sections supports
and their fixings to support the roller shutter and associated frames. A ll roller guides to be
recessed and built flush into the walls.
Punched out slotted openings for ventilation (up to 50% of surface) on the slats shall be factory
manufactured as per SO’s details and requirements.
All dented or scratched slats shall be replaced.
Shop drawings shall be supplied by the Contractor for the SO’s approval and the Contractor
shall provide for the approval. Colours to be selected by the SO.
RSS/1
ROLLER SHUTTERS
3. ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ROLLER SHUTTERS
The galvanised steel electrically operated roller shutters in pigmented organic coated finish
shall be designed, fabricated, supplied and installed inclusive of intended performance and
function by an approved Specialist Contractor to suit the openings.
Sizes for the roller shutters are of NETT OPENING SIZES. Structural opening sizes may be
varied to suit the particular construction requirements of the shutters but all such changes shall
be only with the prior approval of the SO.
Control of the roller shutters shall also be possible to open and close by electric motor activated
from a remote panel located by the SO or manually by chain in an electrical failure.
Operation of the motorised roller shutter shall be “key operated” to turn power on, w ith
separate “Start” and “Stop” push buttons to operate the shutters.
The single panel (one piece) electrically operated roller shutter shall be constructed of
minimum 1mm to 1.2mm galvanised steel curtain in pigmented organic coated finish
permanently lock-seamed to form a continuous curtain with the edges treated with heavy-duty
self-lubricating seamless braided nylon polyglide to prevent metal-to-metal contact. The drum
assembly shall consist of suitably graded oil-tempered torsion springs secured to drum wheels
moulded from engineering plastics. The curtain top shall be fully secured and wrapped around
the drum assembly to form a cylindrical torque-tube. T he bottom rail shall be extruded
aluminium section lock-seamed onto the bottom of the curtain with the base of the rail
containing two slots to retain a seamless finned PVC weather-seal.
Motor operator shall have most components in Nylon-6 engineering plastics with the drive power
provided by the twin 24V D.C. motors with synchronised gear reduction. The whole unit shall be
compact enough to fit neatly inside the door roll and drives the door directly.
The control box shall be compact-sized with electronic PCB and built-in transformer. It shall
be linked to the drive unit via a pre-wired link cord with steel conduits, snap-on conduits shall
not be used.
Speed of travels average 170mm/sec.
The roller shutters shall come complete with a built-in electronic safety device, which is
sensitive to any point of the bottom rail so that when the closing shutter is obstructed, it will
automatically stop.
Limit switch shall be incorporated to prevent the roller shutters from overshooting into the
column casing when rolling up the shutters.
RSS/2
ROLLER SHUTTERS
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ROLLER SHUTTERS (CONT’D.)
The Contractor’s Specialist shall install the roller shutters and connect up to the isolator of the
electrical supply (single phase 230V, 13 Amp.) provided by Others.
Wiring shall be in concealed galvanised steel conduits.
Support guide rails shall be rigidly fixed and all costs shall be deemed to be inclusive of any
galvanised mild steel or frame galvanised mild steel or frame galvanised mild sections supports
and their fixings to support the roller shutter and associated frames. A ll roller guides to be
recessed and built flush into the walls.
Punched out slotted openings for ventilation on the slats shall be factory manufactured as per
SO's details and requirements.
Positions of electrical control switches to be decided by the SO.
Roller shutters complete with guide rails, drum, and casing shall be in pigmented organic
coated finish to the required selected colours to SO’s approval.
4. ONE (1) HOUR FIRE-RATED ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ROLLER SHUTTERS
The galvanised steel push button controlled electrically operated and fusible linked roller
shutters in pigmented organic coated finish shall be designed, fabricated, supplied and installed
inclusive of intended performance and function as approved Specialist Contractor to suit the
openings.
The 1-HOUR rated fire resisting electrically operated roller shutters in pigmented organic
coated finish shall be approved by Fire Safety Bureau, Singapore Fire Service and Testing
Authorities’ Label. The Contractor is to bear all costs and the entire responsibility for
obtaining such approval and shall provide all items necessary to comply with approved
requirements.
Sizes shown of fire-rated roller shutters are of NETT OPENING SIZE. S tructural opening
sizes may be varied to suit the particular construction requirements of the shutters but all such
changes shall be only with the prior approval of the SO.
RSS/3
ROLLER SHUTTERS
ONE (1) HOUR FIRE-RATED ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ROLLER SHUTTERS

(CONT’D.)
The 1-HOUR rated fire-resisting shutter or other approved shall be manufactured to satisfy the
requirements of BS 476 Part 22 UL10B or other approved equivalent.
The various components of the roller shutters are:-

(a) End plates, barrel assembly and galvanised coil casing, i.e. Top Box.
(b) 1.0mm or 1.2mm Galvanised steel curtain laths with malleable iron and clips.
(c) Galvanised steel guides.
(d) Inverted ‘T’ x 2 nos. 50 x 50 x 6mm galvanised steel angle bottom rails.
The shutter’s box shall be installed above the opening on a lintol and to be face-fixed, i.e. on
the side of lintol. The dimension of the box shall suit the size of the shutter’s drum and shall
come complete with steel framing and powder coated 0.9mm to 2mm thick steel galvanised
sheet metal fascia end capping, soffit and top cover.
Coil casing guides, roller shutter laths, end plates and bottom rail shall be in galvanised mild
steel.
The shutter shall be designed to be encased between jambs.
Under normal conditions it shall also be possible to open and close the shutters by electric
motor activated from a remote panel or manually by a detachable crank.
Operation of the motorised roller shutter shall be “key operated” to turn power on, w ith
separate “Start” and “Stop” push buttons to operates the shutters.
The shutter shall closes automatically by the fusing of a link attached to an automatic release
mechanism, e.g. micro-switch to activate motor's starter panel (First source of shutter's
activation).
The shutter will be operated by FSSB's approved photocell smoke detectors' alarm conditions
on both sides (Second source of shutter's activation).
Wiring shall be in fire resistant cable in concealed galvanised steel conduits.
The fire resisting roller shutter shall be operated by the general Fire Alarm System and wiring
from that system to the motor's panel will be done by Others (Third source of shutter's
activation).
The motors will be electric, 415V/3 Ph/20 Amps. The motor's supply will be on normal PUB's
Electrical Supply.
Design shall provide for alternative power supply (where applicable from School), i.e. from the
School's standby generator (Emergency Power).
RSS/4
ROLLER SHUTTERS
ONE (1) HOUR FIRE-RATED ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ROLLER SHUTTERS

(CONT’D.)
Speed of descent to be in a range of 150mm/ second and 600mm/ second controlled by a

descent governor.
Limit switch shall be incorporated to prevent the roller shutters from overshooting into the
column casing when rolling up the shutters.
Mechanical override on the shutter by detachable crank shall be included.
The smoke detectors on either side of opening shall be installed by the Contractor’s Specialist
for the purpose of linking to the building's general Fire Alarm System. The linkage connections
shall be done by Others.
The roller shutters shall be purpose-made to suit the sizes of the openings.
Hot dipped galvanised steel door guides in pigmented organic coated finish of various sizes and
thickness to suit the door size shall be provided and fixed on each side of the roller shutter.
All roller shutters to be lockable with access to the locks either from inside or outside.
Positions of electrical control switches to be decided by the SO.
All lintol, brick pier, grouting and builder’s work by Others.
Roller shutters complete with guide rails, drum casing in pigment organic coated finish to the
required selected colours to SO’s approval.
5. SAMPLES
Provide samples at Contractor's own cost as r equired for SO's selection and approval and
6. SHOP DRAWINGS
For all work in relation to roller shutters, the Contractor shall provide shop for the approval of
the SO drawings for approval before commencement of any work / fabrication showing all
layout and installation details including all wiring and control details. S uch shop drawings
must be clearly annotated and drawn to facilitate checking including design calculations.
RSS/5
RAINWATER PLUMBING
1. RAINWATER PLUMBING
The whole of the rainwater downpipes, outlets, fittings and accessories shall be supplied by the
Contractor’s Specialist to be installed by the Contractor. Shop drawings and details shall be
provided by the Contractor’s Specialist for the SO's approval.
2. uPVC RAINWATER GOODS

All rainwater goods shall be uPVC heavy-duty plastic obtained from the Contractor’s Specialist to
be selected and approved by the SO and fixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions. Rainwater plumbing are to be of the sizes as indicated in the drawings with socketted
and spigotted solvent welded joints. Pipes shall be ex-stock standard sizes or purpose-made where
sizes are non-standard.
Pipes shall be secured to walls with proprietory galvanised steel hinged built-in pattern holderbats.
Each holderbat is to be fitted with two galvanised steel matching bolts. Holderbats shall be fixed at
2.00 metres centres and at every point where a joint occurs in the rainwater pipe to support the pipe
immediately below the socket. The tails of the holderbats are to be built into the wall for a depth of
at least 100mm and are to be grouted in (1:3) cement mortar.
The Contractor shall confirm with the SO all rainwater pipes, bends and fittings not of standard
size.
The Contractor shall confirm the use of the non-standard sizes of rainwater down pipes as shown on
the drawings or as described and shall place orders in time. Any extra costs incurred by using
alternative pipe sizes and increased in duct sizes due to the unavailability of the required sizes
(due to late orders) shall be borne by the Contractor.
Provide and fix rainwater pipes with all necessary bends, swannecks, shoes, etc. all as shown on the
drawings.
3. REMOVABLE RAINWATER OUTLET GRATING

Where applicable the following will apply:-
(a) Stainless steel removable rainwater outlet grating to be selected and approved by the SO.
(b) uPVC domed roof outlet (non accessable areas except maintenance) to be selected and
approved by the SO to all flat panels roofing gutters.
(c) Approved polished stainless steel circular grating with frame including bolting with 2mm
stainless steel screws to corridors, landings, play areas,etc.
Provide and fix the various types of rainwater outlet fittings as above described complete with outlet
nozzle of the required sizes to suit the diameters of the uPVC downpipes.
4. PAINTING
Where uPVC pipes are exposed and require painting, the pipes shall be lightly sanded and painted
as specified in "Painting and Decorating" Specifications.
5. SHOP DRAWINGS
For all Rainwater Plumbing Systems, etc. the Contractor shall provide for the approval of the SO,
shop drawings showing typical installation details, patterns, joint lines, setting out lines, etc. which
shall be based on concept drawings provided by the SO.
6. SAMPLES

RWP/1
SANITARY WARES, FITTINGS, TOILET ACCESSORIES

AND WATER DISPENSERS
1. SANITARY PLUMBING, SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE WORKS
.1 Generally
The Sanitary Plumbing, Sewerage and Drainage Works shall be executed by the Contractor if
he is a licensed plumber, otherwise the works shall be executed by a fully licensed firm and
shall be in full compliance with the Public Utilities Board's Bye-Laws and if the works are not
satisfactory in all respects, the Contractor shall rectify the defects at his own cost.
The Contractor shall allow for all builder's work in connection with sanitary plumbing such as
cutting, chasing, coring, fixing brackets, block up and protection, touching up or making good
walls and floors, etc.
All expenses incurred for stamping fees required by the Public Utilities Board shall be borne
by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit all samples as required for approval before any sanitary plumbing
work commences on site.
Test the entire Sanitary Plumbing, Sewerage and Drainage Works on c ompletion to the
The Contractor shall, on completion of the works, submit 1 set negative and 2 sets printed as-
built drawings showing the layout of the works to the SO.
All sanitary fittings and wares shall be PUB (Water) approved type for Green Label or
Greenmark. The Contractor is advised to review the list of approved sanitary fittings and wares
for Green Label or Greenmark under PUB (water) website. The Contractor shall submit the
Green Label or Greenmark certification for all sanitary fittings and wares used to the S.O.
.2 Balcony Outlet
Supply and install UPVC balcony outlet (square base) to SS213 to all corridor areas,
balconies, covered open-sided area. All fusion joints and supporting pipework shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
.3 Sanitary Fittings Generally
Sanitary fittings shall be obtained from an ISO certified supplier whose sanitary ware are
authority approved and also approved by the SO.
The Contractor shall supply and install sanitary fittings according to one of the product
names specified herein or other equal and approved by the SO or if no pr oduct name is
specified, sanitary fittings complying with the specification and relevant authority’s
requirements and to SO’s approval.
All sanitary fittings shall include for assembling, providing all jointing materials, making all
connections to services, waste or soil pipes, overflow and vents and cutting and pinning or
plugging and screwing to walls, floors or setting in vanity counter or fitments and making
good to provide waterproof joints.
SWF/1

SANITARY PLUMBING, SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE WORKS (CONT’D.)
.4 Wash Hand Basin
Wash hand basin shall be vitreous china basin of approved standard colour range complete
with chromium plated waste fittings, 1.25” CP bottle trap self-closing tap to BS 1010 or
other approved equivalent plug and chain and brackets fixed to wall. They shall be: -
a) Toto L238 or
b) Ina L285 or
c) Armitage Shanks ‘Wentworth’ or
.5 Wash Hand Vanity Basin (Under counter Type)
Wash hand vanity basin shall be vitreous china self-rimming basin of approved standard
colour range, complete with chromium plated waste fittings, self closing tap to BS 1010 or
other approved equivalent plug, chain, and stay and concealed brackets and setting in vanity
top. They shall be: -
a) Toto L522 or
b) Ina L2395 or
c) Armitage Shanks “Jade” or
.6 Cleaner Sink
Cleaner sink shall be white enameled fire clay sink complete with chromium plated waste
fittings, screw-down longshank bib tap and constant flow regulator to BS 1010 or other
approved equivalent plug, chain and stay, stainless steel hinged bucket grating, leg supports
and fixing to wall. They shall be: -
a) Globe 807 or
b) Johnson Suisse 561 or
c) Ina S201 or
.7 Squat Pan Water Closet with Mid Level Cistern
All squat pan water closets with concealed cistern shall be of the low capacity type and
approved by PSB for use in Singapore. Squat pan shall be vitreous china of approved
standard colour range and cistern shall be made of HDPE (refer to specification on
concealed cistern), complying with SS 42:1971 (Amended 1996), SS 378:1996 and SS
379:1996. It shall come complete with 'S' traps for water closet at first storey and 'P' traps
for upper storeys, stainless steel bracket for fixing cistern to wall, stainless steel flush pipe
and setting in concrete and joining to soil pipe in approved joints. They shall be:
a) Saniton Apricot ST4133/SC3023 or
b) Potex Civic TP1014A/SC3023 or
c) Claytan ES401D/LC627D or
SWF/2

.8 Pedestal Close-Coupled Water Closet (WC)
All pedestal close-coupled water closets shall be of low capacity flushing cistern type.
Pedestal close-coupled water closet shall be vitreous china washdown water closet of
approved standard colour range, complying with SS 42:1971 (Amended 1996), SS 378:1996
and SS 379:1996. It shall come complete with 'S' or 'P' traps, matching coloured plastic
hinged seat and cover. It shall be water-saving type (with 3 ticks), approved by PUB (water)
for Green Label or Greenmark. It shall consist of the dual flushing system for full and half
tank respectively.
Wall hung wc shall be of the same SS Standard and Greenmark labeling complete with
galvanised steel chair support complete with concealed cristern or flush valve as indicated
on the drawings.
Stainless steel screw shall be used to secure cistern to pedestal pan. They shall be: -
a) Claytan WC 622D/LC629D or
b) Johnson Suisse Windsor or
c) Toto C703/S703 or
.9 Wall Hung Water Closet (For Handicapped toilet)
Wall hung WCs shall be vitreous china washdown water closet of approved standard colour
range, complying with SS 42:1971 (Amended 1996) and SS 396:1997. It shall come
complete with 'P' traps, matching coloured plastic hinged seat and cover and manual flush
valve. It shall be water-saving type (with 3 ticks), approved by PUB (water) for Green Label
or Greenmark. It shall consist of the dual flushing system for full and half tank respectively.
They shall be:
a) Saniton Daisy ST2199 or
b) Armitage Shanks or
c) Toto CW453 or
d) Other equal and approved equivalent
.10 Wall Hung Urinal Bowl
Wall hung ur inal bowl shall be vitreous china urinal bowl of approved standard colour
range, complying with integral strainer waste, chromium plated bottle trap, flush valve,
stainless steel flush pipe pipe, and brackets fixed to wall. It shall be water-saving type (with
3 ticks), approved by PUB (water) for Green Label or Greenmark. They shall be: -
a) Toto U58 or
b) Ina U115 or
c) Johnson Suisse Santana 321 or
SWF/3

.11 Flush Valves for Urinals
Flush valves shall give a flush of 1.5L to 2.5L of water for individual urinal. Flush valves
shall be approved type complete with check valve and vacuum breaker, stainless steel flush
pipe, coupling push button and all fixing accessories complying with the latest ENV and
PUB requirement. All exposed parts shall be chromium-plated brass. It shall be water-
saving type (with 3 ticks), approved by PUB (water) for Green Label or Greenmark. Flush
valves shall be
a) Toto TEA 99V44 or
b) Global ESV539 or
c) Inhwa USF61 or
.12 Stainless Steel Sink
Stainless steel sink shall be single bowl and single drainer complete with waste fittings,
approved chromium-plated swivel swanneck tap and constant flow regulator, plug, chain
and stay, concealed brackets and setting in concrete vanity top stainless steel with spots of
rust are to be replaced in its entirely galvanising of other paints are not acceptable. They
shall be: -
a) Teka EA Universal or
b) Blanco Blancoplus 45/S or
c) Diethelm MSS 90N or
.13 Stainless Steel Wash Trough
Stainless steel wash trough shall be complete with waste fittings, chromium-plated delayed
action self-closing tap to BS 5412 Part 1 to 4:1996 or other approved equivalent plug, chain
and stay and brackets fixed to wall. They shall be: -
a) 3S or
b) Diethelm or
c) Stainless Steel Singapore or
.14 Shower Fitting
Shower fitting shall be chromium-plated spray nozzle and swivel joint shower fitting with
one delayed action self-closing tap to BS 5412 Part 1 to 4:1996 or other approved
equivalent of: -
a) Presto 50/Global GL-12DE or
b) Delabie 747/Bossini Art 1301 or
c) Alpi TR30DEP/Toto TB17J or
It shall be water-saving type (with 3 t icks), approved by PUB (water) for Green Label or
Greenmark.
SWF/4

.15 Jumbo-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser

Supply and install wall mounted jumbo-roll toilet tissue dispenser. The dispenser shall be:
a) Satin finished and stainless steel
b) Door of the dispenser shall be unlocked with the key provided
c) Spindle to hold 1 roll of, up to 255mm diameter toilet issue
d) Slot in door to reveal the level of tissue supply
The dimension of dispenser shall be 271mm wide x 270mm high x 115mm deep.
.16 Recessed Stainless Steel Multi-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser

Each toilet to have a 306 x 190 x 67mm deep recessed stainless steel multi-roll toilet tissue
dispenser unit to dispense to a standard toilet tissue rolls. Extra roll automatic drops in place
after bottom roll is used up. Doors to have tumbler locks with key alike system.
.17 Soap Tray

Soap tray to shower cubicles shall be 150 x 150mm semi-recessed set into tiled wall. They
shall be:-
a) Johnson Suisse (165 x 165 x 95mm) or
b) Toto S6NV2 or
c) Ina H-153 or
.18 Liquid Soap Dispenser

Liquid soap dispenser for all toilet shall be approved stainless steel, surface mounted wall
fixed and with pump operation.
.19 Towel Rail

Towel rail shall be at least 16mm in diameter chromium plated brass towel rail including
brackets for fixing to wall. The Contractor shall provide towel rail for all shower
compartments. The length should be about 600-700mm. Tower rail to be provided to all
shower compartments.
.20 Mirror
Mirror shall be 6 mm thick first quality polished plate glass copper backed mirror fixed to
6mm thick marine plywood backing including aluminum angle section frame all round and
fixed to wall with chromium plated dome headed screws.
.21 Self-Closing Tap for Wash Hand Basin

Self-closing taps shall be solid brass or bronze body and metal handle with chrome plating,
having a spout length of 110mm and 3 second shut off mechanism. It shall be water-saving
type (with 3 ticks), approved by PUB (water) for Green Label or Greenmark. They shall be:
a) Silfra QK 230 or
b) Presto 605 or
c) Alpi TR10LP or
SWF/5

.22 Solid Surface Vanity Top
The solid surface vanity top shall be solid, non-porous, homogeneous material, generally
manufactured with acrylic or polyester resin with bauxite and marble dust filler and
pigments. It shall be minimum 12mm thick, complete with 100mm backsplash, 200mm
front apron, and with galvanised steel supports. Bonding material and sealants of approved
matching colour shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.
.23 Handicapped Grab Bar
Grab bar for handicapped toilet should be of satin finished stainless steel complying with the
latest Building and Construction Authority and Disabled Person Association’s requirement
for handicapped toilet. It should consist of a L-shaped bar 1200 x 840mm and 2 pieces of
straight bar 650mm in length.
.24 Grab Bar for Ambulant Disabled
Grab bar for Ambulant disabled toilet should be of satin finished stainless steel complying
with the latest Building and Construction Authority and Disabled Person Association ‘s
requirement for ambulant disabled toilet.
.25 Water Cooler and Hot/Cold Water Dispenser
Contractor to supply, deliver, install and commission water cooler and hot/cold water dispenser,
inclusive of necessary piping and electrical installation works, to the areas indicated on the
drawings.
SWF/6

.26 Technical Specification For Water Cooler

Type - Wall mounted, provide lead-free and bacteria free filter with
warranty
Cooling tank capacity - 30 litres per hour
Casting/body Stainless steel, satin finish. Easily removal panel for
maintenance and repairs of cooler components
Basin - One piece mould pressed stainless steel, splash resistant
Water Temperature - 270C to 300C water inlet, 100C to 120C water outlet.
Thermostatically control water temperature
Compressor - Hermetically sealed and permanently lubricated. Power
supply : 220-240V/ap/ 50Hz. A guarantee period of 4 years
is required.
Bubbler - To be chrome-plate material complete with mouth guard,
self-closing push button and stream regulator
Installation
Mounting Works - Mounting of water cooler on wall to be inclusive of all
approved mounting materials
Plumbing Works - Laying and connection of approved copper piping by PUB
licensed plumber
Electrical Works - Provision of electrical cable and power point and necessary
wiring. Earth connection is to be provided and the works to
be carried out by licensed electrician
Guarantee for Water Cooler

A minimum guarantee period of 12 months from the date of commissioning is required for
the coolers installed. The contractor is also required to stock sufficient spare parts including
filter cartridge for replacement and repairs. T he contractor shall change all water cooler
filters every 3 months during the Defects Liability Period.
Technical Specification for Hot & Cold Water Dispenser
Type - Wall mounted/Floor Standing, lead-free and bacteria-free
filter with warranty
Cooling tank capacity - Cold – 15 litres per hour
Hot – 20 litres per hour
Casting/body Stainless steel, satin finish. Easily removal panel for
maintenance and repairs of cooler components
Basin - One piece mould pressed stainless steel, splash resistant
Water Temperature - Water outlet - Cold 100C to 120C
1.28 - Hot 900C to 1000C
Compressor - Hermetically sealed and permanently lubricated. P ower
supply : 220-240V/ap/ 50Hz. A guarantee period of 4 years
is required.
Bubbler - To be chrome-plate material complete with mouth guard,
self-closing push button and stream regulator
Hot water dispenser - Glass filter. Insulated storage tank. Hot water thermostat.
Overheat protection switch (manual re-set)
SWF/7

Technical Specification For Water Cooler (Cont’d.)
Installation
Mounting Works - Mounting of water dispenser on wall to be inclusive of all
approved mounting materials
Plumbing Works - Laying and connection of approved copper piping by PUB
licensed plumber
Electrical Works - Provision of electrical cable and power point and necessary
wiring. Earth connection is to be provided and the works to
be carried out by licensed electrician
Guarantee for Hot/Cold Water Dispenser

A minimum guarantee period of 12 months from the date of commissioning is required for
the dispenser installed. The contractor is also required to stock sufficient spare parts
including filter cartridge for replacement and repairs. The contractor shall change all hot and
cold water dispenser filters every 3 months during the Defects Liability Period.
.27 Hotwater Mixer
Hot water mixer for all sinks shall be approved by the SO and fitted with built-in aerator,
integral thermostat and calibrated temperature control mechanism. It shall have a solid brass
or bronze body with chrome plating finish. It shall be water-saving type (with 3 ticks),
approved by PUB (water) for Green Label or Greenmark.
.28 Hand Dryer

Stainless Steel hand dryer approved by the SO shall be installed at each toilet. Catalogue of
the hand dryer shall be submitted to the SO for approval prior to installation.
.29 Hair Dryer

Electrically operated hair dryer shall be wall mounted in durable impact flame retardant anti-
splash ABS chassis.
Heating shall be via wave-form wire design, with hot air delivered via flexible hose and nozzle
powered by high speed motor with safety temperature controller and over temperature
automatic fuse device.
Catalogue of the hair dryer shall be submitted to the SO for approval prior to installation.
.30 Instant Water Heater
Electrically operated wall mounted tankless instant hot water heater shall be installed in the
male and female staff changing rooms. They shall be minimum 36 kW 220/240 volt self-
modulating 6 G PM electric tankless heaters with Catalogue to be submitted to the SO for
approval.
SWF/8

2. NUMBER OF SANITARY WARES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

The Contractor shall be deemed to have re-checked the numbers and types of Sanitary Wares,
Fittings, and Accessories required prior to placing of order and all costs due to shortage, wrong
orders, etc. shall be borne solely by him.
3. DEFECTS
All Sanitary Wares, Fittings and Accessories shall be free from defects and in good working condition.
4. SPECIAL MATCHING BACKNUT, WASHERS, UNIONS, BOLTS, SCREWS, ETC.

The whole of the Sanitary Wares, Fittings and Accessories shall come complete with matching
chromium plated wall plates and brackets, backnuts, washers, unions, bolts, screws, adapters,
connectors, hangers, chairs, back plates, holding down or expansion bolts, capping pieces and all
associated accessories, etc. for the fixing and complete functioning of the Sanitary Wares, Fittings
and Accessories including approved silicone sealant pointing around basin to vanity counter top.
The unit rates shall be deemed to include these items.
5. INSTALLATION OF FLUSH VALVES

Flush valves for water closets shall incorporate approved check valves that comply with BS 5154 and
approved vacuum breakers that comply with American Society of Sanitary Engineering Standard No.
1001. Alternatively, the flush valves for water closets shall derive water from a separate storage tank
which is not connected in any way with all other fittings supplying basins, sinks, heaters, apparatus,
etc. in the building.
Every flush valve shall be controlled by an approved stop valve to SS 75 : Part 2.
All flush valves must be so adjusted to give a flush of not less than 2.5 litres and of not more than 4.5
litres of water per stall or bowl urinal and not less than or more than the required number of litres of
waters as required by PUB and NEA for water closets.
Every flush valve installed shall be compatible with the toilet bowl or urinal it serves.
The minimum internal diameter of the flush pipe shall be 32 mm.
All exposed surfaces shall be bright chrome plated. The flush valve shall be able to operate without
sticking, whistling or causing water hammer.
6. LOCKABLE TAPS
Provide lockable bib taps located at the void deck below the ISH and to the External Works all to
SO’s approval.
7. STAINLESS STEEL GRATING TO FLOOR TRAP

Specifications for this grating shall be found in the Mechanical and Electrical Engineer’s
Specifications.
If not specified or specified otherwise, it shall be taken to mean as hinged stainless steel grating
to SO’s approval. Only stainless steel grating to be used.
SWF/9

8. SAMPLES
The Contractor shall submit samples of the Sanitary Wares, Fittings and Accessories, etc. to SO’s
approval and remove when not required. All future deliveries shall conform to the accepted samples.
9. SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide to SO’s approval, shop drawings showing the layouts of all toilets with
the locations of all Sanitary Fittings accurately indicated and all typical installation details.

SWF/10
GLAZING
The Specifications below refer generally to Glazing Works to be carried out u nder the
Contractor's Contract. Aluminium and Glazing Works is specified separately.
1. GLASS
All glass is to be from a manufacturer to be selected and approved by the SO and complying with
BS 952 or other approved equivalent and to be of the qualities specified and free from bubbles,
smoke wanes, air holes and other defects.
2. PUTTY
All putty is to be hard and quick setting tropical putty specially manufactured and shall receive one
coat of paint ten (10) days after glazing. Putty to be hard quick setting putty for tropical use
complying generally with BS 544 or other approved equivalent to be selected and approved by the
SO.
3. GEORGIAN WIRED GLASS

The Georgian wired glass to doors, etc. shall have electrically welded wire square mesh
incorporated and is to be selected to ensure perfect straightness of mesh.
The Contractor is to align the mesh one or both ways as necessary.
4. SHEET GLASS
The clear sheet glass is to be ordinary glazing quality (O.Q.).
5. FLOAT GLASS
Clear float glass is to be ordinary glazing quality (G.G.).
Tinted float glass shall be full body tinted in the approved standard colours of grey, bronze, blue or
green.
6. GLASS MIRRORS
Glass mirrors shall be approved smear proof FIRST QUALITY float glass mirrors as described and
obtained from an approved Supplier all as shown on dr awings. All mirrors to be in one piece.
Where more than one piece of mirror is to be used due to non-standard manufactured glass mirror
sizes, the Contractor shall propose to the SO for approval.
7. GLASS BLOCK
Glass blocks shall be first quality obscured 190 x190 x 80 mm to be approved by the SO and fixed
in accocdance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions
8. SILICONE SEALANT
All joints between abutting mirrors shall be filled flush with silicone sealant to be obtained from a
supplier to be selected and approved by the SO and used strictly in accordance with the
9. SAMPLES
10. SHOP DRAWINGS

For all work in relation to glazing works, the Contractor shall provide for the approval of the SO
shop drawings before commencement of any work/fabrication. Such shop drawings must be clearly
annotated and drawn to facilitate checking including design calculations.

GLZ/1
PAINTING AND DECORATING
1. GENERALLY
All paints used shall be Green Mark certified.
The Contractor shall paint all works.
Colours shall be selected from the British Standards range of colours or other approved equivalent
and shall be specially mixed or milled as necessary by the manufacturer.
The Contractor shall provide mock-up samples on selected areas for the SO's approval prior to
commencement of painting work. Actual colour and pattern are subject to SO's approval.
Unless description is given separately for external and internal painting, all specifications should
apply to both types of surfaces.
The whole of the materials are to be the best of their respective kinds and unless otherwise described
to comply with the relevant Singapore Standards.
The Contractor shall prior to placing of orders ensure that all paints or stains to be used shall be anti-
fungus quality and suitable for tropical use.
Locally manufactured paints shall be selected and approved by the SO and tested in accordance with
SS 5 prior to usage.
Types of paints to be used shall be from ICI or Nippon or Jotun or Bergers or Kansai or other
approved equivalent; any mention of brand names and codes are purely for indication of range and
quality.
Materials are to be supplied premixed in the maker's own unopened containers and applied in strict
accordance with the maker's printed instructions.
Only the respective undercoatings and finishing material from the same selected Supplier shall be
used with the appropriate primer as recommended by the Supplier.
Only interior quality paint is to be used for interior work and exterior quality paint for exterior work
and are to be lead free and lead based respectively.
Paints shall be securely kept on site by the Contractor and under no c ircumstances shall they be
exposed to adverse temperature.
The paints are to be used exactly as received from the manufacturer and under no circumstances will
the addition of thinners, dryers or other materials be permitted. P aint supplied which is defective
must be returned immediately to the manufacturer. T he contents of the can are to be thoroughly
stirred before pouring into the kettles.
All coats of paint must be thoroughly dry before subsequent coats are applied, and to be rubbed
down with fine sand paper where necessary.
Materials for painting and decorating work shall be obtained from the respective companies
described below.
The Contractor in executing the painting works shall be held responsible for taking all precautions
necessary for the health and safety of his workmen.
Only skilled painter shall be employed. A properly qualified foreman shall be constantly on
supervision as the work proceeds.
PAD/1
GENERALLY (CONT'D.)
PAINTING - INTERNALLY
PAINT TYPE NUMBER OF

SURFACE
(ICI Dulux or Other Approved Equivalent) COATS
1. Plastered surfaces of walls and • Dulux Eco-guard Water-based

ceilings or off-form concrete Sealer A931-25764 1 Coat
and
• Dulux Eco-guard Interior A991 2 Coats
2. Flush fibrous plasterboard or • Dulux Eco-guard Water-based

compressed fibrous cement Sealer A931-25764 1 Coat
suspended ceiling and cornices and
• Dulux Eco-guard Interior A991 2 Coats
3. Wrought surfaces of doors, • Stain to approval 1 Coat

door frames, skirting, screens and
balustrade, handrails, etc. • Dulux Solarscreen Transparent 3 Coats
Finish
AND
• Dulux Eco-guard Water-based
Primer A931-25788 1 Coat
and
Gloss A996-Line 2 Coats
4. Wrought surfaces of timber • Two pack polyurethane paint as As specifed

floor. specifed.
5. Mild steel pipes, tubes handrails, • Approved Dulux Zinc Chromate

brackets, cleats, railing, etc. Primer 1 Coat
and
Note:- For galvanised steel surfaces, apply 1 • Dulux Eco-guard Water-based
coat of etch primer Dulux Devoe Primer A931-25788 1 Coat
Devran D201 or other approved
equivalent lieu of approved zinc and
chromate primer • Dulux Eco-guard Water-based
6. PVC or fiberglass surfaces • Dulux Devoe Devran D201 etch

Primer 1 Coat
and
and
Note: For galvanised steel work which is concealed in suspended ceilings, walls, ducts, etc.
finishing paintwork is not required.
PAD/2
GENERALLY (CONT'D.)
PAINTING – EXTERNALLY
PAINT TYPE NUMBER OF

SURFACE
(ICI Dulux or Other Approved Equivalent) COATS
1. Fair-faced natural stone or stone • Approved clear silicone water

tiled finish. shield. 2 Coats
2. General plastered external wall • Dulux Eco-guard Water-based

and column surfaces (open Sealer A931-25764 1 Coat
lobbies, corridors, void decks and
undercroft, etc.). Plastered • Dulux Eco-guard Exterior Plus
ceilings and back of fascias or A989 2 Coats
parapet walls.
3. Timber surfaces • Dulux Eco-guard Water-based

and
Gloss Finish A996-Line 2 Coats
4. Mild steel pipes, tubes, handrails, • Approved Dulux Zinc Chromate

brackets, cleats, angles, posts, Primer 1 Coat
fencing posts, gates, etc. and
Note:- For galvanised steel surfaces, apply 1 Primer A931-25788 1 Coat
coat of etch primer Dulux Devoe and
Devran D201 or other approved
equivalent lieu of approved zinc • Dulux Eco-guard Water-based
chromate primer Gloss Finish A996-Line 2 Coats
5. Galvanised mild steel grating to • Bare galvanised finish NIL

drains and sumps.
6. Roads (road lines and direction • Thermoplastic Road Paint 1 Application

indicators).
Note: For galvanised steel work which is concealed in suspended ceilings, walls, ducts, etc.
finishing paintwork is not required.
PAD/3
GENERALLY (CONT'D.)
All expansion joint on wall to be "MASKED" during painting and remove masking after completion
of painting.
Rates for painting are to include for all necessary preparation of the surfaces, including cleaning off,
sand papering woodwork, wire brushing metal and leaving all surfaces free from dust, rust, grease
and oil before painting. In addition rates shall include for additional scaffolding required, all extra
labour involved in external or internal work and all cutting in to line for narrow widths and girths.
Rates shall also include for carrying out all work in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
and for using the correct undercoat and the correct shades.
Rates for painting to walls, soffits, etc. are to include for painting two finishing coats to all electrical
cables, battens, roses, etc. to match the colour of the surface to which they are fixed.
2. BITUMEN PAINT
The bituminous paint on all metal gratings to drains shall be a bituminous paint comprising coal tar
and synthetic resin to be selected and approved by the SO and used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s printed instructions.
3. ALUMINUM WOOD PRIMER PAINT
The aluminum wood primer paint shall be an oil-modified phenolic with aluminum pigment
aluminum paint to be selected and approved by the SO.
The aluminum wood primer shall be an oleoresinous based fungus resistant wood primer sealer
pigmented with non-leafing aluminum to be selected and approved by the SO and the cost for painting
one coat on to the back of all joinery work that is not vacuum/pressure impregnated abutting brick or
concrete is deemed to be included by the Contractor.
4. ALUMINUM PAINT
Aluminum paint to be used for decorative paintwork shall comprise of a single component phenolic
resin high luster an aluminum paint to be selected and approved by the SO. Aluminum paint shall
be ready for use and shall be of a high quality type with a bright luster, excellent anti-corrosive, heat
insulating, weather and fungus resistant, with tough, durable good a brasion-resistant and flexible
properties.
When painted on non -ferrous materials a t wo pack poly-vinyl butyral resin active primer to be
selected and approved by the SO shall be used.
PAD/4
5. TWO PACK QUALITY POYURETHANE PAINT (NOT APPLICABLE TO ENGINEERED

HARDWOOD FLOORING)
Spray coat polyurethane paint to surfaces to the timber floors of the Music Rooms and Dance Rooms,
PAL Rooms, Band Room and other timber floors.
 Prepare stop, knot, stain and sand smooth. Stain to SO’s approval.
 Apply by spray a two-component modified polyurethane paint comprising polyfunctional acrylic

and isocyanate-based material to achieve 30 microns DFT (12 m²/litre).
 Apply finishing coats (in the number of layers) by spray a two-pack polyurethane based
coating on to the polyurethane undercoat to achieve 2.0 mils DFT (7.8 m² / litre).
Clear, gloss or matt finish to be selected by SO.
Spray application shall be 4 kg /m² air delivery pressure with tip size 1.3mm at 60° angle.
Overcoating time 2 hours minimum.
Prepare and apply three coats of approved co-polymer heavy duty liquid plastic dressing to lines on
games courts in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Polyurethane Paint (Staircase)
Apply two-pack quality polyurethane paint to a height of 1200mm to walls of all staircases. Colour
and quality of the paint shall be to the approval of the SO.
6. PAINTING GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall execute the whole of the architectural coating works to the satisfaction of the
SO and warrants that the works shall be executed using good materials and with all the care and
professional skill. He further warrants the architectural coating works against any defects
whatsoever and howsoever arising for a period of FIVE (5) years from the date of substantial
completion of the Works. The Contractor shall make good all such defects appearing within the said
FIVE (5) years from the date of substantial completion of the Works at his own expense and to the
satisfaction of the SO. I f the Contractor shall refuse, neglect or fail to do so for any reason
whatsoever, within such time or may be specified at the complete discretion of the SO in a notice in
writing from the SO to make good any such defect, the Employer shall be entitled to engage others
to make good the same and charge the costs thereof to the Contractor.
(as attached Format Specimen) against faulty workmanship and premature breakdown of the paint
and architectural coating. The Guarantee shall commence from date of Substantial Completion of
the Works.
PAD/5
7. TEXTURED PAINTING ON EXTERNAL PLASTERED SURFACE (ONLY “GREEN” MARK

PAINT TO BE USED)
.1 Unless otherwise stated and as indicated on the drawings all plastered facades of the Main
Building, ramp walls, etc. and planter walls are to be finished in Anti – Algae Coating
conforming to SS 345 or other approved equivalent. The anti-algae coating system shall
comprise of the following:-
.1 Masonry Surface Sealer Coat (1 Coat)

A single component Thermoplastic Acrylic with excellent anti-fungus property.
.2 Intermediate Texture Coat (1 Coat)

Water-based Acrylic texture Body coat.
.3 Finishing Coat (2 Coats)

The water-based acrylic resin anti-algae / fungus coating, shall be applied in two coats. The
cured film should possess excellent resistance to algae (in particular the red-brown species,
Trentopohila). Chlorophyta (Green Algae) and Cyanophyta (Blue Green algae) , in addition
of providing excellent weathering under local climatical condition.
.2 Technical Data of the specified standards or other approved equivalent
Opacity SS: Part E2 : 1992 – Above 70%

Wet Scrub Resistance SS: Part E2 : 1992 – Above 3000 Cycles
Alkali Resistance( 1% NaOH) SS : Part G2 : 1992
Accelerated Weathering (1000hours) SS5 : Part G4 : 1992
Algae Resistance SS345 1990
Diffusion of Carbon dioxide SD,150>194m
Diffusion of Water Vapour SD,150 = 0.06M
.3 Sequence of Coats:
Recoating
Process Material Diluent Method
Interval
1st Coat Masonry Surface Sealer Water (max. 10%) Min. 2 hours Roller
2nd Coat Acrylic Body Texture Coat Water (max. 10%) Min. 2 hours Spray
3rd Coat Acrylic Anti-Algae Finish Coat Water (max. 10%) Min. 2 hours Roller
th
4 Coat Acrylic Anti-Algae Finish Coat Water (max. 10%) Min. 2 hours Roller
8. PLASTERED SURFACES
Prepare and apply one coat of anti-alkaline sealer and two coats of acrylic emulsion paint to internal
plastered surfaces, unless otherwise specified.
PAD/6
9. PRECAST CONCRETE VENTS

Prepare and apply two finishing coats of acrylic emulsion paint to precast concrete vents.
10. CALCIUM SILICATE BOARDS/GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS

Prepare and apply two finishing coats of acrylic emulsion paint to all exposed calcium silicate
boards and gypsum plaster boards.
The finishes for external calcium silicate board shall be in three coats paint as specified.
11. TIMBER SURFACES

Prepare and apply one coat of aluminium wood primer to back of all timber frames in contact with
concrete or brickwork before fixing.
Prepare, stop, knot with shellac knotting and apply one coat of aluminium wood primer, one
undercoat and two finishing coats of synthetic enamel paint on a ll exposed surfaces of wrot
woodwork, frames, etc.
12. FITMENTS, WALL-BAR, PARQUET FLOOR, ETC.

Prepare, stain and apply three coats of approved polyurethane paint to fitments, wall bar, parquet
floor, etc. unless otherwise stated.
13. TIMBER SURFACES

Repair: Large, loose or resinous knots and gross defects shall be cut out and holes plugged with
sound wood. Headless nails shall be punched well below surfaces.
Rub Down: Timber surface shall be rubbed down with fine glass paper in the direction of the grain
and dust off.
Knotting: All knots in woodwork shall be treated to prevent bleeding. Large or loose knots shall
be cut out and replaced with sound wood or cut back and the surface made good w ith stopper.
Smaller knots shall be treated with two thin coats of knotting. The knotting used shall be free from
resin and consist of 1 kg of shellac mixed with 2.5 litres of industrial methylated spirit or naphtha
and two thin coats shall be applied to cover all knots in painted timber or to such surfaces as may be
directed by the SO.
Primer: A full coat of aluminum wood primer shall be vigorously brushed in, particular care being
taken to fill end grain.
Stopping: All cracks, nail holes and the like shall be stopped, preferably with a proprietary
approved “Broadknife Filler” or other approved equivalent hard stopping supplied in premixed paste
form or with putty applied and finished with a broad knife and rubbed down on completion. Water
soluble stopping shall not be used outdoors.
Undercoat: Before applying an undercoat, the primer film shall be examined carefully. A primer
which has been weathered shall be thoroughly cleaned before recoating. If it is cracked, flaking or
heavily chalking, it shall be removed and re-primed. Undercoats shall be of the same brand as the
finishing coat. One undercoat shall be applied to the primed timber surface.
Finishing Coats: Two coats of finishing paint shall be applied on the appropriate undercoat.
PAD/7
14. STAINS
Stains shall be a dye mixed either in water, oil or spirit of the highest quality of colour or colours to
be selected and approved by the SO.
The Contractor shall stain the timbers in the number of coats to the colours as per the samples
previously selected and approved by the SO.
15. PROPRIETORY VARNISH - CLEAR AND MATT FINISH TO JOINERY WORK
The proprietory varnish to be selected and approved by the SO and applied in the number of coats as
recommended by the manufacturers and used in strict accordance to manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
Surfaces to receive the proprietory clear varnish must be well papered, clean and free from dust, dirt,
grit, oil stains, splinters, etc. Open grain to be filled with appropriate filler and rubbed down to a
smooth surface and de-nibbed between coats.
Rates are to include either for clear or matt finish.
16. LINSEED OIL
The linseed oil shall be refined linseed oil, boiled or raw to BS 242 or other approved equivalent.
17. WOOD PRESERVATIVE
Wood preservative for brush, dipping or hot and cold open tank treatment shall comply generally
with the requirements of BS 144 or other approved equivalent.
18. BACKS OF FRAMES, ETC.
Except for pressure impregnated timbers, all backs of timber frames, etc. shall be painted with one
coat of approved aluminum wood primer paint before fixing is deemed to be included by the
Contractor.
PAD/8
19. PREPARATION AND PAINTING
Generally: All surfaces are to be properly prepared to SO’s approval and as directed on site before
painting commences and the Contractor shall include in his prices for all preparation and for the use
of de-rusting and de-greasing solutions (either dipping, spraying, brushing or other application) and
thorough washing and cleansing of the surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer and approved
by the SO.
The description of preparation and painting hereunder is for general guidance but the Contractor
will be expected to comply with the detailed recommendations of the manufacturer and his prices
will be deemed to include for this.
Cement and Sand Plaster and Concrete Surfaces: Surfaces are to be carefully rubbed down
smooth to remove all loose particles and efflorescence. All cracks and other imperfections shall be
cut out and made good w ith suitable plaster. Provide adequate ventilation to assist drying for a
minimum period of three (3) weeks be fore primer is applied. For painting refer to “Generally -
Item 1” of this painting specifications.
Wall surfaces shall be cleaned and wetted immediately before painting. The Contractor shall allow
at least 24 hours interval between coats. Dilution shall not be permitted for the second and finishing
coats of emulsion paint.
Brickwork: Brick surfaces are to be brushed down to remove dirt, efflorescence and encrusted
mortar, etc. and defective pointing cut out and made good.
Preparation and painting shall be similar to requirements previously specified for “Cement and Sand
Plaster and Concrete Surfaces”.
Plasterboard, Cement Building Board or Fibreboard: Surfaces shall be prepared by removing

surface contamination by rubbing down lightly with glass paper.
Factory primed and ivory surfaced boards do not need priming. W here ordinary plasterboard or
fibreboard surfaces are to be decorated with wall covering, the boards shall be primed to the
approval of the SO before the general surfaces are decorated.
For painting refer to “Generally - Item 1” of this painting specifications.
Hardboard Surface: Surfaces shall be prepared by removing surface contamination and light
rubbing down with glass paper.
Factory primed boards do not need priming. Untreated boards shall be primed with a primer-sealer
prior to undercoating. Primer sealer shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the particular
hardboard for the decoration required.
For painting refer to “Generally - Item 1” of this painting specifications.
Wood Surfaces: Wood surfaces are to be cleaned free from dirt and grease, etc. cracks, crevices
and knotholes scraped out and stopped, nails to be well punched in below the surface and stopped,
coarse grain is also to be filled and the whole rubbed down to a smooth surface with wire wool.
Wood surfaces shall be stained or painted or varnished to the requirements as specified in the
“General Painting Schedule” or as otherwise described.
PAD/9
PREPARATION AND PAINTING (CONT’D.)
UPVC Pipes Etc : Prepare and apply one undercoat and two finishing coats of synthetic enamel
paint to all exposed UPVC pipes and fittings.
PVC Surfaces: PVC surfaces shall be lightly sanded down prior to painting. For painting refer to
“Generally - Item 1” of this painting specifications.
Previously Painted Surfaces: Timber, metal, plastic surfaces previously enamel painted shall be
sanded down to the approval of the SO to roughen surface prior to new paint application.
Previously stained or clear varnished timber shall be sanded down to receive new varnish. Where
colours of lighter shade are required the stained timber shall be sanded down to original bare wood.
Ferrous Metal Surfaces: Millscale and tightly adhering rust on f errous metal surfaces shall be
completely removed by closed circuit grit blasting or phosphoric acid washes or as specifically
stated by the SO or in factory by acid pickling or blasting. Less serious rust and millscale shall be
removed by hand or power tools or by flame cleaning with oxyacetylene or butane gas followed by
brushing. Phosphoric acid washes shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed
instruction.
Oil or grease shall be removed by wiping over with white spirit and cleaned off with clean cloth.
An approved chemical solvent shall be used followed by thorough washing and drying if carried out
in the factory.
All open joints and faults stopped with red lead putty or an approved filler.
One coat of approved zinc chromate primer conforming to SS 6 shall be applied to the prepared
ferrous metal surfaces within 1 hour of preparation.
In addition to priming and unless otherwise described, all ferrous metal surfaces (including eaves
gutters, rainwater, soil, waste and ventilating pipes) shall receive one undercoat and two finishing
coats after fixing. Primed surface if damaged during handling, transporting and assembling shall be
touched up with appropriate primer and the edge rubbed down with clean dry cloth. Coated pipes
shall be knotted prior to painting. Eaves gutters and rainwater heads shall be painted inside and out.
Prepare and apply one coat of metallic primer on surfaces of concealed ironwork before fixing.
Previously Primed Metal Surfaces: Previously primed metal surfaces are to be thoroughly cleaned
down to remove all dirt, grease, etc. All loose, adhering or defective paint shall be removed by
scraping back to a firm edge or, if necessary, the surface shall be removed completely by chipping,
scraping and wire brushing back to clean metal. A ll bare metal shall be brought forward to the
general surface with appropriate primer. For painting refer to “Generally - Item 1” of this painting
specifications.
Galvanised or Similar Pre-Treated Metal Surfaces: Galvanised or similar pre-treated metal

surfaces are to be carefully rubbed down to remove rust, loose scale, etc. and cleaned to remove dirt
and thoroughly de-greased; corroded areas are to be brought forward to the general surface with
appropriate approved restorative primer.
PAD/10
PREPARATION AND PAINTING (CONT’D.)
Galvanised surfaces shall be treated with one coat of approved mordant solution. For painting refer
to “Generally - Item 1” of this painting specifications.
Aluminum: The base aluminum surface shall be prepared by abrading with fine wet or dry
abrasive paper using white spirit as lubricant. The surfaces shall be wiped off with clean cloth
soaked in white spirit and all residues removed with dry clean cloth.
The prepared surface shall immediately be primed (without delay) with an approved etch primer
plus zinc chromate by applying smooth even coats.
Paint one undercoat and two finishing coats of approved paint over the primed surface.
Zinc / Stainless Steel Surface: Zinc surface shall be weathered, washed down and degreased with
white spirit.
The Contractor shall ensure that all surfaces are etched to the approval of the SO and dried and
primed immediately with two thin coats of approved zinc chromate on the prepared surface.
For stainless steel surface, no primer is required after the surface is etched.
Paint one undercoat and two finishing coats of approved paint after fixing.
Copper: Copper surface shall be prepared by abrading with emery using white spirit as a lubricant.
The surfaces shall be wiped off with clean cloth soaked in white spirit and all residues removed with
clean dry cloth.
All copper surface to be fixed internally or externally shall be primed with etch primer or aluminum
pigmented primer.
Paint one undercoat and two finishing coats of approved paint over the primed surface.
20. ADVERSE WEATHER

Exterior or exposed painting shall not be carried out under adverse weather condition such as
extremes of temperature or during rain.
Painting shall not be allowed to proceed on surfaces which are not thoroughly dry.
21. DUST
Before painting, varnishing or polishing, etc. is proceeded with, floors must be washed over and
every possible precaution taken to keep down dust.
22. DUST SHEETS

An ample supply of clean dust sheets to protect the work during its progress shall be at hand and all
floors to be covered up when executing any paintwork.
PAD/11
23. TINTS AND COLOURS

No paints are to be brought to the site until colours have been selected and approved by the SO.
All tints and shades are to be selected and approved by the SO and the Contractor is to allow for
painting small portions of work in different colours so that the appearance on site may be judged and
a selection be made.
The tints of the undercoats are to be approximate to those of the finishing colours. I n order to
indicate the number of coats applied, a d ifference is to be made in tint of each succeeding coat
(except in the case of white).
Note:- If after the application of the finishing coat the surface is still not satisfactory then further coat or
coats of paintwork are required to be applied at the Contractor’s own expense.
24. INSPECTION
P riming coats shall not be applied until the surfaces have been inspected and the preparatory work
has been approved by the SO. Undercoats or finishing coats shall not be applied until the previous
coat has been similarly inspected and approved.
25. TESTS
The SO may from time to time require the Contractor to arrange for and to carry out tests to be
carried out by a relevant certification body at the Contractor’s own cost to confirm that the paints
and varnishes used on site conforms to the approved samples.
26. FITTINGS
All metal fittings, fastenings and ironmongery are to be removed before preparatory painting
processes are commenced, cleaned and re-fixed in position on completion.
27. PAINTING SCHEDULE

A painting schedule shall be provided by the Contractor for the SO’s approval prior to the execution
of the work to enable work to proceed at the appropriate time. T he schedule shall give all the
necessary information on colour, type of paint, surface to be coated and method of application.
28. PRIMERS
Primers shall be appropriate for the surface and for the subsequent coats. All primers shall be
applied by brush. Subsequent coats may be applied by brush, spray or roller unless specifically
directed. Roller shall not be used for oil paints.
29. PRIMED SURFACES

Primed or undercoated woodwork, metalwork, plasterwork, etc. shall not be left in an exposed or
unsuitable situation for an undue period before completing the painting process.
PAD/12
30. APPLICATION
Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied. Subsequent coats shall be
applied within the period specifically specified by the paint manufacturer where necessary to secure
a proper bond with the previous coat.
Paint shall not be applied to surfaces structurally or superficially damp (unless otherwise specially
recommended by manufacturer), or extremely hot and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free from
condensation, dirt, dust, etc. before the application of each coat.
The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the SO for structurally damp surfaces before painting
work commences.
31. MIXING
All paints shall be thoroughly mixed before use, unless there is a specific instruction to the contrary
on the tin e.g. “do not stir”. All partially used paint containers shall be properly resealed and stored
away from adverse temperature.
32. THINNING
Thinning shall be carried out with the type of thinner and in the proportions recommended by the
paint manufacturers.
33. EXTERNAL PAINTING BASED ON PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION

The external painting shall be minimum 3 coats paint system as specified.
The Contractor shall execute the whole of the painting works to the satisfaction of the SO, and
warrants that the works shall be executed using good materials and with all due care and
professional skill. He further warrants the painting works against any decoration defects, fungus and
other biological growth, uneven fading, blistering, peeling and discolouring in respect of the
material and workmanship, that is, any defects whatsoever and howsoever arising for a period of
five (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works. The Contractor shall make
good all such defects appearing within the said five (5) years from the date of Substantial
Completion of the Works at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the SO. If the Contractor
shall refuse, neglect or fail to do so for any reason whatsoever, within such time as may be specified
at the complete discretion of the SO in a notice in writing from the SO to make good any such
defect, the Employer shall be entitled to engage others to make good the same and charge the costs
thereof to the Contractor.
(as attached Format Specimen) against faulty workmanship and premature breakdown of the paint
and architectural coating. The Guarantee shall commence from date of Substantial Completion of
the Works.
PAD/13
EXTERNAL PAINTING BASED ON PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION (CONT’D.)
General Requirements
The painting works in this section shall be based on a performance specification. The recommended painting
system shall be so designed to meet the performance criteria as specified.
The external painting shall mean painting to all external surfaces except those within the enclosed
walls of building and other enclosed spaces (not exposed to the weather). All external doors,
windows, shutters, grille gates and the like openable towards outside shall mean painting both sides
including door edges and frames. The Indemnity for external painting shall exclude perimeter chain
link fencings, electrical and mechanical equipment and fittings, floors and roof surfaces and other
areas as specifically mentioned in the Specification. Any defects to these areas shall be made good
during the defects liability period. Extra coats of paint finish to be applied at no extra cost to the
Employer on the instruction of the SO if the final finishing coats appear to be uneven or patchy.
External painting system shall be in acrylic spray textured approved weather resistant and
waterproof paint complying to SS 345.
Where the external painting system requires spray textured super weather shield or other approved
paint, the system shall comprise two coats oil based alkaline, fungus and algae resistant wall sealer
(rolled-on) with one coat of three dimensional polymeric acrylic emulsion textured coating (sprayed-
on) and two coat of high performance anti fungus and anti-algae, anti-carbonation modified acrylic
emulsion paint (rolled-on).
The recommended painting system must be forwarded to the SO for approval 2 months before the
commencement of painting works with the following details:
 Name of system  Spreading rate - m²/litre

 Number and type of coats  Type of primer
 Composition  Thinning ratio of primer - in percentage by volume
 Use  Spreading rate of primer - m²/litre
 Characteristics  Drying time of concrete before primer coat
 Colours available  Drying time of each coat (at 30º C)
 Application method  Painting interval between coats
 Thinner  Surface preparation method
 Thinning ratio - in percentage by volume
PAD/14
EXTERNAL PAINTING BASED ON PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION (CONT’D.)
General Requirements (Cont’d.)
The Contractor’s Specialist shall ensure by supervision, checks or any other means that all materials
used conform to the intended specification and if any changes are necessary shall seek written
approval from the SO with all the above mentioned details listed out.
In proposing the painting systems and products to be used for this Contract, the Contractor’s Specialist
shall comply with all local fire and health requirements. They shall ensure that all paints brought to site
are free from organomercury compounds. T hey shall be fully responsible for the painting systems
used. The Contractor’s Specialist shall allow for different colour tones for all undercoats to distinguish
the different coatings. Should the finished painting work be found unsatisfactory, i.e. brushy works,
unevenness in applications, insufficient film thickness, original stains, etc., the Contractor’s Specialist
shall be required to scrape off the old paint and repaint with additional coat or coats at their own
expense to the approval of the SO.
The Contractor‘s Specialist shall rectify and make good all defects within 14 days of receipt of a written
notice from the SO of any painting defects at his own costs and expenses.
The undertaking given by the Contractor’s Specialist shall be absolute and shall not be restricted to or
limited by any inspection and approval of the quality of the paint and materials which the SO may make.
Materials and Workmanship Requirements
Surface Preparation: The Contractor’s Specialist shall ensure that surface preparation
specification is adequate and compatible with the designed painting specification as any failure of
the painting system due to inadequate surface preparation or preparation specification must be
rectified at the Contractor’s expense. N o exemption from the indemnity will be allowed for poor
surface preparation.
All surface preparatory work shall comply to the appropriate sub-clauses as specified in “Generally”
and “Preparation and Painting” of surfaces to receive paintwork.
Surface Application: Application method may be by brush, roller, spray or airless spray as
recommended by the paint manufacturer. No roller shall be used on rough surface, framework and
the like.
Application shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s specification. A minimum of one primer coat,
one undercoat and one finishing coat of a painting system is required for plasterboard, cement building
board and the like surfaces. For timber and metal surfaces, the painting system shall comprise one
primer, one undercoat and two finishing coats. Etch primer shall be used on all galvanised, stainless
steel and non-ferrous metal surfaces. A ll surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from oil or other
deleterious matters. Paint shall not be applied to any surface which is very hot and upon which there is
moisture or to any external surface during adverse weather condition such as extreme of temperature or
during rain.
The finished surface shall be uniform in sheen, colour, etc., and be free from defects detrimental to
appearance or performance.
The Contractor’s attention is brought to the fact that although an Indemnity for the painting system
is required in the Contract, samples of the paints may be taken for test throughout the duration of
works by the SO to ensure that the specified paints are used and no a dulteration or over dilution
takes place.
PAD/15
34. SAMPLES
35. COMPLETION
On completion, wash off paint, emulsion, etc., stains on f loors, walls, etc. clean glass on bot h sides,
replace any broken or cracked square or louvres, clear away all rubbish and superfluous materials and
leave the whole of the premises fit and ready for immediate occupation.
PAD/16
EXTERNAL WORKS
NOTE:- This portion of the External Works Specification shall be read in conjunction
with the previous Specification Clauses previously described which shall be
applied as appropriate.
1. SITE CLEARANCE
Clear site off weeds, shrubs, bushes, trees, etc. and other undesirable growths and debris on
entire site and dispose off to a dump to be provided by the Contractor at the beginning and end
of building operations to the approval of the SO.
2. IMPORTED VEGETABLE EARTH

The Contractor shall provide imported selected vegetable earth free from weeds, roots, debris
and vegetation to be selected and approved by the SO and to be deposited in areas as described
above to be grassed where the existing vegetable earth for reuse is insufficient. O verall
thickness 200mm.
3. EARTHWORKS AND IMPORTED EARTH FILLING

Excavation and filling to building or over site, to make up or reduce the levels in forming platform
levels, embankments, terraces, roads, pavings, turfed areas, etc. shall be carried out and graded to
levels and falls as shown on the site plan or as directed by the SO on site.
Filling to be with existing selected excavated material free from roots and all vegetable matter,
filled in and well consolidated in layers not exceeding 150mm thick.
Carefully form all embankment banks in cutting or filling to constant or varying angles and
contours as directed by hands.
Sloping sides of embankments shall be carefully trimmed by hand to the desired slopes and
contours.
Provide selected imported earth fill to make up levels to be selected and approved by the SO
where the existing earth cut is insufficient.
4. CUT TREES AND PROTECT EXISTING TREES

Contractor is to establish which trees are to be cut and which to be retained prior to site
clearance.
Existing trees to be retained shall be as marked on drawings. These trees are to be protected.
The protected trees are to be watered as required. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in
his cost for trimming branches as required to suit his method of construction only on S O’s
approval and to remove the trimmed branches off the site.
The Contractor shall obtain written instructions from the Employer of the site for the removal,
transplanting or the cutting down of any trees, shrubs, etc. on site and pay all costs incurred.
5. CONSOLIDATION OF EARTHWORKS TO RECEIVE ROADS,

FIRE PATHS AND FIRE PITS
All final levels of earthworks to receive premix roads, interlocking pavings to fire paths and
fire pits, cobble stones, shall be compacted and consolidated to a dry density of at least 92% of
the Standard Proctor Density (AASHO).
Method of compaction and consolidation shall be as described in Roadworks and Car Parks
Specifications.
6. LANDSCAPE SPECIALIST WORK

Prepare and plant new trees, shrubs, etc. as shown in drawings to SO’s approval & to
incorporate any comments by Arborist to be engaged by the Contractor (if required by N Parks)
to SO’s approval.
Relocate cut or replant any other designated existing trees and associated framework to new
locations and maintain all to SO’s approval
EXW/1
EXTERNAL WORKS
7. ROADWORKS
i) Earthworks
Excavation and filling shall be carried out to this Specification and the sections, lines,
grades, crossfalls, etc. shown on the drawings. All suitable material taken from
excavation shall be used as fill to the extend required to construct embankments or
subgrade. In the event of excavation exceeding the amount of material required for fill,
the excess shall be used to grade areas of ultimate development or wasted as directed at
the expense of the Contractor. In the case of volume of filling exceeding that excavated,
the deficiency shall be supplied from approved borrow sources and the Contractor shall
allow for this in his rates.
Excavation shall be carried to such a depth that sufficient materials remains above the
designated subgrade to allow for compaction of such. On embankments, sufficient
material shall be placed above the designated subgrade to allow for compaction and
settlement. Should the Contractor through negligence or other fault excavate below the
designated levels, he shall at his own expense replace such excavation in the manner
specified for fill. Any topsoil removed in cutting and topsoil in filled areas to a depth of
150mm, or as directed, shall be removed prior to any fill being placed. All such topsoil
removed shall be used on the turfed areas at the edges or alternatively stacked where
directed by the SO.
Filled areas shall be compacted in layers of 150 - 200mm. E ach layer of fill material
shall be compacted to dry density of at least 92% of the Standard Proctor Density
(AASHO).
Sufficient quantities of water shall be sprayed or the soil allowed to dry up to bring the fill
to (+) or (-) 2% of optimum moisture content of the soil for compaction to commence.
Earthmoving plant shall not be accepted as compaction equipment for roadworks. Prior
notice shall be given to the SO of the Contractor's intention to carry out compaction. A
road roller of 8 - 10 tonnes or other approved compacting equipment shall be used on the
works for the compaction.
Where excavation reveals that the materials excavated contained organic matter, peat, etc.
unsuitable for filling, such material shall be transported away from site by the Contractor and
should not be allowed to come in contact with fill material for roadworks.
ii) Preparation of Subgrade
The subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted with a road roller weighing not less that 8 -
10 tonnes and trimmed to the levels, grades and crosstails shown on t he drawings or
ordered. At all times the subgrade shall be kept well drained. Wh erever ruts or low
spots are formed, the subgrade shall be brought up to grade, reshaped and compacted at
the Contractor's own expense. Any soft or spongy patches shall be excavated to a depth
of not less than 600mm. T he sides of the excavation shall be vertical. The excavated
material shall be removed and the hole so formed shall be backfilled with approved
granular material compacted in 150 - 200mm layers.
The top 130mm subgrade layer shall be compacted to not less than 98% of dry density
using modified compaction (AASHO). The 130mm layer below the granite dust or
unwashed sand shall have a minimum CBR of 30% (soaked value) where densities fall
below the specified values, corrective action to bring up the density to the required values
shall be taken at the Contractor's own expense.
In-situ Dry Density Tests shall be carried out at 100.00 metres intervals along the road or
as required by the SO and all apparatus required for such tests shall be provided by the
Contractor, where the length of the road is less than 100.00 metres, at least 3 density tests
shall be carried out. The subgrade shall be finished to a tolerance of (+) or (-) 12mm to
levels shown on the drawings.
Stacking of aggregate or any other material shall not be permitted on the subgrade and no
base course or pavement shall be laid thereon until the subgrade has been checked and
approved.
EXW/2
EXTERNAL WORKS
ROADWORKS (CONT’D.)
iii) Aggregate Generally
All aggregate used in the construction shall be hard, durable granite or other approved
material, free from foreign matter, broken cubically and conforming to the specified
grading requirements. Before any material is placed on the subgrade, the subgrade shall
be selected and approved by the SO. Depth blocks of the appropriate dimensions shall be
provided every 1.50 metres both ways to ensure that the correct depth of each respective
layer is maintained. On no account shall vehicles be permitted on the subgrade.
iv) Base Course

Pave over the prepared subgrade with a layer of crusher dust or sand as a protective layer
of the thickness shown on the drawings or as directed.
The crusher run aggregate base course shall be carried out in two layers each of
consolidated thickness shown on drawings or as directed. Base course aggregate shall be
placed directly on the protective layer where it shall be picked up with stone forks and
placed in position. The fine fraction remaining on the pile shall then be picked up with
square-nosed shovels and scattered evenly over the already spread stone base course to
fill the interstices. The base course shall be rolled with a 8 - 10 tonnes roller. Rolling
shall continue until the granite stones have interlocked and there is no undue movement
in the crusher stone layout.
Blinding material of granite dust or other similar approved blinding material shall be
spread evenly over protective layer and over each base course thoroughly wetted and
rolled into the interstices to the approval of the SO. Any surplus fine material remaining
after rolling shall be swept up and removed from the surface.
v) Preparation of Area to be Paved
Prior to the laying of the hotmix asphalt surfacing, the top layer of the base course shall be
properly brushed and cleaned of all loose material and other materials.
The asphalt mixture shall not be placed on a ny wet surface work. The work shall be
suspended when rain is imminent and no work is allowed after the rain. The SO or his
representative may instruct that the premix at the site be rejected at Contractor's own
expense.
A layer of tack coat of cationic emulsion conforming to SS 85 - Bitumen Emulsion for

Road Construction shall be applied on t he prepared base course before the hot asphalt
premix surfacing is laid, at a rate 0.55 litre/sq m. T he bitumen emulsion shall be
homogeneous and the properties at the time of delivery shall be tested by the methods
prescribed in SS 86.
EXW/3
EXTERNAL WORKS
vi) Asphalt Premix Surface Course

Bitumen Binder
All bitumen shall be approved type petroleum bitumen of either 60/70 penetration. No
mineral matter other than that naturally contained in such bitumen shall be present. The
bitumen shall be of uniform quality, free from water and shall not foam when heated to
175 degrees Centigrade. The Contractor must state the country or countries of origin of
all bitumen prior to its use in the works. A ll bitumen shall meet the following
requirements of SS 84.
60 / 70
Item Description Penetration Grade
1 Penetration of 25 degs. C. 60 - 80 (0.1 mm)
2 Softening Point 47 - 56 (deg. C.)
3 Flash Point (Cleveland Open Up) 230 degs. C. minimum
4 Penetration at 25 degs. C. Thinfilm Oven 52% of original
Test penetration (minimum)
5 Solubility in Trichloro ethylene 99.5% by wt (min)
6 Specific gravity, 25 degs. C/25 degs. C. .0 - 1.11
Test for the above properties shall be carried out in accordance with the methods set out in
the Specification for Methods of Sampling and Testing Bitumen of SS 86.
Mineral Filler shall consist of crushed rockfines or Portland Cement to SS 26 or BS No.

12. At least 85% of cement filler shall pass 0.075mm (No. 200) B.S. Sieve and filler
shall be thoroughly dry and shall be free from organic matter and clay particles.
Fine Aggregate shall consist of approved clean well graded granite fines produced in a
secondary crushing plant, or approved clean natural sand properly washed free of all
impurities. F ine aggregate shall be taken here as materials passing a 3 .20mm British
Standard Sieve and retained on 0.075mm (No. 200) British Standard Sieve.
Coarse Aggregate shall consist of clean, well graded, angular, crushed granite of
approved quality, free from dust, dirt, and/or other deleterious materials, and free from an
excess of flat, elongated or weathered pieces. Coarse aggregate shall be taken here as all
material retained on a 3.20mm British Standard Sieve.
Mixing and Delivery
The mix required for the work shall be as shown on the table below. W herever
considered advisable, the SO may vary the specified proportion of coarse and fine
aggregate within a range of 10% and the percentage filler to be used within a range of (+)
or (-) 2% and the Contractor shall NOT be entitled to any extra or reduced payment on
this account.
EXW/4
EXTERNAL WORKS
Mixing and Delivery (Cont’d.)
Type of Mix 50mm Surface Course

Thickness Course Maximum 50mm
Minimum 38mm
Maximum Size of Stone Aggregate Used 25mm
Total Percentage Passing Including Filler
Passing 50mm -
Passing 38mm -
Passing 25mm 95 - 100
Passing 10mm -
Passing 6mm 54 - 70
Passing 3mm 39 - 55
Passing BS 14 27 - 41
Minimum Average Maximum
% Soluble bitumen (by weight of total
mix 60/70 penetration) 5.5 6.0 6.5
Overall requirements: % graded coarse
aggregate (by weight of total aggregate and 52
filler)
% Graded fine aggregated passing 1/8"
BS Sieve but retained on BS No. 200 Sieve
(by weight of total aggregate and filler) 43
% Mineral filler passing BS No. 200 Sieve
(by weight of total aggregate and filler) 5
% Soluble bitumen by weight of Total 6.0
Mix
All aggregate of the requisite sizes and grading shall be thoroughly dried and fed at a
temperature of 150 degrees Centigrade - 170 degrees Centigrade into a mechanical mixer
of approved type. A n accurately registering pyrometer shall be installed at a suitable
point at the discharge end of the dryer with a registering device so located as to indicate
clearly the temperature of the coarse and fine aggregate when discharged. The bitumen
shall be heated, in an approved type boiler, to a temperature of 150 degrees Centigrade to
165 degrees Centigrade and shall thereafter be added together with the required
proportion of filler, to the coarse and fine aggregate, and all ingredients shall be
thoroughly mixed together until complete coating of all aggregate and filler with the
bitumen has been achieved. The SO or his authorised representative shall have access at
all times to asphalt mixing plant, and shall at liberty take such samples of materials as
considered necessary from time to time to verify the proper operation thereof.
EXW/5
EXTERNAL WORKS
Mixing and Delivery (Cont’d.)
It is particularly important to avoid excessive heating of the bitumen binder as this will
lead to hardening of the binder and result in a shortening of the useful life of the
pavement. In all cases t emperatures should be kept as low as is consistent with proper
mixing and laying.
The asphalt after proper mixing, shall then be discharged from the mixer direct into a tipping
truck of suitable dimensions, for transportation to the worksite. The temperature of the mix on
arrival at such worksite shall not be less than 120 degrees Centigrade. The Contractor shall
provide an adequate number of accurate thermometers for checking the temperature of hot mix
asphalt, etc. as directed by the SO.
Vehicles used for transporting the asphalt shall be thoroughly cleaned free of all foreign
materials immediately prior to loading with asphalt. Canvas cover should be provided for
each and every load during transportation and holding. T he use of dirty or otherwise
unsatisfactory vehicles shall render the load/s of asphalt liable to rejection.
Surface Course
Over the prepared base course shall be spread a l ayer of approved hot mix asphalt of the
thickness of 50mm (after consolidation) unless otherwise specified. Immediately following
the spreading of the premix, the initial compaction will be done to the full width by rolling
with a three wheel power roller weighing 10 - 12 tonnes. The rolling shall progress gradually
from the lower side of the road to the highest point. Rolling shall continue until no movement
under the rear wheel is noticeable but should be discontinued prior to excessive crushing of
the stone. Places inaccessible to the roller shall be tamped thoroughly with mechanical or
hand tampers which shall weigh not less than 25 kg and having a face of not more than 0.064
sq m.
Testing and Finishing

After completion of the surface course, the surface shall be tested with a 3 .00 metres long
straight edge laid at right angles to the centre line of the roadway and all irregularities
exceeding 10mm shall be corrected by removing and replacing to the foregoing requirements.
Depth tests shall be made at the Contractor's own expense. Where there is a deficiency of
stone of greater than 6mm, the Contractor shall make up the deficient areas by removing the
stone and replacing it, if considered necessary by the SO with new stone.
EXW/6
EXTERNAL WORKS
8. TOPSOIL
Provide and spread topsoil over the site as indicated on the drawings to receive turves and planting.
All topsoil supplied by the Contractor shall be free from rubbish, roots, stumps, stones or other
extraneous materials, and well mixed with sludge in proportion of (3:1) to be selected and
approved by the SO. S ludge delivered to site shall be used for the turfing work as soon as
possible. Sludge stockpiled on the site for turfing work shall be evenly covered with a layer of
lime and a layer of topsoil.
The soil and sludge mixture shall be laid 50mm below the desired turf level and spread uniformly
over the site, slopes and/or berms, etc. where directed and shall be lightly watered if necessary,
and then tamped with wooden tampers and trimmed to the consolidated thickness required.
The turf pods shall be planted using topsoil only.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and fixing the turves promptly after topsoiling in
order to prevent erosion thereof due to wet weather or other causes. A ny loss of unprotected or
inadequately protected topsoil shall be made good at the Contractor's own expense. A thin layer of
topsoil shall be broadcast on the turf to fill all depressions and give a smooth finish.
The Contractor may be required to excavate, load, transport and spread topsoil from Singapore or
neighbouring Indonesian Island sources. In such cases, the Contractor shall not be held responsible
for the quality of such topsoil, unless clay, rubbish, roots, etc. have been introduced into such topsoil
due to careless or excessly deep excavation by the Contractor, whereafter the unsuitable topsoil shall
be replaced at the Contractor's own expense.
9. TURVES AND MAINTENANCE

Spot turf all external unpaved areas including all necessary trimming, levelling, 50mm thick
approved loamy topsoil treated with weed killer, well mixed with sludge, watering, rolling, weeding,
maintenance, etc. as specified. Spot turf should not be more than 300mm centre to centre.
Close turf all embankments, slopes formed and School field as shown in Drawings all as before
described for spot turf.
The Contractor is required to maintain the turfed area for 12 months during the defects liability
period including all necessary watering, rolling, weeding and tending until the turf is firmly
established and replacing badly grown patches to the satisfaction of the SO.
About two months after planting, the grass shall be manured with a co mplete chemical fertiliser
which supplies nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium and magnesium approximately in the following
proportion 18:12:6:3. This shall be applied at the rate of 125 kg/ha of grass after all the weeds have
removed. The fertiliser shall be mixed with the top dressing and spread evenly over the field.
Turves shall be Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus). All turves supplied by the Contractor shall
be of healthy and vigorous stock and from approved sources. The grass or turf shall be cut square
and approximately 300 x 300mm in size, and be 50mm in thickness. All turves supplied shall be
free from weeds and care shall be taken to include as much of the roof growth as possible.
The turves shall not be broken up into small pieces for planting and shall be planted as soon as
possible after being cut.
Close Turfing - all horizontal surfaces.
.
EXW/7
EXTERNAL WORKS
TURVES AND MAINTENANCE (CONT’D.)
Turves shall be laid side by side on the ground with gaps not exceeding 30mm where close turfing
is specified. When spot turfing is specified, gaps on all sides of the turves shall not be more than
100mm. In the case of banks, close turfing is required, and each sod shall be held in position by
wooden pegs to prevent movement or displacement of any kind, and the turfing shall thereafter be
tamped down and rolled (except on slopes) with a suitable hand roller. The pieces of turf shall be
sunk into the ground so that they are flush with the surface. All depressions between the pieces of
turf shall be filled with topsoil. T he turfing shall on completion present a uniform and regular
appearance. A fter planting of turf and watering of the turfed areas no additional spreading of
sludge on the turfed areas shall be allowed.
Throughout the maintenance period of the Contract, all turfing shall be watered regularly and
weeded until it is accepted by the SO. T he Contractor shall allow for such watering and
tending. Any dead turves, badly growing turves or otherwise unsatisfactory turves shall be
removed and replaced with approved quality turves by the Contractor at his own expense.
All weeds shall be removed at least twice a month.
About one (1) month after planting, the grass shall be manured with a co mplete chemical
fertiliser which supplies Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium and Magnesium approximately in the
following proportion 18:12:6:3. This shall be applied at the rate of 125 kg/ha of grass after all
weeds have been removed. The fertiliser shall be mixed with the topdressing and spread evenly
over the field. This application shall be repeated after three (3) months.
After one (1) month's growth, the grass shall be cut with a suitable rotary mower to encourage the
grass to creep on the ground instead of growing upright. T his operation shall be repeated at
fortnightly intervals until the ground is completely covered with grass. A mechanised reel cut
mower shall now be used to cut the grass. This normally shall be done about three (3) months
after planting. Thereafter mowing shall be done fortnightly by reel cut mower until the end of the
defects liability period.
Approximately two (2) months after planting, when the grass has grown and produced a
continuous cover over the whole area, the whole of the turfed areas shall be lightly rolled (roller
shall not exceed 150 kg in weight) to an even surface. R olling shall be repeated at monthly
intervals until the surface is accepted by the SO. A heavy roller shall not be used as it is likely to
damage the sub-soil drainage system if one has been installed. A heavy roller will also compact
the ground unduly and this is detrimental to good turf growth.
Grass shall be close cut as short as possible following the general contours of the ground. The
stock or blade of the grass after each cutting shall not stand higher than 20mm above the
ground level. On fairly extensive and open grass areas, sidetables or fields, the Contractor shall
use mechanical mowers powered by small tractors.
The edges of all sidetables, and other grassed areas adjoining roadways, footpaths, kerbs,
dividers and concrete paved areas shall be cut back to proper straight lines or curves as the case
may be, and trimmed thereafter to produce a neat and tidy appearance. T his work shall be
carried out immediately after the grass in the area has been cut.
Grass growing in the cement joints of footpaths and along the edge of the roads adjacent to or
directly fronting the sidetables, centre medians, circuses, etc. shall be manually weeded out and
cleared. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for such provision in his Contract.
Where the existing ground is around established and mature tree (with girth of above 200mm
measured at 1.00 m etre above ground level) or around street furniture, the Contractor shall
level the surrounding ground and employ a weed eater or other grasscutting machine operated
by nylon string cutting "blade", to close cut the grass right up t o the bases of trees or street
furniture without damaging the bark or furniture. To avoid damaging shrubs, flowering plants
or young trees (with girth less than 200mm), the Contractor shall cut grass right up to the edge
of the flower beds only or the weeded areas of such plants.
All cut grass, cuttings together with trimmings, loose stones, rubbish, etc. shall be collected and
removed from the site and disposed off expeditiously to the Contractor's own dumping ground.
Refer to item 20 for Sub-Soil Pipes and Drainage.
EXW/8
EXTERNAL WORKS
10. BAKAU PILING
Bakau piles shall be good, sound, straight piles with fresh uninjured bark and of reasonably
uniform size throughout. They shall be supplied in 3.00 metre, 4.50 metre or 6.00 metre
lengths as required and measured after the heads have been squared and the under-sized ends
cut off. T hey shall not be less than 100mm in diameter at the larger end and not less than
60mm in diameter at the smaller end, measured within 150mm from its end. S uch
measurements shall not be over knobs and protuberances. The permissible deviation of the axis
of the pile from the straight joining the centres of the two ends shall not be more than 25mm.
All bakau piles shall be selected and approved by the SO before being used. Bakau piles that
have been rejected shall be removed from site immediately. The piling shall be carried out by
operators thoroughly experienced in their trade and shall be carried out in accordance with the
instructions of the SO. They shall be driven by a piling frame or tripod with a monkey of
approved weight.
The head of pile shall be protected with a simple steel or cast iron ring during driving and after
completion of such driving, the head shall be properly squared and cut off to the required
levels.
Piles shall be driven vertically in a straight line, perfectly squared from the face of the work
and free from damage. The monkey used shall be 200 kg (minimum) in weight. The monkey
shall be dropped from a height of 1.00 metre to 1.50 metre. The actual height of the drops shall
be approved by the SO.
Incorrectly or badly driven piles and piles damaged during driving shall be extracted and
replaced or else duplicated at the Contractor's own expense.
All piles shall be rigidly and securely joined with steel collars of 300mm long made out of
1.22mm thick (18 SWG) mild steel sheets with joints fully welded. S teel collars shall be
completely coated with tar or bituminous paint.
11. TIMBER PILES
Provide 150 x 150m m timber tanapiles at 2000mm centres both ways and staggered to the
entrance culvert and driven to refusal.
12. CONCRETE KERBS
Provide along edge of Car Parks and Driveways as indicated on the architectural drawings and in
continuation with kerbs cast on drains, precast concrete (1:2:4) kerb with smooth finish 125mm
thick x 300mm high (K7) cast in convenient lengths with chamfered edges, finished fair on
exposed faces and bedded, jointed and pointed in cement and sand (1:3) on concrete (1:3:6) bed
600mm wide x 300mm high one side and 400mm high other side all as directed by the SO on site.
Provide 100 x 100mm weepholes in kerb at approximately 6.00 metres centres as required.
EXW/9
EXTERNAL WORKS
13. CONCRETE DRAINS

Construct reinforced / precast concrete (Grade 20 for house drain and Grade 30 for drain with
standing fire engine access) surface water channel minimum 600mm (unless otherwise stated
with) and cascade steps including fabric reinforcement and 65mm diameter PVC weepholes.
The width of the drain to be varied according to the depth in accordance with Ministry of
Environment’s Code of Practice.
Construct concrete U-drains with 50mm thick lean concrete and 100mm thick compacted
hardcore bed.
Supply and lay removable precast concrete cover and hinged galvanised mild steel gratings with
galvanized mild steel angle seating at 6m center to center to all internal open drains. Heavy duty
gratings to be used as indicated on the drawings.
Break into sides of existing drains to connect surface water drain to existing and make good.
Supply and drive bakau piles for concrete covered drains and surface water channels including
bringing piling rig into site, moving rig around site and removing from site on completion.
14. DRAINS, SUMPS AND GRATINGS

Construct drains, approved concrete standard box sumps and galvanised mild steel heavy duty
hinged gratings with galvanized mild steel angle support and along Driveway, etc. and outfall
drains leading off from building of sizes as indicated or as directed by the SO on site.
15. CONCRETE SUMPS AND GULLEY SUMPS

Construct concrete sumps and gulley sumps including hot-dip galvanised mild steel grating and
angle seating with galvanized mild steel angle support and purpose made galvanised wire mesh
basket to sump.
Supply and drive where necessary 150 x 150mm tanalised bakau timber piles including piling
rig, mild steel connector and cutting off piles to receive concrete.
16. CULVERTS
Construct reinforced concrete box culverts and suspended culverts over existing drains as
indicated on t he SO's drawings on c oncrete (1:2:4) bed with minimum 100mm thick similar
concrete casing all round under Driveways, etc. including heavy-duty hot-dipped galvanised
steel hinged vehicular grating and frame, breaking up of existing drain, temporary stop off and
divert flow off existing drain and reinstate and make good all works disturbed on completion.
Supply and drive 150 x 150mm tanalised timber piles including piling rig, mild steel connector
and cutting of piles to receive concrete.
17. EXISTING CULVERTS

Maintain existing reinforced concrete box c ulverts and suspended culverts over existing drains as
indicated on the SO's drawings. Make good all damaged works to existing to SO's satisfaction.
18. WASHED GRANOLITHIC PAVING

The washed granolithic paving is to comply with BS 1201 or other approved equivalent and
shall be composed of one part portland cement to 2½ pa rts of 10mm cleaned washed
granite chippings (no dust) and ½ pa rt of clean, sharp, washed sand. T he paving to be
damp cured by covering with wet sand or sawdust for at least seven (7) days after laying.
Provide and lay washed granolithic paving with exposed aggregate finish of the required
thickness to pavements and aprons as indicated on the SO's drawings.
EXW/10
EXTERNAL WORKS
19. GEOTEXTILE MEMBRANE

Geotextile membrane to the approval of the SO shall be installed and laid with well lapped
joints all in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
Generally the various areas of use are as follows:-
• Roads, Driveway, Fire Path and Pits with concrete interlocking blocks
• Sub-Soil Pipes
20. SUB-SOIL PIPES & DRAINAGE

Sub-soil pipes for land drainage shall be proprietory perforated uPVC “coil” pipes of 160mm
diameter laid in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
Proprietory sub-soil drainage coil pipes shall be obtained from the Contractor’s Specialist
Supplier to be selected and approved by the SO.
Connectors, end caps, reducers, junctions, adaptors shall be provided and installed in system.
Unit rates shall include for pipes with large or small perforations to be selected and approved
by the SO with 146.5mm inside diameter in lengths of 50.00 metres and weighing 40.46 kg for
normal perforations and 40.42 kg for large perforations.
21. WHITE / YELLOW ROAD LINES AND PAINTING

Refer to the Painting Specifications for Road – White / Yellow Lines and Painting Directions.
22. INTERLOCKING GRASS PAVIORS (GRASS CELL)
As indicated on the drawings and unless otherwise stated driveway for the fire engine access and
bus bays shall be constructed of 200mm thick sub-base material, 200mm graded aggregate base
course (lay in two layers of 100mm each of nominal size 50mm), 50mm compacted sand and
minimum 100mm thick selected interlocking pavers of minimum compressive strength 49
N/mm2.
For areas indicating “fire engine access an d hardstanding area with turfed-over hollow grass
paviors” in the drawings, the Contractor shall provide porous, hollow grass paviors with rigid
rings structure and flexible grids. T he hollow grass paviors shall adapt to the contours of the
terrain. The type use shall be those approved by SCDF to take a 80 Tonne/M2 fire engine.
Specification of Grass Pavior:-
Unit size : 20” x 20” 1” (.5m x .5m x 2.5m cm) or

40” x 40” x 1” (one meter)
Unit weight : 18 oz. (510 grams) or 4.5 lbs. (2.0 kg)
Manufacturing : Injection molded
Strength : 5720 psi (400 kg/cm2) filled with sand (stronger than concrete when
installed over properly prepared base course)
Colour : Black
Resin : 100% post-consumer recycled HDPE/LDPE
EXW/11
EXTERNAL WORKS
INTERLOCKING GRASS PAVIORS (GRASS CELL)(CONT’D)
General
The Contractor shall: -

• Prior to installation, ensure that the area where grass pavior is to be installed has been levelled.
• Ground stabilisation shall be provided to support projected loads by laying a sandy
gravel road base or crusher run.
• A layer of blinding sand shall be laid before laying the grass paviors.
• A layer of sand soil mix for turf establishment to cover the grass pavior cells shall be spread.
• The Contractor shall lay prig or rolled turf above the grass pavior and apply soil wetting
and water retention agents and fertilisers.
Subgrade Preparation
The Contractor shall:-

• If necessary, excavate and level the area where grass pavior is to be installed. The depth
will depend upon the amount of compacted sandy gravel road base to be applied to meet
design load specifications.
• If base preparation is not necessary, the Contractor shall ensure that the area is level
or graded to fall for drainage purposes.
• Compact the excavated or levelled areas using a mechanical plate compactor or light
compaction roller.
• Ensure that the excavated or levelled areas are free from rock and debris. Check to
ensure that the area is adequately compacted.
• Sub-surface drainage and irrigation systems and utility lines should be installed in the
subgrade. Disturbed areas should be lightly compacted after installation.
• In situations where the subgrade is installed over an impermeable structure e.g. roof
garden, a sub-surface drainage system shall be installed.
Base Course Preparation

• Provide and install a sandy gravel or granite aggregate road base to base construction
specifications and compact with an approved compaction equipment.
• The following is a guide to provide adequate support for projected weight bearing loads.
Pedestrians: 75 to 100 mm, light vehicles: 100 to 150 mm and trucks/heavy vehicles 200
to 300 mm.
• Where a sandy gravel road base is used, apply a 10 mm layer of blinding sand. Where
crusher run is used, spread a layer of quarry dust to fill the void spaces and then lay a
needle-punched geofabric over the compacted base. Thereafter spread a 10 mm layer of
blinding sand over the geofabric.
EXW/12
EXTERNAL WORKS
Grass Pavior Installation

• Place connected grass pavior units on t he blinded sand ensuring that the open cell
structure is facing upwards. Take care to ensure that the sections are properly
interlocked.
• Sections can be easily shaped with pruning shears and units placed on steep curves or
slopes should be secured by staking.
• The top of the grass pavior cell should be-25-30 mm below the surface of adjacent
sections.
• Fill and cover the cells with a sandy soil mix recommended for turf establishment.
Ensure that a r elatively open well-drained mix is used as h eavy loam can adversely
affect turf establishment
• Wetting and/or water retention agents and fertilisers shall be applied at this stage.
Alternatively they may be incorporated into the sandy soil mix.
• Spread the sandy soil mixture laterally using inverted rakes or square faced shovels.
• Level off the surface evenly with a stiff broom and lightly compact the area using water
sprayed evenly across the surface.
• The tops of the grass pavior cells must be just covered with the sandy soil mix if the
area is to be turfed, and by 15 mm if the area is to be hydroseeded.
• Ensure that vehicles are not driven over newly installed grass pavior surfaces.
Turf Establishment
The Contractor shall: -

• Lay sprigs or rolled turf onto the sandy soil layer. Turf strips should be well joined
and kept moist, especially during hot dry periods over the summer months.
• Turfed areas should be protected from traffic except for emergency vehicles until the
root system becomes anchored to the subgrade below the interconnected grass pavior
cells. The time required, depending upon growing conditions, will generally be 4 to 8
weeks.
Hydroseeding

• Apply grass seed and mulch over the grass pavior sandy soil filled cells using proper
hydroseeding equipment. Poorly germinated areas should be re-seeded immediately.
The seeded area should be watered frequently and kept moist for at least 2 months.
• Seeded areas need to be protected from traffic, other than emergency vehicles, for a
period of 6 to 8 weeks, or until the grass can tolerate traffic.
EXW/13
EXTERNAL WORKS
Ongoing maintenance

• Regular water regimes and correct fertiliser applications are essential. Watering
hydroseeded and turfed areas 2 to 3 times per day is recommended for the first 2 to 3
weeks. Watering cycles should be increased if hot dry windy conditions are being
experienced, especially during hot and dry months.
The subgrade material shall have a minimum soaked CBR of 5%, be compacted to min 95% of
dry density obtainable using the modified A.A.S.H.T.O. Compaction Test (heavy hammer),
200mm thick sub-base to CBR 30% will be necessary if the subgrade material cannot achieve the
required density.
Construct bus bays including 100mm thick of graded stone (nominal size 50mm), 50mm
compacted sand and 200mm thick concrete (Grade 30) with 2 layers of fabric reinforcement A7.
Construct 100 x 210mm high in-situ concrete (Grade 30) restraining kerb including excavation
and foundation, where necessary.
Prepare and apply two coats of non-reflective thermoplastic white paint in 150mm wide unbroken
lines, directional arrowheads signs, etc. on driveways.
Prepare and apply two coats of non-reflective thermoplastic white paint in 100mm wide unbroken
lines to bus bays.
23. CARPARKS
Construct carparks including all necessary earthworks, trimming, levelling and grading,
compacting, a 200mm thick sub-base material, a 200mm thick bed of graded stone base course as
before described, a 50mm thick sand and approved sub-soil drainage of 100% post-consume
recycled plastic of HDPE / LDPE, and precast concrete (Grade 25) aeration slab laid on sand bed
and filling all voids with approved topsoil and turfing.
Supply and lay precast concrete flush kerb between carparks including all necessary excavation
and concrete foundation.
Prepare and apply two coats of non-reflective thermoplastic white paint in parking lots lines,
numerals and letterings, etc. on carparks.
EXW/14
EXTERNAL WORKS
24. PRECAST CONCRETE INTERLOCKING BLOCK PAVING
Materials
Interlocking block paving shall be shaped, non-chamfered, concrete blocks 100mm thick
supplied by approved Suppliers.
Samples shall be submitted for approval before ordering from Supplier. A sample area, which will
form part of the permanent pavings, shall be carried out in advance to establish the standard
required and the method of finishing at perimeters and around inspection covers, etc.
The subgrade should be adequately drained and protected against inundation, well compacted
and stabilised to achieve the required bearing capacity.
The preparation of the sub-base should be compatible with the performance requirement of the
paving. The sub-base course shall be compacted, trimmed and graded to within plus or minus
10mm of designed level and profiles.
The laying course shall consist of a car efully screeded sand about 50mm thick between the
surface course and sub-base.
Edge restraint is essential to prevent the block from moving sideways and becoming loose. It is
normally provided by standard kerbs or side of drains.
The length and width of all blocks from the sample shall be within 2mm of the nominal specified
dimension, while the thickness tolerance of all blocks shall be 3mm.
Technical Data
Perforated
Concrete Slab Concrete Block
Dimension : 450 x 450 x 100mm 225 x 112.5 x 100mm
Nature of System : Fully Interlocking System Fully Interlocking System
Number Per Sq M : 4.94 Pieces 39.5 Pieces
Compressive Strength : 49 N/mm2 49 N/mm2
Water Absorption : 5% 5%
Perforation Area : 35% -
Colour : To be selected by SO To be selected by SO
A total of 12 pieces of the selected colour range shall be submitted for approval.
The formation (subgrade) and sub-base shall not deviate from the true level by more than 20mm.
The finished wearing surface level shall not deviate vertically at any point from the true
pavement surface by more than 10mm.
The level of any two adjacent blocks shall not differ by more than 2mm.
The requirements for gradients and cross falls shall be as for other road construction materials.
Edge restraint is deemed to include kerbs of cast in-situ concrete or precast concrete. Where an
alternative form of edge restraint is proposed, the SO’s approval shall be obtained in writing.
The clear distance between edge restraint should be as accurate as possible to prevent or reduce cutting.
EXW/15
EXTERNAL WORKS
Workmanship
The laying course shall consist of graded sharp sand containing not more than 3 percent of silt
and clay by weight and with not more than 10 percent retained on a 5mm sieve. It should be
loosely laid and should not be too moist so that the fine sand could enter the joint easily.
The sand shall be struck off to such a level that, when blocks have been vibrated, the upper face
of the blocks shall be true to the finish level as stipulated. Before the blocks are laid, the laying
course shall not be subjected to any form of trafficking including pedestrian traffic, before,
after or during screeding.
Vibration of the block shall be completed as soon as possible to ensure that the sand surcharge
is correct and, if not, alterations made.
Interlocking concrete paving blocks should be installed whereby the long axis of the blocks
shall be as such as possible approximately 90 degrees to the centreline of the road.
The blocklayer must work from the surface he has just laid and is continually supplied with
blocks brought to him over those already in place. This means that the paving will progress into
the site, unlike other road construction and concreting methods.
Blocks shall be placed firmly together without disturbance to the laying course and the order of
placing the block shall ensure this.
At edges or obstructions such as along the kerb and gulley gratings or manholes, special edge
or end blocks must be used and only when really needed standard blocks shall be cut to fit.
Where it is really not possible to cut blocks to fit neatly to an obstruction, the obstruction shall
be surrounded with concrete in advance or paving and the blocks cut to fit at the edge of the
concrete cast in-situ.
The surface course shall be subject to passes of a v ibrating place compactor as the work
proceeds. Performance of vibrators to be as follows:-
- Blocks up to 80mm thick : Plate area 0.20 - 0.40m2 centrifugal force 7 - 16 KN,
frequency 75 - 100 Hz.
- Blocks over 80mm thick : Place area 0.35 - 0.50m2 centrifugal force 16 - 20 KN,
frequency 75 - 100 Hz.
- Brick blocks : Vibrator plate to be rubber faced.
Sufficient passes shall be made to compact the laying course and produce an even surface to the
Vibration shall not be carried out within one metre of an unrestrained edge.
After initial vibrating fine sand shall be brushed into joints and further passes of the vibrating
plate compactor made to fill the joints, more sand being spread over the surface if required.
Small gaps left at the edges of the block paving, including against obstruction with a paved
area, shall be filled to the full depth of the paving blocks with a dry sand cement mortar not
leaner than 3:1, compacted in.
The Contractor shall allow for the cost of forming the special pattern at the centre of the parade square.
Protection
Provide general protection as specified. Protect from any contamination or traffic that could
damage the paving. Lay temporary covers where necessary.
EXW/16
EXTERNAL WORKS
25. FOOTPATH AND WALKWAY

Construct footpath and walkway including earthworks, 150mm thick hardcore, 50mm thick
lean concrete and cement finish laid on reinforced concrete slab unless otherwise shown on the
drawings.
Supply and lay 100 x 230mm high in-situ concrete (Grade 30) kerb including excavation and
foundation.
26. CONDUIT DRAIN

Supply and lay concrete spun pipe and fittings to SS 183 butt jointed and laid in trench including
concrete bed and haunching to half height of pipe and lean concrete under bed. The conduit drain
shall be sized according to the drainage requirement and the minimum diameter shall be 300mm.
Supply and drive where necessary 150mm x 150mm tanalised timber piles for the concrete spun pipe
including bringing piling rig into site, moving rig around site and removing from site on completion.
27. CONCRETE APRON

Construct reinforced concrete apron including reinforcement, finishes, etc. all to be suspended
from the ground beams.
28. ROAD SIGNS

Supply and install “NO ENTRY” and “STOP” road signs including galvanised post and
concrete foundation.
29. CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES

Provide and erect new PVC coated chain link fence and 2 nos. new lockable steel for Public Access at
existing fence location.
Provide and erect chain link fence to other areas as indicated on the drawings.
Construct chain link fence 1800mm high consisting of 65mm No. 8 SWG PVC coated
galvanised mesh, galvanised steel angle, tubular posts set in concrete (Grade 30) bases and
enamel painting to posts.
Construct chain link fence 4600mm high consisting of 63mm No. 8 SWG PVC coated galvanised
mesh, one line of No. 8 SWG galvanised wire at bottom of fence, top and mid-rails, galvanised
steel tubular posts set in concrete (Grade 30) bases and enamel painting to posts.
Construct 250mm high x 150m m wide concrete (Grade 30) kerbs to base of high fencing
including all excavation and formwork.
Supply and fix galvanised mild steel gates and posts including barrel bolt with hasp and staple,
padlock, purpose made mild steel machined pivot hinges and mild steel drop bolt.
The Contractor shall provide new high security pad locks to all gates complete with 3 sets keys.
EXW/17
EXTERNAL WORKS
30. FABRIC WELDED FENCE as indicated on the drawings

Provide and install 50 x 50m m or 50 x 150mm double rolled welded fabric galvanised mild
steel mesh fence with galvanized mild steel framed hollow section all in pigmented organic
coated finish comprising (5mm diameter wires) fixed on a nd including FPO-H24 or other
approved equivalent galvanised fence post in pigmented organic coated finish complete with U-
clips, post caps, bolts, nuts, intermediate supports and concrete foundation.
The Contractor shall provide new high security pad locks to all gates complete with 3 sets keys.
31. CONDUIT AND MANHOLES FOR TELECOM

Supply and install UPVC pipe and fittings in trench to BS 3506 Class C or other approved
equivalent including 14 SWG galvanised iron drawing-off wire.
Construct standard Telecom manholes complete with cast iron medium duty cover and frame,
cover to be purchased from Telecom and sealed with grease.
32. CONDUIT AND MANHOLES FOR POWERGRID

Construct standard PowerGrid manholes complete with 100mm thick precast reinforced concrete
slab with lifting rings.
Supply and install 150mm diameter heavy duty UPVC pipes and fittings in trench to BS 3506
Class C including 14 SWG galvanised iron drawing off wire.
33. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL RISERS

Supply and install UPVC pipe and fittings in trench to BS 3506 Class C or other approved
equivalent including 14 SWG galvanised iron drawing-off wire.
34. CULVERTS
Construct culverts to all access over drains including heavy duty hot-dip galvanised steel hinged
vehicular grating and frame, breaking up of existing drain, temporary stop off and divert flow of
existing drain and reinstate and make good all works disturbed on completion.
Supply and drive 150mm x 150mm tanalised timber piles including piling rig, mild steel
connector and cutting off piles to receive concrete.
35. TURFING
Notwithstanding that the turfed areas shall be maintained for a period of 12 months, the
Contractor shall take note that all turfed areas shall be maintained (grass cutting, weeding, etc) to
the required frequency and standards all as specified herein until FINAL HANDOVER TO THE
MAINTENANCE AGENT TO BE WITNESSED BY MOE.
The Contractor shall deem to have taken note of the above provisions and included it in his tender
sum accordingly.
EXW/18
EXTERNAL WORKS
36. STAMPED CONCRETE PATTERN PAVING (Where Applicable)

Where applicable and as shown on t he drawings, supply and install stamped concrete pattern
paving, able to withstand fire-engine access. The patterns’ colours are to be submitted for SO’s
selection.
The concrete shall be between 75mm to 100mm thick and is cast evenly onto the prepared surface
with one layer of fabric mesh reinforcement. After sufficient trowelling and hydration time, and
using the “dry-shake” method, colour shake/hardener is evenly spread out onto the freshly laid
concrete. The surface is once again trowelled and bull-floated to ensure colour evenness on the
concrete surface. While the concrete is still in the plastic stage of set, release agent is evenly
applied on the surface. The application of the release agent is for added colour enhancement;
giving a dual tone colour texture on the completed job and to facilitate the pattern printing process
which is achieved by the use of stamped concrete pattern moulds. When the imprinted concrete
surface is firmed, it is thoroughly washed and finally sealed with a concrete sealant to further
enhance and protect the imprinted surface.
Colour Shake/Hardener
The colour shake/hardener shall be formulated using appropriate amount of colour pigments, fine
grade silica sand (hardener component) and cement. T he colour pigments in or formulation are
manufactured in Germany and are UV resistance. T o ensure sufficient colour strength and
uniformity, approximately 2.5 – 3.0 kgs of colours are used for each square metre of work depending
on concrete condition.
Concrete Sealer
Sealer is on acrylic type. It is clear and is non-yellowing. To ensure sufficient protection on
imprinted concrete surface, 2 applications are required.
Crack Control Joints

Crack control joints shall be inserted into concrete at intervals of between 4-6 metres apart. Width of
joints at concrete surface is approximately 4mm. Depth of which joint is inserted is approximately
24mm.
37. HANDICAPPED ACCESS AT DRAIN GRATINGS

Supply and install 3mm thick stainless steel chequered plate across hot-dipped galvanised steel
gratings for handicapped wheel chair access t o all external areas that need access acr oss apron
drain gratings and to all ramp access that runs across apron drain gratings.
38. HANDICAPPED SCUPPER DRAIN GRATINGS

Supply and install stainless steel closely spaced gratings, to BCA’s approval, to all scupper drains
running across corridors for handicapped wheel chair access.
EXW/19
EXTERNAL WORKS
39. PROPRIETORY COLOURCOAT ACRYLIC COATING SYSTEM (Where Applicable)

To supply and install anti-abrasive anti-dust acrylic based and cementitious aggregate mix
flooring system, suitable for outdoor application and use, to be applied to the outdoor basketball
court, volleyball court, and net ball court. The approved acrylic system should consist of 2 to 3
mm in thickness, to level uneven substrate promoting economical in its application.
The approved acrylic floor system should have the following features:
a) Excellent weather resistance.
b) Waterproof.
c) Suitable for outdoor application.
d) High tenacity film, high adhesion and durability.
e) High elasticity and tensile strength.
f) Able to correct crack leakage in concrete substrate.
g) Good vapour permeability.
h) Effectively in preventing “blistering” because of moisture emission.
i) Can be reinforced with fibreglass to prevent leakage from bridge crack.
j) Good petroleum-resistance.
k) Requires only 2 to 3 mm thick.
l) Fast application.
m) Short curing time.
n) Environmentally friendly water-based system.
o) Odorless, non-flammable.
p) Easy maintenance by re-coating.
EXW/20
EXTERNAL WORKS
PROPRIETORY COLOURCOAT ACRYLIC COATING SYSTEM (CONT’D.)
Substrate Preparation
The acrylic floor system shall comprise the following components:
• Finishing Coat – Coloured top coat elastic acrylic water based resin
• Anti-skid Coat – acrylic anti-skid acrylic water based resin
• Body Coat – special elastic acrylic water based resin
• Primer Coat – high penetrating, adhesive water based acrylic resin
• Aggregate Mix – factory prepacked cement and silica sand.
The above components should be used and mixed according to the method statement below;
Concrete should have physical strength of 3000 PSI and above. Surface should be dust-free,
aged for 23 days and above. Concrete surface should be moderately smooth. Keep surface free
from grease or other substances to ensure good adhesion.
If the substrate is too porous, mix Body Coat resin to Aggregate Mix in the ratio 1:1. S tir
continuously until the mixture is completely dispersed. U se a sponge to fill in the porous
surface and allow 24 hours for complete drying.
If the substrate’s surface is uneven, mix Body Coat resin with Aggregate Mix in the ratio 1:1.5
for levelling.
If there are cracks, combine with fibreglass for bridge reinforcement.
Apply directly if the substrate is neither porous, uneven nor cracked.
Application method
Mix Primer Coat with water in the ratio of 1:1 and apply 2 coats with a minimum interval of 3
~ 4 hours in between coatings. Let it dry overnight.
Mix 18kg of Body Coat with 18kg of cement and add some water and stir continuously until all the
particles are dispersed. Apply as thin as possible to seal off any porous areas. Let it dry overnight.
Mix Body Coat with Aggregate Mix in the ratio of 1:1 and stir continuously until all the particles are
dispersed. Use a jagged squeeze, depending on the actual thickness required. Use a spider roller to
de-foam and allow a minimum curing time of 7 ~ 10 days before the next coating.
To spray on 2 c oats of Anti-Skid Coat (anti-abrasive and anti-slippage body coat) with a
minimum interval of 3 ~ 4 hours in between coatings.
To spray on 1 coat of Finishing Coat (anti-abrasive and anti-slippage topcoat coat). Let it dry
overnight. Full cure : 5 days.
Apply games court lines as indicated in drawings. Ready for use once the lines are dried.
EXW/21
EXTERNAL WORKS
PROPRIETORY COLOURCOAT ACRYLIC COATING SYSTEM (CONT’D.)
Shelf Life
1 year in unopened containers, stored under cool dry condition.
Technical Information
Performance Test Method Result

or other approved equivalent Standards
Abrasion resistance ASTM D-4060 CS- < 0.56g

17/1000 g loading
Adhesion JIS-A-6909 > 10 kgf/cm2
Water permeability JIS-A-6909 < 1 cm
Resistance against repeated JIS-A-6909 No peeling, cracking,
warming and cooling action swelling
Hardness Shore A 70 – 85
Elongation CNS-A-6986 > 30%
Bending test – 10 m/m JIS-A-5707 Pass
Petroleum resistance JIS-A-5707 30 days Not dissolved
immersion in petroleum
Water resistance JIS-A-5707 30 days Not dissolved
immersion in water
Weathering resistance QUV 500 hours No degradation &
colour change
40. TREE PROTECTION
General Site Clearance

Before site clearance Contractor are to ensure that all trees shown to be retained in the contract
drawing still exist and are in good condition. Photographs of the condition of each tree must be
taken and submitted for record and reference.
Care and Responsibility

The Contractor shall take extra care to ensure no tree is fallen, damaged or branches pruned or
roots cut without the approval of Nparks and SO in the site because this area is under tree
conservation area. C ontractor shall be responsible to maintain the health of the existing trees
especially trees demarcated for protection failing which he shall be held responsible to explain
and pay for any penalties imposed by the Authority if the existing trees are found in damaged
condition, missing or dead during the construction period or during the CSC inspection.
EXW/22
EXTERNAL WORKS
TREE PROTECTION (CONT’D.)
General Tree Protection
Trees marked for retention within the contract boundary are shown on the Contract
Development plan and must be protected at all times during the entire construction period.
A temporary hoarding of minimum 3m x 3m radius for individual tree must be constructed

around tree. Material used may be timber or lightweight metal structures such as Aluminum.
For a large grouping of existing trees, a continuous temporary hoarding surrounding the entire
group of trees will be constructed.
Trees earmarked for conservation is to be properly protected during the entire construction
period i.e. put up bright orange polyethylene fencing around the protected root zone
No dumping of excavated material and storage of building material or equipment are allowed
within the 3m radius stipulated on the plan or from the existing tree trunk.
All building debris and chemical wastes to be hauled away from the trees/other plants and they
should not be burned or buried on the site.
No major roots and tree branches more than 100mm diameter is to be cut without prior
approval from NParks.
Loamy topsoil is to be filled immediately around the tree base after the nearest proposed
structure is built e.g. retaining walls.
Tree trunk of those trees earmarked for conservation is to be properly protected during the
construction of the proposed development.
Watering and fertilizing must be provided during the entire construction period including
spraying of appropriate chemicals to treat existing trees, which may be attacked by insects.
To prevent soil compaction and damage to exposed roots around the existing tree trunk, Root
system bridges may be installed.
You may wish to install root system bridges to prevent soil compaction or damage to exposed
roots around the existing trees.
No temporary structure within the protected root zone is allowed.
EXW/23
EXTERNAL WORKS
TREE PROTECTION (CONT’D.)
Guideline for Tree Protection Zone

Girth (circumference of tree trunk taken at 500mm ht. above ground level)
GIRTH MINIMUM PROTECTION ZONE
1) Less than 1M 2M radius or 4M diameter protection.
2) More than 1M 3M radius or 6M diameter protection.
(less than 1.5M)
3) More than 1.5M 4M radius or 8M diameter protection.
(less than 2M)
More than 2M 5M radius or 10M diameter protection.
EXAMPLE OF TREE PROTECTION TO EXISTING TREE
41. MINOR SEWER WORKS

The minor sewer works shall be executed by a licensed plumber and shall be in full accordance with
the requirements of the Ministry of Environment (ENV). If the work is not satisfactory in any respect,
the Contractor shall rectify the defects at his own expense.
Unless otherwise stated, works in connection with minor sewer/drain line shall be carried out in
accordance with the latest edition of the General Specification for Sewerage Works" (or "Standard
Specification" as compiled by the ENV). Where discrepancy arises between the provisions in the
Standard Specification and the General Specification or any other Specifications, the provisions in the
Standard Specification takes precedence on all matters relating to works on the minor sewers.
Lay new drain pipes/sewer lines all as shown on the Drawings including all connections to manholes
etc. to the approval of relevant authority.
Construct manhole complete with cast iron covers and frames to SS30: 1981 at locations as shown on
the Drawings.
EXW/24
EXTERNAL WORKS
MINOR SEWER WORKS (CONT’D.)
The distance indicated between manholes are approximate only. The Contractor shall undertake to
construct the entire sewer line as shown in the Drawings, to the invert depths or any other depths that
may be required by the Sewerage Department of ENV, so as to put into effect a drainage system that
functions effectively to the requirements of the ENV.
Test the whole of the new works with water, etc. all as specified in the Standard Specification to the
complete satisfaction of the SO and ENV, both before and after covering up a nd flush out on
completion of the works. The Contractor shall supply, at his own expense, all necessary testing
apparatus and water and shall provide all labour to fill and empty and pipes and dispose of surplus
water. Any pipes showing leaks, sweating or other signs of porosity or failure shall be replaced and
retested at the expense of the Contractor.
UPVC pipes shall be to SS272: 1983, vitrified clay pipes shall be to BS65: 1975 and ductile iron pipes
shall be to BS 4772 C lass K9 with Tyton joints. T hey shall be laid on C oncrete (Grade 30) bed
including haunching all to ENV details and requirements.
In addition, pipes must be selected from the list of approved pipes published by the ENV, current as at
the date of tender.
Contractor shall remove existing pavement or vegetation for execution of the works and to reinstate them
upon completion of the works. Area with vegetation shall be reinstated by replanting with cow grass
(Axonopus Compressus), spot turfed, on 100 mm thick selected top soil.
Contractor shall submit the proposed method statement together with a risk assessment report to the SO
before commencement of the project. The proposed method of statement shall include the details of the
protection system for the new services and existing road structures.
Contractor’s PE shall apply and obtain the approval and permit to commence work from the relevant
authorities before the commencement of the minor sewer diversion works.
Contractor shall submit the construction programme of the minor sewer diversion works. T his
programme shall be detailed to reflect the site constraints and interface with the road construction
works or other services laying project if any.
Details of the temporary traffic schemes shall be submitted to the SO. The traffic layout plans shall
show and reflect all necessary temporary traffic signs, traffic markings and temporary signs etc. to be
implemented during the process of the minor sewer diversion works. T emporary footpaths shall be
proposed if the existing footpaths are affected by the diversion works. There shall be no reduction of
traffic lane during peak hours.
Upon the completion of the laying of the services, the contractor shall engaged a registered surveyor to
prepare and submit the as-built plans. These plans shall show the co-ordinates and reduced level depth
of the service lines, the longitudinal profile, the cross-sectional profiles, locations of all manholes etc.
The as-built drawings shall be endorsed by a registered surveyor.
42. GREASE TRAP

Construct grease trap consisting of precast concrete (Grade 30) chamber rings, standard aluminium
alloy strainer bucket, aluminium alloy removable fan shape plate, prefabricated glassfibre reinforced
plastic cover including all necessary excavation and backfilling, reinforced concrete base, brickwalls
and finishes.
43 SAMPLES
Provide samples at Contractor's own cost as r equired for SO's selection and approval and
EXW/25
EXTERNAL WORKS
44. SHOP DRAWINGS

For all work in relation to External Works, the Contractor shall submit shop fabrication
drawings for approval before commencement of any work/ fabrication.
Such shop drawings must be clearly annotated and drawn to facilitate checking including
design calculations.

EXW/26
FIRE FIGHTING AND HOSEREEL INSTALLATION
1. GENERALLY
The fire fighting and hosereel installations shall be executed by the Contractor if he is a l icensed
plumber, otherwise the works shall be executed by a fully licensed firm and shall be in full
compliance with the Public Utilities Board's Bye-Laws and if the works are not satisfactory in all
respects, the Contractor shall rectify the defects at his own cost.
The Contractor shall allow for all the builder's work in connection with the installation such as
cutting, chasing, coring, fixing bracket, touching up or making good floors and walls etc.
All expenses incurred for stamping fees required by the Public Utilities .Board shall be borne by the
Contractor.
Test the entire hosereel installation on completion to the satisfaction of the SO.
The Contractor shall on completion of the works, submit 1 set negative and 2 sets printed as-built
drawings showing the layout of the works to the SO.
2. FIRE HOSEREEL
Supply and install 30m x 25mm diameter recess type swivel hydraulic non-kink hosereels complete
with self-finished steel side discs, cast brass centre body with machined waterways and bearings,
spray jet nozzle with on/off handle, screw down globe valve on inlet to reel and wall bracket
complete with bolts including fixing to walls and jointing inlet to water pipe.
3. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Supply and fix BCA approved fire extinguishers inclusive of lockable cabinet as indicated on the
drawings, conforming to the requirements of the Fire Safety Bureau (Singapore Fire Service)
complete with handle, squeeze grip release vale, gas distribution’s safety catch and discharge nozzle
and mounted on brackets plugged and screwed to walls and columns.
4. FIRE-STOP
Supply and install approved fire-stop sealing compound to withstand 2 hours fire resistance to all
electrical risers which penetrate floor/walls in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
FFI/1
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS

FOR PILING, EXCAVATION OR BASEMENT WORKS
Annex I
Piling, Excavation or Basement Works : Explanatory Notes on Changes
BCA’s current requirements on pre-construction survey, precautionary and monitoring measures for these
works would remain. However, some changes are made in these areas and the revised requirements are
described below:-
1. At Permit Application Stage
i) Piling, Excavation or Basement Works
a) The builder is required to give an undertaking to BCA that a copy of the pre-
construction survey report shall be given to each of the owners of the neighbouring
properties before work commences.
2. Pre-Construction Stage (i.e. before work commences)
i) Piling Works
a) The builder is required to conduct a pre-construction survey of the neighbouring

properties and give a copy of the survey report to each of the owners of these properties
before work commences (the survey report need not be extended to BCA). The builder
is allowed to give to each neighbouring owner only the portion of the report relevant to
his property.
b) The Qualified Person appointed for structural works (hereinafter referred to as QP(ST))
is required to stipulate the allowable vibration limit for the builder to comply. This
limit should be stipulated after taking into account the vulnerability of the actual
neighbouring properties to vibration effects. However, the limit stipulated shall not be
any less stringent than the lowest peak particle velocity recommendation in the
prevailing Standard DIN 4150.
c) QP(ST) has to ensure that the builder submits to him a vibration monitoring plan
showing the locations of the vibration monitoring devices with the stipulated vibration
limit stated.
d) QP(ST) is required to submit such a vibration monitoring plan to BCA for record.
PEB/1

ii) Excavation or Basement Construction Works
a) The builder is required to conduct a pre-construction survey of the neighbouring

properties and give copy of the survey report to each of the owners of these properties
(the survey report need not be extended to BCA). The builder shall give to each
neighbouring owner only the portion of the report relevant to his property.
b) For the purpose of preventing any damage to the neighbouring properties, QP(ST) is
required to stipulate two allowable limits of ground movements (i.e. lateral deflection at
ground level of the temporary earth retaining system and the ground settlement in areas
adjacent to the excavation) at two critical levels (i.e. alert and work suspension levels).
The builder is required to ensure that these stipulated values are used in the temporary
works design.
Work Suspension Level
At this level, the values stipulated are the maximum allowable ground movements
based on soil conditions and the susceptibility of the neighbouring properties to
damage. If the work suspension level is reached or damage has occurred, the QP(ST)
has to ensure that all works on site are suspended pending further investigation and that
corrective measures are immediately taken to safeguard the neighbouring properties.
Alert Level
Alert level is the intermediate level at which the QP has to conduct check on the actual
behaviour of the temporary work system.
c) Within 1 m onth after the issuance of Permit or before commencement of works,

whichever is earlier, the QP is required to submit the following to BCA for record:
- design of temporary earth retaining works with the allowable limits of ground
movement stated in the drawings.
- monitoring plan and programme.
PEB/2

3. During Construction Stage
i) Piling Works
a) A copy of the whole pre-construction survey report is to be kept at site by the builder.
b) QP(ST) is to ensure that vibration monitoring is carried out by the builder and that a
copy of the monitoring results is kept at the site by the builder.
c) The reading for the monitoring is to be taken under the supervision of the QP(ST) or
the site supervisor.
d) The QP(ST) is to assess the vibration results and if the stipulated vibration limit is
exceeeded the works is to be suspended and BCA to be notified.
ii) Excavation or Basement Construction Works
a) A copy of the whole pre-construction survey report is to be kept at site by the builder.
b) The QP(ST) is required to inspect the construction of the temporary earth retaining
works to ensure that the stability of the neighbouring properties is not impaired or
damaged in any way.
c) The QP(ST) is required to monitor the ground movements and notify BCA if the
critical levels are exceeded. The QP(ST) is required to ensure that necessary corrective
actions are taken when the alert level is reached or work is suspended when the work
suspension level is reached.
Please note that the critical levels stipulated are theoretical values and the QP(ST) has
to monitor closely during actual construction to ensure that no da mage occurs to
neighbouring properties.
d) The builder is required to submit the monitoring results to the QP(ST) as work
progresses and ensure that a copy of the results is kept at site.
PEB/3
VISIONCARE FOR BUILDING WORKS
1. VISIONCARE FOR BUILDING WORKS
The works included under this section for Addition and Alteration Works shall include but not be
limited to the following works unless otherwise designated and approved by the SO :-
a) Supply and install aluminium louvres including fastening screws to replace the existing glass
louvres for the first two metres on two sides of the rooms (starting from the front walls of the
rooms where the whiteboards are located) including taking out existing glass louvres and
removing it off site. The rooms shall include existing teaching rooms / facilities, Principal
office, Vice-Principal office, School Administrator office, HOD room, Staff room, Library,
existing computer laboratories, etc. where applicable.
b) Supply and install steel adjustable louvred window frames with control mechanisms with
6mm thick clips to receive 150mm blades including screws to match to the above-mentioned
rooms. R euse existing louvres including taking out existing control mechanisms and
removing it off site. The Contractor shall allow in his Tender Sum for replacing existing glass
louvres which are chipped, cracked or defective with new to SO’s approval.
VBW/1
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR AIR-CONDITIONED ROOMS
1. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR AIR-CONDITIONED ROOMS WITH DOORS THAT

“OPEN-OUT” INTO THE CIRCULATION CORRIDOR
Where new and existing rooms need to be air-conditioned by the Contractor due to noise and dust,
the doors to these rooms that “open-out” into the circulation corridor, the following safety
requirements shall be complied with:
a) For rooms with windows along the corridor, the first panel of the opaque louvre window
next to each door shall be replaced with clear glass louvre to act as a vision panel.
b) Door closers to SO’s approval shall be installed to the each of the doors to reduce speed of
opening and closing.
c) The room doors and its parts including the door handles and locksets shall be blunt and
preferably have curved edges and a b road face to minimise injury when a person
accidentally knocks on it.
SRA/1
GUIDELINES FOR INSTALLATION OF FAN HOOKS

Introduction
In general, all ceiling fans shall be secured by using cast-in hooks for both hollow core
slabs and pre-stressed cast in-situ slabs as detailed in the Cast-In Method. It is acceptable
to have fans that are not centred in the ceiling panels. Consultants should avoid shifting
fan locations based on purely aesthetic reasons.
In the event, that the fan location must be shifted to avoid clashing with other fixtures or
more fans need to be added, anchor bolts shall be used in accordance to the design
guidelines and methods stipulated below.
Projects where different Installation Method is used
For projects where the fan hooks had been shifted and installed using a different method,
the contractor's C&S QP shall check the design and certify that the installation method
used is adequate and safe. Pull out tests. shall be carried out on 20% of the bolts installed
by an accredited lab. In the event of any failure, 100% testing shall be carried out. COW
will supervise the tests and the Contractor's C&S QP should conduct spot checks.
A) Cast-in Method
Generally, the fan hooks are cast into the slabs as shown in the schematic diagram
below. The fan hook is usually fabricated using 10 mm ø galvanised steel rod.
This option is preferable.
GIF/1
B) Installation using Anchor Bolts
i) Hollow Core Slabs
4 nos. of Hilti HKD-S M8x3 0 or other approved equivalent mounted onto base
plate of size 100mm x 100mm x 5 mm (thk) are used. The recommended
embedment depth is 30mm with hole size of 10mm diameter using electric drill for
its installation.
ii) Prestressed/Cast-in Slab
The details for the installation of ceiling fan by means of mounting steel plate and
hook are shown below.
4 nos. of Hilti HSA-KA M8x57 or other approved equivalent bolts mounted onto
base plate 100xl00x5t are to be used.
GIF/2
Guidelines to be followed where Anchor Bolts are used
a. The safety factor used in the design of anchor bolts shall be not less than
4. Higher factor of 4 rather than 3 is to be applied since holes drilled are
often not vertical and there is difficulty in maintaining accurate depth of
holes.
b. The weight of the fans used in our school projects 6 kg in general.
c. Installation of hooks are to be checked by Clerk-Of-Works.
d. 20% of the bolts are to be checked by the pull-out test. One such failure
will warrant a 100% check.
e. Certification of installation of anchor bolts by contractor’s C&S QP.
GIF/3
LANDSCAPING WORKS
1. SAFETY MEASURES
The Contractor shall co-ordinate closely with the SO and make all necessary arrangements pertaining to
safety measures at his own expense to erect temporary protection screens, hoardings, warning lights, signs,
etc, in conspicuous positions and to operate them as may be required.
2. PLANT SAMPLES AND MOCK-UPS
Before commencement of any Works, the Contractor shall submit all plant samples and constraint
mock-ups for the SO’s approval.
The plant samples and mock-ups that are approved shall indicate the minimum standard that the
Contractor would have to achieve in the execution of works.
The SO may reject any mock-up or sample which; in his/her opinion is not up t o the approved
standard. In the case of rejection, the Contractor shall undertake all necessary rectification works or
resubmit samples to achieve the quality and workmanship as specified. No claim by the Contractor
arising therefrom shall be entertained.
3. NURSERY SITE
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a nursery site with a minimum area of 2.0 hectares, at his
own cost, located within Singapore main island for the purpose of storing and nursing of the plants
specified in this Contract for the entire duration of this contract.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safe transporting of plant materials to the
proposed work site.
4. PLANT PROTECTION
All plant materials are to be carefully protected and if necessary wrapped in the nursery during
lifting, awaiting transportation, during transportation, and unloading and during storage on site. Any
evidence of unsatisfactory protection to the roots, stems, branches and leaves shall be rejected by
SO.
Unprotected plants are not to be transported during very hot weather and all plants must be kept
moist during transportation and storage. No plant material shall be left on site unplanted for more
than two days.
5. WORK BY MACHINE OR HAND
All operations herein described shall be carried out by suitable machine or by hand. A ny work
around the base of existing trees, in confined spaces or which is impractical to carry out by machine
for any reason shall be executed by hand. All costs incurred shall be borne by the Contractor.
Heavy machinery, which would excessively consolidate the subsoil, where planting shall occur,
shall not be used during any operations nor shall any heavy machinery be taken over areas that are
prepared for planting or turfing.
The Contractor shall propose and seek permission from the SO for a fixed route at site for his heavy
machinery to travel.
LSW/1
LANDSCAPING WORKS
6. NOTICE OF INTENTIONS
The contractor shall give 48 hours in written notice the intention to commence any of the following
operations:
a) Setting out
b) Planting
c) Topsoiling
d) Turfing
e) Fertilising
f) Maintenance visits
7. PLANT SUBSTITUTIONS
If the Contractor is unable to supply a particular species of plant, he shall notify the SO in advance
of his intention to submit an alternative. No substitution shall be allowed without the approval of
the SO.
Notice of the proposed substitutions shall be given sufficiently in advance of installation to ensure
that the substituted material conforms to the specifications in the Contract. Substitutions requested by
the Contractor after work has commenced on site shall not be entertained.
8. TOOLS & EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall use suitable tools and equipment for carrying out the works and to ensure that
all labour employed on the site is fully and properly equipped at all times.
9. GUARANTEE
All plant materials furnished under this section shall be guaranteed for a period of 12 months from
the completion as to the species, hybrid, and flower colour and/or variety specified herein or in the
drawings. If after acceptance of the project by the SO any guaranteed plant material proves to be of
a different species hybrid, flower colour and/or variety not initially determinable, the Contractor
shall replace that plant with a new plant of the originally specified species, hybrid, flower colour
and/or variety.
10. SITE PREPARATION
The Contractor shall set out the works in accordance with the Drawings or as instructed by the SO
and seek SO’s approval prior to the commencement of the Works.
The Contractor shall peg location of the proposed landscaping works specified in the drawings for
the SO’s approval prior to commencement of the Works.
The Contractor shall notify the SO of any discrepancy at the work site between that shown on the
Drawings and actual area on the ground prior to commencement of the Works; and shall make all
necessary adjustments as instructed by the SO.
LSW/2
LANDSCAPING WORKS
11. EARTHWORKS AND GRADING
Earthworks
Earthworks shall involve excavation for planting holes and bed; including fine grading of earth
banks and landscaped areas. T he Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that planting holes
and beds are kept free of water.
The Contractor shall stop the works if, in the opinion of the SO that the weather condition is such as
to prevent the satisfactory completion of any operation or causes necessary nuisance or disturbance
to any parties. He shall only recommence the works until the SO considers the weather condition
satisfactory for re-commencement.
Excavation shall be carried out to the widths and depths shown or implied on the drawings, or to
such a lesser or greater depths as directed by the SO.
During excavation, it is required that the Contractor take all prudent steps or precautions to
determine the nature or type of material below ground in order to protect all workmen, plants and
equipment on the site.
Where soft or wet ground is encountered, prior to preparation the subgrade, and the ground cannot
be satisfactorily compacted, the Contractor shall submit a written request for this to be inspected.
The area is to be dug out and replaced with a suitable material and evaluated by the SO.
Should the Contractor excavate beyond or below the designated lines and/or levels, he shall, at his
own expense remove all loose excavated material and replace the soil excavated in error and
compact properly.
If, in the opinion of the SO, the base of any excavated or any material to be excavated become
unsuitable due to the Contractor’s operation, the Contractor shall at his own expense, carry out any
necessary excavation and make up in a similar manner to the above.
A complete sub-graded formation on w hich there is standing water, soft spots or slurry shall be
deemed to be unstable and shall be rectified at the Contractor’s expense.
Surplus material resulting from the excavations for path formation or drainage trenches shall be
taken off site at Contractor’s own expense unless otherwise directed by SO.
Grading Works
Grading works shall involve the forming of earth mounds from imported materials where specified
or from the soil generated by the excavations. The soil shall be graded using suitable machinery to
the contoured earth forms indicated on t he drawings. S oil when in a dry enough state for easy
working, shall be distributed to the correct areas and laid in layers not exceeding 200mm thick and
compacted to the satisfaction of the SO.
Earth slopes shall be formed from the compacted mounds to the gradients and levels shown on the
drawings, accounting for the topsoil depths to be included after subsoil formation is completed.
Importation of additional fill to make up the required level shall only be carried out with the written
permission of the SO.
Earthwork levels are to be carried out to the contours shown on the drawings to a maximum gradient
of 1:2.5. The shaping will follow the contours shown on the plans in general terms or as directed by
the SO on site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the completed soil mounds and shall
replace any portion of the earthworks areas which erodes, slumps, silts or is otherwise damaged by
the outwashing of soils.
Fine grading shall be carried out using small sized earth moving equipment or by hand, and shall
involve final modelling of the earth contours produced by the major grading exercise.
Application of topsoil mixes and planting shall not take place until the fine grading is completed.
LSW/3
LANDSCAPING WORKS
12. MATERIALS & PREPARATION
Soils & Ameliorants
Subsoil
Subsoil shall be free draining soil, free from all impurities including but not limited to chemicals,
oils, cement, unworkable clays and stones exceeding 50mm in diameter. Subsoil areas to be
backfilled with topsoil shall be inspected by SO prior to placement of topsoil.
Topsoil Mixes
Topsoil shall be free draining organic soil obtained from the depths less than 300m below the
original surface, of a workable crumbly and lump free loamy character and shall contain no grass or
weed growth of any kind, other foreign material or stones exceeding 25mm in diameter. A 1 litre
sample shall be submitted to and approved by the SO with agronomy soil test data prior to
installation or mixing.
Topsoil specification pH : 5.5 - 7.8

Electrical conductivity : 1:2.5(W/v)
Soil-water extract not exceeding 1500 micrOhm/cm
(1500 MicroSeimens / cm)
Soil texture : Sand (0.05-2.00mm) Max 750% Min 20%
Silt (0.002-0.0-5mm) Max 60% Min 5%
Clay (<0.002mm) Max 30% Min 5%
Soil Conditioner
Soil conditioner shall be approved peatmoss, dried treated sludge, organic compost or friable
growing medium for plants. It shall be resistant to rapid decay, free from soluble salts below
900ppm, pH 6-7, free from large lumps or debris. Coco-peat shall not be accepted. A 1 litre sample
shall be submitted to be approved by the SO with back up test data prior to installation.
Sand
Sand shall be clean, coarse angular, well graded material, free from soluble salts. P articles shall
range in size so that 80-100% passes the 1mm sieve and 0-50% passes the 250 micron sieve.
Organic compost
Organic compost shall be approved organic vegetable compost produced by a thorough horticultural
or industrial composting process.
Compost shal have a clean undecomposed smell and free from any rotting substances, debris, refuse,
clay or visible fungus. A sample and test data shall be submitted for approval before use. All
compost is to be sterilised before being packed and transported. A ny odourous materials used on
site shall be rejected. A ny vermin resulting from the use of organic compost shall have to be
controlled by the Contractor within 12 hours of any infestation.
Lightweight aggregate
Lightweight aggregate shall be an approved law-density inert material such as expanded shale, clay,
charcoal, granules or vermiculite and free from dust and debris, pH 6 - 6:5 and free from soluble
salts. A 2 litre sample shall be submitted to and approved by the SO prior to installation.
LSW/4
LANDSCAPING WORKS
MATERIALS & PREPARATION (CONT’D.)
Soil Mixes
General
The following soil mixes are to be used. Minor changes to the proportions shown for particular
species may be required.
Soil Mix A - Turf, Groundcovers and Shrubs

Each tree for planting should be at least 1 metre cube in size and should be backfilled with 3 parts of
topsoil and 1 pa rt of sludge planting mixture. Each tree base is to be protected with a tree collar
protector made of PVC (200mm long x 100mm diameter x 2mm thick) with a slit cut longitudinally.
Soil Mix A for use in ground level shrub and turf planting areas shall comprise the components listed
below which shall be mechanically cultivated to the correct proportions prior to placement on site.
Soil Mix A shall comprise :
a) Topsoil 50%
b) Sand 20%
c) Soil Conditioner 15%
d) Organic Compost 15%
Soil Mix B Trees

Soil Mix B for use in all tree pits in external areas only.
Soil Mix B shall comprise :
a) Topsoil 40%
b) Sand 30%
c) Conditioner 15%
d) Organic Compost 15%
Soil Samples
The Contractor shall arrange for a sample of each topsoil mix to be tested at an approved soil testing
laboratory. Soil analyst shall include the following:
a) pH
b) Nutrient values (N.P.K)
c) Soluble salt content (electrical conductivity)
d) Physical structure (sand, silt, clay & organic content as a %)
e) Toxic substances (heavy metal)
f) Recommendations for amelioration
The Contractor shall submit the topsoil analysis to the SO well in advance of the commencement
date for of topsoiling.
The Contractor shall allow in his rates for carrying out any ameliorating measures deemed necessary
by the topsoil analysis.
A 0.01 metre 3 sample of each of the topsoil mixes shall be submitted to the SO for the approval
before importation and use and shall be stored under cover until the works are completed. If the
Contractor intends to use more than one source for the supply of topsoil, he shall submit samples
and arrange for testing to be carried out for samples from each of the sources. The acceptance of the
samples does not mean that all topsoil or subsoil will be accepted if the quality falls substantially
below the standard of the original sample.
LSW/5
LANDSCAPING WORKS
Soil Preparation & Application of Soil Mixes

All areas to be topsoiled shall be cleared of rubbish, weeds, debris and all stones exceeding 25mm in
diameter. Any areas that are contaminated by petrol, oil or other toxic substances shall be excavated
to 300mm below the contamination or as directed by the SO. S uch excavated material shall be
removed off site. The excavated areas shall be backfilled with approved imparted topsoil as
specified. These operations shall take place immediately before topsoiling commences.
All obstructions to cultivation or deleterious matter brought to surface shall be removed from the site
and any voids left by this operation shall be backfilled with approved imported materials as specified.
No topsoil or soil mixes shall be spread or planting be carried out until the subsoil operations have
been approved by the SO.
Topsoil or soil mixes shall be spread on the designated areas to the depths shown on the drawings or
as directed by the SO. The loose depths of the topsoil shall be sufficient to allow the area to confirm
to the levels as shown on the drawings after natural settlement has taken place. Soil mixes shall not
be compressed or rolled to achieve levels. C onversely, if levels drop below specified levels,
additional soil mix shall be added to achieve the designated levels.
Soil mixes shall be carefully spread in a moist condition, by machine or hand. The Contractor shall not
use very wet or dry soil mixes must not be used and heavy compaction of soil mixes is not allowed.
Soil mixes shall be spread to the following depths :
a) Turf areas 100mm
b) Groundcovers areas 300mm
c) Shrub areas 300mm
d) Sapling & large shrub pit plants 600 x 600 x 600mm pits
e) Trees 1000 x 1000 x 1000mm pits
f) Instant trees 1500 x 1500 x 1500mm pits
or unless directed otherwise by the SO or as shown on the drawings.
When, in the opinion of the SO, site conditions are unsuitable for working, soiling operations shall
cease and shall only be resumed when authorised by him or by the owner.
The Contractor shall be responsible for soil protection and shall take preventive measures to control
erosion and siltation of all areas and shall restore or replace any portion of the site which erodes silts
up or is otherwise damaged by outwashing of soil.
Fertilizers
Chemical fertilizers shall be approved granular and slow release compound fertilizers. They shall be
stored in waterproof sealed bags under shelter and kept away from water and direct sunlight.
Samples with analysis tags shall be submitted to and approved by the SO before use in the works.
Organic fertilizers shall be approved organic products such as organic liquid fertilizer, pellets or
granules manufactured primarily from organic materials. These products are to be from accredited
sources and technical data indicating sources of origin and manufacturing process must be submitted
and approved before use. Animal by products must be sterilised before being packed for transport
and odourous materials used on site shall be rejected.
LSW/6
LANDSCAPING WORKS
Mulches
Mulches shall be an approved friable-composted material such as oil palm husks, organic compost
or an approved mix. C oco-peat will not be allowed unless mixed in a proportion of 50-50 with
another mulching material free from soluble salts or toxic materials and resistant to rapid decay.
Mulches shall have pH of 5.5 - 7.0. Samples shall be submitted to the SO for approval before use.
Mulches shall be applied in a 50mm thick layer over the entire surface of shrub and groundcover
areas. Mulching shall be re-applied to planting areas as directed by the SO as and when necessary
after initial installation until the end of the Defects Liability Period.
Initial mulching shall take place within two days of installation of planting.
13. PLANT MATERIALS & PLANTING OPERATIONS
General
The following plant descriptions cover the different categories of plant material to be used on the
site. T hese descriptions and their accompanying drawing requirements must be studied carefully
and adhered to. P lants that do not reach the specified dimensions or quality characteristics in this
section or in the sizes and description as set out in the Specification and Fixed Schedule of Rates
shall be rejected and will have to be replaced at the Contractor’s own cost.
Trees and large feature plants that are grown in open ground for transplanting shall be prepared at
least 2 months before moving, either to containers in the nursery or direct to the site. Preparation of
in-ground trees shall be by root pruning to an approved rootball size. If roots over 25mm are
encountered these are to be cleanly cut with large secateurs or a pruning saw. The trench shall be at
least 200mm diameter or of size directed by the SO and dug t o the full specified depth of the
rootball. The tree is then allowed to settle for one month before final wrapping with protection and
lifting. The rootball is to be well watered during this period.
For trees that are to be containerised or rootwrapped, the lifting and placing in container; or wrapping is
to be done immediately after the root trenching operation is completed.
Plants to be transported or moved are to be thoroughly wrapped and protected prior to transporting.
Rootballs are to be wrapped and tied with gunny sack or hessian sacking if not containerised.
Exposed trunks are to be wrapped in rice straw including the lower parts of the branch system. The
upper branch system, especially if well furnished with leaves and twigs during transport is to be
completely wrapped in lightweight netting or cloth tied carefully to avoid damage to branches,
leaves and twigs. Trees are to be laid at an angle to prevent damage from overhead structures and
from buffeting and shall be covered by canvas as protection from wind. D amaged trees shall be
rejected on arrival at site.
All trees shall be either purchased and stored or grown in suitable nursery conditions within 3
months of award of the Contract, and shall be made ready for inspection by the SO. Nursery for pre-
growing these trees shall be situated within the Republic of Singapore. Failure to procure within
this time and to reveal the source of supply and location shall result in the SO sourcing the plant
materials for the Contractor, and such cost incurred shall be borne by the Contractor.
All trees specified for containerising or root wrapping after root pruning operations are to be well
furnished with leaves over the crown of the tree. Thinning of leaves to reduce transpiration to give a
50% cover is permissible providing due notification is given that thinning is required to ensure that
the trees can be inspected before work is done. Bare crowned trees shall be rejected.
Any trees which shed their leaves within 2 weeks of t ransplanting are to be replaced by the
Contractor at his expense.
LSW/7
LANDSCAPING WORKS
PLANT MATERIALS & PLANTING OPERATIONS (CONT’D.)
Trees
Instant trees
Instant trees shall be approved semi-mature trees especially prepared in advance for transplanting.
Root pruning to cleanly cut roots to the diameter of the rootball shall be carried out 3 m onths in
advance of transplanting. Trees shall have a 300 - 500mm stem circumference measured 1.0m from
the ground and shall have a clear trunk of a minimum 1.8m. The head shall be well balanced and
contain at least four main branches 500 - 1000mm long giving an overall height of 3 - 4m after
pruning. All saw cuts to be clean and free from any ripping or splitting and shall be trimmed smooth
after cutting with a sharp knife. Rootball dimension: diameter 1000mm x 600mm deep minimum.
Extra heavy standard trees
Extra heavy standard shall be approved large size nursery grown trees pruned during growth to
produce a tight well rounded head and a straight stem clear of leaves or twigs. Trees shall have a
140 - 180mm stem circumference, measured 1.0m above ground level. T rees shall have a cl ear
straight stem of minimum 2.0m. The head shall be well balanced and rounded and contain at least
four main branches, and a well developed secondary branch system giving an overall height of 4.5 -
4.8m at the time of planting. T rees shall have a d efined central leader. Pruning at the time of
removal from the nursery shall not be permitted. Rootball dimensions: diameter 750mm x 600mm
deep minimum. Branching/leaf spread shall be 2.2 - 2.4m diameter.
Standard Trees
Standard trees shall be approved medium size nursery grown trees pruned during growth to produce
a tight well rounded head, and a straight stem clear of leaves or twigs. Trees shall have a 100 -
120mm stem circumference measured 1.0m from the ground level and shall have a clear straight
stem of minimum 1.5m. The head shall be well balanced and rounded and contain at least four main
branches with a well developed secondary branch system and a defined central leader that has not
been pruned, giving an overall height of 2.5 - 3.0m at the time of planting. Pruning at the time of
removal from the nursery will not be permitted. Rootball dimensions: diameter 500mm x 300mm
deep minimum. Branching/leaf spread 1.5 - 1.8m diameter.
Standard Feathered Whips
Standard feathered whips shall be approved medium size nursery grown trees, having a single
straight stem and unbroken leader, giving an overall height of 2.5 - 3.0m. The stem shall be fully
furnished with evenly spread and balanced lateral branches down to ground level and shall have a 80
- 100mm stem circumference measured 1.0m from ground level. The tree shall have a strongly
developed fibrous root system and shall be container grown. Leaves of branches shall not be cut off
before planting. Rootball dimensions: diameter 450mm x 200mm minimum. B ranching/leaf 1.5 -
1.8m diameter spread.
LSW/8
LANDSCAPING WORKS
Trees (Cont’d.)
Shrubs, Herbaceous Plants, Hedging Plants, Climbers and Groundcovers
Shrubs
Shrubs shall be approved woody perennials of generally multi stemmed and bushy habit ranging
from 3.0 - 4.5m down to 500mm in height. S hrubs shall have no less than three main stems and
shall be well balanced and bushy with strongly developed fibrous root systems, and shall be pruned
in advance as required to achieve the specified height tolerances. B ranches shall break from the
base of the plant just above the root collar, and shall be well furnished with leaves right down to
ground level. All plants are to be grown in containers of suitable dimensions for the species.
Herbaceous Plants
Herbaceous plants shall be approved non-woody perennials usually of clump forming habit. Plants
shall have a well developed main stem or stems with good s ymmetry, a healthy root system, free
from pest or disease. C lumps of herbaceous plants shall include rhizomes, corns, tubers or roots
with undisturbed soil and evidence of growing shoots emerging above soil level. A ll herbaceous
plants are to be grown in containers unless specified as being produced by an alternative method.
Climbers
Climbers shall be approved plants whose growth habit is to climb upwards by means of twining
stems, tendrils or clinging roots. Plants shall be grown to reach the recommended size using stocks
no less than one year old, and no more than five years old at that time of the start of the Contract.
Plants shall have at least two leader shoots up to the recommended height and vigorous root system.
All plants are to be container grown.
Hedging Plants
Low hedging plants shall be approved shrubs such as Murraya paniculata and Ixora sunkist which
are suited to regular clipping. Shrubs are previously prepared to establish a uniform height and
complete foliage cover to the stem from ground level upwards. P lants shall be a minimum of 4
branches arising from the ground level and a strongly developed fibrous root system. Branches shall
be well clothed in leaves down to ground level. All plants are to be container grown in suitably
sized containers.
Hedging plants shall be prepared by branched pruning to achieve the ‘box’ shape shown at 3 months
before transplanting.
Groundcover
Groundcover plants are low growing, 500mm or less, or prostrate shrubs or species shall be evenly
balanced to allow equal growth in all directions. Plants shall have fully developed roots and leaves.
Rooted cuttings will not be accepted. All plants are to be container grown.
Container grown plants

Container grown plants shall mean approved trees and shrubs which have been grown in containers
sufficiently large to hold the developing root system from seed or cutting and shall be filled with a
suitable, nutrient-rich, free drainage compost. Container grown stock shall be well watered prior to
the transfer from the nursery and shall remain in the container until planted on site, whereupon the
containers are to be removed from site.
LSW/9
LANDSCAPING WORKS
Preparation of planting beds
Preparation of the completed soil mix beds shall take place only when the seeding or planting
operations can begin. No preparation of planting beds shall be undertaken in weather or ground
conditions in which operation may destroy soil structure.
Preparation of planting beds shall be carried out by approved mechanical or manual means to a minimum
depth of 250mm for groundcover and 600mm for shrubs to provide an even, weed free texture.
All stones and lumps exceeding 25mm in diameter shall be removed from planting beds and cart
away from site.
All groundcover and herbaceous beds shall have a minimum depth of 25mm of soil conditioner
spread over the entire area and to be well forked into the top 300mm of soil during planting.
Planting techniques & accessories
All plants shall be planted to accommodate the spreading root system of the plant to the same soil
depth as in the nursery and shall be well watered before removing them from containers. Plants are
to be positioned upright and the soil firmed around the roots.
Planting shall be carried out in accordance with the schedule of plants and drawings specified in the
contract. The number of each species and variety shall be evenly distributed over the area as
indicated on the drawings.
For large areas the outer rows are to be set out first to ensure that a correct shape to the planting bed
is established. The remaining plants are to be evenly distributed to cover the planting area. The SO
is to be notified in advance if there are too many or too few plants to fill the area required, and an
assessment of setting out adjustments will than be carried out as be directed by the SO accordingly.
Setting out of planting beds is to be completed and approved before planting works commence.
Small shrubs, herbaceous and groundcovers in planting beds
Small shrubs, groundcovers and herbaceous plants shall be planted in pockets formed by a trowel or
spade. The pocket shall be deep enough and wide enough to accommodate the root of the plant. The
sides and the base of the pocket shall be loosened and the plant roots lightly loosened from the rootball.
The plant shall be placed upright in the pocket and firmed into the ground by backfilling and
treading or hand pressure.
Shrub pits (in grass areas or in cultivated beds)
Shrubs pits for large and medium shrubs, specimens plants and climbers shall be excavated to
150mm wider on either side than the root spread, to depth of 150mm deeper than the root depth
and shall not be less than 600mm x 600mm x 600mm.
The bottom 150mm of the pit: is to be forked loose prior to backfilling. Blackfill material shall be
topsoil Mix A for backfilling purposes. The Contractor shall note that for planting into turf areas,
where topsoil has not been spread topsoil mix will be required for backfilling purposes.
LSW/10
LANDSCAPING WORKS
Tree pits (in grass area or in cultivated beds)
Tree pits shall be excavated to the dimensions show on the drawings. No tree pits shall be less than
300mm wider on e ither side than the root spread, and to a depth of 150mm deeper than the root
depth, and shall not be less than 1.0m x 1.0m x 1.0m. The bottom 300mm of the tree pit is to be
forked loose prior to backfilling and installation of drainage materials. The trees shall be planted to
the same depth in the nursery or as in the containers.
Backfilling of pits (trees, shrubs & climbers)
Before backfilling, imported topsoil and sand is to be thoroughly mixed with soil conditioner and
organic fertiliser as specified for topsoil mix B.
The tree pit shall be backfilled with the soil Mix B to a depth that allows the soil after settlement to
match surrounding ground level. T he filled pit shall be watered and allowed to settle. A fter
settlement soil levels shall be topped up as required.
The centre of the backfilled tree pit shall be excavated large enough to allow placing of the rootball,
and to allow even compaction all round during backfilling. The soil is to be consolidated during the
backfilling in layers to ensure that the plant is firmly held in the ground and that voids are not left
around the roots. Care shall be taken during planting to avoid damage to the roots system, branches
or leaves.
After careful removal of the container or wrapping, the rootball of the roots of shrubs and climbers
shall be placed carefully in the pit. T he soil is to be consolidated during backfilling in layers to
ensure that the plant is firmly held in the ground and that voids are not left around the roots. Care
should be taken during planting to avoid damage to the roots system, branches or leaves.
Staking & Supports
Stakes or guys wires shall be used when planting instant trees and tall shrubs and to be carried out as
directed by the SO.
The types of approved staking methods are :
Multiple guying shall be used for large trees. A minimum of three wire guys is to be used per tree.
Each guy wire is to be fastened by a loop around the lowest branches of the tree at the junction with
the main trunk or stem. Loops are to have protective rubber or plastic hose to prevent chafing and
are to be fastened back to the guy wire by means of a U clamps or bolts.
Guying wires are to be fastened at ground level to short stakes that are firmly driven at angle into the
ground. Stakes shall be minimum length 600mm and be driven deep enough to resist movement. A
notch is to be made near the top of each stake for fastening of the guying wire. S takes shall be
positioned equidistantly around the tree and shall be gauged on s ite to provide firm and secure
guying.
Each guy wire is to have one turnbuckle located near the fastening to the stake. Guy wires are to be
kept properly tensioned and adjusted to maintain the tree in a vertical position without guys wires
being rigid.
LSW/11
LANDSCAPING WORKS
Double staking
Double staking shall be used for smaller trees. Two 50mm x 50mm stakes shall be driven into the
ground in a vertical on either side of and outside the rootball of the trees so as to form straight line
with the stem at the centre. Stakes shall be driven to penetrate the bottom of the tree pit and be deep
enough to resist lateral movement when tested. Stakes shall not exceed beyond the lowest branch of
the tree and if necessary are to be sawn off at the top.
Fastening or securing of the tree shall be carried out as follows:
Wire/hose loops - two separate wire or rope loops are made around the stem just below the lowest
branch with each being fastened back to one of the vertical stakes. Each loop is to have a protective
outer covering or sheath of rubber hose to prevent chafing or abrasion of the bark. The wire or rope
is to be fastened to the stakes in a manner that allows adjustment of the tension to be made easily.
Tension on each wire is to be equal to maintain the tree in a vertical position.
Cross bar - a wooden cross bar of same section as the stakes is fastened in a horizontal position to
the outside of the stakes by nails for tying securely at the level below the lowest branch. The tree is
fastened to the cross bar with a single adjustable tie of an approach rubberised or plastic type with a
spacer and shall be fastened to prevent any chafing or abrasion of the bark. No nails are to be driven
into the tree trunk.
Single staking
Single staking shall be used for sapling trees only. A single 50mm x 50mm stake is driven vertically
into the ground 150mm - 250mm away from the tree. The stake is driven down beyond the base of
the tree pit and shall be firm when tested. The top of the stake shall be 100mm below the lowest
branch and the lower tie 300mm from the base. Ties are to have spacers to maintain the 150mm -
250mm distance between the stake and the tree. Ties are to be fastened to avoid rubbing, chafing or
abrasion of the bark.
“Dead Man” Guying
“Dead man” guying shall be used for large sized trees standard and above. T his method of
supporting trees is for the use of areas where other conventional methods of support are not feasible
due to space constraints. P rior to backfilling, two pairs of preservative treated hardword planks
minimum 100mm x 50mm are laid across the top of the rootball at right angles so that the trunk or
stem is enclosed in a square. The timber planks should be positioned as far out towards the edge of
the rootball as possible but kept approximately 100mm in from the edge. Two pairs of galvanised or
stainless steel cables are then laid over at right angles to the timber preferably fastened to a structure
nearby.
Twin buckles at the midpoint of each cable are installed to tighten the cables to a suitable degree.
Cables should be tightened only to hold the rootball firm. Overtightening may cause the rootball to
settle deeper into the ground than desired. Wherever “dead man” guying is specified refer to the
Contract drawings for particulars. If “dead man” guying is specified without drawing, the Contractor
is to notify the SO.
LSW/12
LANDSCAPING WORKS
Watering of all plants

All plants planted are to be thoroughly watered. The water shall be from an approved source.
Mulching
A layer of approved mulch (minimum depth of 50mm) shall be spread and forked in over all
planting areas after watering. M ulching shall be carried out within 2 days after planting and
watering.
Fertilizing
All plants after a period of settling in of at least one month, shal be fertilised with an approved slow
release fertiliser at the rate of:
a) Trees : 250gm per tree
b) Shrubs : 50gm per plant
c) Groundcovers/Herbaceous : 100gm per sq m spread around the base of the plants
All fertilized areas are to be watered immediately after fertilizer application.
Disease Control
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent or eradicate any outbreak of disease or
insect attack.
Planting into turf bed

Where planting is to be carried out in areas of turf, the turf shall be carefully cut into the size of the
tree or shrub pit rolled and stored for re-use, being kept moist and in shade. After planting, turf shall
be relaid around the base of the plant. The Contractor shall replace any turf that is damaged during
planting operations at his own expense.
Protection of planted areas

The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all planted areas. If it is necessary, the Contractor shall
erect protective fencing. The Contractor shall place the fencing in position and maintain the fence until the
end of the Defects Liability Period. Fencing proposals must be submitted for SO’s approval. Post and
string fences shall not be acceptable.
Maintenance prior to completion

After planting and prior to the onset of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall be responsible for
carrying out all necessary measures to ensure that the plant material thrives and becomes established and
that the planting areas are kept in a clean and tidy condition.
LSW/13
LANDSCAPING WORKS
Maintenance prior to completion (Cont’d.)

The Contractor shall allow for carrying out the following maintenance operations where necessary
or as and when directed by the SO prior to the onset of the Defects Liability Period.
a) replacement of dead/missing plants
b) grass cutting
c) watering
d) forking and loosening of soil
e) weeding
f) pruning and clipping
g) firming up and adjusting stakes and ties
h) eradicating of pest or insect attack
i) topdressing and mulching
j) fertilizing
The Scope of Maintenance Works shall be carried out in accordance with Section 14 of this
Technical Specification.
The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any plants which fail to survive as a result of
inadequate maintenance operations, poor workmanship or poor quality of plant material prior to
issuing of Substantial Completion Certificate.
The Substantial Completion Certificate shall not be issued until all plants as scheduled on the drawings
and schedule of works are installed in a healthy condition and in the manner specified or directed by the
SO.
14. DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
General Obligation
The Contractor shall upon Substantial Completion of the works maintain the works for a period of
12 months.
The extent of the maintenance works to be carried out by the Contractor shall deem to cover all
planting areas within the overall project boundaries as shown on the drawings.
The Contractor shall ensure that a senior qualified supervisor (with horticultural experience) is made
available to organise and coordinate the maintenance programme. The Contractor shall also provide an
experienced foreman who can supervise the workmen on a day to day basis. An adequately trained labour
force of at least 3 workers must be available for routine work and they must be on site for at least half a
working day, 5½ days per week during the Defects Liability Period. Additional grass cutting operators
and trained tree pruners will be needed to ensure adequate cutting and cleaning.
The Contractor’s supervisor shall inspect the site once a week during the Defects Liability Period and
shall prepare a brief schedule of operations required for the coming week. The schedule shall
describe the operations that the Contractor intends to carry out in the coming week to cover the items
listed in the specifications and to ensure that the current weather conditions and growing
performance, insect attack, etc is taken into account.
A copy of this schedule shall be submitted to the SO every week for inspection and record purposes.
If in the opinion of the SO the maintenance works have not been satisfactorily carried out according
to site conditions and specifications, part of the monthly payment will be withheld until the works
have been satisfactorily executed.
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to ensure that all plant materials thrive and become
established areas within this period. A ll planting areas will be inspected monthly and a list of
remedial work shall be issued after each inspection. All items on the remedial list shall be carried
out before the next monthly inspection.
The Contractor shall keep the landscape areas clean and tidy at all times and dispose of all materials
arising from the cleaning.
LSW/14
LANDSCAPING WORKS
DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (CONT’D.)
Maintenance of all trees, shrubs, herbaceous plants and groundcovers

The Contractor shall water all trees, shrubs, groundcovers, herbaceous plants and all other planting
works twice a day or as and when directed by the SO, to keep the planting beds moist all around and
to the full depth of the roots of the plants with a minimum saturation depth of:
a) 100mm for groundcovers
b) 300mm for shrubs
c) 750mm for trees
Only effluent water shall be used for the Works. T he Contractor shall supply the water from his
own source and make all the necessary transport arrangements.
The Contractor shall inspect all planting areas at least twice a w eek to ascertain the water
requirement of the plant during dry weather.
The Contractor shall use an approved hose fitted with an adjustable spray nozzle or sprinklers for the
watering. This is to ensure no c ompaction or wash-outs of the soil or loosening of plants. T he
Contractor shall immediately make good any such damages, from soil erosion or wash-outs. Plants
are to be replaced if loosened by erosion or damaged.
All planting beds are to be kept free of weeds. Weeding shall be done twice a month or as and when
directed by the SO. The Contractor shall remove all weeds, stones and rubbish collected from this
operation off site. No herbicides shall be used on site without first obtaining the approval of the SO.
He shall seek permission in writing specifying the type of chemical to be used for approval by the
SO. Full back up data on the performance of the chemicals and the particular need for such use of
the chemicals must be included in the Contractor’s written request to the SO.
Immediately after weeding at least twice a month or as and when directed by the SO, the soil surface
shall be lightly loosened with a garden fork. Care must be taken to ensure that the root systems are
not disturbed. T he maximum depth of forking shall not exceed 100mm. After forking, mulching
shall be evenly distributed.
Firming up and adjusting of stakes/ties shall be carried out monthly or as and when directed by the
SO to ensure that the trees and shrubs are firmly held in the ground. The Contractor shall check and
make the necessary adjustments to the guy lines, tree ties and stakes so as to ensure that the trees are
firmly secured and are not damaged by the guy rope or ties.
All protective fencing shall be maintained and kept in good condition and position until the end of
the Defects Liability Period.
Trees shall be pruned if rotten or crossed branches are present. T rees shall also be pruned to
maintain a clear stem up to the specified height using the methods described below. Tree pruning
exercise shall be reviewed monthly.
Pruning of shrubs and groundcovers shall be carried out continuously during the Defects Liability
Period to promote bushy growth and good flowering characteristics. All dead, broken, damaged or
excessive branches shall be cut back where necessary. Pruning and removal of branches shall be
carried out by using a sharp and clean implement to give a clean sloping cut with one flat face.
Ragged edges of bark or wood are to be trimmed with a sharp knife.
All pruning shall be carried out in the following manner:
a) pruning shall be done with a cut just above and sloping away from an outward facing healthy bud.
b) pruning of branches shall be done by cutting flush with the adjoining stem and in such a way
that no part of stem is damaged or torn.
c) all ragged edges of bark shall be trimmed with a sharp knife.
d) after pruning works, all pruned branches shall be cleared and removed off site by the
Contractor.
LSW/15
LANDSCAPING WORKS
DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (CONT’D.)
Maintenance of all trees, shrubs, herbaceous plants and groundcovers (Cont’d.)
All planting hedges, mat forming herbaceous plants and ground covers shall be clipped with shears as
often as necessary (at least monthly) or as and when directed by the SO to maintain a tidy appearance.
Flowering plants, such as Ixora sp, required selective pruning in order to maintain continuous blooms.
Heavy pruning shall not be carried out. The operations shall be carried out by experienced workers only.
The Contractor shall allow for monthly fertilizing operations or otherwise directed by the SO during
the Defects Liability Period. All approved slow release fertilizer shall be applied to each plant at the
rate of 50gm per shrub and 200gm per tree, one month after planting and thereafter monthly.
After spreading the fertilizer around the base of the plant, the granules shall be lightly forked into
the soil, and the plant well watered. Herbaceous and groundcovers shall receive 25mm of approved
soil conditioner mixed with 50gm/m² of approved slow release fertilizer evenly spread over the
entire area and lightly forked into the soil to break up the top layer, and the area well watered.
The horticultural requirements of different plants or areas may involve variations to those techniques
(such as the use of organic liquid fertilizers for sensitive plants) and variations in method shall be
authorised by the SO as and when required.
Additional mulching shall be spread every 3 m onths. T he mulching shall be evenly spread and
forked in all planting areas up to a depth of 25mm.
The Contractor shall make weekly checks to ensure that all landscaped areas are free from pests and
diseases.
Replacement planting
If during the course of the Defects Liability Period, any trees, shrubs, groundcovers, turf or other plant
materials, fail to establish due to the negligence of the Contractor, the Contractor shall forthwith replace
such plants at no additional cost. The decision as to whether or not the plant dies due to the negligence
of the Contractor shall rest with the SO and his decision shall not be subject to further appeal.
Final Handover
A joint inspection shall be held with the Contractor and the SO two weeks before the end of the
Defects Liability Period to review the requirements for any plant replacement with the view of
obtaining approval for the Final Handover. T he Contractor must rectify all defective works and
ensure that all the landscaped areas have established and were satisfactorily maintained during the
Defects Liability Period stipulated in the Contract.
At the time of the final inspection, all areas under the Contract shall be free from weeds, neatly
cultivated and in good order. Grass shall be neat cut and all clippings removed. No bare patches of
earth shall be visible in turf or planting areas.
If, after inspection, the SO is of the opinion that all work has been satisfactorily performed in
accordance with the drawings and specifications, the SO issue a certificate of completion for the
project. If all, or certain portions of the work, are not acceptable under the terms and specifications,
the Defects Liability Period for all the work shall be extended at no extra cost to the Employer until
all the defects in the work have been corrected and the work is accepted by the Employer and SO.
As-built drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor upon final completion and submitted to the
SO within two weeks after handing over.
LSW/16
INDOOR PLAY EQUIPMENT
1. PLAY EQUIPMENT
The proposed indoor play equipment shall be of approved proprietary type equivalent in design and
quality as shown in the drawings to SO’s approval.
The play equipment shown on the drawings are only indicative, the contractor may propose similar
playground system from approved specialists and these are to be submitted to the SO for approval
during the tender or quotation.
Safety Compliance
The Contractor and Specialist shall ensure that the Play equipment installed is in full compliance
with either one of the following standards of its latest publication:
a. F1487-11 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification or other approved

equivalent for Playground Equipment for Public Use.
b. SS457: 1999 - Playground Equipment for Public Use.
c. SS495: 2001 - Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems under and around playground
equipment.
d. EN1176 (1-9): 1998 to 1999 - Playground Equipment. General Safety Requirements and Test
Methods or other approved equivalent.
e. Other relevant safety requirements as applicable.
On Site Test and Inspection by an Independent Safety Inspector from an approved accredited
testing agency for the above standards.
Laboratory Test based on all relevant sections of the standard:-

a. Children’s Playground Components.
b. Structural Integrity.
c. Installation.
d. Accessibility.
e. Maintenance.
f. Labeling.
Instructional Signage
An instructional signage designed by manufacturer to be provided for each activity, including
playground rules.
Installation & Maintenance / Inspection Instructions

Explicit installation instructions shall be provided which will include a detailed top view and
footing drawings plus written instructions to assure proper installation of the equipment.
Maintenance guidelines and inspection checklists shall also be provided. The provided installation
instructions and maintenance instructions shall be "project" specific containing component
information that is part of the playground design. A “generic” package of installation instruction
and maintenance instructions is not acceptable.
IPE/1
PLAY EQUIPMENT (CONT’D.)
General
a) Material
All materials shall be structurally sound and suitable for safe play. Durability shall be ensured
on all steel parts by the use of time tested coatings such as zinc plating, zinc nickel plating,
powder coating, “plastisol” vinyl, etc. Colour choices shall be to SO’s selection and approval.
b) Hardware
All temper proof bolts, tee nuts and washers shall be stainless steel. All other hardware shall
be a yellow dichromate finish over zinc plated steel. Tamper proof bolts shall be supplied for
all clamps assemblies. Capped locknuts that cover both ends of bolts shall also be supplied.
c) Eco-Armour Coating & Decks

All decks, stairs, and site products shall be coated with an environmentally sensitive polyethylene
coating that is PVC and phthalate free. This textured, UV stabilized thermoplastic coating shall be
slip resistant, tough and durable. It must meet all requirements for phthalates and toxic materials,
contain no volatile organic compounds and be recyclable.
The Thermoplastic coating shall be available in brown, red, blue or green.
d) Polyester Powder Coating
Powder coating is electrostatically applied at a thickness of 2 to 5 mils (.002 - .005). Powder
coating produces a highly decorative finish having a hard, smooth surface, which is resistant
to abrasion, corrosion, and mechanical damage. All galvanized tubing has a factory-applied
clear acrylic polymer coating. All components shall be free of excess weld and weld spalls.
After fabrication all weld joints are to thoroughly cleaned using a chipping hammer and wire
brush to remove all weld slag from weld joint. Prior to finishing, components shall be cleaned
with a three-stage preparation process. Components are coated with TGIC polyester powder
and are cured at temperatures between 375° and 400° F. E poxy or hybrid paints are not
acceptable. ASTM Specifications: B-117 (Salt Spray Resistance Test), D-2794 (Impact
Resistance Test), D-1734 (Mandrel Flexibility Test), D-2247 (Humidity Resistance Test), D-
822 (Weatherability Test), D-3363 (Pencil Hardness Test), D-3359-B (Crosshatch Adhesion
Test), and D-2454 (Overbake Resistance Test) or their approved equivalent standards.
Manufacturer must allow for a minimum of 16 colours selection.
e) Rotationally Moulded Polyethylene Parts
Shall be rotationally molded from color-compounded, first quality, linear low density, Exxon
CP-812 polyethylene or other approved equivalent. Dry-blended or molded-in resins are not
acceptable. Color- compounded polyethylene are 23 times stronger than dry blended resins
providing better bonded strength with greater surface contact. Compounded color provides
superior colorfastness, UV resistance, and impact resistance with solid color molecules.
Polyethylene shall be ultraviolet (UV) stabilized to UV-8 and have anti-static additives.
Cross-sectional design shall be .25 in. (6 mm) nominal thickness, double wall construction.
ASTM Specifications: D-1238 (Melt Index), D-1505 (Material Density), D- 638 (Tensile
Strength), D-648 (Heat Distortion Temperature) D-790 (Flexural Modulus), D-1693
(Environmental Stress Crack Resistance), D-2565 (Ultraviolet). Meets UL94HB Horizontal
Burn Test or other approved equivalent standards. Shall also meet Arm Test for impact
strength (@ minus 40°C) (.25 in. thickness). Shall meet color change criteria (QUV 500
hours per SAE 1960-89).
All Slides and Roofs shall be linear low-density polyethylene, which contains UV inhibitors
to resist fading.
Plastic Panels shall be rotationally molded linear low-density polyethylene, which contains
UV inhibitors to resist fading.
IPE/2
PLAY EQUIPMENT (CONT’D.)
General (Cont’d.)
f) Support Posts
Shall be fabricated from 3-1/2” OD 12 Gauge galvanised steel tubing. Tubing has an average
tensile strength of 555,000 psi, and an average yield strength point of 50,000 psi. Shall be
finished with a baked-on powder coating.
g) Steel Tubing
Tie Rods, Climbing Rungs, Chinning/Turning Bars, Activity Barriers, Slide Barriers, and
Pipe wall barriers shall be fabricated of 1-1/16”OD, 14 gauge galvanised steel tubing. Sliding
Poles, handrails for swing bridge, side rails for wood arch climber, and chain net anchor rods
shall be fabricated of 2-3/8” OD, 12 gauge galvanised steel tubing.
h) Attachment Fittings
Pipe Clamps, tee fittings, swing hangers and deck hangers shall be cast of a high tensile
strength almag alloy aluminium. Deck clamps shall be hinged on one side to facilitate
installation. Swing hangers shall be fitted with an oil-impregnated bronze bearing.
i) Stairs
Enclosed Stairs shall be fabricated of one-piece perforated metal step plate, with 11- gauge
hot-rolled steel plate side rails.
j) Exterior Finish
All metal and aluminium components shall be put through a 3-stage wash process including a
phosphoric acid/flouridic acid wash, then a fresh rinse and a non-chromated rinse with sealer.
All components shall be oven dried prior to electrostatically applied polyester dry powder
coating. Components shall be oven cured at temperatures in excess of 400 degree Fahrenheit
and tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 or other approved equivalent.
k) Fitness Equipment
Fitness Components consist of the types as shown on the SO’s drawings.
m) Maintenance
The Specialist shall submit the Manufacturer’s maintenance manual to the SO. The Specialist shall
submit a summarized inspection check list for approval at time of handover to the Employer.
Frequency of maintenance shall be recommended by the Specialist, based on size, usage,
vandalism possibilities etc.
The Specialist shall show proof to Employer by way of Organisation Chart and worker details
that they have a Maintenance Team and Supervisor to report.
The Specialist shall provide a system of allowing the Employer to immediately access
detailed installation and parts list details, e.g is a scanning tag where the Owner can scan the
tag with a Smart phone or device to access such details.
A annual maintenance contract shall be awarded to the Specialist at the time of Award or the
end of the Defects Liability Period at the discretion of the Employer.
IPE/3
2. FLOOR
EPDM to be provided for and shall be 75mm thick (minimum) safety surface to graphic design of
different colours to be approved by the SO and installed on and including 150mm thick reinforced
concrete base complete with drainage.
Sub-soil drainage shall be deemed included and proposed by the Specialist including connection to
nearest open drain.
3. GUARANTEE
The Contractor and Specialist shall provide a written JOINT GUARANTEE of ONE (1)
YEAR for the Play Equipment and THREE (3) YEARS for EPDM (both to commence after
DLP) (as attached Format Specimen) against faulty workmanship and premature breakdown of
the Fitness & Equipment and EPDM Flooring. The Guarantee shall commence on Substantial
Completion of the Works
IPE/4
Note: Architect / Engineer where described shall mean SO (Superintendent Officer)
Non-slip and safety glazes with micro-rough surfaces or slightly profiled tiles shall be installed to
the pool deck and oher similar barefoot areas as specified on the drawings. Testing Standards:
DIN EN ISO 51097
Proposed Tensile Fabric Structures
Performance Specification for

Tensile Structures
Performance Specifications for Tensile Structures
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 1
1.1 Scope of Works 1
1.2 Description of Works 1
1.3 Responsibility 1
1.4 Tender Documents 2
1.5 The Following Data Should be Supplied at the Time of Tender 2
1.6 Standards 2
1.7 Waranty 2
1.8 Record Drawings and Maintenance Manuals 3
1.9 Quality Control 3
2. MATERIALS 4
2.1 Fabric 4
2.2 Metal Components 5
2.3 Structural Steel 6
2.4 Structural Cables 6
3. DESIGN 7
3.1 General 7
3.2 Statutory Approvals 7
3.3 Loadings 7
3.4 Deflection 7
3.5 Analysis 8
3.6 Clash 8
3.7 Design Standards 8
3.8 Pre-Stress in Fabric and Cables 9
3.9 Drawings and Approvals 9
3.10 Loadings on Structure and Foundations and Connections to Structure and Foundations 10
3.11 Tolerances 10
4. MANUFACTURE 11
4.1 Fabrication of the Membranes 11
4.2 Fabrication of Steelwork 12
4.3 Cable Works 12
5. ERECTION 13
5.1 Transport to Site 13
5.2 Erection of Steelwork 13
5.3 Stability 13
5.4 Criteria for Pre-Stress 13
5.5 Handling 13
1. GENERAL
This Specification is to be read in conjunction with the Project Structural
Preliminaries, other Specifications and the Contract Documents.
Scope of Works
The Tensile Structures shall encompass the complete and detailed design and
analysis, procurement, delivery, off loading, storage and erection of the mast and
fabric structures and associated works as shown on the Contract Drawings.
The Contractor is to provide the forces from the mast and cables of the Tensile
Structures for which the concrete works of the building and foundations are to be
designed and constructed by others and is to provide the anchorage fitments to be
cast in. The Contractor is to supervise the positioning of the cast-in fitments to ensure
they are in the correct position to accept the erection of the Tensile Structures. The
Contractor is to provide written confirmation that these fitments are correctly
positioned at least four weeks before erection of the mast and fabric structures is to
commence.
Description of Works
The Tensile Structures comprises a series of free form fabric structures supported by
cables, steel masts and steel frame system.
The Contractor will be responsible for designing all the works in accordance with the
Specification and the intent of the Architect‟s drawings. He will also be responsible
for all structural analytical work that is necessary to justify his design. He will be
required to demonstrate that this has been carried out. The Contractor shall employ a
properly qualified specialist Singapore registered Engineer Consultant to carry out
this work (minimum of 10 years experience in design of lightweight structures). The
Contractor will be required to demonstrate the competence of those carrying out the
work.
The drawings produced by the Contractor will show the interfaces between his work
and the work of other parties. His work will include structural steel and structural
cable elements shown thereon.
Responsibility
The Contractor shall warrant that:
i) Notwithstanding any checking and/or approvals by the Architect to the extent
that he selects materials and/or goods for the Contract Works, they will be
new and of good quality.
ii) That any performance specification or requirement regarding visual
appearance included in or referred to in this Specification shall be satisfied.
iii) That to the extent that he designs any part of the Contract Works, the same
shall be designed with all reasonable skill and care in conformity with the
normal professional standards of the relevant disciplines and shall comply
with current Singapore and International Standards and where agreed the
Contractor‟s own national standards unless otherwise under the Contract.
Page 1
iv) All elements for construction work are fit for their intended purpose, life and
location, and have been fully co-ordinated with adjoining elements of
construction.
Tender Documents
The Contractor shall be deemed to have carefully examined all the drawings and
performance specifications referred to in the tender documents and to have
ascertained from them the full character of the works.
No warranty or representation is given by the SO as to the accuracy of dimensions or
the buildability of the details shown on the drawings included in the tender
documents.
Should the Contractor, after consideration of all the criteria which in his specialist
knowledge are relevant to the design and construction of the works, wish to make
proposals for changes in any of the details, dimensions or material shown in the
drawings or referred to in the Specification, then such proposals should be submitted
to the SO for his acceptance or rejection.
The Following Data should be supplied at the Time of Tender

a. Trade names of membrane base fabric and filament, coating polymer and source
of supply of each, together with all technical information and literature.
b. A1-size sample of fabric material with central weld seam. (one for PTFE/Glass
fabric)
c. Names of all Engineer Consultant, Sub-Contractors and Suppliers.
d. Details of where the fabric material has been used before on similar sized
projects.
e. References of five projects completed by Contractor of similar size.
f. Specification of all other proposed construction materials and components,
including the nature and frequency of the maintenance requirements of any
painted or coated steelwork and structural cables proposed in lieu of the stainless
steel specified.
g. Sample guarantee/warranty deed
h. A proposal for an Inspection and Maintenance Contract.
Standards
The works are to be carried out in accordance with all relevant British and
International Standards.
Where the Contractor has preference for justifying his design against U.S, Australian
or German Standards he must first seek the Architect‟s approval and that of the
appropriate Singapore Building officials.
Warranty
The Contractor is to provide a warranty with the Tender covering the stated physical
properties of the fabric material. The warranty is for a total period of 10 years from
the issue of Substantial Completion Certificate.
Page 2
The Contractor and the supplier of the fabric are „jointly and severally liable‟ under the
warranty.
The Contractor to also provide a ten years warranty on workmanship.
Record Drawings and Maintenance Manuals

On completion of the works, the Contractor shall provide full and specific instructions
for maintenance of the works, together with drawings of the works as built. These
instructions shall be typed on A4 paper with associated drawings and illustrations, all
bound in suitable binders and submitted no later than Substantial Completion of the
Contract to the SO. 5 copies shall be submitted. He shall also provide a repair kit
complete with materials suitable for minor repairs. He will instruct the Owner‟s
representatives in the use of the repair kit.
Quality Control
Inspection System
The Contractor shall operate an inspection system to verify that all materials,
workmanship and complete work conform with the specified requirements.
Tests, Procedural Trials, Trial Assemblies
The Contractor shall carry out or arrange to be carried out all tests on operatives,
procedural trials, tests on materials and workmanship and trial assemblies.
Personnel
The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel performing inspections and tests have
appropriate qualifications.
Inspection Status
The Contractor shall operate a system for identifying the inspection status at all
stages of fabrication and erection.
Records
The Contractor shall keep records of all tests on operatives, procedural trials and
tests on materials and workmanship. The Contractor shall make records available to
the Architect for examination.
Period of Notice
The Contractor shall agree a period of notice to the Architect for all tests and
submissions and before commencing any prototype.
Page 3
MATERIALS
Fabric
The fabric shall be from a base fabric of glass fibre cloth coated with PTFE
homopolymer copolymer thermoplastic resin. The glass yarn may be spun using
“Beta” filaments of 3-3.8 micron diameter. Coating resin shall be pure PTFE
homopolymer applied in dispersion and sintered to the base cloth. The outer layer
layer is FEP copolymer (as manufactured by EI Dupont Co or similar equal and
approved). The coating should completely isolate the fabric from exposure and
moisture, air and sunlight.
The fabric shall be chosen by the Contractor to function as required by this
Specification. The fabric shall have a design life of 30 years.
Material Specifications
PTFE- Coated Glass Fibre Fabric Specification

Coating Type PTFE
Base Fabric Glass Woven “EC3/4”
Properties Values Test Standards
Coated Fabric Weight (nom.
1000 g/m2 +/- 100 ASTM D 4851
±5%)
Thickness (nominal) 0.6 +/- 10 mm ASTM D 4851
Tear Strength Warp 300N Weft 300N DIN 53363
Coating Adhesion-(min) 60 N/5cm DIN 53357

Translucency 12 +/-3 % ASTM E424
Solar Reflectance 70+/-10 % ASTM E424
Fire Propagation Pass BS 476: Part 6
Spread of Flame Class 1 BS 476: Part 7
Colour (Visual) White (after exposure to sunlight)
Surface Quality
The surface shall have no significant discontinuities of “blemishes” visible to the eye
when seen from a distance of 4 metres in directional sunlight.
Colour and Appearance

The colour shall be uniformly white throughout each fabric strip at or before the issue
of the Practical Completion Certificate. This shall be judged in the normal daylight
conditions of the site both with the material viewed against the sky and with sunlight
reflecting off the surface. The acceptable variation in colour between adjacent strips
of material shall be defined by sample panels (A1 size) agreed with the Architect at
the commencement of the Contract.
Page 4
Fire Behaviour
PTFE/Glass
ASTM E 84 Tunnel Test
Flame Spread 10 max Class A
Smoke Generation 20 max Class A
ASTM E 136
Substrate Non-combustible Pass
ASTM E 108
Spread of Flame Class A
Intermittent Flame Class A
Burning Brand Class A
NFPA 701 (small scale) (UL 94)
Flame out 1 sec. after
Char. Length 0.25” max.
OR
The coated material shall achieve the following standards when tested according to
BS 476:
BS 476 : Part 6 - Fire Propagation Test for Materials: Class 0
BS 476 : Part 7 - Surface Spread of Flame Classification: Class 1 spread of
flame.
Testing
The Contractor shall carry out such further tests as are necessary to demonstrate
compliance with this Specification and to confirm that the fabric has the properties
assumed by his design.
The Contractor shall carry out Bi-axial load extension tests to establish
 The stretch compensation

 Biaxial stiffness properties
Metal Components
Any metal corners or edges in contact with the fabric structure shall be rounded to
suitable radii. In no circumstances should it be less than 2mm.
Fabric clamps shall be galvanized structural mild steel. Finish shall be according to
the SO‟s requirements. All fabric clamps to be painted and colour will be subjected to
the SO‟s approval.
Stainless steel to be welded must have a carbon content, which does not exceed
0.03%.
Steel bolts, washers and nuts shall be galvanized and painted.
Suitable separating washers and sleeves shall be provided between the stainless-
steel bolts and any other non-stainless-steel components unless otherwise agreed
with the SO.
Page 5
Fabric Membrane Plate

Fabric membrane plate shall be made of Galvanised steel plate with painted finished in
conformity to Euro Standard or otherwise agreed with the SO.
All corners or edges in contact with the fabric membrane shall be rounded to suitable
radii. In no circumstances should it be less than 2mm.
Fabric Rigging/ Tensioning Accessories
Fabric rigging accessories and tensioning parts shall be made of stainless Gr.316 or
Galvanised fitting.
Gasket
Rubber gaskets shall comply with BS 4255.
Structural Steel
Structural steel (including fabric membrane plates) shall be manufactured to Euro
Standards or otherwise agreed with theSO.
Particular grades are to be chosen according to strength, ductility, fracture toughness
and other properties required by the Contractor‟s design.
The corrosion protection system for any non-stainless structural steel shall be chosen
by the Contractor with reference to:
 The climate of the site in Singapore; including high temperatures and humid
conditions.
 A design life of the barrier coats = 25 years.
 A life to first maintenance of the decorative coating = 10 years.
Structural Cables
Cable and fittings shall be manufactured to Australian Standards or otherwise agreed
with the SO. All cables and fittings shall be degreased galvanised strand.
Wire strength and cable construction shall be chosen with reference to the
requirements of the Contractor‟s design.
The corrosion protection system for any non-stainless-steel cable assembly shall be
chosen with reference to:
 The climate on the site in Singapore; including high temperatures and humid
conditions.
 A design life = 30 year.
 A life to first maintenance = 10 years.
End fittings, shackles and turnbuckles/rigging screws to be galvanised (minimum
corrosion protection finish) and painted after installation.
Contractor to provide details of proposed end fittings and Contractor they intend to
use for the rope work.
Page 6
2. DESIGN
General
The Tensile Membrane Design/System shall be provided by a Specialist with a track
record of past and present experience to be approved by the SO.
The Contractor shall prepare a fully co-ordinated design for the works and shall
ensure that all elements therein are mutually compatible.
The Contractor shall determine the size, strength, quality and type of all items and
materials to be used in the Works with reference to the particular characteristics of
the site and the building. Consideration shall be given to all the environmental
conditions, both actual and potential. These shall include, but not be limited to:
 Wind regime - basic permissible wind speed to be adopted is 35 m/s (50 year
return period)
 Temperature fluctuations
 Rain
 Solar radiation
 Orientation to sun path.
The Tensile Structures and its components shall not be susceptible to vibration,
fatigue, excessive deflection or instability.
The arrangement, shape and dimensions of the Tensile Structures and its
components shall be as close as possible to the SO‟s drawings.
The Tensile Structures shall be designed to have a minimum service life of 30 years.
The design and construction of the Tensile Structure shall ensure that adequate
safety margins are maintained over the life of the installation allowing for reduction in
material and joint strength.
The design and configuration of any painted or coated structural connection details
shall be such as to enable full repainting to restore the paint system.
Statutory Approvals
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approval of his design from relevant
local authorities.
Loadings
The design loadings are to be determined by the Contractor in accordance with the
relevant Euro Code.
Deflection
The Contractor is to design the Tensile Structures, cables and masts to limit
deflections of the fabric under load such that the initial double curvative shape of the
fabrics remains anticlastic, i.e. does not invert, under a wind load.
Page 7
Unless the Contractor can show by step by step deflection analysis that the initial
prestress biaxial tension field does not reduce to zero at any point in the fabric
structure during the process of the application of the wind load from zero to maximum
load.
Analysis
The Contractor shall carry out a full analysis of the fabric structure, cables and mast
under all relevant loading conditions and combinations using a suitable non-linear
analysis programme. This analysis shall be used to design the mast, cables, fabric
structure, and all fitments, and to provide forces and moments to permit the design of
the supporting building and foundations. He is to provide the support forces to the
SO within the period specified.
In particular the Contractor must satisfy himself as to the following:
a. That there is compatibility between his mathematical model shape and with his
own cutting patterns.
b. That the geometry and stress described by his mathematical model together
constitute an equilibrium form.
c. That his mathematical model includes support stiffnesses which adequately
represent the supporting building and foundations to which he is attaching.
d. That the membrane connection plate geometry and other steelwork geometry is
compatible with his mathematical model.
e. That the supporting mast and cables for which he is responsible are designed and
constructed to adequately resists the applied forces from the fabric.
Clash
The Contractor is to check and ensure that the fabric remain at an adequate
separation distance from the building beneath at all stages of deflection under load.
Design Standards
Steelwork
Structural steelwork shall be designed in accordance with the following Australian
Standards or unless otherwise agreed with the SO.
Design
BS EN 1991-1-1:2002 Actions on Structures
BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 Design of Steel Structures
BS EN 1999-1-1:2007 Design of Aluminium Structures
Page 8
Cable
Structural cable work shall be designed to give the factor of safety defined for the
ratio of minimum breaking load/maximum load produced by design loads as follows
(unless otherwise agreed with the SO)
Wind Loads Static Loads
Wire Rope Cables 2.2 3.0
Shackles, Rigging Screws 2.5 3.0
and other fittings
Belts and Drives 3.0 4.0
Spiral Rope Cables 2.2 3.0
including end fittings
If high tensile rod is proposed, a full specification is to be provided with tender.
Fabric
The minimum tensile strength shall be five times the greatest calculated stress under
working loads.
Pre-Stress in Fabric and Cables

The Contractor shall select levels of pre-stress in relation to the behaviour of his
structures.
The Contractor shall also select a level of pre-stress in the fabric, as well as the
process of installing it, such that the effects of „crimp interchange‟ are removed and
subsequent loading and unloading are largely elastic.
The initial level of pre-stress shall also be sufficient to avoid the need for re-stressing
within 10 years of the completion of the project.
Drawings and Approvals

The Contractor will be required to obtain the SO‟s agreement to his design at two
stages.
a. Scheme design.
b. Fabrication drawings.
Scheme Design
The Contractor shall develop his designs to scheme stage and submit the design for
the SO‟s agreement.
The submission shall include drawings and other documentation which describe the
following:
Page 9
 All basic data used in the design

 The detailed geometry of each structure type
 Structural member sizes
 Details of typical connections and anchorages
 Details of materials to be used including the fabric, fixings etc.
 Pre-stressing methods and loads
 Details of the loads including erection loads and loads in service which the mast
and cables apply to the building and foundation at points of attachment.
 Method of construction
 Details of ensuring durability of connections.
 Deflected shape of the mast and fabric structure in tabular and graphic form
The Contractor shall submit fabrication drawings for all elements of the Tensile
Structures for the SO‟s approval. Fabrication shall not proceed until the SO has
approved the drawings.
Fabrications Drawings
The Contractor shall submit fabrication drawings for all elements of each structure for
theSO‟s approval. Fabrication shall not proceed until the SO has approved the
drawings.
Agreements & Approvals

Approvals given by the SO shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for
design, material, structural and performance integrity as required by the Contract.
Loadings on Structure and Foundations and Connections to Structure and

Foundations
The Contractor is responsible for the design of connections to the building structure.
Cast-in fixings are to be provided by the Contractor together with location details for
casting in the concrete works. The fixings and details shall be provided in due time to
suit the programme.
Tolerances
The design of the Tensile Structures shall allow for the permitted tolerances in the
building beneath.
The elements of the Tensile Structures shall be manufactured within tolerances,
which ensure that they fit on site and do not induct excessive loads or deflections in
the components.
The Contractor shall satisfy himself on the position as constructed of his connection
points to the main structure.
Page 10
3. MANUFACTURE
Fabrication of the Fabric Structure

Labour
The Contractor shall employ in the fabrication shop only persons specifically trained
to handle cut and weld the specified material.
The Contractor shall employ Production Supervisors with at least 3 years experience
in cutting, welding and handling the specified material.
The Contractor shall employ a Works Manager whose duties shall include the
preparation and operation of a Quality Plan.
Premises
The Contractor shall provide a separate area for the inspection of incoming goods.
The Contractor shall store incoming material at a similar temperature and humidity as
that of the fabrication.
The Contractor shall maintain an extremely clean and dust-free environment to avoid
weld contamination.
The Contractor shall provide a separate area for testing.
Welding Equipment
For structural welds in PTFE/glass the Contractor shall use a heated bar type where
the bar temperature, pressure and dwell time are automatically controlled during the
weld cycle according to previously determined prescriptions which suit various
combinations of weld width, material weight and number of layers.
Fabrication
The Contractor shall fabricate each canopy into a single piece or sections as
indicated on the SO‟s drawings.
The Contractor shall employ great care in cutting the fabric to smoothed-in-curves.
Pieces that include faults, small tears, or mis-cuts shall not be used in the work.
The Contractor shall cut the edges of panels to accuracy consistent with his design
sensitivity calculations.
The Contractor shall ensure all seams are continuous without gaps or trapped
pockets and are of uniform width. Integrity of the coating must be maintained to
ensure isolation of yarns from air and water. Discolouration of seams, junctions and
reinforcements will not be acceptable.
All seam welds of the Tensile structure shall be tested to give 90% fabric strength at
70oC.
Cable cuffs and pockets will be bias cut strips of fabric with yarns at 45o.
Page 11
Fabrication of Steelwork
Steelwork shall be fabricated in accordance with the requirements of the Code of
Practice Euro Standards used in the design.
Cable Works
The Contractor shall pre-stretch each individual cable immediately prior to marking to
length at the design load.
Each individual cable assembly will be fabricated to tolerances compatible with the
Contractor‟s design.
Page 12
4. ERECTION
Transport to Site
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for transport to and handling on site,
employing particular measures to prevent any damage occurring to the fabric‟s
coating or to the yarns. The Contractor is to arrange for facilities for storing the
material so that it is kept clean and is not in any way damaged between being
delivered to site and erected into position.
Cables shall be packaged in coils or reels at the discretion of the cable manufacturer.
They shall not be crushed or kinked nor handled in a way that causes permanent
deformation of the cables. The Contractor shall observe the strict recommendations
of the cable manufacturer for handling the cable. Any damage must be reported to
the Architect with the Contractor‟s proposals for remedial work.
Erection of Steelwork
The erection of the steelwork shall comply with the requirements of Code of Practice
or National Standards used in the design.
Stability
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the erection of the structures and their
stability during the erection period, until the fabric structure has been completed,
stressed and work completed in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall
ensure that the fabric is fully protected against damage due to weather conditions.
Criteria for Pre-Stress

The Contractor shall determine acceptable variations in the pre-stress which are
compatible with his design. On or before the issue of the Practical Completion
Certificate the pre-stress shall have stabilised to the agreed design values and
tolerances thereon.
At the end of the Works, there shall remain adequate adjustment to allow for future
re-stressing.
Handling
Prior to the start of erecting fabric panels, the Contractor shall check all surfaces to
be in contact with the fabric structure. He shall remove any potential cause for rips
that may occur during installation of the fabric and shall provide soft cushioning
material over any surface against which the fabric may be laid.
At all times, creasing the fabric or folding the fabric around sharp corners shall be
avoided. The fabric shall not be abraded in any manner; for example, by pulling tools
across it or by dragging the fabric structure across the surfaces. Those walking on it
shall wear appropriate soft shoes. The surface upon which any fabric is placed shall
be smooth, and free of projections and sharp or irregular objects.
Cables shall not be crushed, kinked, nor handled in any way that causes permanent
deformation.
Page 13
Any damage to fabric and fittings must be reported to the SO immediately following
the occurrence. The Contractor shall carry out repairs to give finished structures in
accordance with the Specification and the other Contract documents and shall
provide the Architect with a method statement for such repairs.
Visible repairs to the finished fabric will not be acceptable.
During the course of erection, the Contractor is to take and record measurements of
the cable forces. The SO shall be given free access to this information during the
course of erection, and upon completion of the work the Contractor shall give the SO
a complete record copy.
Both surfaces of the fabric shall be left clean at the time of Practical Completion of
the work to the satisfaction of the SO.
Page 14

Specification of Works PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specification of Works PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specification of Works PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONTENTS

Temporary Hoarding and Structure TS/1

TEMPORARY HOARDING AND STRUCTURE

1. TEMPORARY HOARDING AND STRUCTURE WITH SOUND BARRIER

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D.)

2. PROTECTION OF PROPERTY, ETC.

3. SITE CLEARANCE AND DEMOLITION WORKS

SITE CLEARANCE AND DEMOLITION WORKS (CONT’D.)

6. ENGAGEMENT OF LICENSED ELECTRICAL WORKERS

7. ENGAGEMENT OF LICENSED PLUMBERS TO TAKE CHARGE OF THE PLUMBING

8. REINSTATE AND MAKE GOOD

9. TREES, CREEPERS, HEDGES, ETC.

10. CLEANING AND PROTECTION

11. SO’s CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS FOR DEMOLITION

4. DEFINITION OF EARTHWORK MATERIALS

DEFINITION OF EARTHWORK MATERIALS (CONT’D.)

All undergrowth shall be cleared from the entire site.

8. METHOD OF EXCAVATION AND FILL

9. CUTTING INCLUDING SLOPES

ALLOWABLE SLOPES IN CUTTING

CUTTING INCLUDING SLOPES (CONT’D.)

10. BENCHING IN CUTTINGS

12. RECORD OF DEPTHS OF FOUNDATIONS, ETC.

13. PLANKING AND STRUTTING

14. STAGNANT WATER

He shall take the necessary steps to prevent the breeding of mosquitoes.

16. KEEP FREE FROM WATER

17. DEWATERING OF SITE

19. FILLING OF FOUNDATION PITS AND TRENCHES AND REMOVAL OF SUPPORTS

20. FOUNDATIONS FOR FILLS

21. FILLING GENERALLY

22. PLACING FILLS IN EMBANKMENTS

PLACING FILLS IN EMBANKMENTS (CONT’D.)

23. FILL SLOPES

ALLOWABLE FILL SLOPE

Sandy loam, soft clay and loose sand 2:1 to 5:1

24. FILL ADJACENT TO CULVERTS AND RETAINING WALLS

SPECIAL FILL ADJACENT TO ABUTMENTS,

Type of Category Max Min Max Min Max Min

Smooth- Force per 100mm

2.1 - 2.6 kN 125 8 125 10 125 10 *

Gridroller Force per 100mm

2.6 - 5.2 kN 150 10 Unsuitable 150 10

Pneumatic- Wheel Load

Vibratory Force per 100mm

0.25 - 0.45 kN Unsuitable 75 16 150 16

COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D.)

Type of Category Max Min Max Min Max Min

Vibrating- Static pressure

Vibro- Mass kilogramme

Power Mass kilogramme

Each class of material to be compacted shall be tested, prior to compaction, by an approved

26. DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS ASSOCIATED WITH TABLE FOR

DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS ASSOCIATED WITH TABLE FOR

 Vibrating-plate compactors shall be operated at the frequency of vibration recommended

Vibro-tampers are machines in which an engine-driven reciprocating mechanism acts on a spring

27. CONSOLIDATED AND COMPACTED FIRE ENGINE ACCESSWAY

29. PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICES

30. ANTI-TERMITE SOIL TREATMENT